UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SAN DIEGO 3 1822025085499 :&& UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA SAN DIEGO 3 1822 02508 5499 GREEK GRAMMAR SYNTAX BY THE SAME AUTHOR. A GREEK GRAMMAR: ACCIDENCE. This work contains all the facts of any importance in the Phon- ology and Inflection of the Greek language, as it appears in literature up to the late period. After an Introduction on the History of the Greek Language, it is divided into four parts : Phonology, Inflections, Dialects, and Formation of Words. The List of Attic and Dialectic Verbs is very full. The general arrangement of the book, especially the employment of the tabular form in the sections whenever possible, greatly facilitates the use of the work both for general study and for reference. LONDON : SWAN SONNENSCHEIN & CO. LIM. NEW YORK: D. C. HEATH & CO. GREEK GRAMMAR SYNTAX BY GUSTAVE SIMONSON, M.A., M.D. AUTHOR OF "A GREEK GRAMMAR: ACCIDENCE" " A PLAIN EXAMINATION OF SOCIALISM " LONDON SWAN SONNENSCHEIN & CO. LIM. NEW YORK: D. C. HEATH & CO. 1911 PKEFACE IN compiling the present Greek Grammar, my aim has been to bring together in convenient and accessible form all the gram- matical facts and rules of any importance in the Greek language as it appears in the literature of ancient Greece up to the late period. The work is in two volumes, issued separately. The first volume contains a brief History of the Greek language, the Phonology, the Inflections of Attic Greek, the Inflections of the Dialects, an extensive General List of Verbs containing all forms presenting any difficulties or peculiarities, and the Word-Forma- tion. The second volume is devoted to the Syntax. The typo- graphical plan of the work is as follows : The pagination of the two volumes is independent, but the numbering of the sections is continuous from the first volume into the second : thus Volume I ends with section 1200, while Volume II begins with section 1201. All cross-references are by sections; and although there are no section or page-references from one volume to the other, the plan of continued section-numbering was adopted to avoid any possible confusion. In the first volume the tabular form was employed whenever in any way possible, as this typographi- cal arrangement greatly facilitates the use of the book both for study and for reference ; and in both volumes brief runn ; ng side- titles were used for sections whenever practical. The word NOTE after the number of any section means that such section is subordinate to the nearest preceding section without that indica- VI PREFACE tion ; thus in Volume I, section " 525, NOTE " means that this section is subordinate to section 524; in Volume II, section " 1264, NOTE" means that this section is subordinate to section 1263 ; naturally an independent section may be followed by a number of subordinate sections bearing the indication "NoTE". In the Syntax volume, all the sections devoted to poetic or dialectic syntax are printed in shorter lines. The quotations cited in the Syntax have all been verified and are printed as they appear in the texts, omissions not bearing on the rule cited being indicated by dots. In concluding these explanatory remarks, the author desires to state that he will be thankful to have pointed out to him any errors of any kind for future correction. GUSTAVE SIMONSON. September, 1910. PAOK PREFACE v PART V SYNTAX Definitions 1201. Subject and Predicate 1 1202. Object 1 1203. Appositive Noun 1 1204. Predicate Noun 1 1205. Copulate Verbs 2 1206. Attributive Adjective 2 1207. Attribute 2 1208. Predicate Adjective 2 Subject 1209-1215. Subject of a Finite Verb 2-4 The Verb 1216-1218. The Copula <>* Omitted 4-6 1219-1221. Other Verbs occasionally Omitted 5 1222. The Verbs tlpl and ytyvo^at with Adverbs as Complete Predi- cates 5-6 1223. The Verb yiyvonat with Local Adverbs =come 6 vii Vlll CONTENTS Peculiarities in the Use of Numbers, Genders, and Persons SEOnOH PAOB 1224-1226. Singular 6-7 1227-1238. Plural -. 7-10 1289-1241. Dual 10 1242-1244. Genders 10-11 1245. Persons 11 Agreement 1246-1247. General Principles of Agreement 12 1248. Construction according to Sense 12-13 1249-1264. Subject Nominative and Verb 13-15 Attribute 1265-1269. Various Parts of Speech and Phrases used as Attributes 15-16 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1270. Remark . ( 16 1271-1280. Masculines and Feminines 16-19 1281-1301. Neuters 19-25 Predicate Noun and Adjective 1302-1310. Agreement with its Substantive 25-28 1311-1313. Assimilation of Demonstrative Pronoun to the Gender and Number of its Predicate Noun 28 1314-1315. Predicate Adjective with some Part of >/ understood 28-29 1316. Predicate Adjective expressing Purpose, Character or Quality 29 ADJECTIVES WITH ADVERBIAL FORCE 1317-1318. Predicate Adjective used where the English uses an Adverb... 29-80 1319. Different Meaning where an Adverb is used instead 30 1320. Predicate Adjectives fJLtyas, iro\vs, &4>6ovos, tvavrios with fita and irvfu 80 1821. Predicate Adjective iro\vs with Other Expressions 80 Apposition 1322. Noun in Apposition 80-31 1323. Adjective with Article as Appositive to a Personal Pronoun ... 31 1824. Appositive belonging to two or more Nouns in Plural or Dual 31 1325. Noun denoting Place with Appositive denoting Inhabitants ... 81 CONTENTS IX SECTION PAGE 1326. Appositive denoting Part of the Subject 31 1327. Genitive as Appositive toan Adjective 31 1328. In Homer Noun or Pronoun denoting a Person with Apposi- tive denoting a Part... 31 1329. Appositive may agree in Gender with its Subject 32 1330. Noun as Appositive to a whole Sentence 32 1331. Position of Appositive Names of Rivers, Mountains, Islands, Lakes, and Cities : 32 1332. The Expression fi &ov\}j ol trevraKAffioi 32 The Adjective 1333-1336. Agreement of Adjective 32-33 1337. Adjectives and Participles used as Nouns 33 DEGREES OF COMPARISON 1338-1339. Positive Degree 33-34 1340-1354. Comparative Degree 34-37 1355-1366. Superlative Degree 37-3S I The Article THE ARTICLE IN POETRY AND THE DIALECTS 1367-1368. The Article in Homer as a Demonstrative or Personal or Relative Pronoun 39 1 1369. The Article in Homer used as a Demonstrative emphasizing a Noun 39-40. 1370. Adverbial use of rf and r6 in Poetry 40 1371-1375. The Article used as Article Proper 40-41 1376. The Article in Lyric and Tragic Poetry ; as Relative in Herodotus, Doric, and Aeolic 41 THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREKK 1377-1388. Use as Pronoun or Demonstrative 41-43 1389-1393. Use as Article Proper 48-44 1394-1395. Use of Article in forming Substantives 44-45 1396-1405. Insertion and Omission of the Article 45-49 1406-1417. Position of Attributes and Predicate Adjectives relating to Nouns which have the Article 49-53- X CONTENTS Pronouns PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PBONOUNS 8BOTION PAGE 1418. Nominative used only when Emphatic 53-54 1419-1420. Uses of tyov, ifwl, ^ie and of Enclitic Forms 54 1421-1422. Oblique Cases of avr6s as Personal Pronouns of the Third Person 54 1423-1431. Various uses of afrnfs 54-56 1432-1434. Indefinite English one or you or they, how expressed 56-57 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 1435-1439. General use of Reflexives 57-58 1440. Uses of the Forms ^u< vr6v, etc 58-59 1441. Reflexives of the Third Person used for the First or Second... 59 1442-1443. Plural Reflexives used for Reciprocal Pronoun, etc 59 1444-1448. Reflexives inHomer 59-60 1449-1452. Personal Pronoun o5, of, etc., in Attic Prose as Reflexive 60-61 1453. Personal Pronoun o5, of, etc., in the Dialects 61-63 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 1454-1459. General Uses of Possessive Pronouns 63-65 1460-1464. Reflexive Possessive, my own, etc 65-66 1465-1466. Simple Possessives sometimes Reflexive 66 1467. Genitives of Personal Pronouns seldom Reflexive 66 1468. Genitives of Demonstratives used instead of Reflexives for Emphasis 66 1469. Synopsis of Simple and Reflexive Possessive Forms 66-67 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 1470-1477. Uses of oSros, 88, iitwos 67-68 1478. KoloSros 68 1479-1483. Position of o&ros, 88e, iicfwos with the Article 68-69 1484-1486. Ovros as Antecedent Relative ' 69 1487. Demonstratives as Predicates 69 1488-1489. Demonstratives roaovros, Too-oVSt , roiovros, roioVSt, rr]\iKovros, n\tit6 ^ followed by Sub- junctive or Future Indicative 204 IMPERATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES 1979-1981. Expression of Command by Imperative 204-205 1982. Perfect Imperative ... 205 1983. Prohibitions expressed by ^ with Pres. Imperative or Aor. Subjunctive 205 1984. Prohibitions sometimes expressed by Aorist Imperative 205 1985. Prohibitions sometimes expressed in the Dramatists by ov ^ and the Second Pers. Sing, of Fut. Indie, or Aor. Subj. 205 CONTENTS XV SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES SUCTION PAGE 1986. Hortative Subjunctive 205-206 1987-1990. Deliberative or Interrogative Subjunctive or Indicative 206 1991. Subjunctive equivalent to Fut. Indie, in Homer 206 1992. Subjunctive and Future Indie, as expressing Expectation 207 OPTATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES 1993-1998. Potential Optative 207-208 1999-2003. Optative of Wishing 208-209 2004-2007. Unattainable Wishes expressed by Past Tenses of Indicative 209-210 THE MOODS IN INDEPENDENT OB DIRECT QUESTIONS 2008-2009. Direct Simple and Double Questions 210-211 2010. Answers, how Expressed 211-212 FINITE MOODS IN DEPENDENT OR SUBORDINATE CLAUSES 2011. General Reference to the Various Constructions 212 OBLIQUE OPTATIVE 2012. Use of Optative in Indirect Discourse 213" DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS 2013-2015. Direct and Indirect Statements 213-214 2016-2022. Rules for Simple Dependent Declarative Clauses introduced by Sri or d>s 214-218 DEPENDENT QUESTIONS 2023-2025. Direct and Indirect (or Dependent) Questions 218 2026-2033. Rules for Dependent Questions 218-221 2034-2036. Dependent Clauses after Implied Inquiry , 221-223 FINAL CLAUSES 2037-2039. Meaning and Kinds of Final and Object Clauses 223 2040-2047. Final Clauses of Absolute Purpose 223-226 2048-2049. Final Clauses of Unattainable Purpose 226 2050-2057. Object-Clauses after Verbs of Effort, etc 226-229 2058-2061. "Orws and 8irws ^ in Commands! 229-230 2062-2070. Clauses and Various Constructions after Verbs of Fearing ... 230-233 2071-2076. Causal Clauses... 233-235 XVI CONTENTS CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES SIOTION PAGE 2077. Meaning of Consecutive Clauses 285 2078-2079. Consecutive Clauses with Finite Mood 235-236 2086-2087. Consecutive Clauses with the Infinitive 286-237 2088. "CHTOS and olos used instead of &(, yiyvofiai, wropx" 302-304 2284. With r x 304 2285-2288. With Verbs of "being" 304-305 2289-2290. With Verbs of beginning, ceasing, stopping, persevering, weary- ing, and permitting 306-309 2291-2295 With Verbs of Feeling or Emotion 309-310 2296. With Verbs meaning to do well or ill, to surpass, be inferior, etc .' 311 2297. With ervftfabti, TraiBi, ho gave the book to the boy, /3t,(3\iov is the direct object of the verb, and jrai&i is the indirect or remote object. Verbs which can take a direct object are called transitive verbs ; others are called intransitive. 1203. Appositive Noun. A noun added to another noun to describe it, is called an appositive noun ; as ^wKpdrris o oi/ cn-par^yo? ecrriv, Xeno- phon is general ; /caOicrrarai ySao^Xeu?, he is established as king ; Aapeios Kvpov crarpdTrrjv eTroirjcrev, Darius made Cyrus satrap ; 1 A\Ki/3id8r)i> (TTpaTr), I say ; \eyere, you say ; but eya) fiev \eya), ao-i, they say, it is said. 1214 SUBJECT 3 3. When it is implied in the verb. Such verbs are : o-aA.7rtei, the trumpeter (o-aXTriy/cT^s) sounds the trumpet; K-rjpva-a-u, the herald (Krjpv) proclaims ; 0-rjp.o.ivu, a signal is given, they signal ; KwXuei, a hindrance occurs. Similarly in the impersonal use of the passive, as Aeyerai, it is said; especially in the perfect and pluperfect, as Trape- <7-Kworrai futi, preparation has been made by me (= things have been prepared by me). See 1800, 23142319. 4. In verbs like vet, it rains ; vfepei, the difference is ; oi^e ty, it was late ; eis TOUTO r)\0e, it went so far ; i^epd eyeVero, it became day. Similarly in the impersonal construction of the verbal in -reov, which often omits eon'; as TW j/o/zu irewrreov, we must obey the law (Plat. Apol. 19 a ) : see 23142319. 6. The indefinite TIS is often omitted ; as lav p-rj vlov Ka-raXiirr) yvrja-iov, if one does not leave a legitimate son (Isae. 6, 44). 1212. NOTE. Many impersonal verbs may have an infinitive or a whole sentence as the subject. Svveftrj vfuv TrfHrQfjvcu, it happened to you to be persuaded (Thuc. 2, 61 2 ). Aet (irioi re oit rrpoy aXXijXovf 6>[i,i\T)(rav (ot 6foi), they narrate the birth of the gods, and how, after they were born, they behaved toward one another (Plat. Leg. 886 C ). 1214. 1. The subject of a dependent clause is often emphati- cally placed at the beginning of its clause. HpS)Tov f7ri\(ipr)(ru>fi(v dirdv, d v 8 p e i o ri TTOT' eoTtV, let us first trji to define what courage is (Plat. Lach. 19O 1 ). 4 THE VERB 1215 2. The subject of a dependent clause is very often drawn into the principal clause, and its case made to depend on the leading- verb. This is called prolepsis (TrpoXij-ty'is, anticipation), and occurs mostly with verbs of saying, perceiving, knowing, fearing, and with i, take care. in n ov roivvv nvts r o X /i o> 8' e/3ouXero Qrjftatots 'Op\ofi(vov napaSovvai ( = roX/i&xrt roivvv nvts Xtytiv o>s (piXinrros ov8\ etc.), some persons venture to say that Philip did not wish to deliver Orchomenos to the Thebans (Dem. 5, 22). Oivov ((ppaa-tv (vda ffv Karopa>pvyp(vor (= (v apxaptvav tiri- (j.f\i(rdai ona>s CDS ^f'Xriorot ((rovrai ( iip\ovra 8(i (7rip.(\(t(r6ai orrats ol dpxofjifi'oi wr /3'XTrroi ?o-oi/rai), it is the duty of an officer to take such care of those whom he commands that they may be as brave as possible (Xen. Cyr 2, I 11 ). T % v VTrepfioXriv T>V 6pu>t> t8f8oiKf p.r) f] vtrp{io\T) TW optav TrpoKaraX^&i'r;), they feared that the pass over the mountains might be occupied in advance (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 18 ). 1215. NOTE. The subject of the dependent clause may even be- come a genitive depending on a noun of the principal clause. T HX0f rols 'Adrjvaiois fvdvs f] dyyeXuz rStv iro\fu>v ort d(pTTa(Tii> (= q\6e rots ' A0T)i>aiois (v6vs TJ dyyeX/a on ai TroXeiy d & e - ^ 8 ^ en omitted, especially the forms eo-ri and eipovSo<>, gone ; erot/40?, ready ; Beov and -xpeav, needful ; eov, possible, and the like. nA*ovi'a piyittTov dvdptanon; Kanov, greediness is a very great evil to men (Men. A/on. 549). Srparta yap f) paa-rr) (sc. 68os) Ta^i'arjj, to an army the easiest way is the quickest (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4 s7 ). Qiptiv dvdyKtj rhs irapta-Tuafis rvxas, it is necessary to bear the present evils (Eur. Or. 1024). "Qpa \iy(iv, it is time to speak (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 12 ). AfJXov on TOV 6pai> fvnca o$0oX/*&>/ , it is plain that we need eyes for seeing (Xen. Symp. 5, 5). ^Kt^ao-dm 1222 THE VERB 5 Seov, it is necessary to examine (Dem. 3, 1). 5 l8eti> a OVK e6i/ avrtj, to see what was not permitted to her to see (Isae. 6, 50). Tw vop.co ireio-reov, the law must be obeyed (Plat. Apol. 19 s ). npar'oi/ opd>s Xeyeti/, it is necessary to speak correctly (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 s4 ). 1217. NOTE. Other forms of ci/u are seldom omitted. 'E-yw Trdo-^fii' onovv eroi/ios (sc. et/u), / i ready to suffer anything (Dem. 4, 29; 9, 4). AIKOIOS o-u f/yfla-dai (sc. ), you ought to take the lead (Plat. Protag. 351 e ). Ilepl rotlj-ov eroi/iot rc5 Xdyw Sta/ici^eo-^at (sc. fV/aeV), we ar prepared to argue it out concerning this (Plat. Rep. 499 d ). "Etas (sc. eWe) r' ev denpaXet (t>v\daTfs (IVTWV KaXoi KayadoL (sc. rja-av), he asked if those who had fallen were honourable and brave men (Thuc. 4, 40 2 ). 1219. Some common verbs of b&ing, happening, going, coming, doing, saying, which are easily understood, are sometimes omitted for brevity or effect, especially in questions and commands. "iva TI (sc. ytvrjTai) ; to what purpose ? = lit. that what may happen (Dem. 19, 257). ii $iXf aipe, TTOI Si) (sc. ei) KOI nodev (sc. fJKis), dear Phaedrus, whither, pray, are you going and whence are you come ? (Plat. Phaedr. 227 a ). OuSev oXX' (sc. Troiovo-tc) t) o-u/u/SovXevovo-ti/ fjfuv, they do nothiny else than advise us (Isoc. 8, 37). Tt oXXo (sc. eVot'jjo-av) olroi fj eirfftovXtvo-tw ; what else did these men than plot against us ? (Thuc. 3, 39 2 ). Ilepi rovroav KOTO o-^oXiji/ (sc. \ft-o(j,fi>), about these we will speak at leisure (Dem. 24, 187). Mrj pot. fjivpiovs f-evovs (sc. Xe'^re), tell me not of ten thousand mercenaries (Dem. 4, 19). 1220. NOTE. In proverbs, official statements, and inscriptions/, omissions of other verbs occur ; these are readily supplied. rXa/(c' (Is 'A.0r)vas (sc. (pep(iv). Ol cru/i/xa^ot dpicrrflov rfj 'A.dr/va. (sc. avedtaav), the allies erected a memorial to Athene (Dem. 22, 72). Ot 0-vp.p.axoi TOV Srjpov avbpayadias fvt '> otfj.a.1 St KOI Vp.a>v roiis TroXXovr (sc. ^aXerrcos 1 e^fiv\ I feel rather in a bad wa;/, but I think many of you do also (Plat. Kyw.p. J76"). OVTOS p.fv v8a>p (sc. 7rii/ei), c'-yw 8e olvov irtva>, this man drinks water, but I drink wine (Dem. 19, 46). 1222. In connection with adverbs, the verbs dpi and are not copulative, but form complete predicates. PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 1223 'Eyyvs fiv ana, the tears triokle from our eyes (Soph. El. 1231). 2. The singular of a noun denoting a person is sometimes used collectively, but much less often than in Latin. 'O apxtav, 6 8iKarr}f, the archons, the judges, the private citizens (Lye. 79). 'OTrXtTTjs, 6pos, inirtvs, hoplites, sutlers, cavalry (Xen. Oec. 8, 4). 'O iro\(fuos, the enemy (Thuc. 4, 10 3 ). 'O irtXas, the neighbours (Thuc. 1, 32*). Thus ai/ (Hdt. 8, 2 s ). T6i> "EXXqva (Hdt. 1, 69). The monarch may thus represent the people ; as 6 'Ap/wVior (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 1 ), rj KiXto-o-a (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). The representative of a state may use ryw for fipds (Thuc. 1, 137"). 4. The singular is sometimes used in a distributive way, referring to several persons or things individually, in cases where the plural would be expected. Aidopo( TOV rpon ov, different in their characters (Thuc. 8, 96 5 ). Tov 1229 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 7 irr)\6v firl TOV V&TOV ffapov, they carried the clay on their backs (Thuc. 4, 4 2 ). Mer' dcririSos KOI BopaTos (ld>0fo~ai> r&s irop.iras irotfiv, they were in the habit of celebrating the procession ivith spears and shields (Thuc. 6, 58 2 ). 5. The neuter singular of adjectives (especially of those in -IKOS) with the article is often used collectively ; occasionally the neuter singular of participles is so used (compare 1301). To TroXtrtKop = ot TroXirat, the citizens (Hdt. 7, 103 3 ). To "EXXrjviKov = ot "EXX^i/er, the Greeks (Thuc. 1, I 1 ). So TO 6ir\iTiKoi>, TO ITTTTIKOV, TO o-i'/i/ia^tKov, etc. To evavTiov = ot evavTioi, the enemy (Thuc. 7j 44 s ). Ei TOVTOVS T KOI TO vTrofjifvov ( = TOVS i>7rofj.fvovTas] fv 'STrdpTr] KaTao~Tpf(j)fni, if you subdue these, and those remaining behind in Sparta (Hdt. 7, 209 s ). 'Op>v TTO\V TO gwt- (TTTJKOS (= TOVS ^vvfar-njKOTas), seeing that those leagued together were many (Thuc. 8, 66 2 ). To uparovv (== ot KpaTovvTes) TTJS ir6\as, the rulers of the city (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 43 ). 1225. NOTE. A dramatic chorus is generally treated as one individual, the coryphaeus speaking and acting as its representative. It is therefore commonly denoted by the singular, sometimes by the plural. T Q e t v o t, pf) Sfjr' d8iKr)6> o- o t TruTTtvcras, friends, let me not suffer wrong, having placed my faith in you (Soph. Oed. Col. 174). 'Ffyuv p,iv 778/7 itav TfTo^tvrai /3e'Xof, (i.tv(o 8t, every shaft has now been shot by us, and I wait (Aesch. Eum. 676). So the dual may be used of two semichoruses, as Xcilo-o-fTop TTavra, do you both look everywhere (Aesch. Eum. 255). 1226. NOTE. These singulars also denote plurals occasionally. Tk, any one (Thuc. 2, 37 1 ). Tt's ; who 1 (Thuc. 3, 39 9 ). Oi>6Vis, no one (Xen. Anab. 3, I 2 ). 'O with a participle (Thuc. 5, 38 1 ). PLURAL 1227. The Greek frequently uses the plural (or dual) of abstract nouns, nouns of material, and proper names. 1228. Proper names are used in the plural to designate several persons of the same, as 8v> K/mrwAoi, two Cratyhises (Plat. Cratyl. 432*) ; or to denote men like , as ol H/3aAcA.s *v KOI tyv%pa>v v8dro>v (Xen. Hell. 5, 3 19 ). Hvpol pyid ^O^tj re ^ipcovos KOI ddXirr) dfpovs fdifai Kaprfptlv, agriculture accustoms us to endure the colds of winter and the heats of summer (Xen. Oec. 5, 4). Km \ d X a fa t KOI ?r a x i/ a i, hails and frosts (Xen. Oec. 5, 18). AV' t O-TOV Tivt /3ia>, there are two lives (Plat. Leg. 662 d ). Tat? ffXiKims KOI rals t p.n( ipiats irpoe^ovTfs, those having advantage in age and experience (Isoc. 15, 200). El86r(s rfls ptv a ir o p i a s 8ia ras dpy i as yiyvopfvas, rhs 8f K a K o v p- yias 8ia ras dirop ids, knowing that want of means arises from idleiiess, and vicious habits from want of means (Isoc. 7, 44). 'Ev n or o is KU\ a* o\aV TroX Xw v...ruy \dveiv, to suffer many deaths (Plat. Leg. 869 b ). Al pMTa>v pci>pur, battles are decided rather by the mind than by strength of body (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 19 ). Srao-etr f) d8iKid cat (ucrti irapt\fi, injustice breeds divisions and animosities (Plat. Rep. 351 d ). Ilavo-avids v IT o ty i n s iroXXhs irapfi\tv, Pausanias gave room for many suspicions (Thuc. 1, 132 s ). Ot dv8pt lot OVK aio~\povs (f) o ft o v s (pofSovvTai ov8' alo~\pa d p pr) dappovtriv, couragemis men have no base fear or base confidence (Plat. Prot. 360 b ). N'tKai/ tv rt nai8iais xal fv (rrrovSais, to conquer in playing and in earnestness (Plat. Leg. 647 d )- 21yds rt rS>v vtu>Ttpv dtpairtids, silence of the young before their elders, rising up (at their entrance), and attention to parents (Plat. Re]). 425"' h ). Toi/s Kpario-rovs ra ti8rj, the best in appearance (Xen. Hell. 3, 2 18 ). Nfavun riis o\lr(ts, young in appearance (Lys. 10, 29). 'Opdol rlis righteous in their souls (Plat. Theaet. 173*). 1238 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NUMBERS 9 1232. NOTE. Some abstract nouns have particular meanings in the plural. NvKTts, the hours of night, so /xfcrat VVKTU, midnight. Avar pal, setting, sinking, so ijXt'ou Suv &voiv dare pa, fj irfldeiv fjp,ds r) iroiflv, TOVT&V ov 8fT t pa Troiel, we offering the alternative of two things, either to convince us or to obey, he does neither (Plat. Crito, 52*). To fj.rj8(repa TOVTVV fo-0' rjfj.lv SITUS 6 UT p a ytvoir av ; that which is neither of these, can it be either ? (Plat. Phil. 43 e ). Example of & (Thuc. 4, 13 2 ). 1236. 1. The speaker occasionally uses the plural for the singular (we for 7) as a more polite form. This is uncommon in prose, more frequent in poetry. Tavra rr(ipdcr6fj.fda 8iriyf) ro) TT 68' tvdfis, having put my feet into the buskins ( Ax, Eccl. 346). IlalSes 8i/o, two children ; TO> iral8e, the two children (Xen. Anab. 1, I 1 ). Avo ?xa> ^v^ay, I have two souls (Xen. Cyr. 6, I 41 ). Auo iarbv ^v\O, there are two souls (ibid.). Tipoa irptxov 8vo v t av i, two- young men came running up (Xen. Anab. 4, 3 10 ). 'E-yeXao-ari/v ovv a p

Ta, booty (Xen. Anab. 5, 9 4 ). MaXXoi/ /la^oii/r' av, d Ta

r TO \JJO~TIKOV Kadfjpti (K TTJS 6a\(i 'EXXqi/tKoV, the ancient Greeks, the old Greek world (Thuc. 1, 6 4 ). KparI ev fKaaTfi TrdXft TO ap%ov, the ruling body in every city has the power (Plat. Rep. 338 e ). NavTifcoV may mean fleet (Thuc. 1, 4), or naval affairs (Thuc. 1, 142 1 ). 1295. The neuter may denote a body or parts of a body or anything perceptible by the senses. *Hrrov dvaTpcnfTai TTUVTU TO. TT X a T e a, broad objects are less easily over- turned (Xen. Cyr. 6, I 29 ). Maxell' Set a ToVe T ols 8 t iol s TOV o-w/iaToy eVotfi, TO!? apia-Ttpo'is Troiflv, one must learn to do with the right part of the body what one did previously with the left (Xen. Eques. 7, 3). T a 8 e o p, e v a pa, the corslet covers those parts of a man needing protection (Xen. Mem. 3, 10*). HiKpu yXvKv jie'/iiKTat, the sweet is mixed with the bitter (Plat. Phil. 46 d ). 'HKOVTIOV e< n\ayiov irapaQfovTes fs TO. yvfj.vd, they threw javelins, running from tlie side, at the exposed flanks (Xen. Hell. 4, 5' 6 ). 1296. The neuter attribute used substantively may express pro- perty, means, power, concerns, affairs, interests, rights, party, and the like. Afl d-rrfxeadai T>V e f-vp.rrapayfv6p.fvoi, p.fyd\a (TGMrrjTf, so that assisting with a small force, you may preserve great interests (Thuc. 6, 92 5 ). A.pK(l pot. piKpb KOI p.ft6va>v alcrxp^ OVK eVi$i5|ia>, my small property suffices me, and I have no shameful desire for a greater (Aeschin. 3,218). T 6 p.fv KOIVOV {-vv8fl, TO 8f "8iov 8iao-7ra TO"? TroXftf, public good binds states together, but private distracts them (Plat. Leg. 876*). 'E/ie vvv v6p.i(rov KOI TO O-QV /3i'o>, human affairs (Men. Mon. 712). TOTWV TrapovTwi', the interests of those present (Plat. Gorg. 458 b ). To rv, the habit of fishermen (Xen. Oec. 16, 7). AI yvvalica croi^fiv TCI tv8ov, a woman ought to take care of what is at home (Plat. Meno, 71 e ). To OIKOI, domestic affairs (Xen. Cyr. 6, I' 8 ). To TC (Kfl fvtToptaTfpa io~Tai, al TO fv6d8f OVK V TySe ovrt rStv nap' tfi.lv, knowing nothing of what happened here or among yourselves (Plat. Tim. 23 b ). "Ei/a (Kturrov (v 8(1 tTriTT)8fvfiv TV v, things of friends are common (Eur. Or. 735). 'Ai/dy*?/ ra T>V 'E X X 17 1> a> i/ (ppovtiv, to feel disposed in favour of the interests of the Greeks (Dem. 14, 34). To r fj s dvdyKrjs 8fiv6v, terrible is necessity (Eur. Tro. 612). El\(trdf ra 'A #17- i' at cor, you took the part of the Athenians (Thuc. 3, 63 3 ). 'AjroXXuvat ra avT&v, to destroy their property (Plat. Rep. 555 C ). To TO avrov irparrtiv, to attend to one's own business (Plat. 433 a ). Taparmra rS>v Q(TTa\o>v, he disturbs the affairs of the Thessalians (Dem. 1, 21). 1297. The neuter attribute used substantively may express con- dition, feelings, behaviour, relations, services, actions, events, thoughts, sayings, causes, influences, opinions, and the like. To d AcaXw, ei/ 8i roi K(ivuv dirpfirtl TOV noXtfiov di>a/3aXXecr$ai, saying that it was to their own honour, and to their rivals' discredit to postpone the war (Thuc. 5, 46 1 ). Et fir] Kadt(is yXwo-o-av, eorai i> dvri TOV /3ao-iXtoi) TO rupawKov, having learned what is tyrannical instead of what is royal (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 18 ). To nt\\ov doparov, the future is invisible (Isoc. 1, 29). Tw a 8 o K. T) T w (f7r\T){-fv, he struck (them) with dismay at the unexpected move (Thuc. 4, 36 2 ). SwKpaTTjf 8ia ratv /idXtora 6 /xoXoyov /xe v a>v fjroptvfTo, Socrates proceeded upon projjositions most generally acknowledged (Xen. Mem. 4, 6 15 ). OVK dp.f\T)V 8i8ao- K o p.( v u>v, she will not disregard what is taught (Xen. Oec. 7, 8). Mij rajrap'e'/ioi) ovrcas dno8(\ov CDS naiovros, do not accept these statements of mine as if uttered in jest (Plat. Gorg. 500 1 '). T a r>v V , the state of the winds (Dem. 49, 7). 1298. NOTE. The neuter plural, especially of adjectives in -I denotes an aggregate or particulars or the whole mass. 1302 PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 25 Ta TpwtKa, the events of Troy (Thuc. 1, 3 1 ). Ta trpb ru>v M;8iKa>;> Greek history before the Persian wars (Thuc. 1, 97 2 ). Ta VUVTIKO, naval affairs {Thuc. 1, 142 4 ). Mera TO. (v nXarata TU>V (o~f\Q6vTV 6f5>v evfifvfs KOI TO TTJS TV^TJS wvaymvi^fTai = ot 6eo\ v/jLi>is io~i KOI f] Tv%T) o-waya>vifTai, the gods are propitious, and fortune aids (Dem. 4, 45). 1301. 1. The neuter singular of an adjective with the article is often an abstract noun expressing nature, essence, or quality. To Ka\6v ( = TO KaXXoy), beauty. To 8' &TT\OVV KOI TO dXrjdes, sim- plicity and truth (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 22 ). To x a X e 7rov T0 *' irvtvpaTos, the roughness of the wind (Ken. Anab. 4, 5 4 ). To y epbv IT podv pov, my zeal Kur. Med. 178). Sweftrj TOV epov \6yov ev roi v/j.Tfpa) do'dtve? TTJS yixaprjs pf) opdbv (paivfo-dcu, it happened that my advice did not seem straight through your weakness of resolution (Thuc. 2, 61 2 ). To a n p ay pov ov VTI {= (v rw pi) p.f\(Tav), in the want of practice = lit. in the not practising (Thuc. 1, 142 8 ). TJJV opytjv Ku>\6eiv els TO p.eTafjif\rjo-6pfvov Trpo'itvai, to prevent anger from going so far as to cause regret (Xen. Mem. 2, 6 23 ). This construc- tion is confined chiefly to Thucydides. PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 1302. 1. A predicate-noun agrees in case with the substantive to which it refers ; a predicate-adjective agrees in case, number, and gender. Kvpiis f&Ti ftao-iXfvs, Cyrus is king. T6p.vpis j3ao-i\(ia fa, Tomyris was queen. KXeW fiptQrj HUTUO- K.OIT os, Cleon was chosen scout (Thuc. 4, 27 s ). TV paw os 6 *Epi\ovs, consider true friends (to be)- brothers (Men. Mon. 377). Swrfjpa TOV Qihinirov fjyovvTo, they regarded Philip their preserver (Dem. 18, 43). 2. The predicate-noun may often be of different gender, sometimes- also of different number. Ovroi yf (pavepei cm XV o-vyyiyvofievuv, these men are a manifest dishonour and a corruption to their associates (Plat. Meno, 91 C ). 1303. NOTE. The predicate-nominative of passive verbs represents the predicate-accusative of the active form (1609 1614). 1304. NOTE. By a change of construction (anacoluthon) , a predi- cate-participle sometimes differs in case from its subject. *E8oej> avTots ( = (\lrr)(f)icravTo) ...... , e rr i K a\ovvTt s, it seemed best to- them (= they voted) ...... , alleging (Thuc. 3, 36 1 ) ; other examples in Thuc. 1, 62* ; Eur. Hec. 970 ; Soph. El. 479. 1305. NOTE. For predicate-nouns and adjectives after the in- finitive, see infinitive, 2186-2191. For demonstrative, relative, and interrogative pronouns used as predicate-adjectives, see 1487, 1510, 1548. 1306. NOTE. (a) A predicate-adjective relating to several sub- stantives is generally in the plural, or may be in the dual if it relates to two. If the substantives denote a masculine and a feminine, the adjective is masculine; if the substantives denote persons and things, the adjective follows the gender of the person ; if all the nouns represent things of the same gender, the adjective follows their gender, or else it is in the neuter plural ; and if all the nouns denote things of different genders (or persons regarded as things), the adjective is commonly in the neuter plural. 'Evpvfj.f8V Kvptoi, fortune and Philip were masters of the actions (Aeschin. 2, 118). i rt ical Swdfifis xal Ti/iai 8fj\d 'ort ya0a ovra, good birth and 1310 PREDICATE-NOUN AND ADJECTIVE 27" power and honour are clearly good things (Plat. Euthyd. 279 b ). 'H Ka\\ia-rrf- Tro\iT(ia Tf Kalo (caXXtorof dvrjp \oi7rd av f) fj.lv f"aj 8i(\0'iv , the noblest common- wealth and the noblest man would be left for us to consider (Plat. Rep. 562 a ). (b) But sometimes the predicate-adjective conforms in number and gender with the nearest or most important noun. BacrtXei/j KOI ot criiv av-nu 8ia> K co v (lo~7rtirT(i fls TO crTparoirfSov, the king and his followers pursuing break into the camp (Xen. Anab, 1, 10 1 ). Hp6ppios avros, 17 yvvr), TO. iraidia K.O.K.UTT diro\oifj,r)v, may I perish most miserably, root and branch, myself, my wife, my children (Ar. Ran. 587). 1307. NOTE. A predicate-participle may conform to the real rather than to the grammatical gender or number of the noun to which it refers. Ta p. e L p d K i a rd8e Trpbs d\\r)\ons OIKOI 8 taXey 6 fj.c v 01 6ap.a fTrifjLfj.vr)VTai 2a>/KfTf cos dyadbv ov, you pursue pleasure as being something good (Plat. Prot. 354). KaraXa/i/3aVov(7t Bpinivvids ov epv/ua tv rfi \fovrivri, they take Bricinniae, a fort in Leontine (Thuc. 5, 4 4 ). 1309. NOTE. (a) A masculine or feminine noun may have its predicate-adjective in the neuter, the adjective then has the force of a noun denoting a class. KoXoi/ 17 d\r)9(ia, truth is beautiful = a beautiful thing (Plat. Leg. 663 e ). 'Addvarov 17 ^v\ri, the smd is immortal = something immortal (Plat. Phaedo,. 105"). (b) Sometimes rl, something, is added to the predicate. Tfjv dp(TT)v K a X d v TI ((rdai, it was impossible to resist the Locrians (Thuc. 4, I 3 ). So also the verbals -riov and -rta in their impersonal construction; as ryv tr6\iv txpfA^reov, we must aid the state (Xen. Mem. 2, I 28 ) ; |v/x/xa^ot dyadoi, ovs ov ira paftorea rols 'Adyvaiois tTrjpiav, I consider this to be my only salvation (Lys. 1, 5). 1313. NOTE. 1. The assimilation does not take place and the demonstrative is in the neuter, if this is wholly indefinite and general and equivalent to this thing or this matter. "Eyaiyt (p?;/xt ravra (j)\vapiat dvat, I declare this to be nonsense (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 17 ). 2. Similarly in questions ri must be used when what ? is equivalent to what kind of thing ? HvOayopas t'pwn^ft's, rl eVrt Ktis T&S f\ni8as = m f\7ri8ts &s StcoKtiy nTTjvai ticriv, yon pursue hopes which are winged = lit. hopes being winged (Eur. Frag. 273). ifsiXriv (x a>v "1 V K((f>a\T)v, haring his head bare (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 B ). nap* inovrtav r os Tvxoirt, if. the lot you meet be 1318 ADJECTIVES WITH ADVEEBIAL FOECE 29' a happy one (Eur. Hel. 698). "Orav azova dvftpbs Trepi dpe-iys 8ia\eyop.fvov,. when I hear a man discoursing about virtue, I rejoice (Plat. Lach. 188). s itrxvov rpf(pu>, I nourish truth (being) strong (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 356). Tovs 0-vp.p.dxovs npoddfjiovs Troteio-^ai, *o make the allies zealous (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2 i38 ). 1315. NOTE. The predicate-adjective can often be known from its position with regard to the article ; see 1415, 1416. 1316. The predicate frequently expresses the purpose, character, or quality in which a person or thing appears ; especially where we use as or for or a similar word. 'ATTt'oraAKfi croi TOVTOV rov Xo-yov 8>pov, I have sent you this discourse as a gift (Isoc. 1, 2). 'EKeiVa> avrr) 17 x^P^ Saipoi/ 'K ^atrtXewy e860r), this country was given to him as a gift by the king (Xen. Hell. 3, I 6 ). "ITTTTOI rjyovro 6 v p.a ra> 17X10), horses were brought as an offering to the sun (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3 12 , actively ITTTTOVS aytiv dvpa). 2v/j./u.a^ovs teis dtovs, you will have the gods for allies (Men. Mon. 126). Tivos 8i8d&>v irpoa-Be'ia-dat pot SoKei piidcw ert rtvwv, he seems to me to still need some words as consolation (Plat. Leg. 903 b ). So with &>s prefixed ; as effort ro> /3ovXo/ueVa> Xpr)a6ai fj8r] TOVT& a>s aj/Span-oSw, it is in the power of any one who wishes to use him as a slave (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2P). Compare also 1314, 1611, 1487, 1510, 1548 ADJECTIVES WITH ADVERBIAL FORCE 1317. A predicate-adjective is often used where the English would require an adverb or an adverbial phrase. 'AfpiKvovvrai rpiraloi, they arrive on the third day (Xen. Anab. 5, 3 2 ). "Opmos S X t K a>v, by force and not willingly (Soph. Oed. Col. 935). Ilapct/Lu &KO>V, I am present unwil- lingly (Soph. Ant. 276). Tovs vtKpovs viroo-rrovdovs dirrjyovTo, they bore off their dead under cover of truce (Xen. Hell. 4, 4 13 ). 1318. NOTE. The adjectives most frequently used in this way are : (a) those expressing time, as Sevrepaios, on the second day, Tpireuos,. on the third day, etc., opOpios, early, O-/COTCUOS, after dark; (b) those expressing order, as Trpwros, first, Trpdrepos, former, vo-raTos, last, later; (c) IKWV and CKOUO-IOS, willingly, rfxtov, unwillingly, gladly ; (d) certain others, as V7roo-7rov8o9, under treaty, opxtos under 30 APPOSITION 1319 oath, etc. Adjectives expressing locality are seldom used in this way in prose. ^KTjvovfjLfv viraidpioi, we are encamped in the open air (Xen. Anab. 5, 5 21 ). 1319. NOTE. The use of the adverb often gives a completely different meaning. 'A.\(av8pos TT pan-os tra^t TOVS \^l\ovs, Alexander was the first who drew up the light-armed troops. 'AXeai/8pof irptarovs -ae TOVS -^IXovs the first troops Alexander drew up tvere the light-armed. But AXfav8pos irpSyrov era TOVS v/riXous, first (of all he did) Alexander drew up the light-armed troops. A similar distinction exists with irportpos, vo-repos, va-raros, and povos, and their adverbs. Thus irparrov p.ev e'SoKptJe TTO\VV xpovov, flra t\(( Toui8(, at first he wept a long time, then he spoke as follows (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 2 ). But npartpos wpdnT) avTov ff fKflvos e'fte, / saw him before he saw me (Plat. Rep. 336 a ), here irportpov would be expected. 1320. NOTE. With the verbs pew, flow, and jrvfw, blow, the ideas greatly or strongly, richly, against, referring to wind or water, are expressed by the adjectives ^u'yas, TTOA.VS, a#ovos, ei/avn'ov. K.pr)vr) a(p6ovos p(ov rov 2Tvp.(pd\iov KOI SwKparjjc roi' "A^euoi/, gtvovs ovras v ra>v 'A&ji/atW, of us the Athenians. ^Y/xay TOVS o~o dtjpita, to a flatterer, a terrible beast (Plat. Phaedr. 24O' b ). Els IltXraf, iroXiv OIKOV- fj*vijv, to Peltas, an inhabited city (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 10 ). 'H i^/xtrtpa n-dXtr, 17 KOIVT) K(iTa(pvyr) ru>v 'EXXi^i/eoi/, our city, the common refuge of the Greeks (Aeschin. 3, 134). 'O OdvaTOt rvyxdvfi &>v ftvotv irpayi*.dToiv 8id\v(Tts, TTJS ^vx^s KOI TOV 0-faft.aTos, death is a separation of two things, the soul and the body (Plat. Gorg. 524 b ). 1328 APPOSITION 31 1323. NOTE. An adjective with the article may be an appositive to a personal pronoun expressed or implied. 'H raXmi/ eya>, I, the wretched one (Soph. El. 1138). 'O T\r)fj.a>v...TJKa>, I wretched one, have come (Eur. And. 1070). Tbv ao-e/S?) pt, the impious, myself (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1441). 'Opas /*f rbv fi0\tov, thou seest me the wretched one (Eur. Hipp. 1395). 2v 6 irpta-fivraTos, you, the eldest (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 17 ). 1324. NOTE. An appositive belonging to two or more nouns is generally in the plural or dual. "YTTVOS TTOVOS re, Kvpioi vv(ap.6Tai, sleep and toil, powerful conspirators {Aesch. Bum. 127). Qdppos KOI (poftov nK.(ra.v, oXt'yai 8e Trfpif/a-av, most of the houses had Jallen, but a few remained (Thuc. 1, 89 4 ). OVTOI aXXos aXXa Xeyet, these men say different things (Xen. Anab. 2, I 15 ). At Te'^vai TO avrfjs eKcurrq tpyov (pyd(Tai, the arts do each one its own work (Pkt. Rep. 346 d ). 1327. NOTE. An adjective implying a genitive may have a geni- tive in apposition to it. 'A.0rjvalos &v, TroXewr rrjs p.(yi(TTr)s, being (a citizen) of Athens, the greatest city (Plat. Apol. 29 d ). 1328. NOTE. 1. In Homer a noun or pronoun de- noting a person often has an appositive denoting a part. ATJIOTTITTIV ovTap.ov, he wounded Deiopites in the shoulder (II. 11, 420). KaS 8* a^or o I XVTO pvpiov o(pda\poi(ri.v, immeasurable sadness o'erspread his eyes, lit. him the eyes (II. 20, 282). 'AXX' ov/c 'A.Tpei8r] 'Aya/ie'/xvoi/i fjv8ai>f dvpto, but he was not pleasing to the spirit of Agamemnon, son of Atreus, lit. to Agamemnon to his heart (II. 1, 24). "ABos rt [uv IKTO 6viJ.6v, and satiety came to his heart, lit. to him, to his heart (II. 11, 88). 2. For 6 8e' followed by an appositive in Homer, see 1369. 32 THE ADJECTIVE 1329 1329. NOTE. An appositive may be made to agree in gender with its subject. "HXiof irdvTov Xapir poTOTos, the sun, the brightest (sc. thing) of all things (Xen. Mem. 4, 7 7 )." Here Xa/iTrporaroi/ might have been used, conforming to the gender of Trdvrav. 1330. NOTE. 1. When a noun is in apposition to a whole sentence, it is in the nominative if it refers in a general way to the subject ; and in the accusative if it denotes the result of an action. Keii'Tat irffrovTfs, TTICTTIS ov crfUKpfr rrdXtt, they lie prostrate no small ground of confidence to the city (Eur. Rhes. 415). EvSat/iovo/^y, purdbv rjoivTatv Aoya>i>, mayest thou be happy, a reward for the sweetest words (Eur. El. 231). 2. Such expressions appositive to a whole sentence are : TO KepaT7/s 7roTa/Aos, the river Euphrates. Names of moun- tains, islands, and lakes (seldom cities and other places) may have the same position if they are of the same gender as the appositive. To n^Xtov opos, Mount Pelion. At KvK\d8(s vr/i> dyadu>v dv8pS>v, etc. A.VTT/ f] yvvf), this woman, ravrrjs TTJS yvvaiKOs, ravrrj rfj yvvaiKi, ravras rhs yvva'iicas, etc. Hapd8fi iroiflv, it is the business of a right-minded man and woman to act thus (Xen. Oec. 7, 15). 1335. NOTE. Avo, two, is often used with a noun in the plural. nal8fs 8vo, two children (Xen. Anab. 1, I 1 ). ^ 1336. In poetry an attributive adjective may agree with the real rather than the grammatical gender of its noun. *t'Xe TKVOV, dear child (H. 22, 84). *ii (piXrar', 2> Trfpicra-d rlpr/dels renvov, 0, dearest child, thou prized above all things (Eur. Tro. 735). So when the noun forms a periphrasis with the genitive with a genitive ; as (p i X r a r A-lyio-Oov jSia, dearest majesty of Aegisthus (Aesch. Cho. 893). ADJECTIVES AND PARTICIPLES USED AS NOUNS 1337. Adjectives and participles are often used as nouns, generally with the article. 'O (ro(p6s, the wise man. Oi dyadoi, the good. *i\oy, a friend. KaXi7, a handsome woman. T>v KOK&V, of the bad. Tols ois, to the wise. To p.ti>, the speaker. TS>v dfjivvovfjifvwv, of those defending. Oi ypa^dpfvot 'StoKpdrrjv, the accusers of Socrates. To \ey6fitvov (the thing said), the'common saying. Ta Atov0o- t a, the festival of Dionysius. See also 12701300, 22412245, and 1301. DEGREES OF COMPARISON 1338. The positive degree in Greek corresponds to the positive degree in English. But with adjectives and adverbs denoting 3 34 THE ADJECTIVE 1339 non- fitness, nan-ability, disproportion, and the like, the positive joined to the infinitive (with or without wcrre or o>p \lfv\pov SxTTt \oiHTacr6ai (V Tro\(p.io>v, we are too few to get the better of the enemy (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 15 ). Tairfivr) vp.Stv f) 8idvoia (yuaprfpt'iv a tyvatrf, your mind is too prostrated to pen* ivre in what you have resolved (Thuc. 2, 61 2 ). Maupbv av eo; ypdfaiv, it would take too long to write (Xen. Ages. 7, 1). So also with nouns ; as yepa>v p.tv fKflnts wrrrt e'/xol fioyddv, that person is too old a man to help me (Antiph. 5, 7'J)- rpavs d, OK irpaypMra TTjXiKavra rrpa, you are too old a woman to do such great things (Plutarch, Pericles, 10). 1339. NOTE. Observe also the idiomatic combination of an adjec- tive with TroXvs. IloXXot KOI dyadol avdpts, many good men. 1340. The comparative degree corresponds to the comparative in English. Used alone, it often expresses excess or tendency, and may be rendered by too, very, rather, somewhat. Mi7 dypoiKOTtpov rj TO dXydts fiirdv, lest it be too (rather) rude to tell the truth (Plat. Gorg. 462 e ). reXoiorepov, rather (somewhat) funny (Plat. Apol. 30*). II/\f (to Xe'XfKrat, too much has been said (Eur. Ale. 706). 1341. The comparative degree is followed by the genitive or by ff, than. 'Eyo> vfompos dpj. Tfpt>s flp.i r) irv, I am younger than you. &of3i>vp.f()a TOVS OTrXfrdf /laXXoi/ f/ TOVS TreXrdtTTaf or T(pov T) f'yv T) Tota>i>8t ((radrjaav, they have been saved from greater dangers than these (Thuc. 7, 77 1 ). TaOra rois oTrXfrat? ov\ fja-a-ov r rf/s dptT?)s ( = r) ds rfjv dp(TTjv), to look at skill more than at courage (Aristotle, Pol. 8, 9 3 ). When fj would be followed by any other case than the nominative or accusa- tive without a preposition, as in the last two examples, the genitive is less common. 1342. NOTE. For brevity the genitive denoting the possessor instead of the thing possessed is sometimes placed after the compara- tive. 1347 THE ADJECTIVE 35 Eyo> oiKtav KKTr}fj.ai ov \fifj(o crov = rj v '\6r)vaifj.r}<;, Kaipov, TOV fjifrpiov, TOV StWros, and the like, must usually be rendered by periphrasis. npo TOV Kaipov irpo'iovTts, advancing further than was advisable (Xen. Anab. 4, 3' ). Kperrroi' etrrt TOV \6yov TO KO\\OS TT/S yvvaiKos, the beauty of the. woman is greater than can be told = above description (Xen. Mem. 3, II 1 ). Mflov f\7ri8os, above hope. Compare the Latin majus spe. 1344. NOTE. The comparative, usually with auro?, is followed by the genitive of a reflexive pronoun (never r/) when anything is com- pared with itself under different circumstances. 'AvbpfioTepos yiyvtTai avTof avTov, he becomes more manly than he ivan before (Plat. Rep. 411). Similarly with the superlative, see 1357. 1345. NOTE. A comparative followed by ?} Kara, (sometimes 17 with an accusative denotes more than accords or is fitting to the matter. "Erv^e (TffivoTepas rj Kara avdpa>irov Ta(pijs, he obtained a burial more magnificent than that of a mere man (Xen. Hell. 3, 3 1 ). 'Ei/SeeoTe'pwr ....... ^ rrpbs TTJV fovo-iat>, less than accorded with the resources (Thuc. 4, 39 2 ). Compare Latin quam pro. 1346. NOTE. After the adverbs 7rA.eW or TrAeiv, more, and and fj.fiov, less, r/ is sometimes omitted before a numeral without change of case. Hefji\^co opvtis Tr\(lv ef-dKcxriovs TOV dpidpov, I will send birds more than si; hundredin number (Ar. Av. 1251). Instead of these adverbs, the corresponding adjectives in the plural, with or without 17, or with the genitive are used. *ApKSey KOI 'A^aioi- TrXet'ouf f) TerpaKKr \i\ioi KOI Trei/rnKOfrtot, more than 4500 Arcadians and Achaeans (Xen. Anab. 6, 2 lfi ). "Er;; ytyovtas wXtiw ^8o/ijjer, generals more numerous than good (Ar. Ach. 1078). 2vvTOfj.a>Tpov r) (ra(f)i(rT(p<>v irfpl UVTU>V SmXt^^j/nt, to discourse more briefly than clearly about them (Isoc. 6, 24). 36 THE ADJECTIVE 1348 1348. NOTE. In Homer and Herodotus sometimes, in the Attic poets rarely, /xaXAoi/ is omitted (especially with (3ov\o(j.a.i) before /. BovXo/i' e-ycb Xaoi> croov epntvai fj a7roXeV0eu, / ici-sh the people to be safe rather than perish (II. 1, 117). 'E/xoi niKpos rtdvijKtv tj Kfivois y\vKvs, his death has been more bitter to me than sweet to them (Soph. Aj. 966) ; Hdfc. 3, 124 4 ; Eur. Andr. 350. 1349. NOTE. Instead of % or the genitive, dvri or Trpd with the genitive, or -n-apd with the accusative, may be used with the compara- tive. AvKovpyos KaT(ipydv napd rf)v Ka6f(TT7)Kv~iav capav, a cold more severe than (lit. in comparison with) the actual season (Thuc. 4, 6 1 ). 1350. NOTE. The second part of the comparison may be omitted. Ot faXriovts , the better ( = those better than the others). "A/mi/ov eWi -rravri vtro Btiov Koi (ppovipov apxffrdai, it is better for every one to be governed by a divine and intelligent being (Plat. Rep. 590). Note also vtutrtpov (in poetry also vtov), something new, often in a bad sense, as in Plat. Prot. 310 b ; also ov x e ~ l P v (Plat- Phaedo, 105*). 1351. NOTE. When the clause containing paXXov is negative, y ov may follow in place of simple ^. Ov Trepl TO>V fp.a>v ISiwv p. a X X o v Tiptopr/a'co'df Ho\VK\((i rf ov % virtp tp.5>v avriav, you will punish Polycles less for my private interests than for your own good (Dem. 50, 66). 1352. NOTE. For /xSAXov, we sometimes find TrAe'ov () and TO TrAe'ov, especially in Thucydides. Mrv oXXwi/ np\ iro\\ov iroiov,. esteem highly those who have judgment more than other people (Isoc. 2, 53).. A' TO 7r\(ov % p.a\\ov rov SeovTos, more bashful than they ought to be (Pkt. Gory. 487"). Similarly /uaXio-ra with the superlative, 1365. 1355. The superlative degree corresponds to the superlative in English ; as 6 /SeXrtcrTo? TTUVTWV rwv iro\lTv, where he is at his best (Eur. Frag. 183). See a similar use with com- paratives 1344. 1358. NOTE. The superlative may be strengthened by (n-apa) TTO\V, much, also by TroAAw, ^a*po>, by far. IIoXv KaXXioroy, much the handsomest (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 2 ). IIoXX< KaXXto-Tos, fjMKpm KaXXtoroy, by far the handsomest. Also by (TO) rravra ; n-oXXdi/, old and new Ion. ; /*eya, poetic ; TrXeioroi/ and /xeyiaTov , poetic. 1359. The superlative, strengthened by a prefixed &> ra irptiyfjMTci ov% oia ^fXrtcrra fv Tr\ noXti ovra, I see that our affairs in the city are Hot in the very best condition (Lys. 13, 23). 1361. NOTE. The poets sometimes use oo-ov and oVws ; as oo-ov ra^io-ra, as swiftly as possible (Eur. Ehes. 672) ; OTTWS aptora, as well as possible (Soph. Phil. 627). 1362. NOTE. Sometimes fuller expressions are formed with ws or 17 or oVos, OTTOO-OS, seldom with OTTTJ or OTTOIOS (never with on) and a verb or expression of possibility. AiijyTjtTOfjiai vp.lv a> s civ 8vva>fj.a.i 8ia ^Spa^vraTcai', I will discuss in the briefest terms I am able (Isoc. 21, 1). 'JZnopfvovro $ t8vv avro rdxtrrra, they proceeded as fast qs they were able (Xen. Anab 6, 3 21 ). *H-yf o-rpaTiai> IT \ ( t'errouf f8vvdfj.rjv t 1 brought as many (allies) as I could (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 a ). 'YirurxvovvTai jBoijddv Tpaira) OTTOIW &v 8vva>vrai to-^vporaro), they promise to help in- whatever strongest way they may be able (Thuc. 5, 47 y ). 1363. NOTE. The numeral efs (usually in the expression Ts wrjp), is sometimes used with the superlative for greater emphasis. 'E^T/j/ K.6pco dijo-avpovs xpvvov TrXet'trTouy tvi ye dv-8pl tv TW O*KO> KCira- df rots- ir\(lv irrirfvs, being the best of good horsemen (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 1S ). A stronger form than this is obtained by doubling the superlative, as tv rots /wytWois ptyurrov, greatest among the greatest (Plat. Cratyl. 427'). A less emphatic form is made by doubling the positive, aa T dpprfTdels vovcrov dva crrparov p ov Xco-a), but I will not free her (II. 1, 29). Tov 8' ocXve (polftos 'ATToXXwi/, and Phoebus Apollo heard him (II. 1, 43). T Hoy 6 TO) TToXept^e, while he fought with him (II. 15, 539). As a relative pronoun : ^rret'X^o-fv p.vdov, 6 817 r(T(\(cr/j.fvos ecrriv, he uttered a threat (lit. threatened a speech) which is now accomplished (II. 1, 388). Tev^ea 8' ffvdpie, TCI ol Trope XaXxtos -Apr)s, he seized the armour which brazen Mars had given him (H. 7, 146). 'Ae'$Xovs TroXXovy, TOVS ^airjufs fireiprja-avr' 'OSvcrfjos, many contests at which the Phaeacians tried Ulysses (Od. 8, 23). IIao-ij> rot ~I\i(a e'yyyaao-tv, to all who are born in Ilium (II. 6, 493). 1368. NOTE. With this use of the article compare the uses of the German article der, die, das, which may be employed as an emphatic demonstrative (its original meaning) ; as " der mann " = " that man " ; and as an ordinary relative pronoun, as " der mann den ich gesehen habe," "the man whom I saw". 1369. In Homer the article used with a noun is usually a demonstrative emphasizing it; in very many cases the noun is an appositive to the article (especially to o Se). *E8o 1 is equivalent to therefore (so in a few places in Tragedy, as Aesch. Pro. 237 ; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 510) ; sometimes to then. The accusative TO is sometimes used adverbially, wherefore, on which ac- count ; as TO KOL K\tuov 'A.rpi8ao nor acrm'Sa Trai/Tocr" icrr]v, oiS" tppr)tv xaXnov, di/e- yvaptpdri 8e ol ai'x/Liij ai/, 6V o5 ; and in certain conjunctional expressions, as eV w, while, Is 6 (evsov, axpi ov, ftfXP 1 ^) un tili till, f ov, since. 3. In Doric and Aeoiic the T- forms of the article are sometimes found as relatives. II. THE ARTICLE IN ATTIC GREEK (A) USE AS PRONOUN OR DEMONSTRATIVE 1377. In Attic prose, the pronominal use of the article is re- tained in the following combinations : 42 THE ARTICLE 187S 1. 'O f4v...6 Be (in all cases and numbers), the one... the other. Ol fjLtv avrStv (To(vov, ol 8* fo-v iro\ta>v at /MI/ TvpawovvTai, at 8 o~T)fj.oKpaTovvTs...'A0T)vaiovs firrjydyfTO' ol 8* rfkQov, Tnaros called in Athenians ; and they came (Thuc. 1, 104 1 ). 3. Kal TOV, teal TTTJV, as accusative subject of the infinitive. Kat TOV diroKpivao-dai Xe'yerat, and it is said that he answered (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2 13 ). Kal TOV Kf\evo-ai 8ovvai (sc. Xf'yerai), and (it is said) he commanded him to give it (Xen. Cyr. 1 , 3 M ). 4. Tov Kal TOV, this man and that ; TO real TO, this and that ; TO. Kal ra, these and those ; ra r) rd, these or those. \\iKvovp.ai a>f TOV not TOV, I come to this man and that one (Lys. 1, 23). *E8 yap TO KOI TO Trotfjcrat, KOI ro pfj iroifjo-ai, for we ought to have done this and that, and not to have done the other (Dem. 9, 68). Ta KOI Ta irtirovdas (Dem. 21, 141). 5. Adverbially: TO /j,ev...rb Be or TC* p,ev...ra Be, partly... partly (Plat. Symp. 21 l a ; Xen. Anab. 5, 6 24 ) ; similarly TOUTO fj-ev ...TOUTO 8e(1475). So also: Ti) ftfv TT) &(, here there, on the one hand on. the other hand, partly....... partly .(Pkt. Leg. 839 b ; Xen. Anab. 4, 8 10 ). IIpo TOV or irporov, before this, formerly (Plat. Symp. 173* ; Ar. Nub. 4). Tw, therefore (Plat. Theaet. 179 d ), very rare in prose (see 1370). 1378. NOTE. With prepositions, the expressions under 1377, 1 and 2 are usually inverted. 'Ei/ i*v TOIS o-vpjfxovavfu*, tv 8e TOIS ov, in some things we agree, in others not (Plat. Phaedr. 263"). 1379. NOTE. If o /V 6 8e refer to no particular person, ris may be added to make the expression more indefinite. *EAryoi/ ToO KOpow 6 p.tv TIS TTJV cro(f)iai>, 6 8< Tqv KapTtplav, o 8f TTJV jrpaoTTjra, 6 8t TIS KOI TO icaXXoy, they ivere speaking, one of Cyrus' irMom, another of his fortitude, another of his mildness, yet another of his beauty (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 41 ). 1380. NOTE. Barely the article alone is used pronominally before a relative. fori "urov, he aims at that which is equal (Plat. Phaedo, 75 b ). 1389 THE ARTICLE 43 1381. NOTE. Sometimes the singular of 6 p.fv...b Se means one part . . . the other part. 'H a\\rj crTparih 8iya 17 p.fv irpbs rr]v iroXiv e'^wpotu/, 17 8 Trpbsrb (rrav- po)fMi, the rest of the army advanced in two divisions, one part towards the city,, the other towards the stockade (Thuc. 6, 100 1 ). 1382. NOTE. To 8c, without a preceding TO /*/, is sometimes used adverbially to introduce an opposing statement, especially in Plato. Olovrai p.e (rofi ro> ovn 6 debs cro(pbs flvai, they think I am wise ; but in truth God only is wise (Plat. Apol. 23 a ). 1383. NOTE. '0 /xe'v is occasionally found without 6 Se following, as in Hdt. 1, 59 1 . 1384. NOTE. Often (6) /xev is wanting and 6 8e follows. Avo Xe'yo) fl8r) Kivrjaecos, d\\oiV yvvaiKtHv, of the women. Tmy TroAeirn', to the- cities. 2. The article may be used in a generic sense, marking a singu- lar noun as representative, or a plural noun as the totality, of a class. Adjectives arid participles are particularly used in this way. The generic article must often be left untranslated. 'O avdpdtrros, man. Oi ytpovrts, the aged. 'O 6s, a wise man. Ol. 44 THE ARTICLE 1390 ayadol avQpwiroi, good men. Ol avBptloi, the brave. C O ovXd/xfi>os, any one icho wishes. 1390. NOTE. At the beginning of a clause, the article is some- times separated from its noun by p.iv, of, TC, ye, yap, 817, ow ; and by TIS in Hdt. Twi> TIS IltpV oXXo>i/ 'EXXiji/wi/ , etre XP*1 KdKtav tivopa, I see a man. But opa> av8pa nva, I see a certain man, or simply / see a man. (c) USE OF ARTICLE IN FORMING SUBSTANTIVES 1394. The article often unites with other parts of speech to form substantives (12701301). 1. With adjectives and participles (1271). ol TrXovo-tot, the rich. Ol napovrfs, those present. 2. With possessive pronouns (1274). Ol aoret, those in the city. Ta irpbs rbv iroXep-ov, the things (needful) for the war. Ol 7rt TW 8ei Ktpcu, those on the right wing. 7. The infinitive which is a verbal noun (2185) very often has the neuter article. To /3a8itiv, walking. To fiftevcu, the knowing. 8. The neuter TO is prefixed to any word or part of speech con- sidered merely as an expression. T6 \eyti, the word "\eyti". T6 av 6 po> TT os, the word " av0pa>nos "- To "EXXay, the word ""EXXar". Similarly with a whole sentence, as TO yvStdi a-avrov, the saying "know thyself". 1395. NOTE. For the great variety of meanings of the neuter article with an attribute, see 1281 1301. (D) INSERTION AND OMISSION OF THE ARTICLE 1396. The article is inserted in the following cases : 1. Generally with names of countries, as these are adjectives by origin. 'H 'EXXar, Greece. 'H 'Amur), Attica. Also names of nations ; as oi "EXX^ves, the Greeks. 2. With a cardinal number : (a) When it denotes a part or fraction of some number. TWJ/ irevTf rcls dvo /ioi'par, two-fifths, lit. the two parts of the five (Thuc. 1, 10*). (b) With an approximate or round number, especially after d//, v Tpto-^iX/wv, more than three thousand talents (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1 s3 ). (c) When it denotes a number in the abstract. Ta Sis TTtvTf 8fKa ( TO nvp, the (particular) occasion tests friends 46 THE ARTICLE 1397 as fire does gold (Men. Mon. 276). Oi TrXovtnoi rot? xP^f iaa ' lv fu>vovvTai TOVS Kivbivovs, the rich buy off dangers for money (Lys. 24, 17). 5. With appositions, especially if the apposition distinguishes the person from another" of the same name. 2(i\r)i>bs 6 fjMvns, Silanus the seer (i.e. no other Silanus) ; but SaXrjvbs p-avris, Silanus, a seer. 6. An apposition to the personal pronoun of the first or second person has the article, if the same apposition would retain it as a third person. 'H/iftj 01 (rrpaTrjyoi. ^dofjifda rots y(y(vrjfji(voi.s, we generals are vexed at the occurrences (Xeii. Anab. 5, 7 20 )- 7. When it has distributive force, where we use each or a. Tpt'a Tjpu.o'apfiKa rov P.TJVOS T, Zeus, in whose temple. 9. A noun qualified by a demonstrative takes the article. OVTOS 6 dvrjp, this man. See 1479 1483. 1397. NOTE. Observe : TroAAoi, many, ol vo\\.oi, the many, the great mass ; oXtyot, few, ol oXt'yot, the few, the minority, the oligarchs ; ol irXeiovcs, the majority; TrXflcrroi, the most numerous part; oAAot, others ; ol dAAoi, the others, the rest ; TO TTO\V, the great part. 1398. NOTE. Names of nations denoting the people or state as a whole often omit the article ; as in Thuc. 1, 144 2 . 1399. NOTE. (a) Occasionally the article is prefixed to an inter- rogative pronoun when the pronoun refers to an object before mentioned or understood. TpvyaZos. 7ra 4>at8p, ovvafuBa npivav. *. Ta fro I a; Soc. Now then, Phaedrus, we can decide about that conclusion. Ph. About what conclusion f v, a river, Cydnus by name, of the breadth of two plethra (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 123 ). nX)$oy if Sttr^rXtoi, about two thousand in number (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 2 ). Oi (pvo-fi do-^i/6 eVfXfj/ra, and the third year nf the war ended (Thuc. 2, 103 2 ). Eif 'la-a-ovt, TTJJ KtXtKtar f 8" qv TO \u>piov, the place was an emporium (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 6 ). *E<^7 Tr)v yttapyiav TUV oXXwi/ T(\V>V p.ijT(pa KOI rpoifrov fivai, he said that agri- culture is the mother and the nurse of the other arts (Xen. Oec. 5, 17). 1402. NOTE. Observe that possessive pronouns, comparatives and superlatives, and ordinal numbers omit the article when they are- predicate. \aip ffjtas trcupos %v, Chaerephon was my friend (Plat. Apol. 21*). For 6 avros, see 1423, 2. 1403. NOTE. When the predicate refers to a particular individual' or a class, it has the article. 'AvfitaXovv Kvpov TOV tifpyfTrfv, TOV av8pa TOV ayaQav, they called Cyrus the (real, true) benefactor, the (really, truly) good man (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 4 ). EtVl 8' OVTM nl fioirrif TA\r)d('s, and are these those (whom I mean) who know the truth ? (Plat. Hipp. Maj. 284 e ). 1404. NOTE. So also the predicate participle takes the article: when it denotes the same particular individual as the subject. *Eyo> /u f> tipat (Tttfav, I am your preserver (Xen. Mem. 2, 7 14 )- 1406 THE ARTICLE 49 1405. NOTE. When two or more substantives are connected by and, and the first has the article, it may be omitted with the others. Toiiy 8' dypovs TOVS eavrov /cat oiKiag, his own lands and houses (Thuc. 2, 13 1 ). (E) POSITION OF ATTRIBUTES AND PREDICATE-ADJECTIVES RELATING TO NOUNS WHICH HAVE THE ARTICLE 1406. 1. An attributive adjective qualifying a noun with the article usually stands between the article and the noun, as in English ; or it stands with greater emphasis after the noun with the article repeated. In the latter case, the first article is some- times omitted. Thus : o dyaOos dvrjp, or 6 dvr/p 6 dyaOos, or dvrjp o dyaOos, the good man. These three positions of the article are termed attributive positions. To 0/7X1; yevos, the female sex (Plat. Leg. 805 d ). Tou? KVVUS TOVS xa^firovs r savage dogs (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 24 ). 'A.vOpa>Trois rots dyadols (Xen. Mem. 2, I 32 ). 2. The same rule applies to all attributes (1207, 1265), to the possessive pronoun, and to dependent genitives of pronouns (except of personal pronouns). Ot irapovres TroXZrcu or 01 TroXireu 01 napovres, the present citizens. 'H TOU irarpos OLKLO. or f) oiKia 17 TOV narpos, the father's house. 'H ava> rro\is or 17 TroXts- 17 avu>, the upper city. 'H ev Mapadwvi pax 1 ! or ^ M^X 7 ? ^ e> " Mapa$a>m, the battle of Marathon. 'H TOV irarpos olx.Ha. or f] oi/a'a 17 TOV naTpos, the father's house. 'O tfios TTCLTIJP or 6 irarfip 6 e/toy, my father. 'H f/xauroi) p-rjTrjp or TJ [J.f)Tr)p rf ffaavTov, my own mother. Ta TOVTOV xpf)fj.a.Ta or ra xpnf JLara r " TOVTOV, this man's money. 'H ovop.aofi.fvr) dv8pda, the so-called bravery (Plat. Phaedo, 68). Tots- TWV 'A0r)valo>v (TTpaT^yo'is, with the generals of the Athenians (Thuc. 4, 132'). 'H TOV vTTtp T>V 'HXetwi/ opovs itopv(pr), the summit of the hill which is over the Eleians (Xen. Hell. 7, 4 13 ). To oTrX'Tt/cov TO ye ra>v 'EXX^vwi/, the heavy-armed troops of the Greeks (Plat. Lach. 191 b ). TAy 'EXevo-Tfi if pm, in the temple at Eleusis (Lys. 6, 4). 'Ev 777 di/a/3ao- T!J ptTa Kvpov, in the expedition with Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 5, I 1 ). Oi Xtot TO T* l\os TrepteiXor TO KCLIVOV, the Chians throw down their new wall (Thuc. 4, 51 1 ). 'Ev TO> np6o-0v Xoyw, in the previous narrative (Xen. Anab. 5, I 1 ). ToC TOT* (3ao-tXwr r of the then king (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6"). Tf)y ot/caSe 68ov, the homeward route (Xen. Anab. 3, I 2 ). ToC ev AeX^otj ^p/7o-T/7piou, of the oracle in Delphi (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2 19 ). 'Awo 0ci\do-o-r)s TIJS lu>v(av, from the Ionic sea (Hdt. 5, 50 1 ). 'ETTJ IwTfs Tqv 3(vo(p5>vTos, going to Xenophon tent (Xen. Anab. 6, 4 1W ). 4 50 THE ARTICLE 1407 vftpts HOI fi fjftfTtpd vTro^id, their insolence and our suspicion (Xen. Anab. 3, l n ). Tov ftiov TOV tftavTov, my own life (Plat. Gorg. 488"). 1407. NOTE. Several articles may thus stand together. To rrfs riitv na\\a>v ^vx^f oft.pM.Ta, the eyes of the soul of the many (Plat. Soph. 264*). Insertion of a genitive is avoided (except occasionally in later writers) if similar forms of the article would thus meet ; thus, not irtpi TOV TOV ftiov TfXovs, but nfpi TOV TtXovs TOV /Si'ov, concerning the end of life. 1408. NOTE. The attributive genitive of a noun (but not the partitive genitive) may have either the attributive or (less often) the predicate position (1415). 'H TOV iraTpos olicid or fj olxid rj TOV rraTpos, and 17 otKid TOV irarpos or TOV irarpbs rj oiKid, the fattier' s house. Tqv TO>V fiapftdpwv (piXldv, the friendship of the barbarians (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 8 ) Tyv Qvyartpa TTJV fiao-iX(a>s, the king's daughter (Xen. Anab. 2, 4 ? ). 'Errl O-KT)VT)V lovTts TTJV Sfvo

vTos, going to the tent of Xenoplion (Xen. Anab. 6, 4 19 ). Tou KVK\OV f) ntpioSos, the length of the circle (Xen. Anab. 3, 4"). T^ reXfvrj} TOV ftiov, at the end of life (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 30 ). TTJV ye opdorr/Ta TT)S ^ovXjjo-ewr, the righteousness of the purpose (Plat. Leg. 668). Aia TOV oXedpov T>V crvoTpartwrcoi', by the death of their fellow- soldiers (Xen. Anab. 1, 2*). Sometimes the attributive genitive in predicate position is rather partitive in meaning. 1409. NOTE. Occasionally a relative or temporal clause is inserted as an attribute. Tfjs oid nap' fffjuv eo-ri noXiTtids, of such a state as there is among us (Dem. 19, 186). Oi oloiirtp isftfly avftpts, men such as you (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2 s ). Tr)y OTTOV ftov\o-6( o\iyapxids, of an oligarchy wherever you please (Dem. 22, 52 ; 24, 163). 1410. NOTE. 1. The partitive genitive (1619, 6) of a noun is not an attribute, and therefore does not have attributive position ; it takes the predicate position (1415). TQJV ' ABrjiKiiui' ol ytpatTaTM (commonly) or 01 ytpaiTUToi TO>V 'Adtjvaitov, the oldest of the Athenians. Toii> 'A.dr)t>aioiv 6 S^^tof or o orjp.os T>V 'Adrjvatiav, the common people of the Athenians (i.e., in distinction to the upper classes). But s o TV t A.6r)VuKparov( K/>(iroi>f or SOXC/KITODI- TJ <^>(Xocro<^>ta, the philosophy of Socrates, i.e., nothing else of him, the genitive being here partitive. 2. Yet the partitive genitive is occasionally found in attributive position. 1412 THE ARTICLE 51 ToT? evddo'e ijp.(ai> d^Kovpfvois, to those of you here who were being injured (Thuc. 6, 87 2 ). To 8' avr&v fueyio-rov , the great part of it, i.e., of the palace (Hdt. 1, 98 2 ). Tots 'EXXqvcoi' TrXouo-twraroif, to the richest of the Greeks (Thuc. 1, 25'). 1411. NOTE. 1. When a noun with the article is qualified by two or more words which have attributive position, they may all stand between the article and its noun, or each may take an article and stand in attributive position. "fjirffj-nov els ras oXXay 'ApKabiKus TroXeiy, they sent to the other Arcadian cities (Xen. Hell. 7, 4 38 ). 'Ei> rjj dp^aia rr/ ^ere'pa aXXo/ TOV ep.ov fiiov yiyva)o-Kiv, to know my other life (Lys. 24, 5). Ta Ttixn TO eavrwv TCI paupa, their own long walls (Thuc. I, 108 2 ). 'O TOKOS 6 tyyeios 6 tfaicTos, the interest on the land at the rate of one-sixth of the principal (Dem. 34, 24). &IHTIS f) dvdpanrivr) f) drjXfta, the human female character (Plat. Rep. 452 e ). Ets TO p.tya nXolov TO &OIVIKIKOV, into the large Phoenician ship (Xen. Oec. 8, 11). Tfjs (v 2aXa/iIW irpos TOV H(po~T]v vavfiaxias p,ep.vf)o~dat, to remember the naval battle at tfalamis against the Persian (A.eschin. 2, 74). 2. Occasionally one qualifying expression stands between the article and the noun, while another follows the noun without the article. Toy avTov (StoKtv dypbv 'E X e v V (v Ttj 'Ao-ia TroXewi/ 'EXX^i/t'Swv, those (coming) from the Greek cities in Asia (Xen. Hell. 4, 3 15 ). Mlp,ovp.fvoi TTJV (p.r)v 8vvafuv n-epi TTJV vp.T(pav y t.v e a- iv, imitating my power in your creation (Plat. Tim. 41). 'H vvv SfjifTepa opyrj es MvTiXrjvalovs, your present anger against the Mytilenaeans (Thuc. 3, 44 7 ). Tijs TU>V ywainwv (piXids irpos TOVS av8pas, the love of wives to their husbands (Xen. Hier. 3, 3). 1412. NOTE. 1. With nouns denoting an action or condition, an attribute consisting of a preposition and its case sometimes follows the noun without repeating the article. 'H gvyicofjiio'f) fK TWV aypu>v es TO wrrv, the gathering from the country into the city (Thuc. 2, 52 1 ). 2. Words qualifying a participle or adjective are often not inserted between the article and these words, but are made to precede the article ; this occurs generally for emphasis, but sometimes from negligent construction. nXet'ou? (o-ovTai i> p. a s ol t\(yxovT(s, there will be more accusers of j/oit (Plat. Apol. 39 C ). IlX7pft>o-aj>Tas Tt TOS XOITT&S T&V vtiav, manning their still remaining ships (Thuc. 7, 72 :t ). 52 THE ARTICLE 1413 1413. NOTE. 1. When an attributive participle with words de- pending on it qualifies a noun with the article, either the dependent words or the participle may follow the noun. 'O icaTiA?70o>f KivSvvos rr\v iroXiv, the danger which has overtaken the city (Dem. 18, 220). Tov.pfo vra irorapbv Sta rf)s jroXtcoj, the river which runs through the city (Xen. Hell. 5, 2 1 ). A i vno TOVTOV ^\a iTTTrta, with his horse sweating (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 1 ). 'Hyovp.(vot auroi/o/x rv, being leaders of allies who were independent (Thuc. 1, 97 1 ). For other examples, see 1310, 1314, 1316 ; compare also 1317 1321. 1416. 1. The adjectives ax/>os, /te'o-09 and lo-^aro?, when in predi- cate position, mean the top or point, the middle, and the last or end of the noun they qualify. To opos anpov or anpov TO opos, the top or point of the hill. 'H x e 'P fixpa or itKfiii f] x fl 'p> the point of the hand ; but TO linpov opos, the high hill (there being others). 'H vf/a-os /ie'cn; or /xt'orj rj vijo-oy, the middle of the island ; but q pto-1) vyo-os, the middle island (between other islands). To opoj to-^arov or to-xarov TO npos, the end of the mountain ; but TO (O-XO.TOV opos, the last mountain (Thuc. 3, 107 4 ) ; Xen. Yen. 3, 4 ; Dem. 29, 12 ; Hdt. 6, 101 ; Xen. 1, 8; Plat. Phaedo, 109* ; Thuc. 4, 35 1 . Compare the Latin summux, medius, extremus. 2. OS? (strengthened also aTrds o-u'/xTrds), all, usually has the pre- dicate position. llnTOf 6 dvfjp or o dvr)p OVTOS, this man. Similarly OUT-OS when means it self; as avrbs 6 dvyp or 6 dvyp avros, the man himself. See also 1479, 1489. 1417. NOTE. The neuter ij/uc, half, as a noun, often stands without the article, ^/ucru TOV o-Tparew/taTos, half of the army. The half of a number of persons is usually expressed by 01 7//Aurs, ai ^/uo-eiat with the partitive genitive (1416, 5). T&v oTTi(r6o(pv\dii(ov TOVS r)(j.iv nprotv TOVS ijpVety, they sent half the loaves (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 4 ) ; but aprwi/ i^/xio-ca, half-loaves (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 a ). PRONOUNS PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS 1418. The nominative of the personal pronouns is only used for emphasis; when not emphatic, it is omitted. 54 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS 1419 'Er fl ft t is tpol OVK i6t\trt nti6r6ni ovot fjrr#ai, 'y w avv Vtt.lv since you do not \vi*h to obey me or to follow me, I will follow you (Xen. Anab. 1, 3" ; 2, l u ). 1419. 1. The forms c/iov, c/iot', e/Ae' are used instead of the enclitics pov, /xot, /*, whenever they are emphatic, and generally after preposi- tions ; in these cases o-oi), a-oi, art are accented. "Otras 8 (eat t^Kij (fit (iraiv( TO /3t/9X/W, I gave him the book- In this case, it cannot stand at the beginning of a sentence nor in emphatic position. For the use of ov, of, 2, etc., see 1449 1453. For the possessive genitive of the personal pronouns, see 1455. 1422. NOTE. When two verbs, which govern different cases, have the same object, the case of the object depends on the first verb ; and no pronoun takes its place with the second verb (as in English). Ov^ faipiiKn Uparrayopav 7ra>7ror ovS* (\KjjKoa ovStv, I have never seen Protagoras nor ever heard anything of him (Plat. Prot. 310 e ). TW 6(oiv yfj KOI avrols (sc. roi? eeo-o-aXoif) 686v, the same way (Od. 8, 107 ; 10, 263). 1425. NOTE. For the difference between the emphatic torms V f, arr partisan, close to the army (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 14 ). AVTOS OVTOS, just this man. (c) AUTOS sometimes = alone, by oneself, apart, of one's own accord, real or pure. 56 PERSONAL AND INTENSIVE PRONOUNS 1429 Xwpci avros, he goes alone (Xen. Anab. 4, 7 11 )- Auroi yap fs dmovras fjdrj (TOVS fiapftdpovs) tv>pv>v ol "E\\rjvts, fTropcvovro Kal avrol dva(vavT(s, and now when the Greeks saw that the barbarians were clearly going, they also broke up and pursued their march (Xen. Anab. 3, 4 s7 ). But KCU OVTOS is used when a statement is made concerning one person or thing, which has already been made concerning another ; we then translate it by and this also. 'P(1 6 Matavfyjos 8ta TV;? no\f , the vanquished lose both themselves and all that belongs to them (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 45 ). Hapeooa-av of iravrfs fp.T)v, Clearchus wished the whole army to be devoted to himself (Xen. Anab. 2, S 29 ). EtVtcVat fc&mrcv, ei /it'XXoiy trvv eovrw (KirXtlv, he bade you come in, if you should wish to sail with him (Xen. Anab. 1, I 39 ). *E7ricrei/ 'Adrjvaiovs tavrbv nardytiv, he persuaded the Athenians to restore him (from exile) (Thuc. 1, 111 1 ). Tfjv HoXixvrjv eYei'^ifov, (1 TI Seoi v TOVTW yp^fv (sc. Kvpos) nv6" e a v r 3 o/io- yXwrrcov ovrtav ovre a\\f)\ois, (Cyrus) became ruler of the nations though they were not of the same tongue with himself nor with each otlier (Xen. Cyr. 1, 1 s ). Ta vavdyia, ocra Trpoj rfj envrSiv (yfi) rjv, dvtiXovro, they took up the wrecks, an many as were close to their own land (Thuc. 2, 92). Of crofpicrral Karrjyopovo-i 58 REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS 1436 rS>v pa&r)To>r us d&iKova-i a f avrovt, the sophists accuse their pupils of icronging them (Plat. Gory. 519*). For the possessive genitive of the reflexive pronoun, see 1460 1467. 1436. NOTE. Sometimes the reflexive refers neither to a leading nor to a dependent subject, but to some dependent word. 'Airb a-avTov 'yci> , / will instruct you from your own case = from, yourself ( AT. Nub. 385). T6i/ K p.dpx*)v fart oifjuu KOI f fji( Kdl (r f KOI TOVS rfXAov? dvdpatirovs TO do'iKf'iv TOV d8iKtlX olos T( (, etc., being used instead in emphatic position (1421) or in contrasts. \ap,$dvov(riv avrbv teal yvvaiKa, they take the man himself and his wife (Xen. Anab. 7, S 22 ). 3. The plurals r)p.S)v avrw, etc., are either reflexive or emphatic; but aurwv i7/Aa>v, etc., are in most cases emphatic. Yet o-v, etc., are never used. "AXXo TL r)p.S>v avrtov TO fiev pd eVrt, TO 8e ^v^r/, is not one part of us body, and another part soul ? (Plat. Phaedo, 79 a ). Ov8e v avrov Kara0jjo-et aXXa ra v/j.Tfpa vplv avrols an-oSaxm, he will not lay down any of his own property, but will return to you your own (Lys. 29, 8). Ov 8vvap.ai n-di/ra n-epi- Xa/3?v, aXX' O.VTOVS ftp. as xpr) KOI ra TrfptXeXet/n/^iei/a crvviSftv, I cannot embrace everything (in my discourse), but you ought yourselves to reflect on what is omitted (Isoc. 14, 63). 4. In Homer forms like ot avrawv, a-v ffjLt Xco-o/xm, I will loose myself (II. 10, 378). 'ATTO & (II. 5, 343). Of (Od. 11, 433). 'En-i ol (H. 8, 327). t (tt. 15, 241). *Qanv OTTO oxfctW (IZ. 4, 535). @ov\(vovi' avrS>v (R. 12, 155). 2pa8ir]T&> (Od. 5, 179). Me...avroi/ (II. 15, 722). TW...avTJ7 (H. 6, 272). Oi...avT/7 (Od. 4, 66). Miv avrov (II. 21, 245).' 1446. NOTE. When avrtu and avrw come first, only an enclitic form of a personal pronoun is used. AvrtS ^ot (II. 5, 459). Avrw TOI (Od. 22, 345). Avr<5 piv oi (Od. 2, 190). Abrtv cov, crftiai, af (ri(riv Srt fityitrnj npfyavis f'u) rov iro\t(jilv, making charges that they might have the strongest possible pretext for war (Thuc. 1, 126 1 ). "EXtav art rr>^t s (6*Ayis) iraprfKde ndi fcK\ivtv diro o~(f)>v TO arrpdrtv^a, 0T), Aristodemus-- said that some others went away, that he himself fell asleep (Plat. Symp. 223 b ). OS also (Rep. 393 e (epic), 617" ; Symp. 174 d ). "E also (Rep. 327 b , 617 e ; Symp. 175"' c ). For ov is used eavrov or avrov. 1451. NOTE. The form oT occurs rarely in the Orators ; except in Antiph. 1, 16 and 5, 93 ; Lys. 23, 13; Andocides, l. as. 40. . 42 . i sae ^ 6, 27. The Attics have it rarely accented ; except Plat. Symp. 174 e ; Xen. Hell. 7, I 38 ; Bep. Ath. 2, 17. 1452. NOTE. The form a-(f>>v occurs often in Thucydides, now and then in Plato (as in Rep. 618 a ), seldom in other Attic prose (as in Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 25 ), perhaps never in the Orators ; for o-^wv possessive eavrwv or o-<^>T/)os avruv is commonly used (1460, 1462). The other forms be- ginning with o-- (without aimov, etc.) are seldom used by the Orators. 1453. 1. The personal pronoun of the third person (ov, ol, etc.) is generally used as a personal pronoun in Homer. It is then enclitic. (For its reflexive use, see 1449). The genitive singular is seldom found as a personal pronoun ; the nominative plural 0-v, since she is not inferior to her (II. 1, 114). TTJV o I nope Ooij3os, which Phoebus gave him (II. 1, 72). Si^ 8voicaioKa vrjvai, ai o I (TTOVTO, with twelve ships which followed him (H. 11, 228). Kac e 8e f Tta-o-apdftoiov , they reckoned her at four oxen (II. 23, 705). Tis T ap f...vvfT}K( /xa^fo-^cu; who then engaged them to fight together ? (II. 1, 8). "O a- a> V v ...(\aiov xairdatv Kare'^eve, who poured oil over their manes (II. 23, 281). 'E* yap , for I will still give them glory (H. 17, 453). OS ie??; also a neuter plural o- firopfvtro, S irti, it has befallen them (7, 38 :t ). \(y6vTo>v...&s io-iv. The accusative plural o- often occurs in Tragedy, sometimes as a singular (as Aesch. Pro. 9 = him, Eur. Ale, 834 = her). Even a-r or 64 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 1456 6 irarrjp. 'Qvofjifurt pov TTJV it povoiav dttXidv, he called my foresight cowardice (Ar. Plut. 207). 'H yXwo-o-a /m auroC, /or /lis 6ocfy (Xen. -4na6. 1, 9* 1 ). Kara yvu>fjo]v TTJV (prjv, according to my opinion (Plat. Soph. 225 d ). Ac'/xor TO 8ia /caAXos, on account of her beauty (Od. 11, 282). 2. The Old Ionic also rarely uses ev and v (pva-is, our old nature (Plat. Symp. 189 d ). 'H SoKovaa TjfjMv irportpov o-totppoo-vvr) , what seemed before our prudence (Thuc. 1, 32 4 ). Tv;i/ avrov trovrfpiav, you will know his other villainy (Isoc. 18, 52). 1458. NOTE. 1. As the possessive pronoun implies a genitive of a personal pronoun, it may have an adjective or appositive in the geni- tive connected with it. To)ta SUO-TIJI/OV caca, the woes of me, unhappy one (Soph. Oed. Col. 344). TTJV ijftfTfpav TO>V ii' ri\vrjv, the art of you Sophists (Plat. Hipp. Maj. 281 d ). 2. In poetry it may have a dative connected with it. i AfKT'pou [= I 7^t> / ] iroTfjMv K\(ivoif AajSdaK/datcTif, the doom for us, the famed race of Labdacus (Soph. Ant. 860). 'Eftalfriv (= (fju>i) 5 as a favour to thee = for thy sake (Plat. Soph. 242 a ). 4>tXi'a rf) try, love to you (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 2fl ). 1460. The possess! ves are reflexive (as my own, thy own, etc.), when the possessor is identical with the subject of the sentence. My own is expressed by efiavrov, epavrris ; thy own by creavrov, creavrfjs ; his or its own and her own by eavrov, eavrfjs ; our own by 77/ierepo? avrcov ; your own by tJ/zerepo? avr&v ; /ier owm by eavTwv or o^e'repo? avrwv (or rarely crfyerepos). These reflexive possessives have the attributive position as regards the article. 'O e pavTov vlos or 6 vibs 6 e pavrov, my own son. 'H T(t)v re KOL T{]f)fj,eTfpq a VT > v Kiv8vv(vV favTa>v v Tr)s Sof-Tjs fv&Htrripovf, falling short of our own reputation (Thuc. 2, II 3 ). TaD/ieoi/ avrcov SirXa, our own weapons (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3 a ). Ta 6v6/j.aTa 8iaTrpSTToi>Tai (rv avrav 7rpoo"ypa(f)TJvai els rfjv cmjAjji', they manage to have their own names added to the monument (Lys. 13, 72). 1463. NOTE. Poetic are e/xos avrov, o-o? avrov, and os avrov or eos aurov. These forms occur sometimes in Homer, rarely in Attic poetry. 'E/nov avTov xpeior, my own necessity (Od. 2, 45). 2w aurov- (cpflart, with thy own head (Od. 22, 218). *Qt avrov 6\>nq> } in his own mind (II. 10, 204). 'Ebv alrov ^peioj, some debt of his own (Od. 1, 409). 1464. NOTE. When the genitives of reflexive pronouns are par- titive, they take the predicate position. 5 66 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 1465 r a v r > v roits f}(\TiV iro\iTOS are sometimes used as reflexive possessives. Ta>i/ KTijfjMTuv v t p 5> v fi.v 3ov\oft.(vois, to those willing to save their own (Lys. 24, 19). 2. So also avrov (with or without the addition of cKciVov) in attribu- tive position. QVTOS (KOO'fiTjo'f rf/v T\TV\TIV OVK dXXorptw aXXa rw avTtjs Kooyiw, this man adorned his soul not with foreign but with its (i.e., the soul's) own ornament (Pint. Phaedo, 114 e ). AVTOU in these cases = Latin ipsius. 1466. NOTE. Poetic o% or cos is always reflexive. T&>i> Z>v TfKixov, his own children (Soph. Trach. 266). 'Eo>i> TreVXwv, her own robes (Bur. El. 1206). And so often in Epic poetry. Herodotus has 5s once (1, 205 1 ). 1467. The genitives of the personal pronouns (/AOU, o-ou, etc.) are seldom used as reflexive possessives. 'Kyta vp.at virip TOV Trarpos p. ov Tt6vtyros airovfiai, I appeal to you on, behalf of my dead father (Antiphon, 1, 23). Tovs vfi.pdxovs e88tWav o-0a>i/, they feared their own allies (Thuc. 5, 14 1 ). AT. Plut. 55 ; Eq. 565. In late Greek the reflexive use of these genitives is very common. 1468. The genitives of the demonstratives, especially of tKetvos, are used instead of the ordinary reflexives of the third person for special emphasis. ' A.(ptK.vovvTai irapa 'Apiaiov KOI rf/v extivov trrparidv, th-ey came up to Ariaeus and hi* army (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 8 ). Examples of the use of o* for ><>? (as in Od. 9, 28) ; os or pov ; thy, o-fk or o-ov ; his, her, its, airr, avrrji ; sometimes in Homer os or s ; and Ionic ev ; our, ^/ICTC/TO? or ///xwv ; your, ^/AtVepos or i>p.wv ; their, wr and Ionic oc'cof. 1472 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 67 2. Synopsis of Reflexive Possessive Forms. My own, tfuivrov (->?s), e'/Aos, seldom p.ov (poetic ejads U.VTOV) ; thy own, o-eavTov (-*/s), o-o's, seldom nai8(s, Xeyere poi, 08' tcrri Soxcpar^s, irtpl ov (ndfrroTf p.f p.i> ijv alnos, for he who furnished the seed that man is responsible for the harvest (Dem. 18, 159). 1474. NOTE. OVTOS is sometimes used in calling out to a person. OVTOS, TI iroifis; you there! what are you doing? (\i. Ran. 198). OVTOS here has local force. 1475. NOTE. ToSro /*'... (TOUTO) Se, partly ...partly, first... secondly t is practically the same as TO /ACV...TO 87 (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 603). See 1377, 5. 1476. NOTE. Observe the colloquial expression TOUT' e/cetvo or TOO"* fKelvo, that's it, there it is ! (referring to something already mentioned or understood), Eur. Med. 98. 1477. NOTE. For ovroo-i, 681, cVeivoo-r, OVTWO-I, u>8r, etc., see 1472 and Part II. of the Grammar. For ovroa-i, in specifications of time, see 1601. 1478. Kai OVTOS, and that too, is used predicatively to qualify more definitely a person or thing ; KOI Tavra, and that too, although,, and yet, and also, qualifies more definitely a verb, usually a participle. Hai>Tdirav, Kai TOVT u>v irovrjputv, ocrivft fd(Xovtrovs irparTdv TI, it belongs to persons wholly without resources and held down by necessity, and wicked also, to seek to do anything by means of perjury to the gods and faithlessness towards men (Xen. Anab. 2, 5). 2ii 8 /xoi ooKfts ov irpocrtxftv TOV vovv TOVTOIS, Kai TavTa (roV He\oirovvr)>v at/rat vf/es, these ships of the Peloponnesians (Thuc. 8, 80"*). 'ETTI TOV avTov TOVTOV X6ov, towards this very knoll (Xen. Hell. 3, 4 13 ). Toi d^iKo/ieVw rour< |fvw, this stranger who has arrived (Plat. Prot. 313 b ). 1482. NOTE. The noun doea not have the article if it is predicate. Hen 36 the article is omitted with OUTOS, oSe, and cxeivos. When the demonstrative is equivalent to an adverb of place, as here, there, and calls attention to an object in sight. 'Opup-ev 6\iyovs TOVTOVS dv0pa>Trovs, we see few men here (Xen. Anab. 4, 7 5 ). NJJes fi> xirwvas rovrovcri, taking these coats here (Xen. Cyr. S, 3 6 ). Xcbpjjy yap x u fj tvyivaav f im^o>i< ya/itl novripnv, pupos (tmv > whoerer lookimj to wealth or nobility marries a wicked woman is a fool (Eur Elect. 1097). 1494. NOTE. In Epic poetry the particle re is often added to the relatives ; as os T, old* Tt, 00-05 re, oOi 1501 EELATIVE PRONOUNS 71 re ; it adds little or nothing to the meaning of the rela- tive. This also occurs sometimes in lyric poetry, rarely in tragedy. In Attic Greek ofos re means able, capable. 1495. NOTE. For oo-ns, the definite relative os is sometimes used, especially with p.rj and av. Ous ftjupa fdfXovras Kiv8vvvfiv, TOVTOVS KOI ap^ovras erroiei, whomsoever he saw willing to incur danger, these he made governors (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 14 ) ; ex- amples with pT] and av in 2148. 1496. NOTE. The indefinite relative oWis is used with a definite antecedent when who is equivalent to such as and is used to char- acterise. 'licavoi f(rfj.(i> 'bp.lv Trep.^ai vavs Tf KCU avftpas, olrtvfs V/JLII' TT]s 86{-7)s rj s (= olds) rroXXot rvy^dvovanv , to desire such glory as (which) many obtain (Isoc. Epist. 2, 10). Trj\iKavTr)s...fjv (vn/X/x?)'), so great as (ibid.). "Ewo-Trep &v r/s os (= TOIOVTOS olos) d, as long as you are what ( = such as) you are (Plat. Phaedr. 243 e ). (b) A relative of quantity or quality is sometimes used for a simple relative. Tavra ...... xpf) nouiv, ova (for a) 6 6fos (K\(v edwdfjujv, all (= as much as) that I could (Xen. Anab. 7, 6*). 1501. NOTE. A relative adverb is sometimes used for a relative pronoun, mostly in designations of place, time, and manner. 72 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1502 Els x*>pL v > od ( v o^oirat ddXarrav, to a place (whence) from which they would behold the sea (Xen. Anab. 4, 7 s0 ). To avro o-xq/xa Sxrntp, the tame order as (Xen. Anab, 1, 10 10 ). 1502. NOTE. (a) Several relatives may belong to the same sen- tence without a copula intervening. TvuHTfTcu. 6 8i)fjMS olos olo v 6pfifJia t)v{-ij(r(v (for otoy tern cat oiov K.T.A.), the people will know how feeble they are and what kind of nursling they have reared (Plat. Rep. 569 b ). AI&MTKWV ota ovcra ^fv^ff v(p' oitav \6ytv T)\&( KU\ of biffin), observe from what place he crossed and to what place. (Dem. 23, 160). (6) One relative may belong to a participle, and the other to a finite verb. OUK dyvoS) T)\IKOS &>v ocrov (pyov eVterra/iat, / am not unaware how great a work I am undertaking for one so old as I am, lit. being how old, how great a work (Isoc. 12, 36). 1503. NOTE. Sometimes with an adverb or with an adjective is added to a relative and its noun. "S.witff ov rpoirov 6 2oXo>i/ TOVS vop.ovs to s K a\> s K(\(v(t ndtvai, you observe in what manner, how admirably, Solon directs laws to be passed (Dem. 20, 93). "laTf olatv vofitav i>fuv Ktip.tvv v KaL crv T(ro\p.r)Kf Tr/xap^oy Stjprjyopflv, you know in spite of what laws, and laws so good and moral, Timarchus has dared to play the demagogue (Aeschin. 1, 20). 1504. NOTE. The plural of 00-05 and orrdo-os, as those of TOO-OVTOS and Too-do-Se, have also numerical signification : (as many) as. Ot yovtls TOVS iraio'as fnoir)(Tav r o s npo- irtTtas (ptpurOi tis avrrfv, although royalty has so many troubles as you say, yet you are strongly drawn toward* it (Xen. Hier. 7, 2). 1505. NOTE. (a) A relative may depend on a participle alone. En-en' nvas oi fnaoovrts olt tiv ftovXavrai tXovs javrois TTotoiiprai, they say there are certain incantations which those who know them chant to those whom they irw/t and make them friends to themselves (Xen. Mem. 2, 6 10 ). ' \KO\ov6r)v Kparrja-ds p,r) naTacrx^o-ft TIS (for ov s, (TTfio'av avTotv Kparfjaj], pr) /caracr^iyo-et TIS), it is foolish to go against men whom one cannot keep down when one has conquered them (Thuc. 6, II 1 ). (Aipov/*e#a) dvGpwTrovs TOVS p.fv aTToAiSay, TOVS 8' avTop.o\ovs, ols oirarav TIS TrXfiova fjuiav fjfiv, f)s 'OpovTas %px e T o\\r) s Kal f v 8 ai- fiov os (for 'Apfjifvidv 7ro\\r)v v 'SvpaKocriw, for TO Tei'^io-^a T>V SvpaKcxriav 8' s (up(lTai dtos, to some God fiives and from others he takes (Men. Mon. 428). 74 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 151O 3. Homer has a number of examples of the demon- strative os ; as xai os, II. 21, 198 ; H. 22, 201 ; Od. 1, 286. RELATIVE AS PREDICATE 1510. The relatives are sometimes used as predicates. OVK rj8(i oioi s 0r) piois fTr\T)proached (Dem. 35, 8). fijjXoCiTe s OTTOIOV T t TO nf\\ov iroirfvowtv } not at all showing what future plan they would carry out (Thuc. 7, 38 2 ). 'ETrtWao-tfe irtpi oiov TIVOS OVTOS e/ioO ^Tj(pif~ia-6e, you know what kind of man I am concerning whom you are to decide (Lys, 21, 1). Otdv e x 1 8 1/ a v TTJV 8' (dTjv, the danger from which I was saved. Observe that when the relative is the subject of a sentence, it has the person of its antecedent. 'Eyw os TOVTO Xe |n, I who sai ro>i> av6pa>ira>v , concerning war and peace which have the greatest power in the life of men (Isoc. 8, 2). 'AiraXXayfVTts iroXfuw KOI Ktvftuvtav KOI rapa^^y, ds ^ v vvv npbs dXXijXoi.'s Kadforafifv, delivered from wars and dangers and confusion in which ice are now involved with one another (Isoc. 8, 20). 1513. NOTE. A relative referring to a collective noun may be in the plural. To 'Af>K(iftiK<>i< 6n\iTiKov, la v qpx* KXea^cop, the Arcadian heavy-armed force which Cleanor commanded (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 18 ). Hoot'orai coc^eX/a ot Twi/8 Kpfitro-ovs tltri, an auxiliary force will be at hand who are better than these (Thuc. 6, 80 1 ). 1514. NOTE. A singular antecedent may indicate a whole class and thus take a plural relative. 1519 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 75 Orjo-avpoirotbs a v jj p, ovs fiij at firatvfl TO Tr\f)dos, a money-making man, just (one of those) whom the great mass praise (Plat. Rep. 554"). HoXt pov ytvriv fvpfjKctfAfv, e > v /iaXierra TOLS Tr6\fcriv KCUCO yiyverai, we have traced the origin of war to sources from which very great evils to states arise (Plat. Rep. 373 e ). 1515. NOTE. On the other hand, a plural antecedent may have its relative in the singular referring to any one of the number. At yvvdiKfs i.K(Tfvov irdvras, orw tvTvy\avoifv , pr) (frfvytiv, the women begged all whom they met not to flee (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 67 ). "Ao-Traferai IT a v T a s. w av TTfpiruyxdvd, he greets all, whomsoever he happens to 'meet (Plat. Rep. 566 d ). 1516. NOTE. A masculine or feminine antecedent considered as. a thing may have its relative in the neuter (compare 1309). ,'H yrj eyevvrjcrev av 6 p at IT o v, 6 (rvvtcrei inrfpt^fi T>V a\Xi'A.oi>, 6 fjLfyLo-rov dyadbv flvai , words which we call hopes (Plat. Phil. 40*). 'O 0(ij3oy o C'K r>v vofiw ytyovuts, ?) v al8S> 7roXXav 'A.6r)valiras vrro TT\OVTOV TTJS o~o(pids, as I say, you give yourself airs from wealth of wisdom (Plat. Euthyphr. 12"). *O apn eXey ov, {rj-nfTfov rives apiaroi v\aKts, as I just said, we must find out who are the best guards (Plat. Rep. 413 C ). *O IT ( p KOI dpxoptvos tiTrov rov Xoyou, 7rapp^crtao-o/i^a irpos tfMs, as I in beginning my remarks said, we will speak candidly to you (Plat. Loch. 179). Ov evtica 6 Xoyor ctpfjirj&T}, vvv \e^op.(v rils Ktpov Trpdfis } now we will relate the actions of Cyrus on whose account the narrative was undertaken (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 16 ). *A d' tlirtv, cor e'yco ei'/u ofof ad itvrt /xera- /$d\\f(r()ai, KaravorjffaTt, etc., but as to what he said, that I am such as to be always changing, consider, etc. (Xen. Hell. 2, S 48 ). (c) After such an introductory relative expression, the principle clause is occasionally introduced by on or yap. *O fiiv irdvrwv 6avp.ar yap ..... fJKovad TIVOS, art KXe'acdpor o eV Bvfaj/rt'ou ApfjuxTTtjs /zt'XXet r}(iv, for a.s ..... 7 heard from some one (that) Cleander the governor at Byzantium, intends to come (Xen. Anab. 6, 4"). 1524 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 77 GOVERNING PREPOSITION OMITTED 1521. When the same preposition governs both the antecedent and the relative, it is usually expressed only with the antecedent. 'ATTO TT}S avTrjs ayvoids fjo-rrep TroXXa irpoleo-df T>V KOIVMV, by the same sense- lessness by which you sacrifice many of your public interests (Dem. 18, 134). 'Ev Tpio-l Kcu o~fKa ov% oXois ere ols eViTroXafft, in not quite thirteen years in. which he has been uppermost (Dem. 9, 25). OMISSION OF ANTECEDENT 1522. The antecedent of a relative is often omitted when it is indefinite or when it is easily supplied from the context. e Ov ol 6eo\ (piXova-iv dirodvijo-Kei veos (for ovros ov, etc.), he whom the gods love dies young (Men. Mon. 128). *A dpaxriv ol uparovvres ov% 6pa> (for ravra &, etc.), I do not see what those in power do (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 530). 'Ey KOI S)v tya> KparS) p.fi>ov/j.fv (lav for OVTOL >v), I and those whom I command will remain (Xen. Cyr. 5, I 26 ). Si-uywi/ fiev rj p ermrev (fj for (Keivrjv rj}, hating her who bore me (Eur. Ale. 338). KaXoi/ TO dvyo-Kfiv ois vftpiv TO i)v (pepei (for TOVTOLS ols, etc. ), death is agreeable to those to whom living bears shame (Men. Mon. 291). *H 0iy TrXetw eVtrpeTreis f) rfj yvvcuKi ; (for eo-rt TIS orca, etc.), is there any one to whom you trust more affairs than to your wife ? (Xen. Oec. 3, 12). To pavdavfiv eWt TO crofpwTepov yiyvevdai IT e p I o pdvOavfi TIS (for Trepl TOVTO S), to learn is to become wiser in that which we learn (Plat. Theaet. 145 d ). 'EyyiyveTai poi evvoia TT pb s ovs &v vnoXd^o) fvvoiK&s fx (lv ""pos fpf (for Trpbs TOVTOVS ovs), a kindly feeling springs up in me towards those whom I regard as kindly disposed toward me (Xen. Mem. 2, 6**). 1523. NOTE. It should be noted that the omitted antecedent is always unemphatic and corresponds to the English unemphatic per- sonal or demonstrative pronoun used as the antecedent of the relative. In a sentence like a ei^oy, avru Wa, what I had I gave him, the antecedent of a is indefinite and easily supplied from the context. But in a sentence like d e'^ov, TO.VTO. auru) ISw/ca, what things 1 had, those (particular things) I gave him, ravra is emphatic referring to something definite, and is not, strictly speaking, the true antecedent of a. 1524. NOTE. For the oblique cases of avro's sometimes used in place of the omitted antecedent, see 1486. 78 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1525 1525. NOTE. For attraction and assimilation of the relative to the case of its omitted antecedent, see 1530 1539. 1526. NOTE. The relative adverbs very frequently omit the ante- cedent. Tov Ta(pov pT(vfyK(iv ovntp airtQavev (for fvravQa ovnfp), to remove the tomb where he died (Thuc. 1, 134 7 ). "Ao> v/j.as ev6a TO npaypa e'yeVero (for (Kfla-f fvda), I will lead you to the place where the affair took place (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4 21 ). *ATai, there are some who discuss (Xen. Hell. 6, 4^). *Ha-av 8e ot icat irvp irpov aXXwi' tQviav, except the Achaeaiis and some other peoples (Thuc. 3, 92 7 ). "EOTIV ols ftf\rlov reOvdvcu y ^ffv, there are persons to whvm it is better to be dead than to live (Plat. Phaedo, 62 a ). "\ITOITTOI eytvovro OTIV (v ols, they came to be suspected in some things (Thuc. 5, 25 2 ). "Eariv ovimvas avdpvirovs TfBavfjMKas tn\ \6(Tovcnv , there are some who will hinder (Lys. 13, 17). (c) Observe these expressions : ermv ov or oirov and lo-rtv JVa, some- where ; lanv ore, sometimes ; to-riv -ft, in some way ; ta-rw onrws, some- how ; OVK ICTTIV OTTWS, nohow ; ovK laTLv O7rws ov, in every possible way. See 2371, 62. 1528. NOTE. 1. Observe that oo-ov sometimes means about. raoTal ocrov dtaKoV TToXfov a>v "Tio-o-fKpepvrjs en ir\rf\avtv e%v), from the cities which Tissaphernes still happened to hold (Xen. Anab. 1, I 8 ). Twi/ fOvwv S>v fjp.f'ts 'icrp.ev (for a Ivpfv), of the nations which we know (Xen. Mem. 2, I 10 ). "OTTCOJ ovv recr$e civdpes aioi TTJS fXfvQtpias r)s KfKTtjcrdf (for r)v KfKTrja-df), see that you prove yourselves men ivorthy of the freedom which you possess (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 3 ). T< fjyffiovi -mo-Teva-op-ev w &v Kvpos 8a> (for ov av $ ^ y ov ^ rn the cities by such natural gifts as Evagoras had (Isoc. 9, 48). 1530. NOTE. (a) If the antecedent, which would be a genitive or dative, is omitted, the same assimilation takes place ; and a preposi- tion, which would govern the genitive or dative of the omitted ante- cedent, passes over to the relative. But a relative in the nominative masculine or feminine or a relative depending on a preposition remains unchanged. 'A/xeXw $)v p, 8(1 irpArreiv (for tKtlv&v a), I neglect ivhat I ought to do (Xen. Cyr. 5, I 8 ). Xeipavos OVTOS otov Xeyeis (for TOIOVTOV olov), the bad weather being as you say (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 :! ). 'A<' >v tore avrol TO. TrpdypaTa npiveiv 8ei (for OTTO TOVTWV a), from what you know you must decide the case (Dem. 19, 216). Tldvras icr(pfpfiv n(p' ocroav exacrrof fX fl (^ or """" TOCTOVTMV ocra), that all shall contribute from such means as each one has (Dem. 2, 31). BAa7rreo-$ai dv f/fjuv 7rap((TKfva' iittivov a), to be injured by what has been prepared by us (Thuc. 7, 67 3 )- To ptyedos vir f p &v a-vvt\ri\vdafj.fi> TT)\IKOVTOV fortv, so great is the magnitude of the things concerning which we have met to discuss (Isoc. 8, 2). 'E/x/nfVti/ ols apn e8oei/ fjp.1v (for TOVTOIS S), to abide by what we agreed just now (Plat. Prot. 353 b ). Siiv ols (ix fv Tl (l ^pos TO Tfixf> ' ie marched against the wall with what troops he had (Xen. Hell. 3, 5 18 ). But r/ 0iyv &i> Xdftoitv TOV p-icrdov (for TOVTOIS Trap' $>v), it is necessary for them to talk with those from whom they receive pay (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 s ). (b) An emphatic demonstrative may take the place of the omitted antecedent in spite of the assimilation. 'A(p' S>v Trpotratret ai &ai>ei'rat, OTTO TOVTWV 8idyfi (for dirb rovrwi/ 3), on what he begs and borrows, on that he gets along (Dem. 8, 26). 80 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 1531 (c) By this assimilation &v, avd' u>v and eg <5i/ are used where we would expect TOUTOJV cm or some similar expression and mean for this, that, or simply, because. HpotrfjKti \apiv avrdis *\fiv 2> v fdr)' tip-cav, it is proper for them to be grateful for this, that they were saved by you (Dem. 16, 13). '-Yp.as TTOITJO-W rfjfjifpov 8ovvai 8iKr)v av ff tuv fp* {rjrelrov fvdev8' ac/mm'crat, I will make you give satisfaction because you sought to drive me hence (Ar. Plut. 434). OVK (' &>v &v \apir)(r6f anpoSnvrm ijp.S>v, dXX' e & v &v tV^vi irtpiyevrjcrdf, they obey you not because you grant them any favours, but because you are superior to them in power (Thuc. 3, 37 8 ). (d) In the same way (as in (c) above) oo-u> is sometimes used with- out a preceding TooWr<{>, and means since, because, inasmuch as. &i\os &>v is &v oi(f)f\oir]v , o or o> ra p.ev ' A.dr)i>aiti>v olda, TO. 8" tiptrfpa jjKaov, being a friend, I could help you because I know the plans of the Athenians while I only guessed yours (Thuc. 6, 92 4 ). (e) For ' ou and c ou, since ; cc <5, while ; efc o, till ; /x-e'xpt (XP l ) "> ww ^> a l so ^ where, and the like. 1531. NOTE. Occasionally a relative which would be in the dative is assimilated to the genitive of its antecedent. *Qv fvTvy\ava> fiaXurra uyap-ai v fiorjdfls OVK diroXtyd x<*P tv (f r trapa etfiixav oir), you will get no thanks from those whom you help (Aeschin. 2, 117). 1332. NOTE. Cases in which assimilation (as in 1529 and 1530) does not take place are not rare, and occur mostly for euphony or clearness. Tots p(1 p.f(j,(pXetcr0at an-6 T o v r a> v A Trap' fjfjMtv \np.:i('n>m'(Tii' ; and do you imagine that the gods are benefited by the gifts which they receive from us f (Plat. Euthyphr. 15"). 1833. NOTE. Assimilation also occurs with the relative adverbs,. oOcv for tKflOfv ov or iniiOtv 01. Aioco/ufoi/To (vdvs o6tv vnf^tdfvTo irdibas KOI yvvaiKas (for (KtWtv ot), they immediately brought over their children and women from the places to which they had withdrawn them for safety (Thuc. 1, S9 4 ). 1534 EELATIVE PRONOUNS 81 1534. NOTE. (a) A peculiar assimilation occurs with 0109 when this relative is to be the predicate in a sentence with the copula elfu. In this case the copula is omitted and its subject as well as the pre- dicate otos are put in the case of the omitted antecdent TOIOUTOS. Upbs av8pas To\p.r)povs oiovs /cat 'A.dr)vaiovs (for ofot KOI 'Adyvaioi tlcriv), against such bold men as the Athenians (Thuc. 7, 21 3 ). Xapto/uei/oj> ota> o-oi dv8pi (for ToiovTcf olos (TV el), pleasing a man such as you are (Xen. Mem. 2, 9 s ). Tov apxovta Set avrbv fivai oiovrrtp TOV dyadbv l8ia>Tr)v (for TOLOVTOV olocrirep 6 dyadbs Idiwrtjs foriv), it is necessary that the commander himself be just like a good private (Xen. Gyr. 2, I 22 ). XaXerrbv rjpov KOI o-^eSov elrrelv oicp ep.oi yt iravTa.Tra.criv arropov (for TOIOVTW ofo? eya), you ask a hard thing, as, for a man like me, almost altogether impossible (Plat. Soph. 237 C ). So also when the antecedent of oios is not omitted ; as, OVK av TTOV rrtpl TOV TO IOVT ov 6 \6yos to) oiov TOV evos, the hypothesis will not be concerning such a thing as the one (Plat. Par. 161 b ). The same peculiar assimilation occurs with fjXiKos ; as, (v O-VKO- $ d v T a s (for bp.ds), hating such informers like you (Antiphon, 5, 78). (c) Sometimes neither the subject nor the predicate oTos is assimi- lated. SoXooi' ffjucrfi TOVS olos OVTOS dvdpu>rrovs } Solon hated men such as this one (Dem. 19, 254). (d) "Oo-7rcp is also assimilated like otos. "ESei porbovvTa irivtiv &o-n-(p ftovv (for fao-n-fp /3oOf trivet), he had to drink sipping up like an ox (Xen. Anab. 4, 5 ; Cyr. 1, 4 15 ). (e) By the same assimilation 6orrow, OOTIS S^, even ocms alone, are used as adjectives meaning any whatsoever. 'E-yw ird(Tx flv oriovv ?Toip.os (for rt OTIOVV ttrri), I am ready to suffer any- thing whatsoever (Dem. 4, 29). 'E? T^V " \a-irtvftov $TIVI 8f) yva>p.rj dtpiKVflTm, with whatever intention it may have been, he went to Aspendus (Thuc. 8, 87 8 ). Other indefinite relatives have the same peculiarity. (/) Similarly on-ris in oo-ns j3ov\ci, any one you please, is assimilated. So: Iltpl HoXvyvarrov fj oXXou OTOV ^ouXft ru>v ypa(p(>s TJV), I will become master of that power which you say / have (Ar. Plut. 200). TTJV ovo-idv f)v KareXintv ov TrXdovos aid eVrt ?) Tfrrdptav (cat 8fKa raXdvTutv (rr)v ovv for irdvra $>v), they said that they had gained all things which they needed (Xen. Hell. 1, 4 2 ). So with adverbs ; as, >cat a\\o v Kaff ijXiKtdv Trarfjp fir^v (= ov8fis e'ort irdvrwv vp.S>v OTOV av xad' rjXiKidv Trarrjp ("ujv), there is no one of you all of whom according to age I might not be the father (Plat. Prot. 317). OvStvi o T o> OVK dironpivfrai { = ov8ds fo~riv 6Va> OVK diroKpivfrai), he answers every one (Plat. Mf.no, 70). O v 8 e v a ((f>aacrav 8aKpCovTa dirfHTTptfyta-Qai), they said that not one turned back without shedding tears (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 as ). OuSetr oo-rts OVK d(pf^Tai, there is no one who will not refrain (Xen. Ven. 12, 14). 1537. NOTE. (a) Similarly ^au/xao-rds (#au/urios) e'oriv oaos, oo-ov, etc., passes by regressive assimilation into 0uv//,ao-ro's 6o-os, ^auftao-roO oo-ou, etc. Qan/xaoT^c oo~r)v irtp\ o~ irpodvfuav (x fl > ne ^ 1ros 6avfJMo~rov o<; ws. OavfjMo-rSts CDS (ir(d6p.r)o-a Tavnjs TT)S p. r) v, p.tyd\r) rjv (for 17 Kpds (for TIJS ^V 'EXAiji'coi' ovs oi'Sa), you are the most ignorant of the Greeks whom I know (Thuc. 6, 40 1 ). 'E| TI s TO 7rpu>TOv f 77 et^e 8vvdp.fi (for trvv TTJ 8vvdp.fi fjv dxfv), he marched with the force which he had (Xen. Hell. 4, 1^). Observe that here also the attracted antecedent loses its article. RELATIVE NOT REPEATED 1540. When two relatives belonging to the same sentence have the same antecedent but would stand in different cases, the second relative is commonly omitted and it is then usually replaced by a personal, less often by demonstrative pronoun. 'Apuzios 8f, ov f)p,fts r)0f\op.fv /Ba TTHTTO. (for w f8a>Kap.tv KOI d(p y ov t'Xdflop.fv), and Ariaeus, whom we wished to make king, and to whom we gave and from whom we received pledges, etc. (Xeu. Anab. 3, 2 s ). Tt e'ort TOVTO o (pfjs s 8ov\ov dvT\ /3aI> 84 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 1541 ot fyvavpoi t v T a v 6 a flirt, ivhere the Great King has his residence and where the treasuries ofhi* money are (Hdt. 5, 49"). 1541. NOTE. But the relative is sometimes repeated, especially if the second is in the same case as the first, also if the demonstrative antecedent of the relative follows. "OTTCOS ovv (crtcrdf avbpts aioi TTJS eXtvdepias f) s KfKTTjtrOf KOI rjs tftas evSat- fiovifa, see that you prove yourselves worthy of the liberty which you possess and far which I account you happy (Xen. 1, 7 3 ). "Ov etpaa-Ktv v TOVTOV tgaipovp.fvos fir fXfvdfpidv, claiming this man as a freeman who, he said, was carried into slavery by us, and from whom we had so much money (Isoc 17, 14). RELATIVES olo9 IN EXCLAMATIONS 1542. The relatives 0*09, 00-09, and &>9 are used in exclamations. Oia noifis, 2) fraipt ; what are you doing, comrade ? (Plat. Euthyphr. 15 e ). *O ^ ow muc h trouble you have ! (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 4 ). 'Qs f)8vt ti, how sweet you are ! (Xen. Cyr. 7, 3 13 ). 'Qs KO.\OS fioi 6 Trdirnos, how hand- some my grandfather is ! (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 2 ). 1543. Sometimes these relatives are used where the sentence on which they depend contains the idea of "considering," "regard- ing " (A.oyio/xevos). > A7r'cXaoi' TTJV (fiavrov TV^V olov avbpbs eraipov firrfpTjfj^vos firfv, I bewailed my own lot, considering what kind of man I had been deprived of as a companion (Plat. Phaedo, H7 C ). KaTeicauo-f rets icwpzs, owas s KOI ytvvaluts eVeXft/ra, the man seemed to me to be happy + considering how fearlessly and nobly he died (Plat. Phaedo, 58 ). 1544. NOTE. The indefinite relatives OTTOIOS and OTTCKTOS are seldom used in exclamations, here some imperative like flirt, is understood (Lys. 30, 4; Plat. Gorg. 522'). INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 1545. The interrogative pronouns and adverbs are used in direct questions; the indefinite relatives are used in indirect questions ; but the interrogatives are very often used in indirect questions. 1550 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS 85 Tis Xf'yei ; who is speaking ? Tl fiovXerai ; what does he want ? Hoi rjKdev ; whither did he go ? 'Hpoprjv OOTIS (or TIS) Ae'yot, / asked who was speaking. 'Hpofjujv 5 TI (or TI) fiovXoiTo, I asked what he wanted. 'Hpo/^i/ otroi (or Trot) f\6oi, I asked whither he had gone. "Hptro o TI ew; TO crvvQ^ia, he asked what the signal was (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 16 ). Ai yvvdiKts f)po>T(av O.VTOVS, rives elev, the women asked them who they were (Xen. Anab. 4, 5 10 ). 'Hpwnjo-e TOVS irpo- MtTtov, A. who of men art thou? B. Who I am ? I am Meton (Ar.' Av. 997). A. ITTJVIK' eWii> apa TTJS T)p.epas ; B. oTrr/viKa ; (rfuxpov TI pfTci p.ecrr)p.^pidv, A. What time of day then is it ? B. What time ? A little past noon (Ar. Av. 1498). 1548. An interrogative is often used as a predicate-adjective. T i TOUT' e\fas ; what is this that thou hast said ? = lit. being what, hast thou said this ? (Eur. Bacch. 1033). Tinas Tovo-fi' etVopw ; who are these that I see? (Eur. Or. 1347). Iloia TOVTO Xryet? ; what is this that you say? (Plat. Cratyl. 391 e ). Ti'y OVTOS o-w/ua Tovpov OVK (as K(ls 8iait(ip.fvovs \d/3oi(v av p.adr)Tns ; how would the pupils that they get be disposed in character ?= lit. those how disposed (Isoc. 15, 222). IIo$' A xpij npd^fTt ; (TTdSav TI ytvijTai ; when will you do your duty? what are you waiting for? = lit. when what has happened? (Dem. 4, 10). Kpe'ovTa ttrdi... tfoi>Ta..."O7rs TI 8pA Tovra npagfiv ; from what city do I expect a leader to do this ? (Xen. Anab. 3, 1). 1551. NOTE. For Iva TI, see 2047. For TI paOuv and n iraOw ,- why in the world ? see 2252. 1552. Two or more interrogative words can belong to the same verb without a connective intervening. Tivas VTTO Tivtav tvpoififv &v p.tiova (VfpyfTtjfjifvovs f) irdlSas virb yoveav ; whom could we find more benefited by any one (lit. by whom) than children by their parents ? (Xen. Mem. 2, 2 3 ). 'Avrl Troivv irdia /xeraTtfleVra evSaifjiova iro\iv dirfpydoiT' av ; what things substituted for other things (lit. for what things) would make a state happy ? (Plat. Leg. 683 b ). Tls iroBtv p.o\a>v trot fjMpTvpTjcrei ; who, and whence coming, will bear witness to you ? (Soph. Track. 421). Has ol8(i> oiroia OTTOIOIS Swara Koiviavflv ; does every one know what letters will unite with what ? (Plat. Soph. 253*). INDEFINITE PRONOUNS rk AND <\Xo9 1553. The indefinite pronoun ris, rl, some, any, often equivalent to a certain or simply a or an, may be used substantively or ad- jectively. Being enclitic it never stands at the beginning of a sentence. Sv\a TIS o-^io-aTto, let some one split wood (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3 80 ). Ta^' ovv ("ttroi TIS av, perhaps, then, some one might say (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4 s5 ). *Hv TI TOV rfi\ovs da-dfvts, some part of the wall was weak (Thuc. 7, 4 2 ). *A.vdpa>rr6t TIS> some man, any man, a certain man, or simply a (certain) man. Ei8ov av6pu>- irov nva, I saw a (certain) man. 1554. NOTE. (a) Sometimes rU, TI, means indefinitely, a sort of r about, rather, somewhat, and the like, especially with adjectives and numerals. 'O trofpurrfjf 7T(s Zonct, 8ver pad^s, I am, as it seems, a rather dull fellow (Plat. Rep. 358"). ToiaCra &TTU 8te\?x&?o-ai/, things of some such kind were discussed (Plat. Symp. 174 d ). 'E-yw T t v i Xpovto, in a pretty short time (Plat. Leg. 698 C ). II 6 (r o v TI ir\jj0os about how great a mass of allies ? (Eur. Heracl. 668). 'En-rd T iv as, about seven (Thuc. 7, 34 s ). n 60-01 TIV ( s; about how many ? (Xen. Cyr. 2, I 3 ). 1560 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 87 'OXi'yot rives, some few (Xen. Hell. 6, I 5 ). Oi> TroXXoi rivts, some few (Thuc. 6, 51 2 ). (6) Similarly rl is joined to adverbs. Aia(pfp6vT<*>s TI, particularly (Thuc. 1, 138 3 ). S^eSc^ TI, pretty nearly (Thuc 3, 68 6 ; Plat. Charm. 164 d ). M5XXdV TI, rather more (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 27 ) Ou vrdvv TI, even somewhat (Xen. Anab. 6, I 26 ). 1555. NOTE. Sometimes TIS, TI, means somebody (something) of importance. Hv^tis T i s flvai, thou didst vaunt thyself to be somebody (Eur. El. 939). A.4yeiv TI, to say something, of note, to the point (Plat. Lack. 195 C ). OtovTai T ( flvai, ovTfs ovdfvos aioi, they think they are something, when they are worth nothing (Plat. Apol. 41 e > Similarly ovdtv is used ; as, oiioev Xe'yeiv oijucu art, I believe you are saying nothing sensible (Ar. Av. 986). 1556. NOTE. Observe Tras ns and eKao-rds rts, any one or every one (you please). 1557. NOTE. Sometimes T!S in the singular refers to more than one person, and is then equivalent to many a or to each one. Ta>v ev TTJ 6\iyapxia dirodav6vTa>v *S TLS rjv Trovrjpos, perhaps many a one of those who perished in the oligarchy was bad (Lys. 30, 13). Xp^ SeiTrvdv o TI TIS fx (l > whatever (every) one has he must dine on (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 4 ); Et5 Hfv T i s 86pv 0Tjgd, let every one well sharpen his spear (II. 2, 382). 1558. The indefinite aXXo? means another, as a\\r) TroXt?, an- other state. With the article, 6 aAAov KOI of oXXot (rrparrjyoi, Xenophon and the other generals (Xen. Anab. 6, 6 8 ). But if the contrasted object is emphatic, oXXoj precedes ; as, KdTo. fdvr] 8( K SapetKouy, he gave me ten thousand darics, besides honouring me in other respects (Xen. A nab. 1, 3 3 ; Cyr. 1,6"). 1560. NOTE. The article is always omitted in the combination aXXo? aAXo, used like the Latin alius aliud, one one thing and another 88 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE 1561 another or the one this and the other that ; also in oAAos uXXodi, alius alibi, d\A.o9 aAAoore, alius olio, dAAos dAAotfev, alius aliunde, etc. OVTOI aXXos aXXa Xe'yei, these say, one one thing, and another another (Xen. Anab. 2, I 18 ). Ate'dcuxa aXXa aXXoiy aytiv, I distributed some to one man, some to another (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 7 ). But if the relation is reciprocal, the reciprocal pronoun is used ; as, woXvo-ovcriv dXXijXovr na\tv x a> P ( ' l P- ( & fripov vtdviov, an old man comes with a young man besides, = with another person, a young man (Ar. Eccl. 849). For /xoi/o? ratv oXXtai/, see 1719. THE CASES 1563. The original Indo-European language, from which the Greek is descended, had eight cases, of which the Greek lost three : the ablative, the locative, and the instrumental. The functions of these lost cases were assumed by the genitive and dative. The Greek geni- tive stands for the ablative with expressions of separation, source, and comparison. The Greek dative corresponds partly to the Latin dative, partly to the Latin ablative. It is equivalent to a locative, in answer to the question where ? and when ? and to the instrumental in answer to the question with what ? NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE 1564. The nominative is used as the subject of a finite verb (1209); and in the predicate after a finite verb signifying to be, to become, to be called, etc. (1204, 1208). 1572 NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE 89 1565. The nominative is used independently : (a) in names and titles ; as, Kvpov 'Ava/foo-ts, the Expedition of Cyrus ; BiftXiov Hpwrov, Book First; (6) in speaking of names or words as such. Hpovvp,idv, crv K o (p dv rrj s, he obtained the common appellation of the vile, " sycophant " (Aeschin. 2, 99). Ilope-yyvd 6 Kvpoy cruvdrjfjia, Z ev s ^vp,fjia^os K a i f) y e p. a> v, Cyrus gave out as the watch-ivord, " Zeus, our ally and leader " (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 58 ). 1566. 1. The nominative is sometimes used in beginning a sentence, although the construction is then changed. 'ETTidvfMcav 6 Kvpoy..., edof-ev aurw, Cyrus desiring,... it seemed best to Mm (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 37 ). 2. Similarly the nominative is occasionally used in specifications. A X X o v ? 8'6 ftfyas. . .NeiXoy t rrffji^fv 'S,ov, is used in addressing a person or thing. T Q avdpfs 'Adr/vciloi, men of Athens ! (Plat. Apol. 30 C ). T fl Ka/aore dv0pTa, they were acquainted with their duties (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 9 ). "E{-apvoi da-i ra t> fj.o\oyov p.t v a, they deny what has been acknowledged (Isae. 5, 26). T a /xcre'wpa (ppovrto-nj? , a ponderer on the things above (Plat. Apol. 18 b ). 2f..., fail, be wanting, give out ; em- opxew, to swear falsely (by) ; XavOdvw, lie hid, escape the notice of ; /xe'vw, wait for ; o/iotyu, swear or swear by ; fvyu, flee from ; &dvo>, anticipate, catch up to ; eu (caKtus) A.ya>, speak well (iU) of ; ev (>caKois) TToicu), treat well (ill). 1580 ACCUSATIVE 91 'O Trait /if a TT e 8 p a, the boy ran away from me (Plat. Prot. 316 C ). 'O 8e "Qpoo-e TT)V (IpTjvrjv, he swore the peace (Dem. 18, 32); and passively, Zevs ofjLwporai, Zeus has been invoked ; fj flprjvr) o^&yiorat, the peace has been sworn. Tas eV /xe'o-o> ri/xas, I am silent about the misfortunes which intervened (Eur. Or. 16). flfvrjra (frevyfi TTOS TIS eWoSwi/ QlXos, every friend flees away from a poor man (Eur. Med. 561). &ddvQv v > t celebrate a god by a choral dance (Pind. Isth. 1, 7 ; Soph. Ant. 1152). 'EXiWeti/ dew, to celebrate a god by dancing (Eur. Her. Fur. 690). 1580. NOTE. The poets sometimes use the imper- sonal Sci, there is need, with the accusative of the person and the genitive of the thing (thus e'ttc Set TIVOS for 8ei 92 ACCUSATIVE 1581 2e Set Ilpop,i)6( Se'ei (or ) TLVOL (rt), to fear any one (or anything) like death (as Dem. 4, 45 ; 19, 81). 1583. Some verbs are used both transitively and intransitively, especially such as denote feeling and motion. nXeti', to sail ; ir\dv QaXaa-trav, to sail the sea. OiKtlv, to reside ; olndv oiniav, to inhabit or to manage a house. 'O8ov ievcu, iroptvccrdai, to go (over) a road. STreuSeti/, to be earnest ; i> eVl rfjv fvBaifiovidv af-a> ere, / shall lead you an easy ami short road to happiness (Xen. Mem. 2, I 29 ). 1585. Many intransitive verbs become transitive by being com- pounded with prepositions. Ata/3atVti> Trora/ioV, to cross a river. Aitpxto-dai TO opos, to go over the mountain. 'Yirfp/3d\\(iv rd(ppov, to cross a trench. HapairXe'iv vf\v...Aiov6(na, celebrating the Dionysia (Dem. 21, 64). No/xtcr/xa Koirreiv /xoXii/SSov, to strike coin of lead (Hdt. 3, 56 2 ). Compare such expressions as, to break a hole, to strike a bridge, with to break a stick, to strike a man. COGNATE- ACCUSATIVE 1587. 1. Many verbs, transitive as well as intransitive, may take an accusative of kindred meaning. Such an accusative,, usually with an attribute, repeats the signification of the verb. 2. The cognate-accusative becomes the nominative in the passive construction. See 1882, 7. For the cognate-accusative and ordinary object-accusative with the same verb, see 1615 1617. 1588. 1. The cognate-accusative may be of kindred meaning and formation with the verb ; as vitcrjv vifcav, to win a victory. "Apxeiv dpxrjv, to hold an office. Md^i/ fj.dxT()ai, to fight a battle. Ilopirrjv Trepireiv, to conduct a procession. 'Aywva dya>vi(o-0ai, to undergo a contest. AivXa/caj (pv\do-fiv 8ov\eidv atV^pfii', to be subject to a shameful servi- tude (Xen. Mem. I, 5 6 ). 'Erpt^papx^o-e Tpiijpapxids, he performed the duty of a trierarch (Dem. 45, 85). Mavids ^aivfarBai, to rage with madness (Ar. Thesm. 793). OVK av eirfo-f rare TOIOVTOV Trrwjaa, it would not then have had such a fall (Plat. Lach. 181 b ). Ktvdvvfvtov TOV (arxarov idvdvvov, being in the greatest danger (Plat. Apol. 34 e ). Sui/ecpuye rfjv (pvyrjv ravrrjv, he shared in this banish- ment (Plat. Apol. 21 a ). Hda-ds ij8oi/As ij8f(rdai, to enjoy all pleasures (Plat. Phil. 63 a ). 2. The cognate-accusative may be merely of kindred meaning ; as f)v fiiov, to lead a life. Ma^v vlttdv, to win a battle. Aiwiceiv SIKTJV, to prosecute a suit. Qtvyav 8iKrjv, to defend a suit. Qtvytiv ypd(prjv, to defend an impeachment. 'Qs dx.iv- 8vvov ftiov S>pfv, how secure a life we lead (Eur. Med. 248). na6fi.ds, those prevailing with their opinions (Plat. Gorg. 456*). via, he carries a decree = he winy with a decree (Aeschin. 3, 68). Tdfiovs ( yaXa, let it floic milk (Theocr. 5, 124). 'H /SouXq . . .(fiXe^t vdirv, the Senate looked mustard (Ar. Eq. 629), and the like. 1591. NOTE. Here belongs the poetic /fcuVeiv TroSa, to step the foot (as in Eur. Heracl. 802), formed on the analogy of fiaivew firj/jui, to step a footstep. So also other similar poetic expressions. 1592. The cognate-accusative may be a neuter adjective or pronoun, the noun being understood or implied ; as TrijSav /j,ei~ ova (sc. TrriBr/fiara), to make greater leaps. 'Y/3pt'eii Stivd (= vfipiv 8fivr)v), to insult grievously (Xen. Anab. 6, 4 2 ). BXa\frm ^KyaXa, to injure greatly (Xen. Anab. 3, 3 14 ). Me'ya \(yu>v, speaking loudly (Plat. Prot. 310 b ). Melfoi/ $6tyytar6at, to speak louder (Plat Prot. 334 d ). l&Xfirrov /3X7Tt, he looks thievish = a thievish look (Ar. Vesp. 900). TotaOra ircrroiriKf, such acts he has committed (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 9 ;. Mrjotv ^(v8((rdai, to utter no falsehood (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 7 ). Tairra XvirelcrOai /cat raura xaiptiv, to have the same griefs and the same joys (Dem. 18, 292;. Tt /3oiX 8aKTv\ov dXyei, he has a pain in his finger (Plat. Rep. 462 d ). BeX-ridi/ eWi o-o5p.a y r) tyvx*l v vovelv, it is better to be sick in body than in mind (Men. Mon. 75). Ot TO. crw^iara eu f%ovTfs, those that are well in their bodies (Xen. Mem. 3, 12 4 ). Tv he with the cloak (Lucian, Deorum Concilium, 9). ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE 1597. A large number of accusatives, having the force of ad- verbs, are practically fixed adverbial expressions. Tovrov TOV Tponov, in this way. TIJI/ Taxicrrrjv (sc. o8d), in the quickest way. Tfjv fvddav (sc. 686v), straightway. Tiva Tpoirov ; in what way? f Ov Tpoirov, in which manner. (Tijv) ap^jji', at first. (To) np&Tov, at first, for the Jirst time, in the first place. To Seurepov, TO TptVov, in the second place, in the third place. To XotTrov, henceforth (but TOU XOITTOU, at some future time). To TeXeuTaioi/, finally. Te'Xoy, at the end, finally. (Trjv) apxyv ov or pr), not at all. TovvavTiov, on the contrary. Tt; why? in what respect ? T, in some respects, somewhat. Ovdtv, in no respect, not at all, in nothing. ToCro, TaCra, in this respect, therefore. ToOro ^(V...TOVTO 8e, firstly... secondly, or partly... partly. T^XXa, in other respects. IIoXv or TroXXa, much, often. Ta woXXa, mostly. Tn TTUVTO, in all respects, completely. Totrovrov, so much. "Otrov, as Jar as. Tvxov, perhaps. Maicpdv, afar off, far, at length, tediously. Upotpaa-tv, 96 ACCUSATIVE 159* for a pretext.^- Ilpol/ca, for nothing, gratis. Awpefli/, as a gift. AI'KT/I' (TIVOS), in the manner (of). Xdpiv (TIVOS), for the sake (of). 1598. NOTE. Some of these can be explained as accusatives of specification (1595), others as cognate-accusatives (1587 1594), whil& others are of uncertain origin. ACCUSATIVE OF EXTENT 1599. The accusative is used to denote extent of time or of space. 'EvTavQa ffjLfivfv fjfjitpds eVrd, there he remained seven days (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 6 ). 'E8aKpvf TroXiiv XP v "> he wept a long time (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 2 ). Af o-irov8a\ fviavTov fvovTai, the truce is to be for a year (Thuc. 4, 118 7 ). '\ir- f%fi fj nXdraia TWV Qqftfav j> ovrt ir\ovv iro\vv ovTt 08 6 v, Megara is not a long voyage or land-journey distant from Syracuse (Thuc. 6, 49 4 ). M t K p 6 v irpoiovra, advancing a short distance (Xen. Anab. 2, I 6 ). 1600. NOTE. The question "how old?" is answered by yeyovws (Lat. natus) with the accusative of the years. Ov8(ira> ("IKOO-IV (TTJ yeyovws, not yet twenty years old (Xen. Mem. 3, 6 1 ). Compounds of eras, year, can also be used ; as TpiaKovTafrfjs, contr. Attic TpidKovrovrrjs, thirty years old- 1601. NOTE. The question " since when ?" is generally answered by the accusative with an ordinal number, counting in the current day,, month, or year ; ovroo-t is sometimes added. The article is omitted. Tlpwrayopas eViSeSij/^Kf TpirTj v fj8tj fifttpav, Protagoras has been in town now two days = since the day before yesterday or is now in town the third day (Plat. Prot. 309 1 '). 'Ef3o~6p,r)v f)pepav TTJS Qvyarpbs aurw TfT\(vrr)Kvids, when his daughter had died six days before = was dead now the seventh day (Aeschin. 3, 77). Trjs ievvvfu, clothe ; e/cSuw, Unclothe ; aTroorep^o), tofjucu, deprive ; a-vXdw, rob. Ov TOVT epwTw tipus TOVS TO>V trpoyovotv TU>V {}p.(Tfpa>v mvo'tvovs, I will remind you of the dangers of your ancestors (Xen. Anab. 3, 1 98 ACCUSATIVE 1606 2 U ). bioydratv TTJV dvyartpa fttpvirTt rov ddvarov rov dt>8p6s, Diogeiton concealed from his daughter the death of her husbaivl (Lys. 32, 7). 2 ravra /xij irtiButv, not convincing you of this thing (Soph. Oed. Col. 797). T6i> tavrov (sc. x iT ^ va ) fKflvov T)pif(rt, he put his own (sc. tunic) on the other boy (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 17 ). 'ExScvv fjLt xpqa-njpidv cVdqra, stripping me of the oracular garment (Aesch. Ag. 1269). 'Endvovs rd orrXa d(pj)pr)fji(da, we have deprived those men of their arms (Xen. Cyr. 7, S 79 ). Tfjv 6tbv rovs , he washed the dried spray from his skin (Od. 6, 224). Et /J.TJ aipclo-0ai nvos n (1682) ; or less often an accusative of the person and a genitive of the thing, as aV arparriyiov OVK fTTfidovro TO. t^ayyeKQevra, the majority of the generals were not convinced of the report (Hdt. 8, 81 2 ). 1609. Object- Accusative and Predicate- Accusative. 1. Verbs de- noting to call, to regard, to make, to choose, to appoint, to show oneself as, can take a predicate-accusative belonging to the objective-ac- cusative. 2. Such verbs are : oyo/zaa>, Ka\ca>, a7roKaA.e'a>, A.eya>, Trpo, ^yco/*at, qpfevj to regard, to consider ; 1614 ACCUSATIVE 99 to mak& ; a.' piop.ai, to choOS'i ; d-TroSei'/ci vp.*., K(x$<.' av8pa flvai, they name the man (to be) a sophist (Plat. Prof. 311 e ). 1611. NOTE. With many other verbs a predicate-accusative may be used in connection with the object-accusative ; as eSw/ca Swpeav ra Avrpa, I gave the ransom as a gift (Dem. 19, 170). See 1316. 1612. NOTE. 1. With verbs signifying to groic, to nourish, to lift up, and the like, the adjectives /xeyas, great, vi/a/Ao's, high, yuerew/Do?, raised up aloft, on high, and some others, can be added as a proleptic predicate (prolepsis, TrpoATji/us = anticipation), showing the effect of the action of the verb The active construction has two accusatives, the passive two nominatives. "Eva nva ael 8rjp.os euo$e rptfpfiv T( K.OI avtiv peyav, the people always have the habit of maintaining and exalting some one man to be great (Plat. Rep. 565 C ). Mtyas f< p.iKpov &i\iiriros rjv^r/Tat, Philip has grown great from being small (Dem. 9, 21). Merewpov? f(K.6p.icrav ras dp.df-ds, they carried the waggons raised up (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 8 ). "Htpero TO v^os rov rd^ovs p-(ya, the height of the wall was made considerable (Thuc. 2, 75 4 ). Dem. 19, 249. 2. The proleptic predicate is seldom a noun ; as UepiKA^s TOU? vte'ds tTTTreds cStSaev, Pericles taught his sons to be horsemen (Plat. Meno 94 b ). 1613. NOTE. When the verb is changed to the passive, both accusatives become nominatives. O Trora/jios KaAeirai Maptrv'ds, the river is called Marsyas (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 8 ). 1614. NOTE. The passive of verbs meaning to call is sometimes 100 ACCUSATIVE 1615 ; as vw KoXaKc?...dKoi;ouoru', noio they are called fawners (Dem. 18, 46). So Xay^avw serves as passive to K\r)p6w, choose by lot; as Upeu's, I was chosen (by lot) priest (Dem. 57, 47). 1615. Object- Accusative and Cognate- Accusative. 1. A transitive verb may have a cognate-accusative in addition to the object-ac- cusative. "EKCUTTOI' fvepytTfiv TTJV /jiyiV iraibav TratSddv avros eVai'Sevev, my father taught me the discipline of boys (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3 s7 ). KaXouo-i fie TOVTO TO ovofia, they call me this name (Xen. Oec. 7, 3). IIardm nva rf)v arlpov Tavrrjv TrXjjyiji/, to strike any one this shameful blow (Plat. Gorg. 527 d ). MeXrjros /it fypd^aTo TTJV ypa(pr)v ravrrjv, Meletus brought this impeachment against me (Plat. Apol. 19). "QpKaxrav irdvras TOVS (rrpartwras' TOVS p.(yiV TTO\ITU>V aKovfiv, to 6e ill spoken of by the citizens (Isoc. 4, 77). IloXXa KOI iravroC aKovovcrds KO/ca, (women) called all kinds of abusive things (Ar. Thesm. 388). Kas K\vov s dnoSaxTd, what of the city he has taken, he will return (Dem. 19, 151). Borjddv e/JouXovTo rots iavrS>v ^vyytvtaiv, they desired to help their own kinsmen (Thuc. 6, 6 1 ). To6V avrS>v ov -^apitv ; is not this quality of theirs charming ? (Plat. Rep. 426*). 2. Genitive of Source or Cause. 'Opjjpou J lAtd?, Homer's Iliad. *Aio-/xa 2t/xv f]fjup>v 686s, a journey of three days (Xen. Hell. 3, 2 11 ). Mto-#6y rtrrapw fufjvatv, pay for four months (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 12 ). 4. Genitive of Material or Contents. *AXo-or f)fjLfpa>v Sfvdpav, a grove of cultivated trees (Xen. Anab. 5, 3 12 ). Bowi/ d-ye'X^, a herd of cattle (Xen. Mem. 3, II 5 ). Kpr/vr) ijfie'ot vdaros, a spring of fresh water (Xen. Anab. 6, 4 4 ). "A/xa^ai onrov, waggons ( = waggon-loads) of corn (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4 18 ). Srari^p xpvvov, a stater of gold (Plat. Euthyd. 299). 5. Genitive of Value. Tpi&Kovra raXavrcav ovtria, an estate of thirty talents (Lys. 29, 2). XiX/wv 8paxpo>v Slier), a suit for a thousand drachmae (Dem. 55, 25). 6. Partitive Genitive, denoting the whole, the governing word expressing the part. 1621 4 GENITIVE 103 'AvTjp TOV 8r)fjiov, a man of the people (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2 22 ). "Hpurv TOV oXov 0-TpaTtvfj.aTos, half of the whole army (Xen. Anab. 6, 2 10 ). MeVov f)f*.fpds, the middle of the day (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 8 ). 'Hp.S>v ov8fis, none of us (Xen. Anab. 3, I 16 ). IIoXXo T>V V7rovyia>v, many of the draught-animals (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 5 ). *Hv TI TOV Tfixovs do-dives, a part (= something) of the wall was weak (Thuc. 7, 4 2 ). 'Ev Tols dpiv, among the best of the Persians (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 1 ). T Q (pi\d yvvaiKV di>0pv, the good among men (Ar. Plut. 495). 2vv Tols irapoixri TOJV TftarTtav, with those presert of his faithful attendants (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 15 ). Totiy p.tv avrwv diTfuTeivt, TOVS 8' ee/3aXev, slew some of them and banished others (Xen. Anab. 1, I 7 ). 7. Objective Genitive, expressing the object of an action or feeling. 'O V iro\p.io)v, the fear of the enemy (which others feel toward them). Am TO Ilav o-av iov /MO-OS, through the hatred of(= against} Pausanias (Thuc. 1, 96 1 ). Al8S)... avTov, respect toward himself (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 19 ). 'ApT^s 8t8d v o s KapTepfi v 6 e S> v opKovs, the oaths (sworn in the name) of the gods (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 10 ). Bi'a f)pS>v, in spite of us (Thuc. 1, 68 4 ). Ti7v T&V K ptia-a-ov av 8ov\fLdv, servitude to the stronger (Thuc. 1, 8 3 ). At' dpl^idv aXXi^Xwv, through non-intercourse with each other (Thuc. 1, 3 4 ). 'ETT! TI)V T>V /Sap- /3 a p to v , to a war against the barbarians (Isoc. 15, 57). * 6 e a> v tvxus, prayers to the gods (Plat. Phaedr. 244 e ). 'Ev diro/3do-fi TTJ s y fj s, in a descent upon the land (Thuc. 1, 108 4 ). Tfjs T>V 'Adijvaiwv tvvoids, from good will toward the Greeks (Xen. Anab. 4, 7 20 ). 'Eyupdrfia fi8ovrjs, mode- ration in pleasure (Isoc. 1, 21). 8. Subjective Genitive, expressing the subject of an action or feeling. 'O V TroXe/uW, the fear of the enemy (which they feel). 'H ? a big thing (or monster) of a wild boar (Hdt. 1, 36 1 ). 2(ptvo'ovr)TS>v Tra/iTToAu TI XPVP* 1 ' a ver y I ar 9 e body of slingers (Xen. Cyr. 2, I 5 ). 1623. NOTE. The Latin genitive or ablative of quality is expressed in Greek by the accusative of specification (1595), or by an adjective and an infinitive (2221). A genitive of characteristic occurs some- times in Greek, but only as a predicate- genitive (1634). 1624. NOTE. Expressions like the Latin quid novi ? what new ? are rendered in Greek by TI KOIVOV, not by TI muvov. The adjective must here agree with the pronoun. 1625. NOTE. An adjective generally agrees in gender with the partitive genitive depending on it. 'O \oiirbs TOV xpovov, the, rest of the time (Dem. 15, 16). Trjs yfjs TJ dpicrrr), the best part of the land (Thuc. 1, 2 3 ). 2iVov TOV ^io-uv, half of the corn (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 1 ). But sometimes the neuter is used, pepos, part, being understood ; as T>V iro\euia>v TO iro\v (for ot TroXXoi), the greater part of the enemy (Xen. Anab. 4, 6 a4 ). 1626. NOTE. A substantive may have two genitives depending on it ; usually they are in different relations. Ata TO CLVTUV 8tos TOV OavaTov, through their own fear of death (Plat. Phaedo, 85*). "Innov 8po/*o? f)p.(pds, a day's run for a horse (Dem. 19, 273). Twv 'I < v a stfange Dlonysiac chorus of old men (Plat. Leg. 665 b ). 1627. NOTE. The partitive genitive depending on a neuter pronoun or adjective is often used to denote the degree or extent. 1631 GENITIVE 105 Els TOCTOVTOV flo~i T 6\fj.T] s d(plyp,evoi, to so great a degree of boldness have they arrived (Lys. 12, 22). Els TOVTO S' dpadids rJKeis, thou art come to this pitch of ignorance (Eur. Andr. 170). 'Eirl p.eya Swdpews f'x^p^o-av, they advanced to a great degree of power (Thuc. 1, 118 2 ). 'Ev Travrl ddipias, in the extremity of despondency (Thuc. 7, 55 1 ). 1628. NOTE. The partitive genitive alone seldom appears as the subject of a verb. *E(pao-av ftrifuyvvvai o-(pa>v re irpbs exeivovs Kal fKfivu>v Trpos eavTovs, they said some of their own men had mingled with them, and some of them with their own men (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 16 ). *Ho-av *Av8pioi.,.Kal AlyivrjT&v T>V firoiKtav, there were Andrians...and Aeginetans of the colonists (Thuc. 8, 69 2 ). Here the genitives may be said to depend on rls or pepos understood. 1629. NOTE. Instead of the objective genitive, the dative is often used (as in 1757, 1770) ; so also a preposition and its case. Tr)i> irapa 0eS>v evvoiav, the good will of the gods (Dem. 2, 22). 'O OTTO TWV (po/Bos, the fear (which we have) of the enemy. 1630. NOTE. The attributive genitives take the attributive position as regards the article (1406, 1408) ; but the partitive genitive (1410) and the genitive of personal pronouns (1455) take the predicate position. (B) PREDICATE-GENITIVE 1631. With copulative verbs (1205) a genitive may form a predicate like a noun or an adjective. Such a predicate-genitive stands in relations similar to those of the attributive-genitive. 1. Possessive Genitive. Bo to) TWV TI TroXtf eoT-at, the city will belong to the Boeotians (Lys. 12, 58). C H VIKT) T >v 'A.6ijvaia>v tyiyvero, the victory belonged to the Athenians (Thuc. 1, 63 2 ). TOVTO Tovvop.d tori fiifpycrovvTos, this name belongs to a benefactor (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2 9 ). 2. Genitive of Source or Cause. 'O vofiof fo~nv ovros ApditovTos, this law is Draco's (Dem. 23, 51). Totovrwi' fv rfv 6 KTO>, the walls were eight stades in length (Thuc. 4, 66 4 ). Tot) Mapcrvov TO fSpos tariv f?Koo~i K at TT f VT f iro8>v, the breadth of the Marsyas is twenty-five feet (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 s ). *Hv (T>V tos rpia v fi TIS rpiflicoi/ra, one ought to marry token one is thirty years old (Plat. Leg. 721"). 4. Genitive of Material. Ot v ff p68a>v %V e IT TO. tar >v fK\r)dr), Solon was called one of the seven wise men (Isoc. 15, 235). Hv *at ovros KOI ScoKpanjy T > v d/ji(pi MfXr/TOK v, both he and Socrates were of those who served at Miletus (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 3 ). TOVTCDV ytvov, become one of these (Ai. Nub. 107). 7. Objective Genitive. Ov T>V K a K o v p y u> v O?KTOS, dAAa T^S St'/oys, compassion is not for the evil-doers, but for justice (Eur. frag. 272). 1632. NOTE. Instead of a predicate-genitive of measure to express size, a predicate- nominative may be used; as TOW Matdvopov TO evpo? 8vo irXcOpa (for ovolv irXtOpow), the breadth of the Maeander is two plethra (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 5 ). 1633. NOTE. A peculiar expression is eauroC ytyveo-tfai, to be oneself, in one's right mind (Dem. 2, 30 ; 4, 7). So ofy eavrov emu or yiyveorQai, to be no longer master of oneself, to be beside oneself, to be rapt (Plat. Phaedr. 250*) ; similar to this are (OVK) eV eavrov elvat and (OVK) eVros avrov tlvai and e^o) avrov elvai. 1634. NOTE. 1. Tho possessive predicate-genitive is often used to denote the one whose peculiarity, characteristic, business, or duty it is to do anything. The subject is usually an infinitive. Tot) ptv a p %o vr 6 s e'ori TO npotrrdrrfiv 5 TI \prj irowlv, rov 8t dp^Ofifvov TO nddta-dcu, it is the business of a commander to order what it is necessary to do, and that of the one commanded to obey (Xen. Mem. 3, 9"). Als ei-anapriiv TOVTOV OVK dvbpbs V rfTT TT o\\ov TTOI/OU, I see this to be of much difficulty (Eur. Phoen. 719). 1637. The predicate-genitive may relate to the object of a verb. Ov K/HTO/SouXoi/ evofu^fS eivai r v av 6 p d> TT v 6 pa a- e a> v ; did you not regard Critobulus as one of the modest rather than one of the forward ? (Xen. Mem. 1, 3 8 ). Bao-tXevy vop,iet KOI v/xar tavTov eivai, the King looks upon you as belonging to him (Xen. Anab. 2, I 11 ). AovXov roS' (liras, what you mention belongs to a slave (Eur., Phoen. 392). Tov 8t<])pov Tois rjvioxois f-rroirjcrfv la"xypa>v {-vXwv, the seat for drivers he made of strong pieces of wood (Xen. Cyr. 6, I 29 ). 'E/xe des rwv 7re7retv TrpayfjiaTODv (TdiTrfpiav avT\ rfjs fv roi \tyetv p^aptros aipflo-dat, I think it is the duty of an upright citizen to prefer the advancement of public business to the gratification given in making a speech (Dem. 3, 21). KdXXapoi/ fTTfypd^faro T S> v ffj.S>v SovXwv, he made Callarus, one of my slaves, defendant (Dem. 55, 31). (c) GENITIVE WITH VERBS 1638. Any verb whose action affects its object only in part may take the genitive (1619, 6). Aaftovras TOV fSapftapiKov a-rparov, taking a part of the barbarian army (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 7 ). Twv (< rfjs (rroas 6ir\o>v KatfeXoirer, having taken down some of the weapons from the portico (Xen. Hell. 5, 4 8 ). 'A^iel? rS>v algjMJUbrw, sending away some of the prisoners (Xen. Anab. 7, 4 B ). Tfjs yijs (Ttpov, they ravaged part of the land (Thuc. 1, 30 2 ). Twv tavrS>v nXtyovTai, they will steal of their own (Xen. Cyr. 7, 4 13 ). 1639. NOTE. 'Ev fvv p,Ta8i86vTfs, imparting our joys (Xen. Oec. 9, 12). noXe'/xov (cat f^axi s v M er ^ I/ vr^i of war and battle there fell to her no share (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2 28 ). OVK aJtTo TrpooTjKfiv ovftfvi apxfjs, he believed no one to have concern in government (Xen. Cyr. 8, I 37 ). Oi diroXavovrts TK>V au>v dyadwv, those enjoying your good fortune (Xen. Oec. 12, 7). "Ovaiadt TOVTU>V, may you enjoy these (Dem. 28, 20). Evw^oO rov \6yov, feast on the discourse (Plat. Rep. 352 b ). 1642. NOTE. When the whole object is referred to, these verbs have the accusative (jueVeo-Ti and Trpoo-^Kct the nominative). Ov /x6Te'Xa/3e TO TrtpTTTov fjLepos ru>v -^(pav , he did not get the fifth part of the votes (Plat. Apol. 36 a ). 'A7ro\av(iv irdvra, to enjoy all things. 'Ei/ d;/io- Kparta /xeVeo-rt irdtviwV irpaypaTw, take hold of affairs (Dem. 1, 20). NO/LUOJ/ e^eo-^at, to hold on to the laws (Men. Mon. 380). 'Ev rfj exop-evrj e p. o v K\IVT), on the couch next to ( = touching) me. (Plat. Symp. 217 d ). Teoi/ opcov rf)s ^a)pa?...7rt/3aii/etv, to tread upon the borders of the country (Plat. Leg. 778 e ). Tov Xoyov fjpxrro, he began his speech (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 7 ). (pvyfjs px etv > ^ begin flight (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 17 ). nftpfio-ai/Tey TOV ^wpt'ov, having made an attempt on the place (Thuc. 1, 61 3 ). U.tip^p,fvoi. ravins rijs Tti^eco?, trying this order of march (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 s *). 1645. NOTE. To begin with anything is apxofj-at O.TTO or IK (Plat. Symp. 186 b ; Xen. Cyr. 2, 2 2 ). 1646. NOTE. Poetic and Ionic Spao-o-o/xat, to grasp, and Epic TCTayvv (ray-), taking hold of, also govern the genitive (72. 13, 393 ; 11. 1, 591). Poetic A.aoju,ai, grasp, takes the accusative ; so also the Attic poetic A.au/xa.i. In Pindar Oiyydw and CUTTO/ACII are also found with the dative. 1647. NOTE. 1. The actives Xa/x./?avo>, x w > an ^ <"p>, are found in poetry (especially in Homer) with the genitive of the part held or grasped. Ao/3t lv Tiva rr 08 6 s, to take any one by the foot (II. 10, 490). 'EXeli' Tiva xpoy (II. 1, 323). Xetpoy %X flv Ttva (H- ^t 154). 2. Similarly ayw, to lead, and verbs of pulling. Bovv aytiv ntpdav, to lead an ox by the horns (Od. 3, 439). ff EX(c)> rtva 7ro86s, to drag any one by the foot (II. 17, 289). 'Epveiv (Od. 17, 479). K6p/s fTTia-irav (Eur. Tro. 882). T^v- OVTOS apirdvds (Eur. Cycl. 400). Aetv iro86s, to bind by the foot (II. 23, 854). 110 GENITIVE 1648 3. Such poetic constructions as above are very rare in prose. *E\afiov rf)s vT)s rbv 'Opovrav, they seized Orontes by the girdle (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 10 ). "Aytiv rfjs fjvids TOV lirnov, to lead the horse by the bridle (Xen. Eques. 6, 9). Ta vrjiria irai8ia 8fav/u.ai, to reach after ; yXi^oaai, to strive after ; ilrmroUapu, /neraTroie'o/tai, to claim ; Tuy^avw, to attain, to hit upon ; efiKve'oyaai, fiKV0(ji.ai, to hit, to arrive at ; d/xapravw, diroTvy^a^w, to miss ; urv^ew, to fail, to fail to obtain ; v, they hunger after money (Xen. Symp. 4, 36). ' \v6pv a\\orpivp*6a /3ai/ KaXa>i> Tt *dyad>v tpyav t^invtWai, to arrive at noble and good works (Xen. Mem. 2, 1 s0 ). OVK ((piKvovfjMi TOV fjifytdovs rutv TrpdypMTotv, I do not attain (with my speech) the greatness of the matter (Isoc. 4, 187). Ov8ds Tjpapraixv dv8pos, no one missed a man (Xen. Anab. 3, 4 16 ). TS>v Smaiwv ovStvos drvxwds, you will not fail in getting what is right (Xen. Hell. 3, I 22 ). 2v dya6S>v ri tpa ; what of good things does he love ? (Plat. Symp. 204 d ). Similarly apaprdvca ri, epyov, etc. ; as Men. Mon. 724. 1651. NOTE. 1. A number of poetic verbs of this class govern the genitive. 'Av8p>v Todfai, you shoot (with the bow) at men (Od. 22, 27). 'Ourrevo-oi/ MeveXaou, shoot arrows at Menelaus (II. 4, 100). *EKup6d.> op-ai, forget ; , Kijoofji.a.1, Trpovoc'w and Trpovocofuu, firifjL\ofj.ai, to care for, to take care of ; MvjUofuut to lay to heart, to take concern for ; evrpcVo/uu, to give heed or care to; /xcXet (/MM*rtroc\ it is a care (to me) ; /xera/AeXei (/uoi TII/OS), to repent ; d/ivrj/xove'a), to be unmindful of ; d^povna-Ttw, to be heedless of; d/xeXew, to neglect; oArytope'to, to regard lightly; Kara, to despise. TOVTOJV oiiSds fjLffj.vrjTai, no one remembers these things (Xen. Anab. 5, S 25 ). T?)y dpxrjs fii>T)p.ovfvop.v, we call to mind the beginning (Isoc. 1, 47). At'Sot/m PLT) firi\ado)fj.fda TT)S ouca&e odov, I am afraid lest we may forget the way home (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 ?5 ). Twv eViKeoTdTa>v...v dSeXcpov, he who cares for a brother cares for himself (Xen. 8, 7 15 ). 'Evdvp*'iV T07rV 7ro\\S>v 86r)s /it'Xet ,- what care is there to us of the opinion of the many ? (Plat. Crito, 44 b ). Til/ dyadadS>v dp.vr)fj.ovf1v, to be unmindful of the good (Lys. 31, 25). Tijs dperrjs dp.f\e1v, to neglect virtue (Isoc. 1, 48). Mr)8(vos oXi-ywpetre p.r)8e Karafppovf'iTf rStv 7rpo(rrfTayp.fva)v, do not regard lightly or despise any of my injunctions (Isoc. 3, 48). 1654. NOTE. With verbs of remembering and forgetting, the object may be in the accusative, and is always so if a neuter pronoun. 'Eav ra irapfXrjXvdora fjLvr/fjiovfvrjs, if you remember the past (Isoc. 2, 35). Ei$...Tfrf rvxas rcis KdKas fVeXd^oi/ro, would that they had forgotten the evil chances (Eur. Hel. 262-265). Tt yap, & iral, pfpvrjaai fKtiva; do you remember these things (Xeu. Cyr. 1, 6 s ). 1 655. NOTE. The active dva-, vTro-fjupvya-Kta, remind, usually governs a double accusative (1605) ; occasionally an accusative of the person and a genitive of the thing ; as /AT/ p dva/xvT/o-7/s AcaKwv, do not remind me of ills (Eur. Ale. 1045). See 1607. 1656. NOTE. TEi'0v/xeo/>uH governs the accusative when it means to take into consideration ; as in Thuc. 5, 32 1 . 1657. NOTE. Mt'Aei sometimes has the nominative instead of the genitive, but rarely in prose. 'Eopral 7rart /K'Xovv vvv fuv p. v T) a d , to have a care of (Od. 9, 275). MfTarptirop-ai, care for (II. 9, 630). TTj/xeXe'w, to take care of (Eur. Iph. Taur. 311). In II. 6, 222, we find fufivr^tm with the ace. : TiJSea ov ; similar examples are rare. 1661. NOTE. Tragic are /^eAw and /teXo/ucu, to care for ; in poetry both also in the sense, to be a care to. BpoT&v fjie\eiv, to care for mortals (Aesch. Ag. 370). 2trco> p.e\((r6f, prepare (= have a care of) the viands (Eur. Hipp. 109). 'E/*ot' K( ravTa /xeXijo-eTat, these things shall be my concern (II. 1, 523). In Homer /ue/^Xws, caring for (II. 13, 297). MeX?7#fi's, active in Soph. Aj. 1185. 1662. NOTE. Occasionally prose verbs meaning to care for, which regularly take the accusative are found with the genitive OVK Ai> CTTparpdrjv (Soph. Aj. 1117). 'Evvofop,ai (Eur. Med. 47). 1663. 1. Verbs of mental or sensory perception, as to perceive, to understand, to hear, to smell, to taste, govern the genitive. 2. Such verbs are : cuo-0avo/xai, to perceive ; , d/cpoaofiat, to hear ; i, to smell (active); oo>, to smell of; yeuo/iat, taste. Fevw, to give a taste of, has the accusative of the person and the genitive of 8 114 GENITIVE 1664 the thing, as in Plat. Leg, 634* ; so sometimes een-iaa>, to entertain, to feast any one (Plat. Phaedr. 227 b ). Tys Kpavyrfs fja-dovro, they perceived the shouting (Xen. Hell. 4, 4 4 ). 'AXXjjXwi/ truvtfa-av, they understood each other (Thuc. 1, 3 5 ). Qopvftov rjaovvt, he heard the murmur (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 16 ). T>v papTvputv aK^Koare, you have heard the witnesses (Lys. 1, 43). \6yov aKpoda-dai, to listen to a speech (Thuc. 6, 17 3 ). 'Afcpow/iei/ot rov aSoirof, hearing the singer (Xeu. Cyr. 1, 3 10 ). ivatv ocrfppaivofuu, I smell onions (Ar. Ran. 654). "Ofovtri d/ji(3po, o n Xtyopev, misunderstanding what we say, lit. each other in what we say (Plat. Gorg. 517). 'Eirvdovro TTJJ Hv\ov KoretXr;^- fj^vrjs, they found out about Pylus being taken (Thuc. 4, 6 1 ). Tov oixaSc ir\ov 8 if V etSdrwv o TI Xt'yovert xal o rt iroiovcriv, contemplate those who have knowledge, what they say and what they do (Xen. Mem. 3, 6 17 ). T ov Tof-orov ov KaXS)s f\(i. Xeyeiv, Sri..., it would not be right to say of a bowman that... (Plat Rep. 439 b ). These genitives may usually be considered as depending on an omitted TOVTO or roSt, which is actually found in some examples; as Tovro...(iratvflv T>V dvdptov, to praise this in (of ') the men (Plat. Menex. 241 b ). We thus have a possessive genitive (1631, 1). 2. So the genitive may depend on an interrogative or relative. T fit T>V iTrirtav olti ; what then do you think of horses? (Plat. Rep. 459 b ). TJ}? [iT)Tpos...pdv (v ols vvv toTiv, about to tell of my mother, in what circumstances she now is (Soph. Trach. 1122). 1665. NOTE. Verbs signifying to perceive, to learn, to hear, and the like, often take the accusative of the thing. If a word denoting the person from whom anything is heard, learned, etc., is also given, it is in the genitive of source (1631, 2). Tt xaX7r6i' yo-drj&m rov/xov ftiov ; what have you perceived disagreeable in my mode of life ? (Xen. Mem. 1, 6 4 ). njrvo-/iiji' ravra ro>v v Trwddvop-ai on OVK aftarov eWt TO opos, from them I learn that the mountains are not im- passible (Xen. Anab. 4, 6 17 ). 1666. NOTE. 'A/cov'w with the genitive of the person may also mean to obey ; as 2,/jt.epSi.os fiao-iXfjos doviv, to obey King Smerdis (Hdt. 3, 62). 1667. NOTE. "Ou>, to smell of, may take a second genitive of the source of the odour ; as rJ/s Kc p.vpov, / smell of perfume from the head = my head smells of perfume (Ar. Eccl. 524). 1668. NOTE. A number of verbs of perception are poetic or dialectic. They may take a genitive of the person or of the thing or of both ; but K\VW, to hear, has only the accusative of the thing (except in the formula KfK\vre /*cv /xc^wv, hear my speech, as Od. 10, 189). Tivos K\vovres ; obeying whom? (Eur. Cycl. 119). 'AKOV- d^ovTcu. doi8ov, they listen to the bard (Od. 9, 7). KeVAvre' /*eC pvdov, hear my speech (II. 3, 86). "A.U , to be king over, to rule ; Tvpawevd), Tvpawew, to be absolute ruler (tyrant) over ; Kupiew to be lord or master over ; Kpare'w, to be master of ; T/y'o/xeu, to lead ; o-rparrjyew, to command, to be general ; vauap^e'w, to command (ships), to be admiral. 'Av6pa>iro)v ap^fiv, to rule men (Xen. Cyr. 1, I 3 ). *Epa>s rS>v ftaa-tXew ftao-iXfVd, Love is king of the gods (Plat. Symp. 195). IloXv^par^j 2a/*ou rvpavviav, Polycrates being ruler of Samos (Thuc. 1, 13 s ). 'O Mivcas T^S vvv 116 GENITIVE 1670 'E\\T)viKijs 6a\do- /3poToir rfjv y\xr(rav, oi>xi r&pya irdvff' f)yov)ifVT)v, I see among mankind the tongue and not the deeds bearing rule in everything (Soph. Phil. 99). (Meifii'as) ras 7ro/x7r&r i^yeiTo, Meidias conducted the processions (Dem. 21, 174). 1671. NOTE. 1. Kpareto with the accusative means to conquer. K.paTr)(ravTfs TOVS fiapfidpovs, having conquered the barbarians (Isoc. 4, 35). Hdvras (tpdrei, (Socrates) vanquished all (Plat. Symp. 220"). But with the genitive it means be become or to be master of ; as upareiv ^wpi'ov, TTJS 0V/J.OV, rSav ei'avTtwv. 2. 'Hyeo/iai with the dative means to be a leader, to govern. Ot TOIOVTOI av8pfs fjyovvTO rais TrdXeeriv (Plat. Meno, 99 b ). So f have charge of, be set over ; as 17 ^V\TI rw crw/xari tiri&raTf I, the soul is set over the body (Plat. Gory. 466 d ). 1672. NOTE. These govern the genitive on account of the pre- position they contain. npoionjfii Ttvd TIVOS, to set over (Plat. Lach. 197 d ). Hpoiv yepoixras, villages stored with many excellent provisions (Xen. Anab. 4, G 27 ). $1X17771-0? xP 1 ll Ji ^ Tmv fviropel, Philip has plenty of treasure (Dem. 18, 235). Ot> xpiJa-iou, aXXa...fw^y dyadfjs. to be rich, not in gold, but in a good life (Plat. Rep. 521 a ). v...8f'i, there is need of ^lingers (Xen. Anab. 3, 3 16 ). Ae^o-erai 8opv(p6p(ov, he will have need of guards (Xen. Hier. 10, 1). 'Avdpairav dirop&v, wanting in men (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 3 ). TOUTOV f\\fiirofjifv, we are deficient in this (Thuc. 1, 80 4 ). 'ErraiVov... of/wore vrravi(Tf, you never lack praise (Xen. Hier. 1, 14). 'A.v8p>v ray vavs irXrjpovv, to furnish ( = fill) the ships with men (Xen. Hell. 6, I 11 ). Seo-ay^eVor TT\OVTOV TTJV ^VXTJV e 8' 6X/yov Sei (lit. nor does it want little, i.e. it wants all) ; both expressions mean far from it, not at all (Dem. 54, 40 ; 19, 184). 118 GENITIVE 1678 1678. NOTE. 1. Ao appears personally in Homer only in //. 18, 100, impersonally 8fl only in II. 9, 337. 2. For Set with an accusative of the person (instead of the dative) and a genitive of the thing, see 1580. 3. The expression \prj / TIVOS, I have need of some- thing, is epic. Tt p ( xpt) fjLtrrtpos aivov ; what need have I of praise for my mother ? (Od. 21, 110) ; so the equivalent XP* f^ Tii/or (some- times with fuet or yiyvtrai. or m) ; as II. 9, 608, and Od. 4, 634. 1679. NOTE. Examples of poetic verbs of this class : NOOTOIO xorijJW, wishing for a return (Od. 8, 156). O' irovav KfXPWfOa ; do I not experience cares ? (Eur. Med. 334). -Ao-eo-tfe K\av0poio, sate yourselves with wailing (II. 24, 717). *Eya> pt', t separate ; vo, to remove ; to loose, to free / dTroAXacro'w, I\ev@p6w, d.Tro\vicfjLai, to abate ; \(f>(i(a, to have relief from ; orepur/ca), aTrooTepew, a^atpeofjMt, to deprive (1682) ; ep, to be pure, free from. 'ETTitm^/ii; xeopifo/it'i/i; dprn)s, knowledge separated from virtue (Plat. Menex. 246*). 'An-^XXa-y^Vot TOVTWI/ (T>V irovtav), released from these toils (Xen. Anab. 4, 3 s ). 'A.iro\6 p f) or a I...TW 7rpe KOI \6ya>v v IT 1 1 a t, to yield the path to the elder, and to give place in conversation (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 16 ). TOVTOVS rijs nyav KoXa/eei'a? en-Mr^o-fTe, restrain these people from their adulation (Dem. 45, 88). "ETTta-xov rrjs Tet^tVecof, they ceased from building the wall (Xen. Hell. 6, 5 4 ). Xp?7 fJiTjTt xprjp.dTa>v (pdde&dai prjTt TTQVOSV, it is necessary to spare neither money nor toil (Plat. Phaedo, 78 a ). "E-n-ava-av Ttp-odeov TTJS trrpijTriyids, they deposed Timotheus from the command (Xen. Hell. 6, 2 13 ). *EX?7e rfjs drjpds, he ceased from the hunt (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4 21 ). Ov naveo-de rfjs poxdypicis, you do not cease from your rascality (Ar. Lysist. 1160). rvp.vav peQitvTai, they leave off bodily exercise (Plat. Rep. 537 b ). A&x^a rf/s oSi/vys, it rests from pain (Plat. Phaedr. 251 d ). 'H vfjcros ov no\v Sie'^ei rf)s fjirtipov, the island is not far distant from the mainland (Thuc. 3, 51 3 ). Ov8ev Bioicrfis Xaipe(pa>vTos, you will not differ at all from Chaerephon (Ar. Nub. 503). 1681. NOTE. Instead of the genitive alone, d-n-o with the genitive is sometimes used. 1682. NOTE. Srepio-Kw and a.irov xP r l^ Tv XXwi' d(paipovp.(vot xp^/iara, taking away property from others (Xen. Mem. 1, 53). 1683. NOTE. The poets (chiefly Homer) use the genitive of separation with verbs of motion in cases where a preposition would be necessary in prose. OvXv p. no to KaTr)\dop.fv, we descended from Olympus (II. 20, 125). 'OSvtrija Staxcero ofo So polo, he wished to drive Ulysses from his own home (Od. 18, 8). Bddpcav urrao-0e, rise from the steps (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 142). Tlv6>vos (fids, thou didst come from Pytho (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 152). 1684. NOTE. 1. Some verbs which govern a genitive of separation are poetic. XdovTo KfXtvdov, they retired from the way (II. 11, 120 GENITIVE 1685 504). OVK d\v(Tov popov (caict'orov, they shall not escape a most wretched fate (Soph. Ant, 488). MJJTTO) TIS (put firm TroXe'/toto, let no one ever retire from the battle (II. 17, 422) ; so (pvopcu, defend (II. 5, 456), and others. 2. Some prose -verbs govern a genitive of separation only in poetry or in dialectic prose. 2x^o-e0-0e *Apr)os, ye shall be restrained from war (H. 13, 630). At K.(V Tv8eos viov airoa-xfl -iX/ou frpjjs, if she will restrain the son of Tydeus from sacred Ilium (II. 6, 277). *E o- x " T T *)f dy, to relieve, to set free (Eur. Or. 1341) ; Se'co, to bind (Od. 4, 380) ; 6pi'o>, separate (Hdt. 2, 16) ; povoa, deprive (Hdt. 8, 62) ; ^wpe'w, withdraw (II. 15, 655). 3. In poetry verbs compounded with airo sometimes govern the simple genitive where in prose the preposition with the genitive would be used. So p.fdi(m)fii, to remove, to liberate, in tragedy (also Thuc. 2, 67 1 ). Mfdtrjfu, to let go (Horn., Hdt.). 'YirUvai, to let go (Hdt.). 'AVB//U (Eur., AT. ; also Thuc. 7, 43 7 ). 4. Homeric dvaTrve'w with the genitive, to rest from, lit. to breathe again ; as OUTO> KCV Tpwes avfTrvevo-av Kai<6- nyros, thus would the Trojans have had a respite from destruction (II. 11, 382). 1685. NOTE. 1. Ai^yw, to cease from, also has the accusative in Homer, besides the genitive or participle. 2. Some verbs of depriving which govern the genitive are only poetic. KfnaSov, deprived (Od. 21, 153). 'Apeipw, (Od. 8, 64). 'AXadw, to blind (Od. 9, 5l6). 'Are>|3(, disappoint (Od. 9, 42). 3. 'ATr-avpaw, to deprive, to rob, is used by Homer with two accusatives (II. 6, 17), sometimes also with a dative of the person and an accusative of the thing (II. 21, 296). He uses ivapifa and airoppaiw, to despoil, with two accusatives. 1688 GENITIVE 121 GENITIVE OF DISTINCTION 1686. 1. Verbs signifying to surpass, to be surpassed, or to be inferior, and those derived from comparatives are followed by the genitive. 2. Such verbs are: 7reptci/u (rrtpi and tip-i), to be superior; -n-epi- yiyvop.au., to overcome ; vrrept'^w, Trpoe^w, to surpass (vTrfpfid\\, vo-repeo), to be behind, to be late, to be worsted. TS>v l8i(n>Ta>v Trepielvai, to be superior to private individuals (Xen. Ag. 5, 2). Ufpiytvea-dai TTJS /3as Swdpews, to overcome the power of the king (Xen. Anab. 2, I 13 ). 'Epireipia TTO\V Trpoe'^ere ra>v aXXwi/, in experience you far excel the others (Xen. Hell. 7, I 4 ). 'H Nao? fv8aip,ovia rS>v vr)v Trpoffapf, Naxos surpassed the other islands in wealth (Hdt. 5, 28 2 ). TOVTOV ov% T)TTT) TrX^ei ye fip,S>v \iv Idiwrwv, they have less than private individuals (Xen. Hier. 1, 18). StoKpdrrjs Ovcrids 66a>v piKpas ov8fi> jjyetro p.fiov(rdai TWV peydXa dvovratv, when Socrates made small sacrifices, he 'thought he was not at all inferior to those who offered great ones (Xen. Mem. 1, 3 3 ). Tlavcravias vV npdyfj.dTcov, they are too late for the business (Isoc. 3, 19). 1687. NOTE. 'Ho-crao/xat and vli, to rejoice ; ed), to praise; fj.t/j.o[jMi, to blame; 6pyto/zai, to be vexed; /j.vr)o-i- ea), to bear ill-will or a grudge ; o-vyyiyi/a>crKw, to forgive. Tovs 0(\ovras dtpaircutiv T&S noXtis OVK aya\(p(iay ; do you not admire those willing to serve the cities for their courage and dexterity ? (Plat. Rep. 426 d ). Tovs irtpifpoftovs iipus iroutvvras TT/S p*v ToXfujs oil 6avpAa>, TTJS 8f dvvf(rias, I wonder at those making you terrified, not for their audacity, but for their folly (Thuc. 6, 36 1 ). TOVTOVS otKrdptu rrjs ayav Xa\cn-f)s vo T>V -yfyfi/j/^e'vcav, / share the joy for what has happened (Dem. 15, 15). Oviror' dvBpl r8* KTjpvKfvfMTdtv pip.^, never shalt thou censure me for my tidings (Aesch. Sept. 653). Ta>i> a8iKT)pMTu>v opyi((rdai, to be angry at wrongs (Lys. 31, 11). Ov p.vr)criKaKfi avrots Xpf) TTJS fTnOvpias, we must forgive them for their desire (Plat. Euthyd. 306). 1689. NOTE. Here belong verbs of disputing, the object of con- tention being in the genitive. Evfw\7ros T)fjLs, Eumolpus disputed with Erechtheus for the city (Isoc. 12, 193). OVK avTiiroiovp.t6a /SacrtXei Ttjs ap^^r, we do not dispute with the king for his dominion (Xen. Anab. 2, S 23 ). So 8ia may take the accusative of the person and eVt TIVI (1852, 2 (d)) ; (6) Oavpdfa may take the genitive of the person and a dependent clause with d or on expressing the cause (2074). 1693 GENITIVE 123 1691. NOTE. 1. The genitive of cause is very frequent in Homer ; the other poets also use it freely. 2. Examples with poetic verbs : '\Xyvp.tvoi irep fTaipov, though grieved for their comrade (II. 15, 651). Xe6p.tvos 2ap7rij86i/oy, enraged on account of Sarpedon (II. 16, 552). TiJo-S' dTrdnj! Korfwv, angry on account of this deceit (II. 4t, 168). Tfjs 8e 8fi\ias orvyw, I abhor thy cowardice (Soph. El. 1027). So do-^aXaw, to be vexed (Od. 19, 534), p.r)via>, to be wroth (Soph. Ant. 1177), and others. 3. Ordinary prose verbs, which could not take such a genitive of cause in prose, are occasionally so used ; as TraiSos OVK dAyeiv So/cct v olopfda revf-to-dai enaivov, which praise ive expect to obtain from all (Xen. Anab. 5, 7 33 ). Adptiou KOI Tlapva-dndos yiyvovrat 7ra18(s 8vo, of Darius and Parysatis are born two sons (Xen. Anab. 1, I 1 ). For more examples see 1665. 2. In poetry the genitive is sometimes found with a few passive participles denoting the agent ; o-as dAo^oi; o-^ayeis, slain by thy wife (Eur. El. 123). So with the verbal SiSaKros ; as vovOeTr/fjuiTa /ceiVr/s BioaKTa., admonitions taught by her (Soph. El. 343). GENITIVE OF PRICE OR VALUE 1693. 1. With verbs denoting to buy, to sell, to value, to exchange,. and the like, the price or value is in the genitive. 2. Such verbs are : wve'oyuai (eV/na/xr/v), ayopaa>, to buy ; 7ro>A.e'u>> a.7roSt'Soyu.ai, to sell ; a.ioa>, Ti/xato, to estimate ,' aAAaoxro/iai, to exchange. Aoa 8e xpTjfuiTtov OVK v irowv TTcoXouo-tv fip.lv iravra riyada ol dtoi, the gods sell us all good things for labour (Xen. Mem. 2, I 20 ). OVK. &v dirt86p.r)v ir o\\ov T&S (\irl8as, I would not have sold my hopes for a great price (Plat. Phaedo, 98*). Ol 124 GENITIVE 1694 TWV p.fyi(TTO)v Scopewi' r)ia>(Tav, the barbarians esteemed Themistocles worthy of the highest gifts (Isoc. 4, 154). M.tiovos avra Tip.>vTai, they value them more (Xen. Gyr. 2, I 13 ). Mrj8( ai/TaXXdao-#at pjfitpar x a P lTOS fjLrj8' o)(ptXfids TT)V ds TOI/S "'E.XXrjvas (vvoiav, nor to barter your good-will to the Greeks for any favour or benefit (Dem. 6, 10). 1694. NOTE. The genitive of price occurs also with other verbs. Tpi>v 8paxp-o>v TTovTjpos e'ort, he is a villain for three drachmae (Dem. 19, 200). Tdai/Tes dpyvpiov iroXXov, rating (the food) at a high price (Thuc. 4, 26 5 ). Miv, for how much does he teach ? For five minae (Plat. Apol. 20 b ). npoirfirorai TTJS napavriKa ^aptros ra TTJS noXftat Trpdyp-ara, the interests of the city have been complimented away for immediate favour (Dem. 3, 22). 1695. NOTE. The thing bought is sometimes in the genitive. OoXX^v x^P lv o(pfi\a> TTJS OfairtjTov yi/wptVewr, / owe you many thanks for the acquaintance (Plat. Pol. 257"). Ov8eva TTJS (rvvovtrtas dpyvpiov irpArrn you exact no money of anybody for your society (Xen. Mem. 1, 6 11 ). 1696. NOTE. Observe the judicial expressions rl/xav rivf TIVOS (used of the judge), to estimate the penalty for any one, and Tlp.a.a-$ai nvi TIVOS (used of any one of the litigants), to propose a penalty for any one. Tpia (rr) 8f8f, eav pr) TO 8iKa davdrov TtTip.Tjij.fvov, if the death-sentence has been decreed against any one (Plat. Leg. 946*). Compare 1702. 1697. NOTE. To estimate highly, etc., is usually irepi TroX\ov , TrXei&Tov) 7roicio~6ai TI (1856, 1 (c)) ; and SO Trepi oXiyov s, ouSeVos) irout(r6af TI, to estimate a thing as little (less, nothing). Similarly irpo TroAAoG -n-otfta-Oai (1857, 1 (c)), Trap' oXiyov TTOteto-^ai (1855, 3 (/)), Trap' ov8iv fryci(r&aL. 1698. NOTE. The genitive of price or value seems to lie in these two passages in Demosthenes : TJjr T>V 'E.XXr)vo^m' o-e Set At' ay, I will prosecute you for cowardice (Ar. Eq. 368). 'E7rfiYa> (j) 6 v o v TW Kreivavri, let him proceed against the slayer for murder (Plat. Leg. 866 b ). HpocrKa.\ovp.ai 6 v o v &v fiKor^s ffj.avTu> \a xt'iv. I might fairly institute proceedings against myself for murder (Dem. 21, 120). Aucafovo-i...ax ap i a- rids, they go to law for ingratitude (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 7 ). A a> p w v fKpidr)p(ov fXovTts (cat <\oir^g, having convicted Cleon of bribery and theft (Ar. Nub. 591). ev8o /ia prv piS>t> dXtoo-fo-^at irpoa-- O~OK>V, expecting to be convicted of false testimony (Dem. 39, 18). Kav d pr)o-6p.t6a, if ice take revenge on those present for their deception (Xen. Anab. 7, I 25 ). 1700. NOTE. The genitive of crime sometimes depends upon a cognate-accusative (1587) like BiK-rjv or ypatpyr. TpavfJiaTos (K irpovoids ypa(f>as ypcxpofitvos, making charges for injuries committed with premeditation (Aeschin. 3, 212). 'OcpXwi/ yap dpTrayfjs Tt KOI K\oirr)s 8iKT)v, having been cast in the penalty for abduction and theft (Aesch. Ag. 534). The usual omission of this cognate-accusative gives rise to the genitive of crime. 1701. NOTE. 'Ovai irort, one who works well ought never to despair of anything (Men. Mon. 133). Ta (paXayyia TOV

V e X IT i b pas r)p.u>v opt) ptydXa, high mountains lie in front of our land (Xen. Mem. 3, 5 35 ). IloXXoZy ^ yXwrra ir poT pe %f i TTJS Biavoids, in many the tongue runs ahead of the thought (Isoc. 1, 41). 'Yirpe(f>dvfjo i av TOV \6p6vfi t Agesilaus did not exult more than becomes men (Xen. Ages. 11, 2). OI/TWJ tpu>v inrtpa\y5>, so do I grieve for you (Ar. Av. 466). \pf) vntpoiK.(~iv TOV Xoyov, it is neces- sary to plead for the principle (Plat. Phaedo, 86 e ). 1705. NOTE. 'Airoyiyvwo-Kw with the genitive, to despair of; with 1709 GENITIVE the accusative, to give up as useless (Xen. Hell. 7, 5 7 ). 'YTrepopdw and V7rep, to despise, to disdain, may take the accusative (Plat. Grit. 120" ; Thuc. 3, 39 5 ). So also dTroo-Tpe^o/xat, to turn oneself away from, abhor, as OVK a-n-uo-Tpe^fi pe, you will not turn away from me (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5 36 ). 1706. NOTE. Less often do we find compounds of other preposi- tions, as dvTi, with the genitive, unless they fall under the previous rules (so /3aiv<>, to tread upon, 1644); as 7-175 vvv d/u,apTids avriOflvai TTJV TOTC -n-poOvfjiidv, to set against our present error our former zeal (Thuc. 3, 56 3 ). Still less often compounds of prepositions which may govern more than one case. 1707. NOTE. In Homer some compounds of Sid, afjLtpi, and Trepi are found with the genitive; as oirjX&fv (II. 20, 100); a^i^axovTai (11. 18, 20); wepiSei'Sia (H. 10, 93). 1708. NOTE. In general, with verbs like the above (1704), the repetition of the preposition (or some similar one) before the genitive prevails ; especially with verbs whose component parts still strongly retain their original meaning and have not acquired a new sense, like a7ro-yiyvcocrKw, to despair of, vTrcp-opda), to despise. 1709. 1. Compounds of Kara which express a judgment or a feeling against take a genitive of the person. Some may also take in addition an accusative of the thing (the crime or punishment}. 2. Such verbs are : KarayeAdw, to laugh at, to deride ; KarcuppovftD, to despise ; Kanrjyopew, to accuse, to indict ; KO.T^LTTUV, to denounce ; KaToxpiVw, Karayiyvaio-Kw, KaraSi/cd^w, to pass judgment against, to con- demn ; KaTai/f7iopu, to vote against, in condemnation of ; /carai/ffuSo/iat, to tell lies against ; Kara/Sodw, to cry against, to decry. Mfvav TToXt/jiiov ovftfvos Kareyc'Xd, Menon laughed at (despised) no enemy (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 23 ). Ov KaTa^povw 'ya> rS>v 6e>v, I do not despise the gods (Eur. Bacch. 199). Ka.T((f)p6vr)(rav rS>v 'A.Qi)vtdmv d8vvai/ Stolen ^ Karayvmvai 8u>po8oKidv f/xov, I beg of you not to declare me guilty of bribery (Lys. 21, 21). avra>v Kora\lfi)(pi v d K p IT <>>v 6 dv arov naTa\^-T)(plv aXXwv *ara\//-evSe. TOIOVTO irpdyfM, yon tell this lie about others (Plat. Euthyd. 283 e ). KaTe/36o>i> ...TO>V 'Adrjvaiojv, they decried the Athenians (Thuc. 1, 67 1 ). 1710. NOTE. 1. The genitive of the crime or punishment with these verbs is rare. Yiapav6fjL ol Trarcpes ^u.wv fj.f)8 to- p.ov Q6.va.rov Ka.Teyi>(i>o-av, our jathers condemned many to death for favouring the Persians (Isoc. 4, 157). 3. For the genitive of value with other verbs expressing the punishment, see 1699 1703. 1711. NOTE. The accusative of the person with these verbs is rare ; as TO Karo.$povv TOVS eViovras, to despise the assailants (Thuc. 6, 34 8 ). 1712. NOTE. In Herodotus KarayeAaw often governs the dative; as Hdt. 3, 37 2 . Other examples of com- pounds of Kara with the dative also occur in Herodotus and Homer. 1713. NOTE. In the passive construction of the verbs in 1709, the genitive of the person becomes the nominative (1882, 2) ; as K&V vo/xo) TIS KCLTayvfacrOf), and if any one is condemned by law (Xen. Hell. 4, 4 2 ). But if the active verb governs at the same time a genitive of the person and an accusative of the thing, the accusative becomes the nominative of the passive construction. 'A7rdvTa>v ddvaros KaTtytyvwcrKtTo, the death penalty was pronounced against all (Lys. 13, 38). Karrj-yop^Tai 'ETrncparovr iicavd, enough has been charged against Epicrates (i/ys. 27, 1). 1714 GENITIVE 129 (D) GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES 1714. The objective genitive accompanies adjectives which are of similar derivation or meaning to verbs that govern the genitive. 1. Adjectives of sharing and their opposites, especially those compounded with a privative. Thus /xeVo^os, sharing ; i(ro/xoipos, sharing equally ; a/Aoipos, oU having no share in ; ayeuo-ros, not tasting ; ai^/coos, not hearing ; dOt not seeing ; very many other compounds of d privative ; also linjfio\o<;, having attained, possessed of. 2o(pias /xeVo^os, partaking of wisdom (Plat. Leg. 689* 1 ). 'lo-d/xopot T>V TTarpaKov, sharing equally their patrimony (Isae. 6, 25). Tv KO.\>V KOI dyad&v dpoipos, not sharing in the fair and good things (Plat. Symp. 202 d ). "Ayeuoroy KCIK&V, not having a taste of evils (Soph. Ant. 582). To>i> Tpa]papxwv dr(\r)s, exempt from the trierarchies (Dem. 20, 27). Haideias eV^/3oAos, possessed of education (Plat. Leg. 724 b ). 2. Adjectives denoting mindful, experienced, and their opposites. Thus fivyfuov, mindful ; a/j.v^fj.i>, attentive to little things (Plat. Leg. 900). Plat. Phaedo, 117 a . 3. Adjectives denoting power and capability, especially those in Thus e'y/cparrjs, master of; aKpar^s, having no control over, im- moderate in ; avroKpdrwp, master of ; xvptos, having power or authority ; and very many in -IKOS. Kvpid, mistress of all (Aeschin. 2, 131). Toiv f)8ov>v iraa->v aTos, most perfect master of all pleasures (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 14 ). dupaTT)!, having no control over my tongue (Aesch. Pro. 884). djcpdrtop, not master of himself (Plat. Rep. 579). TLapa.(TKfva, capable of procuring the necessaries of war (Xen. Mem. 3, I 6 ). AifiafficaAtKoj rrjs avrov (rofpids, capable of teaching his own science (Plat. Euthyphr. 3"). Xen. Mem. 3, I 8 . 4. Adjectives denoting possession and some expressing con- nection. Thus rStos, oiWios, belonging to, peculiar to ; KOIVOS, common to ; ds, sacred to ; dAAdrpios, foreign to, another's ; ervyyei/^s, related to ; 9 130 GENITIVE 1714 d<5eA KO.KWV, full of evils (Men. Mon. 334). nXovo-twrepo? (ppovrjo-fms, richer in good sense (Plat. Pol. 261 e ). nXe/oTwi' fv8ff(TTaros, most lacking in most things (Plat. Rep. 579"). \pr)fj.dri/ia, purchasable for blood (Aesch. 3, 160). 'A.vrd{-iov tlvai T>V Travrutv xprip-drov, worth all riches (Xen. Hell. 4, I 38 ). 7. Adjectives of separation and distinction. Thus yu/ivos, naked, uncovered, stripped ; opo9, different ; aAAo, o^/ier ; Irepos, i/ie other, different from ; dAAoios, of a different kind ; dAAdrptos, another's, of different kind ; also /xeo-o*-, middle. rvfi.vr) TOV (rvfjuiTos, stripped of the body (Plat. Cratyl. 403 b ). Ka^apos t> op5coXot xpjj/idrwi', sparing of money (Plat. Rep. 548 b ). 'ETrtonj^i; tVitrrij/i^f 8id(popos, knowledge distinct from knowledge (Plat. Phil. 61 d ). "AXXa TWJ/ fttKraW, things other than the just (Xen. Mem. 4, 4' ;R ). "Ertpov TO f)8v TOV ayadov, the pleasant is different from the good (Plat. Gorg. 500*'). 8. Adjectives of accountability and liability. 1718 GENITIVE 131 Thus amos, guilty, blameworthy, causinj ; un-o8to?, subject to trial ; evoxos, chargeable; vTrev6vvo<>, liable to give an account, respons- ible ; vTTOTcA.i/5, subject to taxes. TOVTOV curios, responsible (causative) of this (Xen. Anab. 2, 5 s2 ). <&6i>ov vnodiKos, subject to trial for murder (Dem. 54, 25). "Evo^oy BtiKids, chargeable with cowardice (Lys. 14, 5). Tijy apx^s vnfvdvvos, liable to give an account of his office (Dem. 18, 117)- 'YTrortXety (popov, subject to tribute (Thuc. 1, 19 1 ). 9. Adjectives of feeliny and sensation. Thus tv&u/Awv, happy ; SuVepws, passionately m love with; a-vy- , forgiving ; fjLo>v TO>V avdptoirivav, forgiving in human affairs (Xen. Cyr. 6, I 37 ). Tv(p\bv TOV p.f\\ovTos, blind to the future (Plut. Solon, 12). A.6ya>v KO\WV fTTrjKooi, listening to fine discourses (Plat. Rep. 499 11 ). 'YTTJJKOOS T>V yove'wv, obedient to one's parents (Plat. Rep. 463 d ). 1715. NOTE. In some cases an adjective with a dependent genitive is to be considered a noun. 1716. NOTE. 1. To these adjectives belong natur- ally some which are entirely poetic ; as eVi'A^os, causing forgetfulness ; I/A/AO/SOS, partaking of, fortunate ; aK/x^vos, fasting, without food ; evi is, bereaved ; and others. 2. The poets freely join adjectives to the genitive in ways inadmissible in prose. A.vdd8r]s (ppev&v, self-willed in mind (Aesch. Pro. 908). SwfTos TToXe'/xou, skilled in war (Eur. Or. 1406). "YTTOTTTOS... TpwiKJjs a\aa-f(os, suspecting the capture of Troy (Eur. Hec. 1135). 1717. NOTE. For evavrtbs, opposite, with the genitive, see 1768, 2. Herodotus has TOV HOVTOV eiriKdpo-iai, at an angle with the Pontos (Hdt. 7, 36.). 1718. NOTE. Compounds of d privative occasionally govern a genitive of kindred meaning. ToO f)&iv 7rai8a>i>, childless in regard to male children (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6 3 ). XpqpdTuv d8o>poraros, most free from accepting bribe* (Thuc. 2, 65 8 ). 132 GENITIVE 1719 1719. NOTE. 1. Observe the expression /toi/os TW oXAc^, altogether alone, i.e. separated from the rest (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 24 ). 2. Similar to this are inaccurate expressions in Homer, like : "\purroi TO>V 6<; (TLVL Tiros) voting for (with any one) ; opaTraOys, feeling th: same. KaKoCpyo? T*V aXXeoi/, doing evil to others (Xen. Mem. 1, 5 :1 ). QiXopadris dirdvTuv, fond of learning all (Xen. Cyr. 1. e 38 ). 'O^i^adfjs TTJS dSinids, late in learning about injustice (Plat. Rep. 409 b ). 2i//x\^?;(^6s i' ratv 1779 Oeov, from those sinful towards the goddess (Ar. Eq. 445). 1722. Some adjectives govern the genitive by virtue of the noun which they imply. rv dpKovvTuv Trepirrd, more than is sufficient (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2 21 ). TlepicraevovTa rfjs dairdvrjs, more than the expenditure (Xen. Symp. 4, 35). noXXa7rXi7 row fipcrepov (sc. (rrparfv- ), many times our army (Hdt. 7, 48 1 ). 1724. The partitive genitive occurs with adjectives as with nouns. See 1619, 6. (E) GENITIVE WITH ADVERBS 1725. Adverbs derived from adjectives which govern the genitive also govern the genitive. &ia(p(p6i>Ta>s ratv oXXwv dvdpuirwv, differently from the rest of men (Xen. Hier. 7, 4). 'A/v, in a manner worthy of us (Xen. Cyr. 7, 3 11 ). To>i> p.fyi(TTo>v irm8fvp.dr s e^eir 8 6 { r) s ; what is your opinion ? (Plat. Rep. 456 C ). "ETrXeoi/ w s e?x e r d x o u s fKCKTTos eirl TOVS 'A.0T)vaiovs, they sailed as fast as each could against the Athenians (Thuc. 2, 90 4 ). 'IitavSts eVto-njpyy et, he will have enough of knowledge (Plat. Phil. 62"). Tourcoi/ aXts, adrjv, enough of this (Plat. Polit. 287"). 1727. NOTE. Here belong also a number of adverbs which have been classed as Improper Prepositions (1862) and of which all except a.fj.a. and ofjiov and w? govern the genitive. 1728. NOTE. In cases like the following the genitive is partitive. Hp68iKOS T S> v (rofpicrrmv (caXXiora TCI ovoftara o"iijpti, Prodicus, of all the sophists, most skilfully pulls the words to pieces (P.&t. Lach. 197 d ). MdXiora rrdvrtov, above all (Thuc. 4, 52 2 ). (F) GENITIVE IN LOOSER CONSTRUCTIONS 1729. Genitive of Time. The genitive is often used to denote the time at some part of which something takes place. 134 GENITIVE 1730 K.\tap%os KOI rjptpas KOI VVKTOS rfytv tn\ rovs 7ro\fp.iovs, Clearchus used to march day and night against the enemy (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 7 ). A?)Xta f K iv ov TOV p.T) t> o s rfv, the Delian festival took place in that month (Xen. Mem. 4, 8 2 ). Bao~tXcvf ov /xa^eerat 8 1 K a TJ p ( p u> v (=eV 8f>ca r/ptpaif or ivTos 8tKa f]p.ep(ov), the king will not fight within ten days (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 1S ). Tov (7riyiyi>op.tvov ^et/xwi/or, during the following winter (Thuc. 8, 29 1 ). Ovirut TroXXov xp 6v ov TOVTOV f)8tovi ntvif (irtTv^f, he has not for a long time met with pleasanter wine than this (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 25 ). TaGra rr)s f)p.fpds tyivtTo, this happened during the day (Xen. Anab. 7, 4 14 ). Tpi'a fip.i8dpfiica TOV prji'os, three half-darics each month (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 21 ). Plat. Prot. 31 (K 1730. NOTE. Without the article, such a genitive as ^/Ac'pds means simply by day, in the day ; with the article, as ri/s ^/tepT?, it means within the day (mentioned) or every day. So with other genitives of time. 1731. NOTE. ToD Xomov, in the future, or more exactly, at some time in the future ; but TO Aorn-dV, for the future, throughout the future. The genitive of time thus means only a part of the time mentioned ; while the accusative means durinj the whole of the time mentioned. 1732. Genitive of Place. In poetry the genitive is sometimes used to denote the place in which anything occurs. *Sf (Od. 2, 404). Much oftener wfoVoio, on the plain ; as 6i(iv TTfSi'oio, to run on the plain (II. 6, 507). Atdxcto-^at (II. 21, 602). 1734. NOTE. T^s 68oO, on (over) the road, is found in the drama- tists, in Herodotus and in Thucydides. ''EirtTa^vov TT)s o 8 o v TOVS o^oXaiYtpov tiriovTas, they hurried on the way those coming up more slowly (Thuc. 4, 47 3 ). So TOV irp6V (ppevStv, King Zeus, what subtlety of mind ! (Ar. Nub. 153). <{) roO avftpos, alas ! for the man (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 39 ). Ar. Plut. 389. 1 737. Occasionally the genitive is used to express in regard to ; as ITTTTOS rfV KOLKOVpyf,, TOV ITTTTc'd KOLKl^OfJieV " Tl}s & yVVdlKOS, 1 KCLKOTTOlfl, ....ureas 8t/caio>s av -f) yvi'r) rr)v at iov c\oi, if a horse is mischievous, we blame the r.der ; but as to a wife, if she conducts herself badly, perhaps she ought justly to bear the blame (Xen. Oec. 3, 11). 1738. Genitive Absolute. 1. The genitive of a noun with a participle in agreement is used absolutely, i.e. as grammatically independent of any other word in the sentence, like the Latin ablative absolute ; as ravra eTrpa^dr) K 6 v o> v o v, Cyrus then gave the army four months' pay (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 12 ). Ai'Sw/it o-oi t/xauroi', / offer myself to you (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6 2 ). OVTOS K -6 p a> tiirtv, this man said to Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 2 ). Ile/iTrwi/ a i T a> ayyeXov, sending a messenger to him (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 s ). 'Y7rto-x yvatvai Vp.at avrovs, I advise you to know yourselves (Xen. Hell. 2, 4 40 ). -So in passive constructions ; as 6o)piiKfs a v TO Is tTTopia-drja-av, breast-plates were furnished to them (Xen. Anab. 3, 3*). 1741. NOTE. Verbs of saying may also take Trpos TIVO, to or against any one. 1742. With Intransitive Verbs. Many intransitive verbs govern the dative. Here belong verbs signifying to seem, to befit, to be becoming, to be permitted, to be a concern to, to be a regret, to be possible, to belong, to be necessary ; to help, to benefit, to satisfy, to defend ; to please, to trust, to favour, to fo'loiv, to obey, to serve, to yield ; to pray to, to enjoin ; to reproach, to be angry with, to revile, to threaten, to envy ; also their opposites. Many of these take in English a direct object or a prepositional construction. 'E 86cei avrols virovpydv rots 'Svpa.K.ofriois, it seemed best to them to help the Syracusans (Thuc. 6, 88 1 ). Tj; ^ X i K i a eirpewf, it suited his age (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 6 ). Nuv trot e^to-riv dvdpl ytvia-Qai, now it is possible for you to become a great man (Xen. Anab. 7, I 21 ). Hdt. 1, 138 1 ; Aesch. Bum. 899. Tt 17 ft i v TTJS rv 86r)s p.t\ft; what do we care about the opinion of the many ? (Plat. Crito 44). "An aa-i IT poa-rj K 1 1 irtpl iro\\ov iroiflardai rrjv (ppovrjaiv, it befits all to set high value on wisdom (Isoc. 9, 80). A f t (r o t Trjs avrrjs fpa>TTjs, you need the same question (Plat. Meno 79). Toty d 8 1 K o T(s, helping those who do wrong (Lys. 14, 22). \vo-iT(\(i TW (xovri, it benefits the possessor (Plat. Rep. 392). 'A/itWti> 777 TrdXci, to defend the city (Thuc. 2, 60 :t ). Tots 7rX'oo-ti/ apto-Kovrfs, pleasing the majority (Thuc. 1, 38 3 ). Avroir x a P^ f(r ^ a ^ t y ra ttfy themselves (Lys. 14, 22). 'Eiriortvov UVTU> at iroXfis, the cities trusted him (X n. A nab. 1, 9 s ). Tor irovrjpols dirio-rtlv, to distrust the bad (Isoc. 1, 22). Vfi.1v, they will follow you (Xen. A nab. 3, I 38 ). Totr vopois i, they obey the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4 1:| ). MrjSffjua 8ov\(v( T>V 1744 DATIVE 137 f)8ova>v, serve none of the pleasures (Isoc. 2, 29). 'Aperi; v7re/K, it yields to virtue (Plat. Menex. 240* 1 ). Tot? deals etv 17 pli> eVt^etpeiy fjpas diro\- \vvai ; what fault do you find with us that you attempt to destroy us ? (Plat. Crito 50 d ). Ot orpetTtwrcu e^aXfTraivov KOI a>pyiovTO l&xyp&s TO> K \ e d p % w, they showed great resentment and were angry with Clearchus (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 n ). 'Eirripedov(riv dXXijXots 1 Kai (pdovovcriv e a v T o I s, they revile one another and are envious to themselves (Xen. Mem. 3, 5 16 ). 1743. NOTE. 1. The verbs of this class are numerous, as: So/cet, seem ; TrpeVet, be becoming ; irpoa-^Kei, it concerns ; Set, be necessary ; fj,fXei, it is a care ; /xera/xeXei, it repents, rues, is a regret ; extern, it is possible ; /?077$eu>, iTriKovplw, virr]pTe(D t virovpyiw, Tt/xwpea), help ; AVtpu>, benefit (but aK^eXew and 6viV^/u.t govern the accusative) ; t'w, satisfy ', Ti/xwpew, d/xrTvw, defend ; dpea-Kw, please, gratif ; i, please, favour ; dp/AOTTw, to fit ; aTrapeo-Kw, displease ; T Trci6ofj.ai, trust (but wfiOw, persuade, governs the accusative) ; dT distrust ; nKO\ovOfo/x.ai, reproach, blame ; fj.vt](Ti.Ka.Kf(a, bear a grudge ; &py^o/tuu, ^aXeTrmvco, Ov/jLoop-ai, be angry with ; Xoi8o- ptop.au, cTr^pcd^'D, revile ; aTretXecu, threaten ; (frOovea), envy (but ^Xdw governs the accusative). 2. Poetic and dialectic are avodw, to please ; XoXoo/xeu, ^wo/Aat, to be wroth or angry ; KOTW, to bear a grudge, to envy ; aydaa-Oat (from aya/xai) in the sense to be indignant at, to envy ; crcu^o/iat, to be angry at ; i'/u,e(raw, vefj.ca-dofj.at, vffj.ea-i%0fj.ai, to be angry, dis- pleased. Homeric (Iliad) is f3ov\eo-6ai TIVL VIK^V, to wish any one victory (II. 16, 121). 1744. NOTE. 1. Verbs cf enjoining and commanding also take the dative in connection with an infinitive. 'E7re'raai' TW Qrjp'ap.fvft dvt Xe'ertfat rovs vavdyovs, they commanded Theramenes to rescue the men on the wrecks (Xen. Hell. 1, 7 17 ). But a participle in the accusative may be added; as rols irfXraa-Tals navi f 8 trjy (cvXw pe v ov s Ifvai, he directed all the peltanta to advance 138 DATIVE 1745. holding their javelins by the thong (Xen. A nab. 5, 2 la ). For the ordinary accusative subject of the infinitive after these verbs, see 2207- 2. KeAeL'O), to order, always takes the accusative with the infinitive in Attic (for the poetic construction, see 1753, 2). 1745. NOTE. For- Aufta.iVo/>uu, eVo^Xe'w, AoiSopcco and Aonopeo/xcu, see 1578. For TI/AW/DC'W and Tt/xwpeo/zui, see 1699. 1746. NOTE. Eu^eo-^ai, to wish any one, also takes the dative of the person ; with the dative focus, it means to pray to the gods for something, or to vow something to the gods ; in the sense to pray for som thing, it may also take irp6<; with the accusative and an infinitive. E$XOVTO avrta TroXXa icat dyadd, they wished him many blessings (Xen. Hell. 5, 1 s ). Tots 0ois (VXOVTCU. iro\vKapiridv, they pray to the gods for abundance of fruit (Xen. Mem. 3, 14 3 ). 'H fiijr^p TroXXa rots Qtdis ev^rat dyadd vntp crov, your mother entreats the gods for many blessings on your behalf (Xen. Mem. 2, 2 10 ). SwK/janjr et^ero npos rovs Otovs d7r\>s rayada 8i86vai, to the gods Socrates simply prayed that they would give him good things (Xen. Mem. 1, 3 2 ). 1747. NOTE. &6ovf0ovrj 1 ward off anything from any one, and xpaio-/xe and i'pKw in. the sense to ward off, also have the construction nvi rt in poetry. So also d/x^i/w which may also take TIVOS TI, to ward off anything from any one, and TWO. TIVOS, to hold off any one from anything (II. 18, 128 ; II. 4, 10 ; II. 15, 731). 'ApT/yw may also take nvi n in poetry. Epic is oir6Z,f.iv TWO. TLVI, to cause to follow (Od. 20, 364), and oiraZ,uv nva, to follow hard upon (II. 8, 103). 2. Poetic KfXojjLai, to command, to exhort, takes the dative in Homer, so also KeXcu'w (II. 12, 274; Od. 17, 193). With a dependent infinitive, K\OJHCU has the accusative (Od. 9, 100) ; K\evw oftener the dative than the accusa- tive (II. 2, 151 ; II 14, 62). 8. For the dative with verbs of ruling, see 1671, 2 and 1673, 2. 1754. With Adjectives and Adverbs. Many adjectives (and adverbs) similar in meaning to the verbs in 1742 are followed by the dative. Such are adjectives meaning faithful, friendly, hostile, agreeable, useful, necessary, and the like. Ila<7t...7r to-rot, faithful to all (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7 13 ). 'AXXijAots tx^poi, hostile to each other (Xen. Mem. 2, 6 19 ). * t X o s ftaaiXd, friendly to the king (Xen. Anab. 2, I 20 ). 'A.v6p, most unbecoming to guardians (P)at. Rep. 398"). BXafitpb 0-w/wm, harmful to the body (Plat. Rep. 559 b ). "Yrro^or TOIS dtois, subject to the gods (Xen. Anab. 2, 5 7 ). 'En-o/xfi/ws rw i/o/xw, conformably to the law (Plat. Ley. 844"). np7r(Wy....avT, in a manner worthy of himself (Plat. 8ymp. 198*). 140 DATIVE 1755 1755. NOTE. $t'Ao?, friendly, ex#pds and 7roA./Aios, hostile, may be nouns and then take the genitive. So SoCXos, a slave. 1756. NOTE The adjectives mentioned in 1714, 4 : tStos and oifceio?, KOti'ds, tcpos, dAAdrpios, (ruyyevT/s, dSeAx^ds, 6yu.u>vuft.os, dKoA.ou$os have the dative or genitive. So WTTJKOOS and Karoos, and eV/y/coos (1720). 1757. TF^fe Nouns. Some nouns similar in meaning to the verbs in 1740 and 1742 may take this dative. To trap' fjpcav 8 cap a TO'IS deals, the gifts (given) by us to the gods (Plat. Euthyphr. 15*). Trjv fp.rjv T&> {Jew virr)pfv 'EXXi^vwi' 'Adyvaiois, for the subjugation of the Greeks to the Athenians (Thuc. 3, 10 3 ). DATIVE OF ASSOCIATION AND RESEMBLANCE 1758. The dative of association and resemblance follows all words expressing association (friendly or hostile), likeness, near- ness, and approach. 1759. With Verbs. Here belong verbs meaning to unite, to mix, to associate with, to communicate, to approach, to meet, to converse with, to attack, to agree with, to reconcile, to differ with, to quarrel, to contend or to war, to make like, to equalise, to resemble, and the like. "Y8o>p p.lyvvfjifi'ov iratri rois Tpftpov&iv f/fjias, water mixed with all things that nourish us (Xen. Mem. 4, 3 6 ). O * v o> ntpdo-as TTJV Kpjji/qv, having mingled the spring with wine (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 13 ). Kanols 6p.l\a>v, asso- ciating with bad men (Men. Mon. 274). 'EKoivu>vr)V KivStiviov f) ft.1v, they shared in the dangers with us (Isoc. 6, 43). H\T)(ridti.v TOIS rroXe/xtpt?, to draw near to the enemy (Xen. Anab. 4, 6 8 ). IleXao-ai...^ cto-ddo), to get near the entrance (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 3 ). '\iravra TW 3 e v o(p u>v r i EvK\(io~Tjs, Euclides meets Xenophon (Xen. A nab. 7, 8 1 ). AiaXfxdfjvai TOIS ap^ova-'iv, to speak with the commanders (Xen. Anab. 4, 4 5 ). Tots TfXfvraiots tiriQtvTo, they attacked the hindmost (Xen. Anab. 4, I 10 ). Ilpoo-f'/SaXXe ra> Tt'xt> he attacked the wall (Xen. Hell. 1, 2 s ). Nd/xowf a(piHo\oyovp.(vavs, laws agreeing with each other (Isoc. 2, 17). Xp^...*araXXa- y/)i/at rrdXii' IT 6 X i, it is necessary for city to be reconciled to city (Thuc. 4, 61 2 ). Tout (pfiryovTas e'/na^ero, no one fought with him (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 23 ). Tats evirpayiais 7ro\p.ovo-iv, they war against good conduct (Isoc. 15, 142). To opoiovv iavrov a X X w, to make himself like another (Plat. Rep. 393 C ). Ein-ep rots j9Xr( avrov, if I liken him to the best (Xen. Symp. 6, 9). 'O o-i8rjpos av lo-ol TOVS do-dtvels rois I w foinas, you resemble (are like) a philosopher (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 13 ). 1760. NOTE. 1. Verbs of this class are the following : and pj,yvvp.i (TL TLVL), to mix (one thing with another] ; oyaZXew to associate with; /xere^w, Koivwvew (nvi rtvos\ to share with, to com- municate ; rivcLKoivom (TLVL TL), to communicate (anything to any one) ; dvaKoivoi>fjMi (TLVL irtpi TIV. s), to consult (any one about anything) ; 7rXr;cria^w, TreXa^w, to approach ; ('nravTata, tv-, eVi-, irapa.-, Trept-, a~vv- ), to meet, to come across ; SiaXeyo^ai, to converse with ; eTrievai, , 7riTi^e/x.ai (mid.), to attack ', op.ovof.ia, 6/AoXoyeco, to agree with (see 1771) ; 8t-, KO.T-, o-uv-aXXao-crto, to reconcile ; o-TreVSo/xai, o-vvriOfLiai, to make a treaty or truce with ; Siai(r(3r]Teu), 8taya>vi'^o/xai, to quarrel, to contend with ; avTiTroie'o/ACu (TLVL ), to lay claim to (anything against any one), to contend for ; L, to be at law with; d/xi\Xao/i,at, to vie with; iroAe/At'o) TIVI, to war against ; /ta^o/tat TI- i, to fight against ; o-rao-ia^w, to revolt against, to quarrel with ; Siacr/cwTrrofwu, to contend in jests with ; 8iaAoyt?o/xai, to balance accounts with ; 6/xotdw, to make like, to liken to ; t*aw, to compare, to make like ; la-cxa, dvio-ooj, to equalise ; toiKa, to resemble. 2. Some are poetic or dialectic : p.dpvafj.a.L, to contend ; to fight ; tzvTioo/xai, oppose ; di/Taw, dvTiaa), ), to meet ; avnySoXew, to meet with, to hit upon ; , to hktn ; di/Ti0e/>t^, to match oneself with. 1761. NOTE. 1. Here belong also many phrases with ep^o/xai and fL/JLL. Tw '\\Kiftid8j} rives f's \6yovs rf\6ov, certain persons had an interview with Alcibiades (Thuc. 8, 48 1 ). Els xZpar tXdtlv (or feVat) TIVI, to put oneself in the power of any one (Xen. Anab. 1, 2* ; Xen. Cyr. 8, 8 6 ). At.avoovp.fda 8 id TT o\( LIOV avTois It v at, we propose to be at war with 142 DATIVE 1762 them (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 8 ). BovXcvd/j.cda aiirols 8ia i\ias itvat,, we intend to be on friendly terms with them (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 s ). 2. Phrases formed with iroUofjuu more commonly take irpos with the accusative ; as o-TrovBas (a-vfJL/j.a\La.v, eipT^T/v, (Thuc. 2, 15 2 ). 1763. NOTE. noA./xeu/ TIVL, to make war against some one; but TroAcp.eii' trvv Tin. or 7roX/u,eu> /xerd TIVO?, to make war in alliance with -SO me one crv/ATroXc/Aeiv rivi or (rvp.fJM\tlv TIVI. 1764. NOTE. IIeA.aa>, to approach, rarely has the genitive; as rtav atcpw, they approached the heights (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 8 ). 1765. NOTE. 1. Several other verbs expressing ap- proach are also found in poetry with the genitive of a thing, especially the poetic dvrtaw in the sense to go in quest, of. 'Stoartpoi avTioa>vT(t)v (pya>v TOIOVTOV, let younger men go in quest of such deeds (II. 23, 643). Kot'rq? f/xTrfXaa-^vat, to approach the bed (Soph. Trach. 16). For ai/raw, see 1651, 1. 2. Several are also found with the accusative in poetry and late prose ; so regularly djmeiu> in Herodotus. Thus Avrido) (II. 1. 31); avndfa (Hdt. 4, 118 2 ). 1766. With Adjectives. 1. Adjectives similar in meaning to the verbs in 1759, govern the dative; especially such as denote friendly or hostile disposition, nearness, likeness, and compounds of OfJLOV. 2. Such adjectives are CVKOVS, cv/AfyT/s, well-disposed ; ova-uevrf;, ill-disposed ; 8tdV epyaiv f^evpeiv, to find ^vords equal to the greatness of the subject-matter (Isoc. 4, 13). *H 6p,oiov ovros TOVTOIS % dvofjiolov, being like or unlike these (Plat. Phil. 74 C ). "Opopoi rots 2icdi'ots, neighbours of the Sicanians (Thuc. 6, 2 :! ). To avro TW T)\i6ia>, the same thing as foolishness (Ken. Anab. 2, G 22 ). 1767. NOTE. For , TroAe'/xtos, and others which take the genitive or dative, see 1755 and 1756. For the dative with some compound adjectives, see 1781. 1768. NOTE. 1. Aiao? with the dative denotes opposition ; with the genitive, different from. 'O 'Prjyiov rvpavvos 8id(popos rourt Z ay K\aio itr i, the despot of Rhegium being in opposition to the Zanclaeans (Hdt. 6, 23 2 ). Aido when they form, as it were, a kind of compound with their verbs ; as 'Apytloi iovr o dvr ioi rots \aK(8aifj.ovioiV SouXeov ), she had her dress like, (the dress of) the slave-girls (Xen. Cyr. 5, I 4 ). pfvoi Trdvrts %o>i>t'a TOIS dvdpdcri, participation with men (Plat. Rep. 466 C ). 'H iroXewv f'mplia Tr6\riv, the intercourse of cities with cities (Plat. Leg. 949"). Tus Tots X rj ef r}?, next in order. 'EvavTiais *x fl cra>(^)povi. 6 doXxioTos, the intemperate man is the opposite of the moderate (Plat. Gorg. 507 C ). 'A X X 17 X o t s dvopoioDs, in a manner unlike one another (Plat. Tim. 36 d ). 'E/xTroSwv TJJ avrovo piq, obstructive to independence (Xen. Hell. 6, 3 7 ). *A/ia 777 ^/if'pa, at daybreak (Xen. Anab. 2, I 2 ). To v8 o-Tparev/iaTi ou To\p.r) irpbs avrov, he joined Cyrus in the war against him (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 2 ). Tots vopois epfuvcw, abiding by the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4 4 ). "MS/; pot errt/3ovXeuoucrt T^V ftfyfcnjv /3ov\r)v, they make the vilest (greatest)- plot against me (Dem. 53, 16). HoXXaKiy Trovrjpois eVi^etpoOcrt TT p(iy p,a f) p t v ToX/xt'S^s 6 KJ)pv|, let Tolmides the herald be with us (Xen. Anab. 3, I 46 ). napicrrao-Oai aXXijXot?, to stand by one another (Xeu. HelL 6, 5 3:t ). Tavrats rats crv p.(po pals irfpifirta-fv, he fell into these misfortunes: (Isoc. 4, 101). 'EK Tirots, to yire good hojies to the men (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 19 ). Ot tv e'8 pats ffjL7ri-rrTovTs, those that fall into an ambuscade (Xen. Hipparch. 8, 20). i 1779. NOTE. 1. When the compounds of lv are used simply with a local reference, they are not followed by the dative alone, but by eV with dative, or cis with the accusative ; as f/jLfjifivavTf<; cV TTJ 'ATTIJOJ (Thuc. 2, 23 3 ); fo-^SaXeoroaTn/v-.-fc MI'AT/TO./ (Hdt. 1, 14 8 ). 2. Similarly the compounds of o-uV, CTTI, n-pds, napd, jrepL are often followel by the same (or another) preposition and the required case instead of the simple dative. 1780. NOTE. SiWSa -nvL , / know something as well as (with) another ; o-JyotSa. e/u-avrw rt, / am aware or conscious of something. Ov8e wj)8ti (TO i TIS t < 6 1 TW TT ar pi KOI rfj p. rj T p I fiovov ytyfvrjfj.fda, a\\a KOI ty TC a r p i 8 i, we are born not only for our father and mother, but also for our country (Dem. 18, 205). A v T Trove?, every man toils for himself (Soph. Aj. 1366). MeyXa)i> irpdy- fj.dr o TOIOVTOS -n-XovTfl, ovx a v r a>, such a man is rich for another's benefit, not for himself (Plat. Menex. 246). Oii^ air diAi7r7roj/ care irdAcis 'EAAr/viSas avopairooi^e trOaL 81 a TT o p i a v <^o8iwv T o I s o-Tpareuofie'vois, you let Philip enslave Greek cities for lack of provisions to the soldiers (Dem. 3, 20). 1789. NOTE. Observe the expressions o-T^>avoi)o-6ai nvi, to crown oneself in honour of some one, and Kfipea-dal nvt, to shear one's hair for some one. 148 DATIVE 1790 'EK(\(V( (p i\ov p.t v a> ylyvtrai, all blessings come (are) spon- taneously to him who is beloved (Xen. Hier. 3, 5). Oi'xeta TO. re era 17 p. I v virdp^fi, KOI a- ol TO. fjpfTepa, your relations with us will again revive, and ours with you (Plat. Lach. 181 a ). T Hi> vibs TW 2 (f> o 8 p i a, Sphodrias had a son (Xen. Hell. 5, 4 2S ). With the verb sometimes omitted ; as in Xen. Cyr. 7,5 s ". 1792. NOTE. Sometimes eo-rt or ela-t is omitted. Ot irovot fyov rois dyadols, labours are a relish to good things (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 80 ). To> irarpl nvpi\dp.irr)s ovofia, the father's name is Pyrilampes (Plat. Farm. 126 b ). 1 793. NOTE. The expression ri e/ioi KO.L erot (COTIV) ; means what have I to do with you? Thus TI v K.Tr]^dru>v TOIS &tols, one of the possessions belonging to the gods (Plat. Phaedo 62 b ). This construction is more frequent in Herodotus and in poetry. 1795. Ethical Dative. The dative of personal pronouns is sometimes used in familiar language with mere expletive force, or for liveliness of expression, to denote some one as interested. Sometimes it cannot be conveniently translated. 1797 DATIVE 149 Tt (TO i ftadff tyocbtl, everything sounds to one who is in fear (Soph. Frag. 58). 'O p,(v yap f e'o-rtV, let us go back if that pleases you (Plat. Phaedo 78 b ). 'Aa-p-evois rols dvdpoiTrois fK TOV (TKOTOVS TO (f>6i)s eylyvfTo, to the joy of men does light come after darkness, lit. to men rejoicing (Plat. Cratyl. 418 d ). 3. This dative, especially with a participle in agreement, may also be used in connection with a statement of time or place ; the participle alone may be so used. T Hi> f)p.(pd TrtpTTTT) f TT nr\ f ova- 1 rot? 'Adijvoiois, it was the fifth day since the Athenians sailed out, lit. it was the fifth day for the Athenians sailing out (Xen. Hell. 2, I 27 ). Evpfia-fi....8fK.a 0fpr)....T(p Trpcorw 7roA'/na> o~tayfy(VT)p.fva, he will find that there were ten summers to the first war (Thuc. 5, 20 3 ). ''Eirio'a.p.vos e'trn ir6\is Iv 8fia fo~7T\tovTi rbv 'loviov K.O\ITOV, Epidamnus is a city on the right as you sail ( = to one sailing) into the Ionian gulf (Thuc. 1, 24 1 ). Ot vntpftavTi \lfj.ov FeYm, the Getae beyond the Haemus (Thuc. 2, 96 1 ). 1797. NOTE. When no noun is used in agreement with the participle, nvL or di>fy>u>7rois is understood. Thus is explained the phrase J>? o-ui/eXovrt fiirelv or (rvv\6vTi elTrciv, to speak briefly (lit. for me to siy it, having made the matter briel ) ; a-wfXwTL alone may be ao 150 DATIVE 1798 used, as in Isae. 4, 22. Note also S ?^(iv, it seems to me to be fitting to think it is so (Plat. Phaedo 114 d ). Of? ovfie anal- tXvtrmXrjtre iTfidofifvois, to whom it did not profit to obey even once (Lys. 25, 27). Et rod* avroi

, if it is agreeable to him to be thus called (Aesch. Ag. 156). Ei Xaiof teat aptivov dr) av rf) TrdXft ovra> icara- V OTT\ ^pTjo-o/iai *cai a8eX<^)c5, I will use you as a friend and a brother (Xen. Anab. 7, 2 25 ). Similarly many idiomatic expressions ; as xpfjo-tfat re^vy, to follow a trade ; opyfi xpfjo-dai, to indulge in anger. 2. Sometimes vo/uw is used in the same way. $a>vfi...voniov(Ti, they use the language (Hdt. 4, 117 1 ). Qva-iais...ev(>p.iov, they observed sacrifices (Thuc. 2, 38 1 ). 1804. Dative of Cause. The dative is used to express cause. 'A7rodvr), he dies through disease (Xen. Anab. 7, 2 32 ). Oi>x v ft p 1 1, dXX' d v d y K y \ap.^dvop,v TO. eVir^Seta, we take provisions, not from wanton violence, but from, necessity (Xen. Anab. 5, 5 16 ). > Ayvoia...ea/iap- rdvovo-i, they err from ignorance (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 38 ). Bia6p.voi.,..Tov iridv ( IT i 6 v p. i a, forced by the desire to drink (Thuc. 7 , 84 1 ). HdvTts rjSovTo rrj flprivji, all rejoiced on account of the peace (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 2 ). 'H^^d/xe^a TOIS yfyevrjp.fvois, we were vexed at what has happened (Xen. Anab. 5, 7 20 ). Al(rx^vop.ai rot rals Trportpov A p. a p r i a i s, I am ashamed of my former faults (Ar. Eq. 1355). 1805. NOTE. Ttpirfa-Oai TIVI, to delight in anything, is very rare in Attic prose. In poetry the dative of cause with this verb is occasionally a person ; as reWoio-i reptpOfLs, being delighted with the children (Soph. Oed. Col. 1139). Od. 14, 244. 152 DATIVE 1806 1806. NOTE. 1. With /Jape'ws cpfiv and ^oXe?? fpfiv, to be distressed, to bear grievously, either the dative or accusative may be used; as Plat. Menex. 248"; Xen. Hell 3, 4 9 ; Xen. Rep. Ath. 2, 6; Xen. Anab. 1, 3 3 . 2. When dyaTraw and o-re'pyo) mean to be satisfied, they may also take the dative or accusative ; as dyaTroWe? T-JJ o-wn/pia, being content with their safety (Lys. 2, 44) ; crrfpyciv (with dat., Plat. Hipp. Maj. 295 b ; with ace., Lys. 33, 4). 1807. NOTE. 1. With verbs of feeling, the cause may be expressed by CTTI with the dative ; as CTT! rot? Karats Suo-^epaiVovras, being grieved at it's (Isoc. 1, 26). See 1852, 2(d). 2. For the genitive of cause with some verbs of this class, see 1680. 1808. NOTE. An external cause is often expressed by vn-6 with the genitive ; as OVK eSiWvro KaOevStw viro As?;?, they could not sleep from sorrow (Xen. Anab. 3, I 3 ). 1809. NOTE. The cause on account of which anything happens is expressed by 8ia with the accusative (1842, 2) ; the cause for the >>ake of which anything occurs is expressed by IvtKa with the genitive (1862, 4). 1810. Dative of Manner. The dative is used to express manner. Kpavyj/ 7To\\f) fnida-i, they advance with loud outcry (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 4 ). "Qcrirtp opyjj eWXevo-e, he commanded as in anger (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 8 ). Tovrw TO) rpoTro) f-rropfvdyo-av, in this way they proceeded (Xen. Anab. 3, 4 s3 ). 'ArXt 177 vinTf dva~rr), in reality, in fact ; ravTfl, this way ; irjj ; which way ? fyfjmirin. publicly ; I8ia, privately ; Kotvf), in common ; irt^ji, on foot ; these datives are used without a qualifying word. 1811. NOTE. Otherwise, when the dative of manner would have no attribute, a prepositional phrase is usually preferred ; as fiera with justice ; ot aKpi/?as, with accuracy ; Trpos /3mv, by forte ; , with all one's might. 1812. NOTE. Sometimes the dative of manner is a dative of respect, and is then practically equivalent to the accusative of specifi- cation. 1816 DATIVE 153 Tj/ v \fKpdevTfs, having been inferior to us in number (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 31 ). TlpoTtpov rfi 8vvdp.fi , and art is weaker than necessity by far (Aesch. Pro. 514). Totrovrw rj8lot> o> oftr)(rav, in the tenth year they came to an agreement (Thuc. 1, 103'). 'Opxdo-dai navaOyvaiois, to dance, at the Panathenaea (Ar. Nub. 988). 154 DATIVE 1817 1817. NOTE. When the above datives have no attribute, cV is always prefixed. 'Ei> WKT'I, at night (Men. Mon. 150). 'Ev ro> ^et/iwvt, in the winter (Xen. Oec. 17, 3). The exceptions are only apparent ; as vov^via (on new-moon day), on the first of the month (the adjective is here in the nominative) ; Xfip&vos o>pa, in the winter season (the genitive serving as attribute). 1818. NOTE. 1. When the attribute of the temporal dative ia 58f, OVTOS, cWvos, or 6 auros, the preposition ev may be inserted or omitted. Thus Tjj8t (ravrtj, IKUVTJ) rrj i^/xepa or eV Trjoe (ravTrj, CKfivr)) TTJ r}fj.fpi ; and 17 ^ftc'pa or eV y rinfpa. But we have regularly ev TOVTW TW xpovw or *aipa>, at this (that) lime or moment ; ev TW Trporepov v) xp6v) va-Tfp o ^povw. 2. But ev is never omitted in phrases like eV vo-repu, lv TO> ev TOUTO), c^ TW TOTC, etc., when xP^f ^ s understood. 1819. NOTE. Alongside of /ua i?/tepa and the like, we find also cV fjiia fiaepa. With greater cardinal numbers as well as adjectives like ?, oAt'yos, etc., the temporal dative regular takes ev. v oTrai/Tt TO) xpo v< jp> * n the whole time (Lys. 2, 54). 'Ev e/38o/xijcoi/T (Lys. 19, 60). 'Ei/ TroXXw (plicpw) \pnvtp. 1820. NOTE. When nouns that in themselves do not express time (as 7r6A./uo<;, flprjvrj) are used as temporal datives, they are regularly preceded by eV. Ta firiTr]8(vfjiaTa Koiva tv Tro\fj., especially in Thucydides ; as CKCI'I/I; rff ^, during that incursion (Thuc. 2, 20 1 ). Thuc. 1, 128 s . 1821. NOTE. Karci riva, in any one's time (see 1853, 2(6)) , in any one's time, under the rule of any one (see 1852, For the genitive of time, see 1729 1731. 1822. NOTE. In poetry we sometimes find V inserted (except with names of festivals) where in prose it would be omitted, and the reverse. In a few cases WKTI is found alone ; as Od. 15, 34 ; Eur. Hipp. 106. 1829 PREPOSITIONS 155 1823. Dative of Place. In prose the dative of place occurs only with the names of Attic denies, very rarely with names of other places. Ta rpoiraia rare MapadS>vi nal 2aXa/j,tvt /cat nXaraiais, the trophies at Marathon, at Salamis, and at Plataea (Plat. Menex. 245"). 'lo-fyiot xol Ne/ie'a, at Isthmus and Nemea (Lys. 19, 63). But tv 'A.6i}vais. 1824. NOTE. Here belong old locatives or datives like ot/cot, at home; KVK\tp, all around, in a circle; also adverbs like Tavry, rfjoe r here. See the Locative Case in Part II of the Grammar. 1825. Several isolated cases of the dative of a place for ets or Kara. with the accusative occur with *x iv > t l> an d a t ; as Thuc. 3, 29 1 . 1826. In poetry the dative without a preposition is often used to denote the place where. This occurs mostly in Homer, much less often in the tragic and lyric poets. 'E X X a 8 i otKta vaiwv, inhabiting dwellings in Hellas (II. 16, 595). EvSe p. v x

, to fall to the ground (Soph. El. 747). PREPOSITIONS 1828. Prepositions as Adverbs. 1. The prepositions were all originally adverbs and as such could be used alone without a dependent case. 2. The only remnants of this use in Attic prose are the expressions Trpos 8e (or TT/OOS Se ai) and Kal Trpos, and besides (Dem. 20, 112 ; Plat. Gorg. 469"). 1829. NOTE. Herodotus has besides 717)69 Se' and Ki (Od. 17, 208). 2. In tragedy we find ?rp6s 8e and *at Trpos (rarely TC irpos) ; also ev 8e'; v 8e (irapa 8e, Eur. 7jO/l. -4wZ. 201); cTrt, and besides (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 183). 3. Homer sometimes joins -two prepositions either ad- verbially or with a case ; as n-ept' T* afj. (fir^Xdtv), dark- ness came on (II. 1, 475). IloXe/ioto vt), after them the divine Ulysses himself went out of the house (Od. 21, 190). 'OX'(\icrcr(Tai (Soph. El. 746). *E IT t 8e c a X t a- o v (Ar. Lysist. 1280). Mfra irov x a\r)pov, Kara 8e. . . . TroAAous 8^/xous, they devastated Pkalerum and many demes (Hdt. 5, 81 3 ). 3. In Attic poetry and in Herodotus, cases of tmesis with the preposition following the verb probably never occur. In Homer such cases are sometimes found. 4. In Attic prose examples of tmesis are exceedingly rare, and the reason for them is always obvious. Thus 7rapfTKfva.a-fj.evoi, a.v p.fv TLv (Od. 15, 410). 3>i\u>v airo (Od. 7, 152). 'AXqdetar viro (Eur. And. 321). For the change of accent, as v-no for viro, see anastrophe in Part I of the Grammar. 1836. NOTE. Besides postpositive conjunctions and words qualifying the dependent case, other words are often inserted between the preposition and its case in poetry, especially in Hooaer. Mfra -yap T K al a\yf> (Ar. Eccl. 976). Note the frequent insertion of tri between irpos and its genitive with a verb of supplicating expre -sed or understood ; as irpos at ru>vbf yovarutv (so. iKtrtvia), by thy knees I entreat thee (Eur. Hipp. 607). 1837. Preposition used for a Compound Verb. 1. In Attic prose r, to come 1840 PREPOSITIONS 159 from the king. 'Airb ((K) rf/s TroXews eX$eiv, ety TTJV TTO\IV livai, eV TTJ TroXti 1840. 1. (a) With verbs of motion the Greek sometimes uses eV with the dative with reference to the rest which follows the completion of the action of the verb. Here we naturally would expect e/'s with the accusative. 'E v Ti, wept, eV/, irpos, and (rarely) napd, with the dative where the accusative would be expected. (6) In Attic Greek this construction is found principally with the perfect and pluperfect ; as V TOI'TU> TW TOTTW Ka.TaTreewytvai, to have made one's escape in that region (L J lat. Soph. 260 d ). In poetry (especially Hoiner) it occurs more frequently and also in forms different from those in prose ; as V Tpu>yi...opoucrav, they rushed on the Trojans (II. 16, 258). 2. With verbs meaning to arrive, to assemble, to land, and the like, the Greek often uses is with the accusative, thus referring to the motion denoted or implied by the verb. Here ei/ with the dative would be expected. 2vXXtyo/iei/ot fudev els TO 8 1 K a c.pu>v ( K. irdywv, we sat on (and looked down from) the top of a hill (Soph. Ant. 411). 'E TV d^6v7p7raoTo icat avra -ra airo T>V oiKimv v\a (for tv rait oiKtais), even the very timbers in the houses (lit. from the houses) had been carried off (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 16 ). Of tic rijs ay op as KaraXiirovrfs TO. &via ((pvyov (for tv rff dyopa), the market-people (the people in the market) left their goods and fled (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 18 ). Ot JT a p' 'A (3 po K 6 p.d p-ter$o(popoi "EXXqi/er diroo-rdvTfs r/\dov irapa Kvpov (for irapa 'A|3poKop,a), the, Greek mercenaries having deserted from Abrocomas came over to Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 3 ). Similarly fls is occasionally found for tv ; as 6 drr6crro\os fs rf)i> MiXrjTov %v, the messenger was in Miletus (Hdt. 1, 21 2 ). 1841. NOTE. The above constructions are termed constructio pregnans and occur sometimes with adverbs which may be similarly interchanged. Kflvos 8' oifov (for oTrot) fBffirjKfv, ovo'ds otSe, ivhere he has gone (and remains) no one knows (Soph. Trach. 40). *O ir o i (for OTTOV) (ca^Wa/ifv, where we (have arrived and) are standing (Soph. Oed. Col. 23). T/r dyvod TOV tKfldfv (for furl) iro\(fjjov SfOpo fjovTa ; who do not know that the war in that quarter will come hither (Dem. 1, 15). Toi>s (vSodfv (for Hvftov) irdvras f&yt, he brought out all who were within (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2 5 ). So (vdf v i (Lat. amb-, compare a/Ap.oicriv, about his shoulders (II. 11, 527). 'A/x Bavdra) av-rfjs, concerning her death (Hdt. 3, 32 1 ). 'Ap., on account of fear (Eur. Or. 825). 3. WITH ACCUSATIVE, about (mostly of place, time, number, also other relations). 'A/xcpt Trvp Kadr}p.(i>ovs, seated about the fire (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 s ). 'Apfpl pta-as VVKTOS, at about midnight (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 8 ). 'Afjupl TO. irfvTtjKovTa f-nj, about fifty years (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 15 ). 'A/u(pt Selirvov fix (V > ne was a t supper (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5 44 ). Elvai d/i^>l TO tepa, to be engaged in the sacrifices (Xen. Cyr. 7, I 1 ). Ta dpv KOKOI ytyivr^vrai, they have become bad instead of good (Thuc. 1, 86 1 ). 'Av$' 2>v, because, lit. for that which (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 4 ). 2. IN COMPOSITION, against, in opposition to, in return, instead : 1847. Airv, he set out from Sardis (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 4 ). 'Av StKavid TOT* ^ v^V diro TOV dr/funi dvTtiirovTos, 1848 PREPOSITIONS 163 one of the popular faction replying (Thuc. 4, 130 3 ). 'ATTO ardafwv, on account of factions (Thuc. 1, 12 3 ). 'ATTO vv6rip.aTos, by agreement (Thuc. 6, 61 2 ). Et/xara OTTO {-v\a)v TrcTroirj/jLeva, garments made of tree-wool = cotton (Hdt. 7, 65). Zfjv diro TWV (\axio-Ta>v xP T IP^ Toi>v > t ^ ve on the smallest means (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 14 ). (d) Partitively and Possessively. 'OX/yoi oVo TroXXwj', few of many (Thuc. 1, HO 1 ). &06v(p drro r>v irparrwv dv8pa>v, through hatred (on the part) of the most prominent men (Thuc. 4, 108 7 ). (e) Of Agent with passives (seldom) : lirpdxO-ij O.TT avrtav ouSev epyov d^ioAoyov, no noteworthy deed has been accomplished on their part (Thuc. 1, 17 1 ). (/) Various Phrases. 'ATTO (TKOITOV, away from the mark, amiss (Plat. Theaet. 179 C ). 'ATTO TOV irpayp.aTos, foreign to the subject (Dem. 24, 6). 'A<' tavrov, on one's own account, of one's self, voluntarily, unforced (Thuc. 5, 60 1 ). 'ATTO Tavro/iarov, of itself, without cause (Thuc. 2, 77 4 ). 'ATTO y\u>v (T>V, after (an interval of) /o?tr hundred years (Isoc. 6, 27). (d) Of Means. *EXey< 81' fpp.T)v(w$, he spoke through an interpreter (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 17 ). At* firtopKidt, by means of perjury (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 n ). 164 PREPOSITIONS 1849 (e) Various Expressions. Aia (ptXids Ifvat rtvi ..... 8ia iravrbs TroAe'/xov levcu nvi, to be in friendship with any one ..... to be in constant war with any one (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 s ). Aia fyoftw yiyvtcrdai, to get to be in a state of fear (Plat. Leg. 791 b ). Ata o-rd/xaro? t to have in one's mouth, to mention always (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 26 ). Aia (X flv > to hold in one's hand (Thuc. 2, 13 2 ). Ata panpaiv ..... 8ia ftpaxvrdrutv TOVS \6yovs iroielcrOcu, to make the speeches long ..... very brief (Plat. Gorg. 449 b ). Ata Ta^eW, 'quickly = by quick ways (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 9 ). Aia fianpov, at a great interval (Plat. Theaet. 193). Ata xpovou, some time later (Xen. Mem. 4, 4 5 ). Aia TtXovs, thoroughly, through to the end (Soph. Aj. 685). 2. WITH ACCUSATIVE. (a) Of Cause or Agency = through, by the help of, on account of. Aia icavpa, through (on account of) the heat (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 6 ). SaJfto-tfai fit' ffftas, to be saved by us (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 13 ). Ata ptyddvp.ov 'Adf)vr)v, by the help of great-souled Athene (Od. 8, 520). Aia TOVTO, 8ia ravra, 816, through this, for this reason. Aia rt ; why ? With the accusative of a person, 6id denotes that the person acts of his own impulse ; with the genitive, the person acts under command or request. (b) Of Place or Time, through (poetic, mostly epic and lyric). Aia Sw/xara, through the halls (II. 1, 600). Aia VVKTO, through the night (II. 2, 57). 8. IN COMPOSITION, through, thoroughly, asunder or apart (Lit. di-, ), 8t-aya>, 8(.a-< 1849. els or I?, into, to, up to ; originally to a point within anything, as opposed to c, out of. Of Attic prose writers, Thucydides uses cs (so also Herodotus) ; other Attic prose writers have eis. The poets use both indifferently. Both forms are from original and Cretan eVs (see cv). 1. WITH ACCUSATIVE only. (a) Of Place. Aiffiyo-av ts TT)V 2tK(\idv, they passed over into Sicily (Thuc. 6, 2 4 ). Eft KapSov^ow (p.^d\\(iv, to make an incursion into the land of the Carduchi (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 16 ). Els $, to build walls down to the sea (Thuc. 1, 107 1 ). The accusative of a person here implies the land or dwelling. But in Homer, seldom in other poetry, ds is also found used like wr or irpos with a person ; as ds 'A^iX^a, to Achilles (II. 15, 402). 1850 PREPOSITIONS 165 With the accusative of a person, tls may also mean among, against or towards, before (with notions of speaking) ; as rov KO.KKTTOV TT\OVTOS (is Trpwrovs ayti, wealth brings the worst among the highest (Eur. Alcmena frag. 8). Ov yap ts , till dawn (Od. 11, 375). M.vr)peu>v els airavra xpovov, a memorial for all time (Isoc. 11, 10). Eis tviavrov, for a year (Od. 4, 595). 'Es o, until. So of an expected future date, as els TTJV vv-repaidv ov% r)*(v, on the following day he did not come (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 25 ). (c) Of Number. El%( Towards KOI irovs (is dp(Tr)v, to train men for virtue (Plat. Gorg. 519 e ). Ev ds cro(pidv, (a city) most famous for wisdom (Plat. Apol. 29 d ). Eis 8vvap.iv, up to one's strength (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 23 ). Eis TOVTO dpdaovs, to this point of boldness (Dem. 21, 194). 'Es reXos, finally (Eur. Ion 1621). 2. IN COMPOSITION, into, in, to : elo-fidXXw, elar-dyw. 1850. iv (Poetic often evi; sometimes etv, rarely elvi), in, corres- ponding to Lat. in with the ablative. 1. WITH DATIVE only. (a) Of Place. *Ev rfj TroXet, in the city. 'Ev "^Trdprrj, in Sparta. H6\iv...(v rw Evf-dva) irovTtp, a city on the Euxine Sea (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 22 ). With words implying a number of persons, among ; as eV MijSoiy, among the Medes (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 2 ) ; fv ircuriv dvdpa>7rois, among all men (Xen. Cyr. 8, 5 23 ). And so also before = in the presence of ; as Ae'yeti/ (v vp.lv, to say before you (Xen. Anab. 5, 7 10 ). For eV with verbs of motion, see 1840, 1. (6) Of Time. 'Ev Tovrat TW xpoi/a>, at that time (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 17 ). 'Ev TW x(ip.v dfiav ycyovarts, born of the gods themselves (Isoc. 12, 81). 'E* roiovSf ovfio'fos, on account of such a disgrace (Hdt. 6, 67 1 ). 'Ex iro\(p.ov dpfivij /xaXXoi/ (Sf^atovrat, by war peace is made more stable (Thuc. 1, 124 2 ). So of agent with passive verbs (for viro), the agent regarded as the source ; as en fjcun\(u>s 8(8op.fvai, (the cities) given by the king (Xen. Anab. 1, I 6 ). (d) According to : c(3ov\evovro K TWI/ TrapoVrwv, they took counsel ac- cording to the present state of affairs (Thuc. 3, 29 2 ). (e) Various Expressions. 'En deta?, on the right (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3 10 ). 'Eic iravros rponov, in every way (Lys. 16, 1). 'Ec TroXXov, at a great distance ; ' urov, in equal condition (Xen. Anab. 3, 4"). 2. IN COMPOSITION, out of, from, away : cV/JaXAw, K-/?atVa>. 1852. *irt, on, upon. 1. WITH GENITIVE. (a) Of Place where or whither. 'Eirl TUV ovptav, on the mountains (Hdt. 7, 111 2 ). 'Eirl TTJS Kt(paXfjs (ptptiv TI, to carry anything on the head (Xen. Anab. 4, 3 8 ). 'Enl y^s, on the earth (Plat. Menex. 240-"). UoXtts *V1 epatrjs, cities in Thrace (Dem. 9, 26). Mctvat eVt rov n-ora/xov, to remain at the river (Xen. Anab. 4, 1852 PBEPOSITIONS 167 eirl AeV TipfTepwv irpoyovwv, in our forefather's time (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 31 ). 'Eir' ffj.ov, in my time (Dem. 3, 2). 'En-' flpr^vijs, in time of peace (II. 2, 797). 'Eirl Kivdvvov, in time of danger (Thuc. 6, 34 9 ). (c) Of Various Relations. Avrol f(f)' eavrcav e^wpow, they began to march by themselves (Xen. Anab. 2, 4 10 ). 'ETaxdr)po\oyr)(j,eva eirl TOV 8iKav, before witnesses (Xen. Hell. 6, 5 41 ). KaXer#ai eiri TIVOS, to be named for (after) something (Hdt. 7, 40 4 ). 'Eiri TWOS \eyeiv, to speak with reference to some one (Plat. Charm. 155 d ). Tovj eirl TU>V irpdy- /xarei>, those in charge of (public) affairs (Dem. 18, 247). 'Eirl tr^oX?}?, at leisure (Plat. Theaet. 172 d ). 'Ew' dXrjdeMs, truthfully (Dem. 18, 17). 2. WITH DATIVE. (a) Of Place. Mip.v' ftrl 7Tvpyq>, remain on the tower (II. 6, 431). KXripovxovs eirl rfj x^Pll XeiVova-t, they leave in the land holders of allotments (Hdt. 5, 77 3 ). ndXtv eirl rff 6a\a.TTT] otKovfjLevrjv, a city situated upon (by) the sea (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 1 )- (b) Of Succession in Time or Place. 'Avecrrrj 8' eV atma 4>epavXdy, Pheraulas stood up after him (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3 7 ). 'ETT! TOVTOIS, thereupon (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5 21 ). 4>ovos eVi (pova>, murder on murder (Ear. Iph. Taur. 197). (c) Of Time (mostly poetic) : em WKTL, in the night (II. S, 259). (d) Of Condition, Purpose, Cause. 'Erri TOVTOIS f\a(3ov KOI (ftcxrav irdvTts Ta Trtara, on these conditions all received and gave assurances of friendship (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 23 ). 'E^>' , etp' wre, on condition that. Aaj/i'feti/ eVi TOKW, to lend on interest (Plat. Leg. 742 C ). 'ETT' dyada> eKoXatra Tiva, I punished some one for his (own) good (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 18 ). Oi>x eirl Tf\vr) (pades, you did not learn for the sake of a profession (Plat. Prot. 312 b ). 'Eirl rtVi f*fyi(rrov (ppovds ; on what do you value yourself most ? (Xen. Symp. 3, 7). 'En-i ir>v iroirjtrfi "Opypov pd\icrra TfdavfjMKa, I admire Homer the most for epic poetry (Xen. Mem. 1, 4 3 ). (e) Of Various Relations. 'En-t o-ot eWt \tyeiv, it is in your power to say (Xen. Mem. 2, 6 s8 ). 'Err! rw in the power of his brother (Xen. Anab. 1, I 4 ). Oi tirl TO"IS wpay- 168 PREPOSITIONS 1853 fjiatrii', those at the head of affairs (Dem. 8, 76). 'Eptt tirl rols airoQavoixn, he will speak over the dead (Plat. Menex. 234 b ). Tov vopov es dvpas, to go to the gates of the king (Xen. Anab. 2, I 8 ). 'le'veu eVt TOVS TroXe/u'ovr, to march against the enemy (Xen. Anab. 3, I 42 ). (b) Of Extension over Space or Time. 'Evl irao-av EvpvTnjv, throughout or over all Europe (Plat. Critias 112*). 'ETT! rptls f)p.(pds, for three days (Xen. Anab. 6, 6 M ). (c) Of an Object or Purpose : ITW ? e<' vowp, let some one go for water (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3 60 ). (d) Various Expressions. 'ETTI TroXv, widely. To eVl tro\v, for the most part. Aiacpfpwv tirl irpaiv, differing in practical ability (Plat. Rep. 370 b ). To eV e'/i or TO eV e'/x (ivai, as far as I am concerned (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 12 ; Thuc. 4, 28 1 ). 4. IN COMPOSITION, upon, over, after, toward, at, against, moreover : 1853. icard (compao'e /carw, below), originally down (opposed to dva). 1. WITH GENITIVK. (a) Down from, down upon, underneath. 'AXa/xevoi KOTO. TTJS irfrpds, jumping down from the rock (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 17 ). Mvpov nara TTJS KfffraXrjs Kara^tavrfs, pouring perfume on his head (Plat. Rep. 398 a ). K<(O-O/ACU Kara ^doi/or, / shall lie beneath the earth (Eur. Heracl. 1033). Toi/ (cara yrjs, the one buried (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6 5 ). (b) Against (of speaking, and the like). *O TfXfvraiov K.OT ffjiov fiTTt, what he last said against me (Xen. Hell. 2, 3 M ). Mdprvpas irapi\tv TtXdav, to swear by full-grown victims (Thuc. 5, 47). 2. WITH ACCUSATIVE : downwards (of motion) ; of motion or extension, over, throughout, among, against, at, on ; also for = in search of, 1854 PEEPOSITIONS 169 according to, relating to, during, by (in distributive expressions), nearly (of number). (a) Of Place. Kara Trora/iov, down stream (Hdt. 4, 44?). Kara yrjv KOL Kara rfjv OaXarrav, by land and by sea (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 13 ). At e^tSi/at Kara rrda-av TTJV "fyv eto-t, vipers are distributed throughout the whole earth (Hdt. 3, 109 6 ). IlpoeXtfeiv Kara rfjv 686v, to proceed on the road (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 16 ). Ila/ei avrov Kara ro orepvov, he strikes him on the breast (Xen. Anab. 1, S 28 ). Kara TroXij/, opposite the city Sinope (Hdt. 1, 76 1 ). Toi/y Kara r&r TruXar KretVovo-t, i/iei/ /ciii , according to the law (Xen. Anab. 7, 3 23 ). Kara irdvra rpoirov, in every way (Xen. Anab. 6, 6 30 ). Kara o-TrouSjji/, with zeal (Thuc. 2, 94 3 ). Kar' fja-vxirjv, quietly (Hdt. 1, 9 5 ). Kara updros, with all one's might (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 19 ). Kara irdvra, in all respects (Dem. 24, 108). To Kar' ep.4, as regards myself (Dem. 18, 247). Ka0" apTrayrjv, for (in search of) plunder (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 2 ). Kara e f ^aKr^ZXiovs KOI rerpaKoo-tovs, nearly 6400 (Hdt. 6, 117 1 ). 3. IN COMPOSITION, down, against (often it merely strengthens or intensifies the meaning of the simple verb) : aT-fcrOLW, /cara-yeXaco. 1854. p-erd, amid, among ; with (compare fifra TroXXwi/ Saicpvcav, to supplicate with many tears (Plat. Apol. 34 C ). 'YTTf'p/SoXoj/ diroKTeivova-i /nera Xap/xiVov, they kill Hyperbolun by the aid of Charminus (Thuc. 8, 73 :! ). 2. WITH DATIVE, poetic (chiefly epic), among, with : *ETfc)p..../ATa Trpwroio-i dVeo-/ce, Hector appeared among the first (11. 11, 64). 170 PREPOSITIONS 1855 3. WITH ACCUSATIVE. (a) After (in time or order). At icara) tret /ira avnji/ (i.e. njv ei> Mapa$a>ri p.d)(rjv), in the tenth year after the battle at Marathon (Thuc. 1, 18 3 ). Il6Xti'...r^v ir\ovo-i 8t8naaXa), tfcey dtn with the teacher (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 s ). Ta rrap* t/iol, affairs with me (Xen. -4no6. 1, 7 4 ). With things^ mostly poetic, aa Od. 6, 97. Note expressions like irap' rjfjiiv, in our opinion (Soph. Trach. 589). 3. WITH ACCUSATIVE, to, to (a point) near ; along, beside ; beyond or beside, except ; contrary to ; during ; in comparison with ; on account of. 1856 PREPOSITIONS 171 (a) Of Place. 'A.iriKOfji(voi irapa Kpolvov, having come to Croesus (Hdt. 1, 36). Ilc'/iim rrapa TOVS "E\\r)vas npevpeis, he sends ambassadors to the Greeks (Xen. Anab. 6, I 2 ). "irrjv irapa vfjas, they (two) went to the ships (II. 1, 347). *H/j.rjv, not on account of his own strength (Dem. 4, 11). (e) Contrary to, besides. Ilapa TOVS vopovs, contrary to (= beyond) the laws (Xen. Mem. 4, 4 2 ). OVK ((rri irapa ravr oXXa, there are no others besides these (Ar. Nitb. 698). (/) Various Expressions. Hapa fUKpov, within a little, by a little (Isoc. 7, 6). Ilapa iroXv, by much, by a great deal (Thuc. 1, 29 3 ). Ilap' oXiyov iroiflv, he sent heralds concerning the truce (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 1 ). Ilept ovopdruv 8ia(pfpf E(po/3oi)i'To irfpl Tys \mpas, they were in fear about the country (Xen. Anab, 5, 5'). (b) Around or about locally (rare and poetic) : (nrfiov;, around the grotto (Od. 5, 68). (c) Above, superior to, surpassing (Homeric) : Trept (fj.fj.efai., to be superior to all others (11. 1, 287). In prose this use survives in the common phrases Trept (TrXci'ovos, TrXcto-Tov, oXt'yov or arfUKpov, eXarrovos, e Travro?, ouSevos) Trouurtfai Or ijyela-Oat TI, to think much (more, most, little, etc.) of anything, to esteem highly, etc. (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 10 ; Anab. 1, 9 7 ; 1, 9 16 : Lys. 31, 31). 172 PREPOSITIONS 1857 2. WITH DATIVE (uncommon in Attic prose). (a) Around or about locally: OwpaKa l^ irepi rots arepvois, he has a cuirass round his breast (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 13 ). (b) About = concerning. Zfvs (8d(rf ntpl TV ytvfi r)p>v, Zeus feared about our race (Plat. Prot. 322 C ). Note irraitiv or a~(pd\\ a-dai irtpi rti/t, to get a fall over anything, to fail, to make a mistake (Thuc. 1, 69 s ). 3. WITH ACCUSATIVE (nearly the same as d/iV n-uXwi/, before the gates (Xen. Hell. 2, 4 34 ). IIpo 68ov, well forward on the way (II. 4, 382). (b) Of Time. Hpo rfjf p.axns, before the battle (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 13 ). IIpo Sjfitpas (Xen. Cyr. 4, 4 U ). IIpo TOV, formerly. (c) Of Preference or Exchange. A.iptl(rdai Trpo TJTTTJS rt KOI 8ov\fids ddvarov, to choose death in preference to defeat and slavery (Plat. Rep. 386 b ). IIpo rwrSe, for this (Soph. El. 495). IIpo TroXXot) iroifla-dai, to regard highly, to consider important (Isoc. 5, 14). (d) Of Protection : in behalf of. yia\fv dypvTTVTjffas, having watched in your behalf (Xen. Anab. 7, 6 M ). 2. IN COMl'OtilTiON, before, forth, forward, in defence, in preference : , irpo-Ki.v8vvevo), irpo-uipwp.au. 1858. irp<5s (Horn, also Trpem and TTOTI), at or by (properly in front of) ; related to irpo. 1. WITH GENITIVE. (a) Looking towards = in front of. rf/t BoteoT/ar ndrai, it lies orer against Boeotia (Dem. 23, 182). To avos T(I\OS, the wall facing 8icyon (Xen. Hell. 4, 4 1 "). 1858 PREPOSITIONS 173 (b) Of Origin and Characteristic. 'AXKiftidSrjs Xeyerat irpbs irarpbs 'AXK/iattoviSciif ciVat, Alcibiades is said to be of the Alcmaeonidae on his father's side (Dem. 21, 144). IIp6r yvvaiicbs TJV, it was the way of a woman (Aesch. Ag. 1619). (c) On the side of (of partisanship), for the benefit or advantage of. KaXXtay fioi Soxei irpbs npeoraydpou dvai, Callias seems to me to be on the side of Protagoras (Plat. Prot. 336 e ). Sirovdas eVonjcraTo.... irpbs Qr)ftaiv, by (before) the gods (Xen. Anab. 5, 7 5 ). AiKaiov....irpbs 6eS>v icai irpbs dvdpairav, just in the eyes of gods and men (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 6 ). (e) From. *EXv, having much praise from you (Xen. Anab. 7, 6 33 ). So occasionally (rarely in Attic prose) of agent with passive verbs (like viro). ' A.8oovvTai irpbs ra>v iro\ea>v, they are held in no esteem by the states (Xen. Oec. 4, 2). (/) Occasionally in Homer, under the protection of, as Od. 6, 207. 2. WITH DATIVE. (a) At, near. npbs rff oiKia, near the house (Xen. Rep. Lac. 15, 6). Ilpor Ba/SvXom qv 6 Kvpos, Cyrus was at Babylon (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 1 ). IIpoj rot? irpayficun, yiyveaBai, to be occupied with affairs (Dem. 8, 11). (6) In addition to, besides : 717365 TOVTOI?, besides this, furthermore (Xen. Cyr. I, 28). 3. WITH ACCUSATIVE. (a) To; against; towards (of time, direction). "HKW trpbs (re, I am come to you (Xen. Mem. 2, I 27 ). Ilpbs $&.iirirov irpea-^fis irtpirdv, to send ambassadors to Philip (Dem. 18, 24). A'are npos /it, say to me (Xen. Anab. 3, 3 2 ). 'levai irpbs rovs iro\[iiovs, to go against the enemy (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 10 ). IIpos ea-irepdv, towards evening (Xen. Hell. 4, S 22 ). Ilpor /3oppav, towards the North (Thuc. 6, 2 4 ). (b) Towards (of disposition friendly or hostile). TTJV tvvoiav TTJV irpbs f)p.as, the good-will towards us (Isoc. 3, 61). Ilpbs roiis 'A.dijvaiovs (ptXiK&s (f%fi.v), to be disposed in a friendly way to the Athenians (Xen. Hell. 4, 8 17 ). Suv&jicar Troiflo-tfat irpbs dXXrjXovy, to make agreements with each other (Aeschin. 1, 161). (c) With a view to ; with regard to ; in relation to, in comparison with, according to. Ilpbs ri p,( ravr e'peoraj; to what purpose to do ask me this? (Xen. Mem. 3, 7 s ). nfirai8(vfj.fda irpbs TT)V aptr^v, we have been educated for valour (Isoc. 6, 174 PREPOSITIONS 1859 102). Tovy apurra irpos dpcrfjv irpvKOTas, those best by nature in regard to virtue (Isoc. 15, 284). Hpos TO. irdpovra t\tf roidtif, with regard to the prtsent subject he spoke thus (Thuc. 6, 41 1 ). To irpos TOV iro\fftov, what pertains to the war (Xen. Anab. 4, 3 10 ). Mefo>...7rpor irdtrav xvpTjv, greater in comparison with any country (Hdt. 2, 35 1 ). OvSt irpos dpyvpiov TTJV fv8ai- fiovidv (Kpivov, nor did they judge of happiness according to money (Isoc. 4, 76). Ylpos avXbv a>pxn, by force (Soph. frag. 701). Ilpor opyrjv, in anger (Ar. Ran. 998). Ilpor (piXini', in friendship (Xen. Anab. 1, 3"). OvStv irpos e/W, nothing to me (Dem. 18, 21). 4. IS COMPOSITION, to, towards, by, besides : irpoo--dyta, Trpoo--ifvai, 1859. ow or older Attic |UK (Lat. cum), with, in company with, in union with. Except in the expression cm/ (TOIS) 0cois, with the help of the gods, aSeX^ai, he was educated with his brother (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 2 ). So of help : o-i-v fools (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4 19 ). (b) In conformity with : , trw-ayo). 1860. uir^p (Horn, also vnup ; Lat. super), over. 1. WITH GENITIVE. (a) Of Place, also of Motion. *O rjXtos virtp 17/10)1' iroptvofKvos, the sun journeying above us (Xen. Mem. 3, 8*). '\irip rfjr KU>MS y^Xtxpoy qv, above the village was a hill (Xen. Anab. 1, 10"). (b) In behalf of, for, on account of. *YVep rfjs iro\as airo6vjiv irpay\uerv>v (poftmiptu, I am in fear on account of public affairs (Dem. 9, 20). 1861 PEEPOSITIONS 175 (c) Concerning = irep>'. (mostly in the orators) : TT/V virep TO? yvw/xr/v l^ovra?, having such an opinion about the luar (Dem. 2, 1). 2. WITH ACCUSATIVE : over or beyond (of place or measure). 'E,wo\tp,fi TOIS 6/>ai Tots vTrep 'EXXijcrTrovroi' OIKOVO-I, he waged war against the Thracians living beyond the Hellespont (Xen. Anab. 1, I 9 ). Ot virtp TO. v, accompanied by trumpets (Hdt. 1, 17 a ). (b) Of Cause. 'Yiro XVTTTJS, through grief (Xen. Cyr. 6, I 35 ). 'YTTO \ip.ov, through hunger (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 5 ). 'YTTO TT)S fjdovrjs, through joy. (c) Of Agent with passive verbs. Ert/iaTo VTTO TOV dr)p.ov, he was honoured by the people (Xen. Hell. 2, 3 15 ). 'A.irf0av(v viro Nlndvdpov, he was slain by Nicander (Xen. Anab. 5, I 15 ). 2. WITH DATIVE, under. 'YTTO TW rei'^et, under the wall (Xen. Hell. 5, 2 41 ). 'Yrro TJJ aKpoiroXti, under the acropolis (Hdt. 6, 105 4 ). 'YTTO /Sao-tXei ovrts, being under (in the power of) the king (Xen. Cyr. 8, I 8 ). For viro with dative as agent in poetry, see 1868. 3. WITH ACCUSATIVE. (a) Of Place, under (of motion towards). 'A.irfi\dov viro ra 8(v8pa, they went under the trees (Xen. Anab. 4, 7 8 ). 'Yrro JTOVTOV fdoo-rro, he dived under the sea (Od. 4, 425). HiiXm- r cat fOvrj av6pa>ira>v v, viro-oTpdrijyos, wr-dyta, to advance by degrees or unnoticed ; vi to send secretly. 176 PEEPOSITIONS 1882 IMPROPER PREPOSITIONS WITH THE GENITIVE 1862. 1. Sxpi and JA^XP I > until, as far as. Mf'xpi TOV MijSi'dy Tft'^our, as far as the wall of Media (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 18 ). T(\i>rris, until the end (Dem. 18, 179). 2. ficeu, without, apart from. *Av(v irXoia>i, without boats (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 3 ). "Avtv TOV KO\T)V 8dai> ivtyntiv, apart from, (in addition to) bringing good reputation (Dem. 18, 89). 3. ir\f\v, except : -rrXty Aios, except Zeus (Aesch. Pro. 50). TlXr/v may also be a conjunction and be followed by some other case ; as Xen. Hier. 1, 18. See 2131, 2234 and 2371. 4. lyeica or I^eicec (Ionic iveca or CLVCKCV), on account of , for the sake of, as regards, generally placed after the noun. Tivos tvfKfv ; on account of what ? (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 20 ). Ae'vSpa dtpaneixiv TOV Kapirov (vtKtv, to raise trees for the sake of the fruit (Xen. Mem. 2, 4 7 ). 'Ao-^aXw? efeov tvfua yt TU>V v, he lived in safety as far as the sycophants were concerned (Isoc. 15, 163). The dramatists also have ovvtua. 5. Examples of other improper prepositions of frequent use : EvBv AuKet'ou, straight towards the Lyceum (Plat. Lys. 203*). 'Eyyvf dyaOov, near the good (Men. Mon. 400) ; in the sense of related to, akin, it takes the dative, as tyyvTtpov T&> davdrto, more akin to death (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7 21 )- n X 17 a- i o v ToC brii.a>TT)piov, near the prison (Plat. Phaedo, 59* 1 ) ; in poetry seldom with the dative. M fragv V 5pa>v, outside of the boundaries (Plat. Leg. 854 d ). E? TOV (piifioros (\0dv, to go within the fortification (Xen. Hier. 2, 10). 'E^wpovv ?a> TOV Tflxovs, they came without the wall (Thuc. 3, 22 8 ). 'Evavrlov woXXwv, in the presence of (before) many (Xen. Mem. 2, 5 1 ). ILpoa-dtv TOV 6t v Kf 6( v TTJS 68ov, on both sides of the road (Xen. Hell. 5, 2*). 'E K ar t p a>0 f v avrov, on each side of it (Thuc. 7, 78*). ^E v 6 t v KOI (v 6 (v TTJS 68ov, on this side and that of the way (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3 9 ). n e'p a v TOV roTa/iov, across (on the other side of) the river (Thuc. 6, 101 6 ). 'Ai>rt- nipds *HX8or, over against Elis (Thuc. 2, 66 1 ) ; so avTiiripdv and K oTavTiTTt pas, over against (Xen. A nab. 1, I 9 ). n ( p d or IT i p a, further than, beyond: trip a TOV /xcrpiov, beyond measure (Dem. 14, 35). 1867 THE VEEB 177 n 6 p p & and TT p o a- a>, far into, advanced, far from : re 6 p p w row $tou r advanced in life (Plat. ^4poZ. 38) ; IT p6 TOV 'EXXj/o-Trdi/Tov, /ar /rom the Hellespont (Hdt. 5, 13 4 ). X ay pis, without, apart from : x > P * TOV a-atparos, apart from the body (Plat. Phaedo 66 e ). "A T p (poetic) = avev (JL 15, 292). Aa$pa or \adpa, secretly, without the knowledge of: \ddpa rS>v o-rpi/, without the hnowledge of the soldiers (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 8 ) ; so Kpixpa (as Thuc. 1, 138 9 ). Xdpiv (ace. of ^apty), for the sake of, on account of: irarpos ^apiv, for his father's sake. Similarly SIKTJV (ace. of 8ie|tjs, see 1771. 'E^efijs is occasionally found with the genitive, as in Plat. Tim. 55 a ; similarly l^s (Plat. Cratyl. 399 d ; gen. Ar. Ban. 765). WITH THE ACCUSATIVE 1864. d>s, to, used only with the accusative of a person, like TT/DOS or cis. Tlopeverai a>s |3a(rtXfa, he goes to the king (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 4 ). Hepfyovaiv a>s avrovs 7rpe'o-/3ety, they will send ambassadors to them (Thuc. 1, 90 3 ). ADVERBS 1865. As in English, adverbs relate to verbs, adjectives, or other adverbs. For adverbs used as attributes, see 1265. For adverbs governing the genitive, see 1725 1728 ; the dative, see 1771. For adverbs used prepositionally, see the Improper Prepositions, 1862. For adjectives used where the English uses adverbs, see 1317 1321. . THE VERB THE VOICES ACTIVE 1866. The active voice simply represents the subject as acting ; as 6 TTCU? rpe^ei, the boy runs ; ypd W\i\\ an adverb, !x = to be, as KoAws or ev X> it is well, Lat. bene se habet ; ayw, to lead, intr. to advance : Trparrw, to do, intr. (eu, KUKUJS), to do (we/Z, badly] ; TA.uraa>, to end, intr. to die ; eKAeiVw, o abandon, intr. to cease ; aTrayopevw, to forbid, intr. to grow weary ; KaraAtfa), to dissolve, to destroy, intr. to halt. The original object can often be easily supplied. 2. The intransitive meaning sometimes belongs only to certain tenses. See Mixture of Transitive and Intransitive Meanings, in Part II. of the Grammar. 3. Some transitive verbs are used intransitively only in certain compounds. e'/xi>, to bear, to carry, 8ia, to throw, /Lura- /8aXXo>, to become changed, <-io-/3aAAa> and e^/3aAA.o>, to wafce an incursion, to empty (of rivers), Trpoo-ySaXAw, to advance against ; fr//xi, to seTta", avir)/ju, to relax, to give over ; oiSvpi, to give, en-iSiSw/ju, to improve, to make progress, cv8t8- Tre/XTro/tat riva, I send some one away from me J 7rpo/3aAAo/xai rrjv a, I ward off an enemy from me ; /cAcao/mi TO. TrdOrj, I bewail my sorrows ; 1 set up for myself ; eupio-Ko^at, I find for myself, procure ; Kara to pick out for one's self ; riOca-Oai rrjv if/rjfov, to give one's vote ; i\ov, I make some one my friend ; ayr#ai ywaiKa, to take a wife. 1873. NOTE. The indirect middle sometimes has causative mean- ing. 'Eyw yop (re ravra f8i8at-dp.T)v, for I had you taught these things (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 2 ). TpaTrefoj/ Hepavrj ovcriav evf.ip.avTO ol a.8f\oi, the brothers divided the personal property among themselves (Lys. 32, 4). 1876. Subjective or Dynamic Middle. The Middle sometimes denotes an action performed with one's own powers or means. IIap\o>, / furnish, irape\o(iai, I furnish from my men means ; ACM, I lose, Aco/iai, / ransom with my money ; o-ufi/?aAAo//,ai, / con- tribute from my Own ; Xa^avetv, to take, Aa//./?ave/Acu, to perform military service, to serve, of the soldier (Xen. Anab. 3, I 10 ) ; TroAireuW, to be a citizen (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 26 ), TroAiTtueo-^ai, to perform the duties of a citizen, to take part in the government (Xen. Cyr. 1, I 1 ) ; rrpeo-ySeu'eiv, to be ambassador (Xen. Anab. 7, 2 s "), 7rpeo-/3u'eo-0cu, to negotiate as ambassador, also (of the state) to negotiate through ambassadors (Thuc. 1, 67^) ; /JovAeuw, to take counsel, to be counsellor (Xen. Mem. 1, I 18 ), /3ovAevW0cu, to take one's counsel, to form plans. 1879. Some verbs acquire, in the middle, meanings quite different from those of the active. The following are especially important from their frequency : Atptw, to take, alpcofuu, to choose = to take for myself ; a7ro8i'Sw/xi, to give back, atroSi&ofjLai, to sell = to give away for one's interest ; , to fasten, a7rro/W TIVOS, to cling to = to fasten one's self to, to 1882 VOICES 181 engage in ; apx w > t rule, to begin, without regard to continuation of the action which another may take up (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 5 ), apx /* 011 ' ^ begin one's own work, or for one's self (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 7 ) ; ya/xcw nva, to marry (of the man), ya//,co//.ai nvi, to marry (of the woman), ya/zeo/Acu Ovyarepa. -rivL, to give a daughter in marriage to any one (of a parent) ; ypa VO/AOVS, to write or to propose laws, ypdfaa-Oai vopovs, to pass laws (of the people), ypdfao-Oai nva, to indict, to bring a law-suit against any one to write any one down in a document of prosecution ; Saveiw, to lend, Savetojaat, to borrow = to have another lend to one ; St/ca^w, to judge, to pronounce decision, SiKao//cu, to go to law, to plead ; l^w, to have, to hold, ^o/x,at TIVO?, to hold on to anything, to be close to, or to border on ; Aav0ava>, to lie hid, eVtAai/- 0aVo/Aai TO/OS, to forget ; /AIO-&KO, to let out for hire, /ncr0oo/>uu, to hire = to have another let to one ; rrepaiow, to convey over, Trcpaioo/xai, to go across ; o-reAXw, to send, oreAAo/xat, to set out, to travel ; rl/xw/aew TWI, to avenge a person, rt/Awpeo/xai nva, to avenge one's self on a person, to punish ; rtva, to frighten any one, o/3o/x,ai riva, to fear any one ; rivuAaTT-o/xai' rtva, to be on guard against any one. 1880. 1. In many cases the middle or active may be employed indifferently ; the reflex action being sufficiently clear, the active will often answer quite as well ; as IIai\ov TT o irj , to laugh at, d/ieXuo, to neglect, which verbs govern an object-genitive ; Trto-revo), to trust, aTrtoreo), to distrust, 0ov(a, to envy, eTri/JouXeuo), to plot against, dTreiXe'w, to threaten, eyKaXe'w, to censure, 7roXe/Aa>, to war against, these governing the dative. 'Yrro SovXov a p \ ( a 6 a i, to be ruled by a slave (Plat. Lys. 208 C ). "Qpd ftov\fve(r6ai,...[j.T) Kara(ppovr)du>p.fv, it is time to deliberate lest we be despised (Xen. Anab. 5, 7 12 ). liter e vt cr d ai vrro TTJS rraTpiSos, to be trusted by one's country (Xen. Symp. 4, 29). Qdovrjdels virb rov 'OSvc-a-ttas, envied by Odysseus (Xen. Mem. 4, 2 33 ). 'YTT' 'A.di)vaiayv eirif:iov\fv6fj.e6a, we are conspired against by the Athenians (Thuc. 1, 82 1 ). Ovxeri d7rXot5/iat, I am no longer threatened (Xen. Symp. 4, 31). OVK eir ir o X e pov v rat, they are not rightly warred against (Thuc. 1, 37 1 ). 3. When the active has two objects, a dative of the person and an accusative of the thing, the accusative of the thing generally remains and the dative becomes the nominative of the passive. Oi f7riTTpap.fJLfvoi rrj v

a\T)v (Xen. Anab. 3, I 17 ), which could become 6. With verbs governing an object-accusative and a cognate- accusative, the cognate-accusative remains and the object-accusative becomes the nominative of the passive. See 1617. 7. A cognate-accusative is sometimes found as the subject of a passive. 'O KivSvvos mv^vvtixrai (actively T&V KtvSiivov KivSvvfvfiv), the risk it run (Plat. Lach. 187 b ). Kirrvxn (Thuc. 7, 77 s ). 1888 VOICES 183 8. In this way passive neuter participles from intransitive verbs are used substantively. Ta (Tol Kap,ol /3e/3ta>/ieVa, the lives led by you and by me (Dem. 28, 265). MiKpa dfj.apTT]dfvTa, small errors (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 20 ). At rS>v irfiro\iTevp.va>v tv&vvai, the accounts of their public acts (Dem. 1, 28). Ta rja-f^peva, the acts of impiety committed (Lys. 6, 5). Ta KivBvvevdevTa, the risks which were run (Lys. 2, 54). Ta dvo-rvxydevra, the misfortunes suffered (Lys. 2, 70). 1883. NOTE. An impersonal passive from intransitive verbs, like the Latin itur, curritur, ventum est, does not occur in Greek. 1884. In changing from the active construction to the passive, the subject of the active, if a person, is usually expressed by vwo with the genitive (1861, l(c)) ; if the subject is a thing, it is put in the dative. 1885. NOTE. For the dative of personal agent, especially with the perfect and pluperfect, see 1800. For the agent expressed by irapa. with the genitive, see 1855 1(6) ; by d?ro or e with the genitive, see 1847, l(e) and 1851, l(c) ; by TT/>OS with the genitive, see 1858, l(e). For the agent with verbals, see 2315. 1886. NOTE. In poetry the agent is often expressed by VTTO with the dative. 'E(p6f3t)dev v(f)' "EKTO/H, they were put to flight by Hector (H. 15, 637). In Attic prose this occurs only with verbs meaning to bring up or to educate ; as virb 7raiorpi'/3j/ aya6u> 7Tfir(u8fVfjivos, having been educated under a good master (Plat. Lach. 184"). 1887. For future-middle with passive meaning, for deponents with passive meaning, for passive aorists with reflexive or middle meaning (middle passives), see Part II. of the Grammar (Irregularities of Meaning). 1888. 1. Some intransitive active (or middle) verbs serve as passives to some other verbs and are construed as such (with vtro). 2. These are especially important : ev -n-aa-x^ (lit. " to suffer well "), to be treated well, passive to ev TTOUO ; ev oxoixo, poet, eu K\VW (lit. " to hear well "), to be praised or to be well spoken of, passive of ev Xeyo> ; e'/cTTiTTTU) (" to fall out "), to be cast out, expelled, passive to eK/?aAAw ; (f>(vyv, to be ill spoken of by the citizens (Isoc. 6, 41). 'A.\Kficuovi8ds (pda-iv virb row rvpdvvatv f K. IT t v tlv, they say that the Alcmaeonidae were expelled by tyrants (Dem. 21, 144). 'Ao-e^ftas (vya> viro MfXrfrov, I am prosecuted for impiety by Meletus (Plat. Apol. 35 d ). 'A.irfdav(i> viro NucavSpou, he was slain by Nicander (Xen. Anab. 5, I 15 ). 'Yir' avrStv TOVTUV 8 i K. 17 v tftiBcxrav, by these very ones they were punished (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 48 ). 1889. NOTE. The passive to TI'KTW, to bring forth, to bear, is yiyvo/mi ex (Xen. Hell. 6, 4 37 ). The passive to TfOeiKa, I have placed, is often xei/xai, to lie (Isoc. 1, 36). For Xayxavw as passive to K\rjp6w, to choose by lot, see 1614. 1890. NOTE. There is some tendency also to use an active verb like x w or ruyx^ VO) or A.a/i/?avo> with an object, instead of a passive. Ho\\f)i> TT)V air idv i\ov viro T>V (rrpartwrtoi', they were severely blamed by the soldiers (Thuc. 6, 46 5 ). Too-avn;j (Tv\f Tiptop ids viro d(>v, he obtained so much honour from the gods (Xen. Ven. 1, 11). TlXrjytis Xa/3cbv VJT" aXXov, receiving blows from another (Xen. Rep. Lac. 6, 2). THE TENSES 1891. 1. In English the tenses simply express the time of an action. In Greek the tenses not only express the time when an action takes place, but they also qualify the action as being in progress or going on, as simply taking place or occurring, or as actually com- pleted. 2. The distinction of time always occurs with the indicative mood, and somewhat in the other moods and in the participle. The quali- fication of the action as going on or taking place or actually completed, belongs to all the moods and to the participle. 1892. 1. The aorist and future express the action of the verb as simply taking place or performed ; the present and imperfect as going on ; the perfect, pluperfect, and future-perfect as completed. 2. It is often difficult to render in English the different shades of meaning denoted by this three-fold character of the action ; but the following examples will make this distinction clear : 1893 TENSES 185 Present. lv, to be occupied with, to be in the act of doing. (pfvyeiv, to be in flight, to be in exile. a.Tro@vyvai, to form an opin- ion, to decide upon. dvdr), I shall write. ACTION GOING ON. Present. aTroflvijcrKfi, he is dying. ypd(f>, I am writing. Imperfect. dirfdvrja-ne, he was dying. fypav 'Adrjvaiciv aa>Kf'a?, vvv cra>'fi, the Lacedae- monians he is trying to overthrow, and the Phocians whom he destroyed he is now trying to preserve (Dem. 6, 15) ; so with the infinitive (as 8t8oi/p, eyw &' olvov irivat, he drinks water, but I wine (Dem. 19, 46). For the corresponding imperfect of customary action, see 1908. 1899. Present in General Truths. The present is used to express a general truth. TiKret icopos vfipiv, satiety breeds insolence (Theog. 153). For a similar use of aorist (gnomic) and the perfect, see 1914 and 1933. 1900. Present with Force of Perfect. 1. Some presents may denote an action already begun, and continuing in the present time. A present so used is practically equivalent to a perfect. So especially viKaw, I am victorious = I have conquered (lit. 1 conquer) ; ^Trao/xat, I am beaten = I have been beaten ; dSiKew, I do- wrong = I have done wrong ; O.KOVW and 7rw0ai/o/xcu, / hear = I have heard ; yiyvwa-Kw, I know = I have found out ; 8iw/co> or ypafvyVTOS TJ8r) KOI irpbs tap KCU TO TldvanTov KadypdTo, they concluded the alliance when the winter was now closing towards spring, and Panactum immediately began to be destroyed (Thuc. 5, 39 3 ). 2. Similarly an action performed by a number of persons, but not simultaneously, is usually expressed by the imperfect; see Xen. Anab. 4, 7 18 ; 5, 4 M - 26 ; 5, 8 20 . 1904. NOTE. (a) An action which was going on at the same time or before some other past action took place, is expressed by the imperfect. 'Errel 8f f) cr 6 e v ( i Aapetor (cat viratirrtvt T(\cvrf)v TOV ftiov, e^ovXero TO> iral8( dp.(portpa> irapt'ivcu, when Darius was sick and suspected the end of his life near, he wanted both of his sons to be present (Xen. Anab. 1, I 1 ). Stvias o 'ApuasTa \i/Kaia (6i> p e t 8 TOV dyS>va not Kvpos, Xenias the Arcadian celebrated the Lycaean sacrifices and held public games.... Cyrus was a spectator at the games (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 10 ). 'End d8ov O.VTOV olirtp TT p 6 & 1 v irpo, os 3>pi( (for op/fet) 7171^ re T>V Maxpcoi/oji/ ^wpai' KOI TT)V T>V 'S.K.vQivutv, they arrived at the river which separates the territory of the Macrones from that of the Scythini (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 1 ). 1905. NOTE. The imperfect is sometimes found instead of the present to denote that the truth of a present statement was not formerly recognised, but is now admitted. 1908 TENSES 189 Ov rovr rfv ev8ai(ji.ovia,...KaKov dira\\ayr), this thing deliverance from evil is not happiness, as we formerly imagined (Plat. Gorg. 478). OVK ap' ayados TO. TToXIriKa HfpiK\fjs rj v tK TOVTOV TOII Xoyou, then according to this view, Pericles was not a good statesman (Plat. Gorg. 516 d ). 1906. NOTE. For imperfects like $>, e'xp^v, ei*os ty, etc., denoting obligation or possibility, and referring to present time, see 2105 2108. 1907. Imperfect of Attempted Action. Corresponding to the pre- sent of attempted action (1897) is the imperfect of attempted action. Ne f IT fide v avrovs dirorpfirfa'daf oi 8e oi>x VTTTJKOVOV, Neon tried to persuade them to turn back, but they did not heed him (Xen. Anab. 7, 3 7 ). K\(apxos rovs avrov crrpaTKaras e'jStafero ot Se avrov fj3a\\ov, Clearchus tried to force his soldiers to march, but they began to stone him (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 1 ). 'Piyet air wXXu p.( 6 a, we were in danger of perishing (= we were perishing) from cold (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 2 ). 'AXovvrja-ov e'Si'Sou, he offered (tried to give) Halonnesus (Aeschin. 3, 83). 'O^povs OVK e'St'Socrai/, they were not willing to give ( = tried not to give) hostages (Xen. Anab. 6, 3 9 ). 1908. Imperfect (and Aorist) of Customary Action. 1. Corre- sponding to the present of customary action (1898) is the imperfect of customary action. Soo/cpar?;? wtrn-ep fyiyva>s eXeyev, as Socrates thought, so he used to speak (Xen. Mem. 1, I 4 ). Compare below a similar use of the aorisi with TroAXa/as 1 . 2. The imperfect of customary action with the particle av denotes that the action used to take place under certain circumstances. 'AvaXap-ftdvatv avrS>v TO. iroirj/jLara SiT/pcorwz/ av ai/rovs, ri \eyoifv, taking up their poems, I would often ask them (or J used to ask them) what they meant (Plat. Apol. 22 b ). For a similar aorist with av, see below. This use of the imperfect with av must be particularly distinguished from the apodosis with av in conditional clauses (2102, 2113). 3. The repeated occurrence of a single act is expressed by the aorist with TroAAaKis. 2vv ye'Xwri TroXXaKt? f] IT 1 1X77 u f Kptpav avrovs, with laughter he often threatened to hang them (Plutarch, Caesar 2). 4. The aorist indicative with oV is used of customary actions like the imperfect with av, to express what used to take place under certain conditions. IIoXXaKir T] < ov cr a pe v av...6p.as, we often used to hear you (Ar. Lysist. 610). Ei nvts tSotf'f TTOV rovr ov and -0-Kop.rjv in the imperfect and aorist (see Part III. of the Grammar). In customary actions, Herodotus some- times adds av also to these forms (as in Hdt. 3, 119 4 ). 1909. Imperfect with Force of Pluperfect. The imperfects of presents frequently used as perfects (1900) are correspondingly used as pluperfects. So evtKtov, I was victorious = I had conquered ; ^TTW^V, etc. (see 1900). For r)Kov and W^O/A^V used as pluperfects or (generally) as aorists, see 1900, 2. AORIST 1910. The aorist indicative simply represents an action as taking place in past time ; as ejpa-^ra, I wrote. 1911. NOTE. For the aorist of customary action, see 1908. 1912. NOTE. The name aorist, aopio-ros (indefinite, indeterminate], is a compound from a.-, without, and opos, boundary, and denotes that the tense simply expresses a past event without any regard to its development or completion or repetition. It is the tense of narration, and is thus used like the Latin perfect or the English simple imperfect {preterite), as lypa^/a, scripsi, I wrote. 'Ev KeXatpatf tfitivf Kvpos fjp.(pas TpifLnovra, Cyrus remained thirty days at Celaenae (Xen. Anab. 1, 2"). *H\dov, tidov, (vlKrja-a, veni, vidi, vici (Plutarch, Caesar, 50). The Greek imperfect is equivalent to the compound form of the English imperfect : typatpov, I was writing. 1913. NOTE.- With ' ou the indicative aorist is used in impatiently asking why something has not already happened, and is thus equi- valent to a present exhortation or command. Tt ovv ov...f\fds pot; (lit. why did you not tell me?) tell me (Xen. Cyr. 2, I 4 ). Tt ovv ov not UpobiKov (Ka\eo-ap.(v ; (lit. why then did we not call also Prodicus?) let us then call also Prodicus (Plat. Prot. 317 d ). The present may also be thus used ; as ri ovv OVK (paras; (Plat. Lys. 211 d ). 1914. Gnomic Aorist. 1. The aorist indicative is often used to express a general truth or maxim. It is then called the gnomic aorist and is to be translated by the English present. 1918 TENSES 191 *Hv TIS TOVTO>V TI Trapa/Saivy, fruiav avrois fTredea-av, if any one trans- gress any of these precepts, they impose a penalty (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 2 ). Tas T>V or f, a short time dissolves the intimacies of the bad (Isoc. 1, 1). 2. The aorist is so used on the principle that what happened once can happen again under the same circumstances. It is called gnomic from its frequent use in proverbs and maxims (yvw/Aai). For the present and perfect in general truths, see 1899 and 1933. 1915. NOTE. In poetry, especially in Homer, this . aorist is frequent in similes ; as rpiTre 8' u>s ore ns SpC? fj p i TT c v, he fell as when some oak falls, lit. as ivhen some oak fell (11 13, 389). 1916. Ingresswe or Inceptive Aorist. With verbs whose presents denote a state of being, the aorist may denote the entrance into that state ; as TrXovrw, am rich, eVAoimjcra, I became rich. This use occurs in all the moods and in the participle. Thus ?xw, I have, lo-xov, J got, took possession of ; xP ^ use > txpyfdfj.rjv, took into use ; apxv oiK(To>v ov8fva tear (\t7Tfv, dXX' aTravras irlir pa whom I send (sent) to you (Thuc. 1, 129 3 ). The perfect is sometimes thus used; as aTreo-TaAica (rot rovfit TOV Xoyov, I send (have sent) you thi& discourse (Isoc. 1, 2). FUTURE 1921. 1. The future denotes an action that will occur or will be in progress ; as ^pd^a, I shall write or I shall be writing. 2. With verbs whose presents denote a state of being, the future (like the aorist) may denote the entrance into that state ; as ap^w, J rule, apw, 1 shall rule or / shall attain dominion or office. 1922. NOTE. The second person of the future sometimes ex- presses a permission; as 7rp? ra-^ia-ra. ; (will you not) carry (her) away instantly (Soph. Ant. 885). For a similar future with ov p.rj, see 1985. 1924. NOTE. Herodotus uses the second person singular of the future in geographical and other descriptions, as though directing a future traveller; as ryv Xt/xvryv Su*- 7rA.8' e p fe i, and some one will (or may) speak thus (II. 4, 176). Hap' e/iorye *at aXXoi ot ay (iv els Qao-iv, I am going to lead you to Phasis (Xen. Anab. 5, 7 5 ). Et fj.f\\(i KOKOS yfvto-dai, if he is to become bad (Plat. Prot. 345"). 2. Of the other tenses of /Ac'AAw, only the imperfect is frequent. 'O , he was about to sail away (Isoc. 6, 44). 1927. NOTE. Observe the expression TTWS ov fte'AAw ; or n ov /xeAXw ,- how (why) should I not ? with the infinitive present (which often has to be supplied). HS>s ov fifXXfi TO o~oa, I have written. 1929. NOTE. For periphrastic perfect forms, see 2280, 2281. 1930. Perfect with Present Meaning. 1. Some perfects denote that the action which has been completed has passed into a present continued condition ; such perfects thus have present meaning. (For the pluperfecis, see 1935, 2;. Thus KCK\r)fj.at. (KaAe'w), have acquired a name = am called ; o-Kw) , have called to mind = remember, Lat. memini ; (KTO.OIJMI), have acquired = possess ; lyvwKa (yiyvoW/co)), have recognised = know ; Se'Se/uu (Sew), have been bound = lie bound ; pi.evt'vfj.i), have clothed myself in = have on ; reOvrjKa have died = am dead ; reOaTrrai (Oairrta), has been buried = .lies buried ; a-fa-iyrjKa (o-Zyao)), have become silent = am silent ; pip-rjKo. (ftatvia), have stepped = stand, also have gone ; CO-TT/KO. (lo-T^/a), have set myself = stand ; W^u/ca (ao- /n), have taken in use = use. So KtK\ayya (*Aato), clang ; Kf.Kpa.ya. {*paa>), cry out, and others. 2. Some have no regular corresponding present forms. So otSa, know, Lat. novi ; eiw#a, am accustomed ; IOLKO., am like ; 8e8oiKa and B(8ia, fear. 3. The perfect of verbs denoting a feeling or condition, denotes that the subject continues in that feeling or condition. 'EvTf6f>p.rjfMi, I am strongly considering (Xen. A nab. 3, I 43 ). 'EiriredCfjiTjKa, I am full of desire (Plat. Phaedr. 227 d ). TfOopvpTjfjMi, I am in perturbation (Aeschin. 2, 4). 'E^Xwice, he is zealous (Dem. 2, 15). ffdavfianas ; do you not admire ? (Xen. Mem. 1, 4 2 ). 1931. NOTE. A past action, which has already ceased but whose consequences are still noticeable in the present, may be expressed by the perfect. Saxcparrjr 8it(p6apKf roiis veovs, Socrates has corrupted the young men (Plat. Apol. 33 C ). Here the perfect expresses, from the standpoint of the writer, that either Socrates or the young men may be still living. 1932. NOTE. The perfects ycye'n/M< and ytyoi/a (from yiyvopai) may mean to have become or to be now, to have happened or to have been. 1937 TENSES 195 1933. Gnomic Perfect. Sometimes the perfect is used to express a general truth, like the aorist (1914). noXXoi &a 86gai> KOI H-oXm*^ Svirapiv /xryaXa KUKCI irfirovQatnv, many suffer great misfortunes through fame and political power (Xen. Mem. 4, 2 35 ). 1934. Perfect as a Vivid Future. 1. The perfect is sometimes used emphatically to express a cert lin future action. Ait(f)0opas, it is all over with you (II. 15, 129). Et p.(...al, we are undone, then, if to the old we add a new ill (Eur. Med. 78). 1935. Pluperfect. 1. The pluperfect denotes an action as completed in past time; as eyeypdtprj, I had written. 2. With verbs whose perfects have present meaning (1930), the pluperfect has imperfect meaning ; as ep.p.vr]p,r)v, I remembered ; tKf.KTruji.-rjv, 1 possessed, 17817, / knew, etc. FUTURE-PERFECT 1936. The future-perfect represents an action as completed in future time ; as yeypd-^rerai, it will have been written ; eyvcarccos ecrofiai, I shall have recognised. 1937. Future-Perfect equivalent to Future. 1. When the perfect has present meaning (as in 1935, 1), the future-perfect has simple future meaning. Thus KCKA^o-o/xai, shall be called ; /ne/i^ao/im, shall remember ; xeKTTjo-o/iai, shall possess ; co-n^w, shall stand ; Te6vrj, ws KOI r tr tXe cr pf v o v eorat, but I will declare it to thee and it shall surely be brought to pass (II. 8, 286). */}a>, (p<>/i.(u, shvH be cut (^0^770-0/^01 late or Attic in composition). 196 TENSES 1938 TENSES IN THE OTHER MOODS (A} NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 1938. 1. The tenses of the subjunctive, imperative, also of the optative and infinitive, when these tivo latter do not stand in indirect discourse, do not express time. 2. The aorist here simply denotes that the action takes place, without any reference to time ; as Trotrjo-cu, to do. The present here expresses the action as going on or continued or attempted ; as TToteiv, to be doing, to be occupied ivith, or to try to do. The perfect (which is not often found in these moods, except in the indirect discourse) expresses the action as already completed ; as Trejroi- rjfcevai, to have done anything or to be done ivith anything. See 1892. 3. The actual time of the action is not denoted in these con- structions by the tense itself, but must be inferred from the context. 'A KOVO-O) fifv TOV dvdpos, let us hear the man (Plafc. Prot. 314 b ). E*ira>p.(v r) o-ly>p.v; shall we speak or shall we remain silent (Eur. Jon. 758). Ta TrXoTa KartKavtrev, tva /zij Kvpos 8ta/3, he burned the ships so that Cyrus might not cross (Xea. Anab. 1, 4 18 ). Ae'&oiica p.rj /tot $ /3 77 AC 17 6 iraTTjp, I fear lest my father may prove to have died (Soph. Phil. 493). 'Eai/ (riTjjs (caXwy, (i>pT)v paxovpfOa, whenever any one attempts to wrong you, we will fight for you (Xen. Cyr. 4, 4 n ). Ti Av a s ir\fia> \ap.ftdvoi, he was clearly desirous of ruling, so that he might get more (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 21 ). Et 8* dvayKOiov (tr) do'iKflv TI d8iKfl(rdai, (\oip.r)i> av p.u\\m> ddiKfitrdm, if it should be necessary to do wrong or to suffer wrong, I would prefer to suffer wrong (Plat. Gorg. 489*). OVK av....fltv evdvs SeSoxcorer, they would not have proved to have paid at once (Dem. 30, 10). Toiis \t*v dtovs V avTmv (pvvai, fj,*ya 8e TO ofiov TpcKpfjvai, it conduces greatly to friendship to have been born of the same parents, and to have been brought up together (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 4 ). 1940. NOTE. For the perfect imperative, see 1982. 1941. NOTE. The perfect infinitive sometimes denotes that a thing shall be positive and permanent; as fl-n-ov rrjv Ovpav KCK\elo-6ai t they commanded the door to be (kept) closed (Xen. Hell. 5, 4 7 ). 1942. NOTE. The future optative is found only in the indirect discourse corresponding to the future indicative of the direct discourse (2016) ; and in final clauses introduced by OTTWS when these follow a past tense (2050). 1943. NOTE. The future infinitive is used in the indirect discourse to represent the future indicative of the direct discourse (2193). It is also used with verbs of promising, swearing, and hoping (2195). For /Ae'XAw with the future infinitive, see 1926. 1944. NOTE. Occasionally the future infinitive is found for the present or aorist infinitive after verbs expressing intention or wish or ability. TOP iroXefjiov 8ievoovvTo irpodvp.s ot&fiv, they desired to carry on the war with spirit (Thuc. 4, 121 1 ). 'EfiovXovTo TifiGnprjafo-dcu, they wished to avenge themselves (Thuc. 6, 67 2 ). Thuc. 6, 6 1 ; 1, 27 3 ; Soph. Phil. 1394. This makes the idea of futurity more emphatic, and occurs ofbenest in Thucydides. (j5) OPTATIVE AND INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 1945. When the words or thoughts of a person are quoted and made to depend, as a dependent clause, on a verb of saying or thinking or the like, they are said to stand in indirect discourse. The original 198 TENSES 1946 words or thoughts would be the direct discourse. Thus oT8a, I know, is direct discourse. But eXeye on flSetrj, he said that he knew, or r)i;trl TOVTO iroir)o-(iv, he says that he will do this (he says "TOVTO TrotTjcrw "). 7v Xy, laughing he says; y*Xi> fXrye (and t Xf|f), laughing he said ; yt\5>v X't, laughing he will say ; yf\>v tlprjKt, laughing he has said. Here yXo is always present with regard to verb. ypd^as X'y, having written, he says; ypd^as eXeye (or Xe), having written, he said ; ypatyas X', having written, he will say ; "Ep^tTai TOVTO X ' u> v, he if coming to say this ; drr/X# TOVTO X t o> v, he came to say this. 1957 TENSES 199 Oi8a avrov d'rrodvri Cyrus said (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 27 ). 1952. NOTE. The present participle may denote an attempted action (1897). 'AiroSiftpdcrKOVTa pf} bvvacrdai dirobpavai, trying to escape and not to be able to get away (Plat. Prot. 317 a ). 'ATroAAv/ievos, in danger of perishing (Lys. 13, 61). 1953. NOTE. The present participle may express customary action (1898). Aeyotxrii/ $ eya> vScop ir Iv a> v etKOTco? StiorpoTros nai 8v(TKO\os flp.i Tie avdpwiros, they say that as I drink water (habitually), I am a rather stubborn and peevish fellow (Dem. 6, 30). 1954. NOTE. The present participle may also have the force of the perfect (1900) ; so VIKW, am victorious = have conquered, ol VIKO>VTS, those victorious = those having conquered. 1955. NOTE. Like the present and perfect of the infinitive and optative (1948), the present and perfect participles may stand for an imperfect and pluperfect indicative respectively. Ol Kupeioi irpoa-Qev crvv r^iiiv T arr 6 p.tv o i ( = ot e TOTTOVTO), the Cyreans who formerly stood up with us (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 17 ). "Qs irpoa-d' e'/ioO n T rj p, e v , to him who owned before me (Soph. Phil. 778). 1956. NOTE. For the future participle, see also 2243 and 2256. PRIMARY AND SECONDARY TENSES 1957. The present, perfect, future, and future-perfect are called primary or principal tenses ; the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect are called secondary or historical tenses. But the gnomic aorist (1914) is a primary tense, and the historical present (1895) is a secondary tense. We must also regard as equivalent to primary tenses all forms of the verb which do not express past time (2012, 3). 200 THE MOODS 1958 THE MOODS GENERAL VIEW OF THE MOODS 1958. 1. The moods are those forms of the verb which indicate how the action of the verb is related to reality. (a) The indicative is the mood of reality and indicates an actual fact, that something is taking place, took place, or will take place. (b) The imperative mood expresses a command or prohibition. (c) The sub- junctive is the mood of expectation (1986-1992), expressing the ex- pectation that something will happen. (d) The optative is the mood of simple conception and indicates that the action of the verb is merely conceived in the mind. (e) The past tenses of the indicative serve also as the mood of unreality, and imply that the action expressed by the verb does not or did not take place. 2. There are two principal classes of sentences : (1) declarations or assertions ; and (2) commands or wishes. The negative of the former is ov ; that of the latter is arj. 3. The subjunctive, optative, and the mood of unreality take the particle av when these moods are used to express a declaration or assertion ; when these moods express a command or wish, they do not take av. 1959. NOTE. Yet the (Homeric) subjunctive in declarations (1991) generally does not take av. A protasis expressing an unreal condition does not take av (2102). Final clauses occasionally take av (2045). THE PARTICLE av 1960. The participle av (Epic /ce, Doric KO) is used to represent a statement as conditional or contingent. It is employed in various constructions, of which a synopsis is here given. 1961. "Av in Independent Clauses. 1. With the secondary tenses of the indicative, av is used to denote that something would happen or would have happened, but actually does not or did not happen, because the condition (expressed or implied) is not or was not fulfilled. See 2102. *E.noiovt> av rovro, / would do this (sc. if I could) ', the opposite is implied, but I do not do this because I cannot. 'ETroirjtra av TOVTO, I would 1964 THE MOODS 201 have done this (so. if I had been able) ; the contrary being implied, but I did not do this because I was unable. OVK &v % A 6 o v, ei pr) ficaXfo-as, I should not have come if you had not called (hence = I did come because you called). 2. For av with the imperfect and aorist indicative to express customary action, see 2099. 3. With the present and perfect indicative av is never used. For the use of av with the future indicative, see 1925. 4. With the optative av is used to denote that something might or would happen, if some condition (expressed or implied) should be fulfilled. See 1993. The future optative never takes av. Ei TOVTO irpafit, KO\S>S av e^ot, if he should do this it would be well. "lo-ms &v TIS elVoi, perhaps some one might say. TOVTO OVK av yevoiTo, this may (or might) not happen, as a mild future statement. So Xeyot? av, you may say ( = Ae'ye), as a mild command. 5. For av with the subjunctive in Homer, as equivalent to a future indicative, see 1991. 1962. NOTE. In the above uses, av is rendered by words like may, would, should. In the use with the subjunctive mentioned in 1964, it cannot be translated. 1963. NOTE. For the omission of av with the indicative in certain cases, see 21052108. 1964. "Av in Dependent Clauses. 1. The particle av is used with the subjunctive in all kinds of subordinate clauses. In these clauses it does not belong so closely to the verb, but rather to the introducing particle or relative. 2. In conditional clauses, av unites with ei, if, forming lav (rfv or &v). In temporal clauses, av unites with ore, OTTOTC, en-ei, eTreiSr/, forming OTUV, oTToVav, CTTUV or tirrjv (Hdt. en-caV), eTreiSav ; with other particles it is simply added, as ^viV av, ?s av, eor' av, etc. In relative clauses av is added to the relative, as os av, oaris av, OUK av, ws av, OTTOV av, etc. In final clauses it is occasionally added to ?, on-us, (poetic) opa, never to I* a. ; as ws av, OTTWS av, 5pa av (never Tva av, which means wheresoever). 'Eav TOVTO JTotj/s, if you do this. "Orav TOVTO iroi^s, when you do this. Ots av Xa/3>7, whom he may take. "Qs av naBys, avTaKovo-ov, hear me in turn that you may learn (Xen. Anab. 2, 5 ltt ; here av is unnecessary). 202 THE MOODS 1965 1965. NOTE. For oV occasionally omitted in such clauses, see 2101, 2110. For rare Homeric et KC with the opta- tive, see 2115. 1966. "Av with the Infinitive and Participle. 1. The particle av is joined to the infinitive or participle when they represent a finite verb which would take av. See 2193, 2194, 2300, 2301. Ei TI f\oi, (r) Bovvai av, if he had had anything he would have given it (etiaica av). Ot8a avrov TOVTO IT OIOVVT a av d exeXevov, J know that he would do this if I commanded ((TToifi av). OtSa avrov TOVTO n o trj av). OtSa avrov TOVTO IT OIOVVT a av d KfXfvcraipi, I know that he would do this if I should command. Whether the infinitive or participle with av stands for an in- dicative with av or for an optative with av must be determined by the context. The protasis will usually decide it. 2. The infinitive with av is used chiefly in indirect discourse ; the participle with av is used chiefly as supplementary to a verb (2300). But in other constructions the participle with av occurs more frequently than the infinitive with av (2125 2127). 3. The infinitive with av is found very rarely in early poetry, once only in Homer (11. 9, 684), and only several times in Pindar. The participle with av is absent from both Homer and Pindar. 1967. NOTE. Corresponding to the very rare and perhaps wholly Homeric future indicative with av (1925), we find (but only in Attic) a few cases of the future infinitive of indirect discourse with av ; as in Thuc. 2, 80 12 . In such passages, av is considered suspicious by many scholars, even in spite of the MS. Pindar has *A.citv with KC'V in 01. 1. 113. A few cases of av with the future participle are also found in Attic, as Plat. Apol. 30". 1968. Position of av. 1. *Av never begins a clause. 2. Generally dV follows its verb ; as ij\0ov av, Sofrj av, lypo^a av. 3. But av precedes its verb in subordinate clauses with the subjunctive ; also usually after an interrogative and after a negative or other (accented) particle. 1978 THE MOODS 203 Ovs av opaxri. 'ETretSav TOVTO yevr/rai. Tt av (pairjs ; Hu>s av TOVTO yevotTO ,- TOVTO OVK av ylvoiro. "ls yap av (sc. tirf), how can it be? (Plat. Soph. 237). For wo-n-ep av tl, see 2130. FINITE MOODS IN SIMPLE OR INDEPENDENT CLAUSES 1973. The following are the different kinds of independent clauses : (o) ASSERTIONS 1. Indicative (ov): see 1974. 2. [Homeric Subjunctive with (or without) av (ov) : see 1991.] 3. Optative with av (ov) : see 19931995. 4. Past Tense of Indicative with av (ov) : see 1976. (j3) COMMANDS OR WISHES (DESIRES) 1. Imperative (jj,rj) : see 1979-1984. 2. Subjunctive without av (//.?;) : see 1983. 3. Optative without av (w) : see 19992003, 2007. 4. Past Tense of Indicative without av ) : see 2004. 204 THE MOODS 1974 INDICATIVE IN INDEPENDENT CLAUSES 1974. The indicative mood is used in making a direct statement and in asking questions ; as Xeyet, he says ; 7/jai/rei, he will write ; OVK r)\0ev, he did not come ; rl \eyet,? ; what do you say ? 1975. NOTE. For the imperfect and aorist indicative of customary action with av, see 2099. For the future indicative in final clauses, see 2050 For the indicative in wishes, see 2004 2006. For the in- dicative in conditional sentences, see Conditional Sentences. For the indicative (and subjunctive) with p.rj or /AT) ov in independent clauses, see 1977. 1976. Potential Indicative. The past tenses of the indicative with av are used to express what would happen or would have happened, if some condition (expressed or implied) were fulfilled or had been fulfilled. See Conditional Clauses. 1977. A strong denial in future time may be expressed by the double negative ov fir] followed by the subjunctive (generally aorist) or by the future indicative. Ou /i) Travcrw/im $iXoi>, / shall never cease philosophising (Plat. Apol. 29 d ). Oii8fv fj.f) 8eivbv irddrjTf, you will surely suffer no harm (Dem. 6, 24). Ov voi pr] p.(d(\^ofjMi iroTt, never will I follow thee (Soph. El. 1052). Ov /iij *itpf 1986 THE MOODS 205 (817), or Wi, come ! These expressions are used indifferently for the singular or plural, and for the second or third person. 1982. Perfect Imperative. 1. The perfect active imperative occurs only in verbs whose perfects have present meaning ; as io-Oi, know thou ; Kcxr/vare, gape (ye). 2. The second person singular imperative middle, which seldom occurs, expresses an emphatic or urgent command to be immediately fulfilled ; as TreVavfro, cease (Dem. 24, 64) ; Trio-rot OfG>v Triroir)cro, give at once the pledge (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2 7 ). 3. The third person singular perfect imperative passive usually expresses that something shall be positive and permanent. Elpr]o-da> poi, let it have been said by me once and for all (Xen. Mem. 4, 2 19 ). Tera^^o), let him have been definitely placed or let him take his place (Plat. Rep. 562*). Taura -ireiraicrdo) fi/juv, let this joking of yours now be finished (Plat. Euthyd. 278 d ). 1983. Prohibitions. 1. Prohibitions are expressed by /j,r/ with the present imperative or aorist subjunctive ; as pr/ ypd(f>e or /AT) ^pa^ys, do not write ; pr) iJ,0a, let us 206 THE MOODS 1987 reckon up ; firj TOVTO iroiwpev ; Xeye 8ij, too), come, let me see (Plat. Rep. 457 C ). 2. This subjunctive (like the imperative) is often preceded by aye (877), fpe (8rj), or Wi, come ! In the singular it is always preceded by one of these or an equivalent expression. 1987. Deliberative or Interrogative Subjunctive. The first person of the subjunctive (not often the third) can be used in questions expressing doubt as to an action ; as Iwpzv ; shall we go ? The negative is pr). Often /9ou\ei or {3ov\e p. t v ovTos TI /xi) $> p( v ; shall I speak thus or not ? (Plat. Gorg. 480 1 ). Tt fpcap.ai; what shall I ask ? (Plat. Gorg. 447). BowXe t o-ot elirto ; do you wish me to tell you? (Piat. Gorg. 521 d ). IIot TIS ovv (f>vyr]; whither can (or shall) one flee? (Soph. Aj. 404). 1988. NOTE. The first person of the future indicative is sometimes used in the same way; as ctTrw/xei' ^ o-Iyw/xei/ f/ ri Spao-o/xev; shall we speak or be silent, or what shall we do ? (Eur. Ion 758). 1989. NOTE. A deliberative question is expressed in past time by periphrasis. Ti f 8 f i fit TToifjcrat; orn' TJ fj. e\\o v IT o tij cr e i v ; what was I to do ? A periphrasis is often used for the present ; as fjfjtels 8( irpoo-pf va>p(v ; 9 TJ xprj noifiv ; shall we still wait ? or what must we do ? (Soph. Trach. 390). 1990. NOTE. The expression ri -n-aOw ; what will become of me ? is chiefly poetic (Aesch. Sept. 1057 ; Od. 5, 465 ; Ar. Pint. 603; Hdt. 4, 118 4 ; Plat. Euthyd. 302 d ). Compare 1991. 1991. Subjunctive equivalent to Future Indicative (in Homer). In Homer the subjunctive (with or without av or *e) is sometimes used like the future indicative, and indicates an expectation that something will happen. Qv yap roiovs *&ov avtpas, ovftt 1 8 tap. at, for never yet saw I, nor shall I see, such men (II. 1, 262). Kat irort TIS tlirya-i, and some one will (or may) hereafter say (II. 7, 87). OVK Sv rot xpai' s ai fcrovrai ai oifs, the shepherd must take care that his flock be safe (Xen. Mem. 3, 2 1 ), or rather, the shepherd must take care so that we may expect that his flock will be safe. *Eo~ofv T ; how may I benefit thee? (Soph. Ant. 552). 'HSf'wr av i>p.)v irvdoifirjv, I would gladly learn from you (Dem. 50, 67). Ta^' olv t"iroi TIS av, perhaps, then, some one may say (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4 :!s ). Ti's OVK av 6 p,o\oyrj o-t KV ; who would not admit ? (Xen. Mem. 1, 1 s ). BovXoipjv av, I should like = velim (compare f(3ov\6[j.r)v av = vellem, 2102). 2 The potential optative often appears as the apodosis of a conditional sentence (2113). Thus, Aeyoi av, et epoi^v, he might speak if I asked him. In all examples a condition may be conceived as understood. 1994. NOTE. 1. The potential optative which regularly refers to the future, sometimes expresses what may turn out to be so ; as -n-ov orjT av etev ol tvoi ; where may the strangers be ? i.e. where will the strangers prove to be when looked for ? (Soph. El. 1450). 2. In the same way the potential optative may express what may 208 THE MOODS 1995 turn out to have been so in the past. This occurs occasionally in Herodotus, very rarely in Attic writers. Elrja-av 8' av OVTOI Kpijres, these were probably Cretans, i.e. would prove to have been Cretans (Hdt. 1, 2 2 ). Avrat 8e OVK av TroXXai tttja-av, these were probably not many (Thuc. 1, 9 5 ). 1995. NOTE. In poetry the potential optative is some- times found without dv, especially in Homer ; as o\> n KOKiorepov dAAo irdOoLfju, I could not suffer anything else that is worse (II. 19, 321). Aesch. Ag. 620. 1996. NOTE. For the potential optative in Homer used with reference to past time, see 2104, 2. 1997. NOTE. The potential optative of the second person is sometimes used as a mild imperative. Thus, ^wpois av eto-w, go in or you may go in (Soph. EL 1491) ; OVK av p.iv amou>o, do not accuse her (Od. 20, 135). 1998. NOTE. There is no optative future with dv ; compare 1925, 1967. 1999. Optative of Wishing. 1. The optative is used to express a wish referring to the future. The negative is fir}. 'YfjLtv ptv 6(o\ bolfv (Kirepo-at Hpidpato TTO\IV, may the gods grant to you to destroy the city of Priamus (H. 1, 18). Tovravs ol dtol dirorio-aivro, may the gods requite them (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 s ). M^KCTI {arjv, may I no longer live (Ar. Nub. 1255). For the difference in the meaning of the tenses, see 1938. 2. This optative is mostly introduced by ei#e or ei yap, that. E'df av...(pi\os f)p.lv ytvoio, O that you may become our friend (Xen. Hell. 4, I 38 ). Et yap yivoiro, that it might be (Xen. Cyr. 6, I 38 ). 2000. NOTE. In Homer the optative is found a few times expressing a permission rather than a wish ; as 'Ekfvrjv Mevc'Ados ayoiro, let Menelaus carry away Helen or Menelaus may carry away Helen (II. 4, 19). In such cases the optative is equivalent to our English may. This was probably the original use of this mood. Com- pare 1995. 2001. NOTE. 1. Homer introduces wishes also with aide and a* ydp. In poetry ei alone sometimes occurs (Eur. Hec. 836). 2004 THE MOODS 209 2. In poetry, especially in Homer, a wish is sometimes introduced by o>s; as J>s lpi<;....d7rdXoiTo, that strife would perish (II. 18, 107). 3. A wish is occasionally expressed by TIXOS av with the optative ; this is always a question in form. It occurs in Homer, oftener in dramatic poetry, very rarely in prose. Thus TTU>S av 6\oifir)v ; how can I perish ! = that I would perish! (Eur. Ale. 864). Od. 15, 195. Plat. Rep. 430 d . Very seldom we find TIS av with the Optative SOUSed; as TIS av Oeu>v o-oi rovS' apio-rov av8p' ISftv SOL 77; that some god would grant thee to see this most excellent man (Soph. Oed. Col. 1100). 2002. NOTE. For the present optative in unattainable wishes in Homer, see 2007. 2003. NOTE. In II. 10, 536, we find an aorist optative used to express the wish that something may prove to have occurred ; at yap.... Aacrat'aro /x,ww^a9 ITTTTOVS, that they may (prove to) have driven away the single-hoofed horses. 2004. Unattainable Wishes. 1. A wish referring to the present or the past and conceived as unattainable, is expressed by a secondary tense of the indicative with eWe or el yap. The negative is /u^. The imperfect here refers to present time, the aorist to past, as in the protasis in 2102. Ei#e fixes fit \riovs e\ov (w^eXe?, w\ov ; as in Eur. Med. 1 ; Plat. Crito 44 d ). 2006. NOTE. Forms like ci yap eT^ov and ci0 (rweyevo/xT/v (2004), also et yap yeVoiro (1999, 2) and the like, were originally protases (2089) equivalent to if I had, if I had been, if it might be. 2007. NOTE. 1. Homer expresses a present unattainable wish by w^fXov with the present infinitive (as II. 1, 415). He also uses the present optative (generally with et#c or i yap) J as ci yap OLTW ye Aio? TTCUS atytd^oio e I rj v, that I were the son of aegis-bearing Zeus (11. 13, 825). 2. For past unattainable wishes Homer uses a>e\ov with the aorist or (rarely) perfect infinitive ; as in II. 19, 59 ; 11. 24, 253. 3. Homer does not use the past tenses of the indicative in unattainable wishes. 4. Homer sometimes has the imperfect w^eAXov for uxf>f\ov; as in II. 6, 350. 5. Often in Homer, rarely in Attic poetry, s e \tyts ; did you not say so? (Plat. Rep. 334 b ). M o> v ov% upas; dost thou not see? (Soph. Oed. Col. 1729). T Ap' ovv pr) fjplv eVavriwo-erat ; will he, then, oppose us ? = he will not then oppose us, will he ? (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 5 ). M 17 o-oi SoKovpev ; do we seem to you ? = we do not seem to you, do we ? (Aesch. Pers. 344). M a> v (Soph. Phil. 734). MS>v p,f) (Plat. Lys. 208 d ). Direct Double Questions : II d T e p o v eas apxeiv f) aXXoi/ Kadia-Tijs ; do you let him rule or do you appoint another ? (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 12 ). 'Eyprjyopas fj Ka0v8eis ; are you awake or asleep ? (Plat. Prot. 310 b ). 4. The interrogative expression aAAo n f) ; (lit. is it anything else than ?) or more commonly aAAo TI; is used in simple direct questions and expects the answer yes. *AXXo TI T) 6fjLo\oyoviJ.(v ; do we not agree? = are we doing anything else than agreeing ? (Plat. Gorg. 470 b ). *A X X o r i (piXelrai VTTO 6tSv ; is it not loved by the gods? (Plat. Euthyphr. lO 1 ). Xen. Anab. 2, 5 10 ; 4, 7 5 . Plat. Rep. 343-1. 2009. NOTE. Occasionally we have an interrogative sentence with Trdrepov (jroTcpa) and the second clause with ^ is wanting or understood : Soph. Aj. 460 ; Thuc. 1, 80 3 . 2010. NOTE. Answers. Questions like the above can be answered 1. By repeating the emphatic word of the question, with or without some confirmative adverb. Thus Ae'ys ovv TOVTO oCrws fx fLV ' do you then say that this is true? Answer: "Ac'yw" or "OVTW 877 (l^ei)," / do say it ( = yes). ^Apa a-v ye fXf^aTr)fj.t, eyw, eywyc, negatively by ov rm.{, OVK eyuj, OVK lyojyf. Thus apa a-v ye cTrotTjcras TOVTO ; did you do this ? Answer : lywy^ (yes), OVK lywye (no). 3. By affirmative or negative words or phrases ; as vai, yes ; irdw ye, KapTa ye, o-s (6/>0u>s) Ae'yeis, yes (lit. you say truly] ; ( maxime), certainly ; ov (p.rj), no ; ov 8rjTa, no truly ; (ju^Sa/itos), by no means ; ^Kiora, ^Kwrra y (minime), least of all, not at all. FINITE MOODS IN DEPENDENT OR SUBORDINATE CLAUSES 2011. In the following sections (2012 2184), besides the finite moods in dependent clauses, these infinitive and participial construc- tions are conveniently mentioned : 1. Infinitive with /x^ after verbs of caution (2056, 1). 2. Infinitive with or without TO or rot) for OTTWS and the future indicative (2056, 2). 3. Infinitive as object of a verb of fearing (2065, 2, and 2070, 1 and 2 ; with wore, 2070, 3). 4. Infinitive in consecutive clauses (2077, 2080, 2081, 2082, 2086, 2087, 2088). 5. Infinitive as apodosis after verbs of declaring, thinking, per- ceiving, commanding, desiring (2125, 2126). 6. Infinitive with irpiv (2176, 1; 2177; 2179; 2182, 4); with irporepov T! (2182, 1) ; with vo-repov rj (2182, 2) ; with Trapos (2182, 5) ; with Trplv r, (2182, 6). 7. Participle after verbs of fearing (2070, 7). 8. Participle preceded by WO-TC or w? and depending on a supple- mentary participle (2084). 9. Participle standing for a protasis (2121, 2122). 10. Participle standing for an apodosis after verbs of declaring, thinking, perceiving, and the like (2125, 1). 11. Participle standing for an apodosis and not depending on another verb (2127). OBLIQUE OPTATIVE 2012. 1. In order to indicate that a dependent clause represents the words or thoughts of another and not of the speaker (or writer), the Greek sometimes uses the optative. This is called the oblique optative or optative of indirect discourse. But this oblique optative is used only to a limited extent. 2. The oblique optative is only used when the verb of the 2013 THE MOODS 213 principal clause is in a past (historical) tense ; and even then it is only used in place of the indicative of diiect statement (2016) and the interrogative subjunctive (2026) ; the interrogative sub- junctive may also be changed to the optative when the verb of the leading clause is in the optative (2033). Other forms of the verb in subordinate clauses remain unchanged in indirect discourse. 3. Not only is the gnomic aorist (19 14) a primary tense, but we must also count as equivalent to primary tenses all forms of the verb which do not express past time ; thus also, the aorist subjunctive, the optative aorist in conditions (with or without av), the aorist optative in wishes, and the aorist imperative. As the optative is often used after secondary tenses, but is not allowed after primary tenses, the grammarians sometimes speak of a sequence of mood. But the following sections will show that this sequence of mood is by no means an absolute rule. A sequence of tense, as in Latin, does not exist in Greek. I. DEPENDENT ASSERTIONS 2013. 1. A statement or assertion may be made directly or indirectly. A direct statement or assertion is one given in the original words of the speaker or writer (oratio recta). An indirect assertion is one in which the original words of the speaker are incorporated in a sentence as a subordinate clause dependent on some verb of saying, knowing, thinking, also showing, hoping, ap- pearing, and the like (oratio obliqua). Thus ypar)/jii, the infinitive construction is used (2198). 3. Verbs of saying introducing clauses with on or d>? are : Ae'yw, flirov, say ; 8irryeofj.Q.i, narrate ; aTrayye'AAco, announce ; aTroxpfvo/xai, reply ; /3oau>, dva>cpaw, cry out ; 8rj\6, to teach. 214 THE MOODS 20U But a clause with on or ws may also follow verbs of perception (see 2302) and feeling or emotion (see 1688, 1690). 2014. NOTE. Sometimes on introduces a direct quotation and is then practically equivalent to our comma or colon. npo(vos (iirfv on avros (lfj.1 o v {rjTfis, Proxenus said, "I am the one whom you seek" (Xen. Anab. 2, 4 16 ). Thuc. 1, 137 4 . Dem. 8, 31. With later writers o>r is also used thus ; as Plutarch, Themistocles 2. 2015. NOTE. 1. The conjunction on is properly the accusative neuter of Sorts, while d>> properly means as or how ; but both on and d>s, that, are used indifferently, except that J>s seems to be preferred when the assertion is made less positively, especially after a verb of denial or opinion or hope (di/TiAeyeiv, o>s in Dem. 8, 31 ; u7roXa//./?aVs, a>5 in Xen. Gyr. 8, 3 40 ; olea-dai, s in Xen. Mem. 3, 3 14 ; f\irifiv, u>s in Thuc. 5, 9 2 ). 2. Occasionally oVws is used in the sense of d>s, that, seldom in Attic, but oftener in Herodotus (after a negatived verb) ; as Ttavoe p. rj K e r cXirio-gs OTTWS Ttvgfi WOT , take no longer any hope that thou shalt gain these things (Soph. El 963) ; Xen. Gyr. 3, 3 20 ; Hdt. 2, 49 7 . 3. Aion ( = OLO. TOVTO on), which is mostly a causal conjunction, because, is occasionally used declaratively like on, that, in Rerodotus and the Orators, often in later writers ; as in Hdt. 2, 50 1 ; Isae. 3, 50 ; Isoc. 4, 48. 4. Poetic OVVCKO. (from ow evena) and tragic 60owc*a (from OTOU !i/e/ca, both causal conjunctions, are also occasionally found used declaratively like s ; as (OVVCKO.) in Od. 15, 42; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 708; (60ouWa) in Aesch. Pro. 330; Soph. Oed. Col 941. 5. Homer seldom has o (neuter of os) for on, that ; as ///AC!? loftfv, o rot K\VTO. Tcv)(f' t)(ovTat, we know that they possess thy famous armour (II 18, 197) ; Od. 4, 206 ; II. 1, 120. 2016. The rule for simple dependent declarative clauses intro- duced by on or &>? is as follows : 1. If the verb of the leading clause is a primary tense, the dependent declarative clause retains the .same mood and tense it would have in direct discourse. 2016 THE MOODS 215 2. If the leading verb is a past tense, an indicative (without av) may be changed to the corresponding tense of the optative, but very often the original indicative is retained as a more vivid form of expression. The potential indicative, potential optative, and indicative of unreal condition (2021) remain unchanged. Ae'yet on ypd"). Aeyet on eypa(pe v, he says that he was writing (he says " typafpov "). Ae'yet on. ypd^et, he says that he will write (he says " ypd^w"). Atyei on eypa-^ev, he says that he wrote (he says " eypa^a "). Ae'y on y ty pa(p e v, he says that he has written (he says " yeypas f"i^ } he said that he had written (he said "yeypcxpa," I have written). Eirrev on tyeypdcpfiv, he said that he had written (2018) at the time (he said " e'yeypd^j; "). EITTV ort y t y p d^f T ai or y ey p d^o IT o, he said that it will have been written (he said " ytypd^erai "). The same construction also if the leading verb is any other past tense. Indicative unchanged. At'yct o>? v/3pi<7TJj? d /xt, he says that I am insolent, i.e. "u/3pnrr^r et" (Lys. 24, 15). A'y yap u>s ovdev ts vntp i)p.S>v e'^povr <' cavrbv i\KV(T, he dared to assert that he drew enemies upon himself on your account (Dem. 22, 59), " t \KV might have been used. Indicative changed to Optative. Ot Sa^/-airo6 > euros 6 irorap-bs Siaftarbs yevoiro, the Thapsacenes said that this stream had never before beenfordable (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 18 ), they said "e'ytVeTo" which might have remained unchanged. Kvpos f \tyfv OTI 17 686s to-oiTo irpbs /3as ol TIf\o7rovi>tjpfaTa, it was said that the Peloponnesians had thrown (" e'/^e/SXijKaa-i ") poison into the wells (Thuc. 2, 48 2 ). Optative after historical present in Xen. Cyr. S, 2". 2017. NOTE. Very often one of two subordinate clauses retains the indicative and the other is changed to the optative ; as lAeyof on Kf;po? fj.tv TeOvrjKcv, ' Aptaios oe Trc^euyws elrj, they said that Cyrus was dead and that Ariaeus had fled (Xen. Anab. 2, I 3 ). 2018. NOTE. 1. The imperfect and pluperfect indicative are seldom changed in indirect discourse to the optative (present and perfect), lest, if they were so changed, they might be supposed to represent the present or perfect indicative (compare 2193). Thus on ypa," and OTL yeypa^)ws ftrj for eiTrev " yeypatpa " ; very Seldom would etTrev OTI ypdtfroi Stand for elirev " eypa^ov ". 2. Very seldom do we find such an imperfect indicative changed to the optative, and only when the context makes it clear that the optative does not represent the present or perfect. Aii;yoi)i/To OTI auro! Vt rous iroXffuovs IT X ' o 1 1 v, they stated that they themselves had been (or were) sailing against the enemy (Xen. Hell. 1, 7). 2021 THE MOODS 217 Here the context shows that TrXeoiev stands for eVXe'o/xe v and not for ir\eop.tv ; so in Dem. 30, 20, the context shows that irapfir) represents irapfjv and not irdpean. 2019. NOTE. Observe that direr on. ypcupei (ypacpot) and H-rrtv OTI. 2ypas' dvpais rf K t era v 8e avrovs ot.../3ap/3apot, the Greeks were in great despair, reflecting that they were at the gates of the king,... and that the barbarians had betrayed them (Xen. Anab. 3, I 2 ). Here qo-av stands for " (K(o-av for " TrpoSedw/cao-i, " which might have been retained (ta-pev naturally becoming eiVt) or changed to the optative. The imperfect and pluperfect may be considered as expressive of the writer's opinion that all this was the case at that time. 2. In Homer this is the regular construction with indirect assertions ; as II. 13, 674 ; II. 5, 433. Homer does not use the oblique optative in indirect assertions ; but he uses it in indirect questions (2024, 3). 2021. NOTE. The potential optative, potential indicative, indicative in unreal conditions (2102), and optative with et remain unchanged. Ae'yei (or eXeyei') on fypa^tv av, he says (or said) that he would have written. Ae'yet (or tXtyev) on ypdv 6vofj.a(rTos (yivtro, OVT \f'ivos 'Adijvaios, Themistocles replied that he would not have become famous himself if he had been a Seriphian, nor would the other if he had been an Athenian (Plat. Rep. 329"). 'ATreKptvaro on npocrdtv &v air o Q av o if v t) TO. o?rXa TT apaooir) o-av, he replied that they would tather die than give up their arms (Xen. Anab. 2, l lu ), direct Trpoa-dtv &v airo6avoip.fv. 'ESoicet, i p.T) ((pdatrav (unreal condition) v\\a@6vT(S TOVS av8pas, irpoSodrjvat, &i> rrjv noXiv (infin. with av), it appeared (to- them) that if they had not seized the 218 THE MOODS 20-2-2 men beforehand, the city would have been betrayed (Thuc. 6, 61). Etwei/ art ( A 6 o i &v (Is \6yovs ( I ofjLTjpovs A a /3 o t, he said that he would come to a conference with him if he could receive hostages (Xen. Hell. 3, I 20 ), direci ai' ft 6p.T)pOVS \dftoifU. 2022. NOTE. For the treatment in detail of dependent verbs of a complex sentence which is put into indirect discourse, see Indirect Discourse, II. DEPENDENT QUESTIONS 2023. Dependent or indirect questions are of the nature of dependent or indirect assertions (2013). Thus ri, ypdfat, ; what is he writing ? is an independent question ; while epcara) ri ypd(f>ei t I ask what he is writing, is a dependent question. 2024. Indirect Interrogative Particles. 1. Indirect single questions are introduced by el, whether (if), occasionally by apa. 2. Indirect double or alternate questions are introduced by TTOTCDOV ....T/, ei r), fiTf....fLTf, whether.... or ; irortpov is occasionally omitted. For $ P.YJ and TI ov, see 2349, 2. For pronouns and adverbs in indirect questions, see 1545. 3. Homer seldom introduces an indirect single question by Tff (fit) ', aS s eft), see 2018, 1) ; r^popajv TI yeypd^erai or y fy pd\fs OITO. 'Ayvow Tt Trotw (subj.) or TTOUJO-O) (subj.), / know not what I am to do (directly TI TTOIW or iroirja- dei, J know not if I am to give always (directly 8i8> dei;). OVK oi8a el Tavra CITTW,. / know not whether I should say this (directly etTrw TaCra ;). 'E^ouXevoi/To (I diriaxTt or dirloicv, they were deliberating whether they should depart (directly an-/a>/xe> ;). 'EfiovXevovTo el TOVTO noifiiraxri or irotT) " Ma^f wpurrov, rives elo-iv, find out first who they are (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 5 ), direct " rives elpao-at, el fie o-aaxreif, consider whether you will preserve me (II. 1, 83), direct (radacrfts ; OvTf T< OTpar^yiKW 8f)\ov (sc. eart), ft (rv/x(^)pei (rrpaTtjyfiv, nor is it clear to one fit to be general whether it is expedient to be a general (Xen. Mem. 1, I 8 ), direct " (rvp.(pepei ;" "iSwp-ev 2p' ovrwo-r yiyverai irdvTa> let us see whether everything is so produced (Plat. Phaedo 70" 1 ), direct "<5pa yiyverai ; " 'HTrdpouv Tt nore \eyei, I was at a loss what he meant (Plat. Apol. 21 b ), direct "W irare \eyei. ; " Sevofpmv rjirope'iTO o Tt rrotijo-et, Xenophon was at loss what he should do (Xen. Anab. 7, 3 29 ), direct "W TTOUJWCO ; " future indicative for interrogative subjunctive. In these two last examples we might have had Xe'yoi and 220 THE MOODS 2027 Indicative changed to Optative. 'H p.f)Tijp 8iT)pa>Ta TOV Kvpov irorepov /SouXoiro fievfiv r) UTruvai, the mother asked Cyrus whether he wished to remain or go away (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 15 ), she asked "ouX;" for which ftovXtTai might have stood. "Hptro o n fir) TO TI t TT o>, / know not what I should say, Lat. non habeo quid dicam (Dem. 9, 54), direct "rt etirat ; " 'Epcora 6 KpiVa)!/, TTCOS p. ddrrTTj, Crito asks how he should bury me (Plat. Phaedo 115), direct " irSx a-f ^ajrrw;" Ta Se e'/cTrco/xara OVK 018' fl Xpvfrdvra rovrta 8 w, I do not know whether I should give the drinkiny-cups to Chrysantas here (Xen. Cyr. 8, 4 16 ), direct " 8a> ; " 'Ej3ouXevoi>To e?r K a TO K a v a~ i TOVS 0;/3aiovs eire TI aXXo ^pjo-a>vTat, they consulted whether they should burn the Thebans or do anything else with them (Thuc. 2, 4 8 ), direct " K araicaiio-a>/i*i' ; " and * ' xP1 (r( ' ) P- f ^ a " ^ or which KaTaKduo-fiav and xptjo-aivro might have been used. Interrogative Subjunctive changed to Optative. 'E^ovXevfTO, t nffjirroifv rivas T) navrfs toief, he consulted whether they should send some or all should go (Xen. Anab. 1, 10 5 ), direct " irt^noa- fjxv" and " ia>p.fv ; " which might have become simply -rrffnrtaa-i and icotrt. Tov dtbv firrjpovTo fl IT a p a 8 ol e v KopivQiois TTJV 7rdXii>, they asked the god whether they should give up the city to the Corinthians (Thuc. 1, 25 1 ), direct 4 ' 7rapa8(afj*v ; " for which irapaftSxri might have stood. This change also in Homer (as II. 1, 18891). 2027. NOTE. Observe that d (not edv), whether, stands before these interrogative subjunctives. 2028. NOTE. Very often the construction varies (as in 2017), one of two subordinate questions retaining its original mood, and the other changed to the optative. *E7rui/$ai/ero avrwv KO.I oTr6 %u>pav 8iT)\a/j,r]v Trept fp,ov fi^erf, fl pf) firiTpiT]pdpxri y u would not know what to do with yourself (Plat. Crito 45 b ) ; similarly Plat. Gorg. 486 b . So also ^apievra yovv Trddoip.' &v, tl fj.fi 'xoip.' oTTot -ravra KaraOfLrjv, I should be nicely off if I should not know any place to put these down (Ar. Eccl. 794). As we regard the optative in conditional clauses as equivalent to a primary tense (1957), this change ia contrary to the general rule that the optative (without av) follows only secondary tenses. 2034. Dependent Clauses after Implied Inquiry. 1. A dependent question may depend on a verb which does not of itself signify, but really implies, an inquiry. Such a dependent question has the form of a protasis of a conditional clause (2089), with a'v or ei. Some idea 222 THE MOODS 2035 like in order to find out or in case that, is here implied ; the force of the particle eav or ei may also be rendered by if perchance. 2. After primary tenses, eav with the subjunctive is generally found (but also ei with the optative) ; after secondary tenses el with the optative (but e'oV with the subjunctive may be retained). \\vafjiifi.vT]a-K rd(, eav d\r)0r) Xe'yw, call to mind if I speak the truth {Andocides, 1, 37). napfXTjXu^a/^fi/ is rrjv tr6\iv,...rj v 8vva>p.fda nap' vpjov dyadov TI fvpiWeer&u, we have come into the city to see if we could obtain some service from you (Xen. Anab. 7, I 31 ). Sxe'^ai tav KOI v dv8pa>v fjLvrjcrrrjpoov (TKf8acriv...d ( it), I am expecting the unhappy man to see if perchance he should come and scatter the suitors (Od. 20, 224). 'E8oKt KaXeT(s Trap' 'Adtjvaiovs 7rpV/3ty, ei ir>s irtia-fiav pf)... vfa>T(pitiv, they sent ambassadors to the Athenians to see if they could persuade them not to take any new measures (Thuc. 1, 58 1 ). 'Efieoi/ro TOV 'Apurrayopew, tt KO>S airrotcrt Trapatr^oi dvvap.iv, they besought Aristagoras if he could in any way furnish them with a force (Hdt. 5, 30 4 ). 'Horo KOTO) opoatv, Trcrrio'fyp.fvos (i TI fuv ftirot, he sat looking down, waiting if she would speak to him (Od. 23, 91). Subjunctive with ear retained after secondary tense : TJ8' f) Ka>/ia>ta Drover' ^X^', TJV irov 'ftFvjgj dfdrais ovrca trocpoTf, this comedy has come seeking, if perhaps it meet with spectators so clever (Ar. Nub. 534). 2035. NOTE. These dependent clauses are really protases of conditional sentences (2089) ; but they resemble indirect questions so closely that they are introduced here. 2036. NOTE. 1. Such dependent clauses are especially frequent and varied in Homer, who has ei KC (a? KC) and TJV (= eav). 2. Barely Homer has ? with the optative in such 2040 THE MOODS 223 clauses; as ^vwyet. ...etTre/jiev, ei KC TTC/D U/A/U pa, that, in order that = Lat. ut ', and by Iva yu^, 009 yu,?;, OTTO)? /AT;, opa is originally a temporal particle, meaning while, until (2172). 2039. Final clauses are of two kinds : those expressing absolute purpose (2040), and object-clauses after verbs of effort, care, or attention (2050). For object-clauses after verbs of fearing, see 2062. 2040. Final Clauses of Absolute Purpose. Final clauses take the subjunctive after primary tenses, and the optative after secondary tenses ; but the subjunctive is very often retained after secondary tenses. Thus ypd , give them to me, that I may distribute (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 10 ). EITTCO rt Sf/r' KaXX", ii/' opyio-rj n\tov ; shall 1 say still more, that you may bejnore angry ? (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 364). Ov\ S(ppa TTfTroidjjs, 1 will nod that thou mayest have confidence (II. 1, 524). TOVTOW eWica v wero Stlcrdai, u> s tXoy e/SovXtro (tvat rols /ityttrroi/ 8vvap.tvois, Iva d8ixS>v p.r/ 8180 ir) 8ixr)v, he wished to be a friend to the most powerful, that he might do wrong and not suffer punishment (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 ffl ). Subjunctive retained: Ta 7rXoia...)caTecrt, the < i Corinthians manned ships, that they might try a naval battle (Thuc. 7, 17 4 ). 2041. NOTE. The subjunctive in final clauses is the subjunctive of desire (2064, 1986) ; the optative is the oblique optative. 2042. NOTE. 1. The retention of the subjunctive in final clauses (also with verbs of fearing) after secondary tenses is much preferred by Thucydides (especially), Herodotus, and Aeschines ; somewhat by Lysias and Isocrates. The optative is much preferred by Homer, Pindar, the Attic dramatists, Isaeus, Plato, and especially Xenophon. In Demosthenes the usage is about equally divided. 2. The optative and subjunctive may be used in the same sentence ; as in Thuc. 6, 96 l . 3. The few rare cases of the optative in final clauses after a primary tense (as in 11. 1, 344), are perhaps doubtful. 2043. NOTE. 1. "\va final is almost exclusively used in Plato and the orators, and mostly in Comedy. 'OTTWS final is largely preferred by Thucydides and Xenophon. 'Os is by far the favourite final particle in Tragedy ; it is rare in Aristophanes and Herodotus ; it is less common than OTTO)? or Iva in Xenophon ; while it is almost entirely absent from other Attic prose. In Homer opa is greatly preferred as a final particle. 2. For that not in final clauses, simple prj is largely preferred to Iva py, is p.rj, etc., by Homer, Hesiod, and the lyric poets ; simple fjuj is also somewhat preferred in Tragedy. Herodotus and Aristophanes decidedly prefer Iva pr/, etc. In Attic prose Iva /AT/, s /AT/, and OTTWS p.rf are the final negative particles in regular use. Simple p.rj in final clauses is rare in Attic prose : Plato and Xenophon together have over thirty examples ; Thucydides only about five ; in the orators it hardly ever occurs. 2044. NOTE. Assimilation of Mood. A final clause may be in the optative when it depends on an optative. 2046 THE MOODS 225 OVK fTTicrrdfjieda, ort /SacrtXeus fjfjLas aTroXeVat rrtpl TTUVTOS av Troujtrairo, t v a Acai TOIS aXXois "EXX/7s, OTTODS, and opa sometimes add av (*e), which hardly modifies their meaning. But Lva final and UTJ final never add av. "Iva av means wherever (1964, 2), and aiij can be used with the potential optative with av after verbs of fearing (2066). 1. Qs av with the subjunctive occurs in Xenophon (almost never in other Attic prose); as u>s 8' av p. a 6 #?,... avraKovo-ov, that you may learn, hear the other side (Xen. Anab. 2, 5 16 ). 2. "OTTWS av with the subjunctive occurs in Attic prose and poetry ; as a^is rjpJa<;, OTTWS av el8w pev, you shall lead us, that we may know (Xen. Gyr. 5, 2 21 ) ; Soph. El. 41 ; Ar. Lys. 1223 ; Dem. 19, 298. 3. c Os av and dbs *' with the subjunctive are more common in Homer than d>s alone ; as Od. 5, 144 ; II. 1, 32. Herodotus also has J>s av ; as in 1, 36 4 . 4. "Op' av and o^pa Ke rarely occur in Homer ; as Od. 3, 359 ; 17, 10. 5. '09 av and o>s KC sometimes occur in Homer with the optative after secondary tenses, rarely after primary tenses; as II. 12, 26 ; Od. 2, 53. "O^/aa /ce and 6p' av hardly ever occur. Herodotus has s av and o/wos av with the optative in a few cases after secondary tenses ; as 1, 99 3 ; 7, 176 7 (after a primary tense in 1, HO 4 ). In all these cases the optative with av is potential rather than final. So also d>s oV and OTTWS av with the optative (after secondary tenses) are very rare in Attic prose : ws av with the optative occurring mostly in Xenophon (as Cyr. 7, 5 37 ) ; OTTWS av occurring very rarely in Xenophon (Hell. 4, 8 16 ), and only once in Thucydides (7, 65 3 ). 2046. NOTE. Future Indicative for Subjunctive. With 07TW5, and very rarely with ws, oa, rarely with u>9; as Iva a-writm ravra, to cut this short (Dem. 45, 5) ; ws (rvvTffna (Eur. Tro. 441) ; some expression like / (wish to) say this, is understood. So Iva ri, that what (should happen) ? (Ar. Nub. 1192). 2048. Unattainable Purpose. In Attic Greek iva, and sometimes also O7r&>9 and &>(p(\ov oloi r (ivai oi TroXXoi TO /itytora (coxa e{-fpydfs is so found only in Xen. Anab. 7, l a:! ; and 5na>s in Dem. 36, 20. This construction is an assimilation of mood, as in 2033, 2044. 2049. NOTE. In several instances we find av added after Iva and oTr.u?, to these indicatives : Isae. 11, 6 ; Plat. Leg. 959 C (OTTWS av lyiyvtro) ; Pseudo-Plat. Sisyph. 387 H . The av probably does not belong here. 2050. Object-Clauses after Verbs of Effort, etc. 1. After verbs denoting effort, care, or attention, object-clauses are introduced by OTTOK? and O7nwpovri(i) OTTO) 9 rovro yevij a-erai, I take care that this may happen; efypovTi^ov o TT co 9 fi 77 roOro ryevrfa-erai (or yevij s treoat e er o v r a t at oiey, a shepherd must take care that the flock be safe (Xen. Mem. 3, 2 1 ). poj/Ttf OTTOK prjdev dvdgiov rrjs TI/MTIS ravrrjs TT p d e i s , take care that you do nothing unworthy of that rank (Isoc. 2, 37). 'Eiceivo povov erjjpovj/, OTTO>S p.r)8tv TO>V irarpicav KaraXcaovo-t, for that only they cared, not to abolish any of the institutions of their fathers (Isoc. 7, 30). "Eirpavo-ov oirws TIS ftorjdfia rjfi, they were trying to effect that some help should come (Thuc. 3, 4 K ). Optative Future : tTTtpf \elTo 5 IT o) s p.f) acrlroi Trore e s TroXffios y e v T) T a i, he was trying to effect that a war might be brought about (Thuc. 1, 57 s ). Dem. 6, 25. Optative Present and Aorist : Xen. Symp. 3, 5 ; Anab. 1, 8 13 . 3. For object-clauses after verbs of caution, see also 2055. 2051. NOTE. Such verbs of effort, attention, and care are : cVt- fubjiofuu, /xs'Aet fjLot, op.aL, to prepare, to work for ; p.^\ava.op.a.i, to contrive ; opd- O-LV, he takes care that the others hunt (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 10 ) ; Ar. Eq. 917 ; Plat. Rep. 433*. 228 THE MOODS 2054 2. In a few cases Xenophon has > or (very rarely) o>? av with the subjunctive in object-clauses; as en-i/icXovvTai a> s I^TJ OVTWS, they take care that this may be done (Xen. Oec. 20, 8) ; Hipparch. 9, 2 (d>s av). He has ? (like OTTO?) with the future indicative twice, once with the future optative (Cyr. 3, 2 13 ; Hell. 2, I 22 , opt.). 3. Cases of OJTWS d/ with the optative, which are occasionally found in Xenophon and almost never in other Attic writers, are potential optatives ; as in Xen. Oec. 2, 9 ; Cyr. 7, 5 70 . 4. Herodotus has s with the future indicative in two or three places (as in 3, 84 1 ) ; s av with subjunctive only in 3, 85 3 . He has OKWS pafo/x$a 'Apyet- oicrtv o TT a> s ex' apurra y t v o i T o, we were deliberating how the best might occur for the Greeks (Od. 3, 129). &pdo- P a). 3. Where OTTWS is found with the future indicative, it is mostly an indirect interrogative (" how ") ; as 7rovs av v\dr), (if) cre....ar t p. d tr a> v 8 f r\ v fv rdis appals f i v a i, they always took care that one of themselves should be in the offices (Thuc. 6, 54 6 ). ' Kvayna^ovrai. T 6 virb oivov py cr(p d\\f cr 6 at eVt^eXeio-^at, they are obliged to take care not to stagger from, the effects of wine (Xen. Rep. Lac. 5, 7). 'En-i^eAou/tai TOU a. peer a i TW dpfa-Kovri p.oi, I take care to please him who pleases me (Xen. Mem. 2, 6' J9 ). See the syntax of the infinitive. 2057. NOTE. Some verbs which regularly take an infinitive, are sometimes followed by an object-clause. These are verbs of desiring, contriving, requesting, commanding, and the like. IlaptcrKfvd^ovTO o TT a> s e cr /3 aXov cr iv es rfjv KOTCO MaKeSovtdi/, they prepared to make an incursion into lower Macedonia (Thuc. 2, 99 1 ). 'E 8 e o v T o T>V v o K. a> s d TT ay o if v s ....a-a>fa>/*6#a, to try to save ourselves (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 s ). Ot ei>8f ca Trapayye'XXo i/9 ^ is some- times used independently in commands or exhortations, or even warnings. This occurs mostly in the second person. Sometimes epe or erye, come now, introduces these clauses. "O TT w s ovv eo-(o-6( ai>8ps aioi rfjs \(vd(pias, (prove yourselves to) be men worthy of freedom (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 a ). "O ir o> s poi /iij e'pe Is ort fo$en- P*l a '!), they feared that the army might also advance against them (Thuc. 2, 101 2 ). Thuc. 1, 91 3 . Subjunctive changed to Optative : Ov/ctVt t-ntriQfvro ol TroXe/xtot..., 8f8oiKor(S p.f) air or \t-r\6 f ITJ , ddu/te'to, aTrioTco), VTTOTTTCUW, fjiai } v\a/3iofjiai., cvvoeoywai, opaco, , ai^Ovo/Aat, KtVSvvds eori, and others. 3>povTia> p.T) Kparurrov y p.ot py /not 6 \va-ias rcurfivos (pavfj, I am afraid that Lysias appears tame (Plat. Phaedr. 257). 'Hdvprjardv TIVS, fvvooi>fj.fvoi fir/ TO. fVtTiySeta, d Kaioitv, OVK f%oifv oirodev Xafifidvoiev, some were disheartened, being apprehensive that if they should burn them they would have no place whence to get supplies (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 3 ). '\7rutirTfvf P.TI diraTTjs tvfKa Xe'yotro, he suspected that it might be said for the sake of deception (Xen. Hell. 6, 2 31 ). EvXa/3o{) p.r) (pavfjs KO.KOS ytyws, beware, lest you appear to be born of base spirit (Soph. Track. 1129). "Opa p.rj irtpl rots (piXrarotr K v /3 ( v y s , see that you do not gamble for your dearest interests (Plat. Prot. 314 a ). SKOTTOJ /i f) 86av \}fuv TT ap da- ^w p. a i irtpl fjlupov TroXXa \fytiv, I am considering lest I offer the appearance of talking too much on a small subject (Plat. Leg. 641"). 'YTrep ijfj.S>v al&xffvtyuu, p,r) 80^77 TO irpayfM dvavSpiq TIVI IT fir pd\6ai, I am ashamed of you lest the thing appear to -have occurred through cowardice (Plat. Crito 45 e ). Kivdvvos ecm, p,r) p.fra- fi aXw VTO.I, there is danger lest they change (Isoc. 14, 38). 2. For the construction of aio-^cvo/iai, see also 2294 ; of KtvSZvos rn, see also 2206. When verbs of fearing express fear or hesitation to do anything, they take the infinitive ; , I fear that I shall have a share.... (Ken. Cyr. 2, 3 6 ) ; so with future optative after past tenses (Isoc. 17, 22). 2069. If the fear relates to something present or past, the indicative is used with fjnj and ^ ov. 'OpS>fKv p.f) Ntic/af oltrai n \(yeiv, let us be careful lest Nicias is thinking that he says something (Plat. Lach. 196 C ). Ar. Nub. 493. "Opa pi) Traifav tXfytv, be careful lest he was speaking in jest (Plat. Theaet. 145 b ). Oct. 5, 300. 4>o/3oi^if$a ^117 d/ji(poT(pti)v dfjM T)[i.apTT)KafjLfv, we fear that we have missed both together (Thuc. 3, 53 2 ). 2070. Other Constructions with Verbs of Fearing. 1. Object- Infinitive. (a) A verb of fearing may take an object- infinitive (2207), sometimes with the article, to express the object of the fear ; as n afraid to refute you (Plat. Gorg. 457"), different from (poftov/jLai. /AT) SuAcy^w (subj.) at, which would mean I am afraid that I may refute you ; Seurds TO fjv, becoming afraid to live (Plat. Apol. 28 d ). (b) After verbs of caution this infinitive often has ftrf (2351) ; as v\dcTai /XT) o-uvaTrn/ ndxyv (Xen. Mem. 3, 4 n ) ; 2071 THE MOODS 233 i, taking care not to become hated or being anxious not to incur enmity (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 27 ); uA.aaro p.-tj aTrtaros y eve o-0 a i, he guarded against being distrusted (Xen. Ag. 8, 5). When the infinitive is here used without the article, the verb of fearing expresses unwillingness or hesitation to do anything (see 2065, 2). 2. Future Infinitive. A verb of fearing may be used with the future infinitive to express a fear that something may happen ; as ou of3ovp.fOa cAatro-oio-eo-flai, we do not fear that we may get the worst of it (Thuc. 5, 105 3 ). 3. The infinitive with ware may be used after verbs of fearing to express the result (2080) of the fear or of the cause of the fear. AfSteVat 8e fyacrKOVT&v Hepnvpaicav e^eiv, wore AaKtSai/xoi/ioi? (cat 'A.6rj- vaiois a7re'x$eo-$ai, the Corcyraeans alleged that they were afraid to keep him, on account of the danger of becoming hated by the Lacedaemonians and Athenians (Thuc. 1, 136 1 ). 4. A causal clause with on, because (2072), may follow a verb of fearing ; as in Xen. Hell. 3, 5 10 . 5. An interrogative clause with c/, n's, or OTTCDS, or other interroga- tive, occasionally follows a verb of fearing ; as ou Se6Wa, ei 3>iA.i7r7ros 17, / have no fear whether Philip is alive (Dem. 19, 289) ; Plat. Theaet. 195 (o ); Eur. Iph. Taur. 995 (6W) ; Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 19 6. A declarative clause (2013 ; 2015, 2) with u>? or GTTWS occasion- ally takes the place of ^ with the subjunctive, but usually only the verb of fearing is negatived. MIJ (frofiov to y an-opi^o-eiy, do not fear that you will want (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2 12 ). Miy dfio-T)T, s, because ; eV', y, ore, OTTOTC, since. 234 THE MOODS 2072 2. Poetic are OVVCKO. and (tragic) oOovvcKa, because (II. 1, 111; Soph. Aj 123); evre, since (Soph. Oed. Col. 84). Homeric are o or o re, because (II. 18, 197; 1, 244). New-Ionic is OKOV (= oirov), since (Hdt. 1, 68 2 ). 2072. 1. Causal clauses are dependent assertions (2016) and take, according to the sense, the indicative, the potential optative, or the potential indicative. The negative is ov. '~Ev6fuov T) Ai>ovTi on fs). Xen. Mem. 4, 8 7 (bioirtp). Ov yap ^/xeiy tudvov tn orpaTiwrat tv OVK (7T(dyoi, they abused Pericles, because being general he did not lead them out (Thuc. 2, 21 3 ) ; this is the Athenians' reason, and not that of Thucydides. Thuc. 4, 66 3 . The oblique optative in causal sentences is absent from Homer. 2073. NOTE. Sometimes CTTCI is used in the sense of although ; as ryoi Se TO. fjMKpa. ravra aSvvaros, e TT e i efiov\6fji.r)v av old? T' tivai, I am unable to master these long speeches, although 1 would wish to be able to (Plat. Prot. 335 C ). 2074. Use of el for ori. 1. After verbs of emotion, expressing wonder, delight, vexation, approval, satisfaction, shame, and the like, the cause of the emotion is often expressed by the protasis (2089) of a conditional clause introduced by el. The negative is here fir), but ov is occasionally found. &avpdu> 8' fycayt ( i fjur)8(\s vp.S>v /xijr' fv6vp.lrai /ii^r' opyi'fcrtu, but I am surprised that (lit. if) no one of you is either concerned or angry (Dem. 4, 43). 'Ayai/aKTw i ovraxA & i/ow firf olos r' ft/xt dirt'tv, I am vexed that I am so unable to say what I mean (Plat. Lach. 194"). OVK dyaira 1 1 ^17 fttKrjv 8 ( 8 a> K ( v, he is not satisfied that he has not been punished (Aeschin. 3, 147). Kar((ji(p.(f)(To KOI avrov KOI rnvs , 1 1 ol aXXot aK/j-d^fiv /iaXXor 1 8 o fp(j>, to bear impatiently ; al? consecutive mostly in Aeschylus, Sophocles, (Herodotus), and Xenophon ; rarely in other Attic writers. 2. Homer has wore (better d>s re) only twice with the infinitive : II. 9, 42 and Od. 17, 41 ; elsewhere it means as (= like). 2078. 1. With Finite Mood. If the consecutive clause expresses a result which actually does occur in consequence of the action of the leading verb, it takes the indicative. The negative is ov. Thus Trdv eiroirjaev, cocrre ef3a, wort d&tftdas fypd^aro, he looked at me so sharply that he has indicted me for impiety (Plat. Euthyphr. 5). Otmuj dyvu>p.6va>s (\tr(, Sxrn lXr/fcr, you are so senseless that you expect (Dem. 2, 26). Xen. Anab. 7, 4 3 . IHOC. 12, 103. With us : Hdt. 2, 135 ; Xen. Cyr. 5, 4" ; Aesch. Pers. 730. 2. The potential indicative may be used with wore, also an imperative. 236 THE MOODS 2079 fitv dvT(8po)i>, &v fir paacrov , ovS' &v &8' e y ly v 6 JJ.T) v ca irav (T rwi/S' OTraXXa^at, we will find devices so as to free you entirely from these troubles (Aesch. Eum. 82). Bpa^v Tt \t\' ? after a positive with comparative meaning, see 1338. 2083. NOTE. For consecutive relative clauses, see 2140. 2084. NOTE. We sometimes find wore or ws with a participle depending on a supplementary participle. Ta TOU ird\p.ov roiavra f-yiyvaxrKOv o v r a a> s pr) v TO) atr^aXei 77877 tcrofjLai, la s p.rjo'fv av ert KO.KOV TraQelv, I shall then be in safety so as no longer to suffer any ill ovfttv av rt irddoifu (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7 27 ) 'A.TTorfTfi)(icrp.fvoi av r) cr r fj,rj8' el p.eTirep.\lsav eri o/io/wy a v avroiis f\ow (Thuc. 7, 42 3 ). This consecutive infinitive with av is usually found in indirect discourse (see 2087). 2087. NOTE. 1. "Oore and the Infinitive in Indirect Discourse. A consecutive infinitive clause may stand in indirect discourse (2193) ; the infinitive here takes av if the finite verb (either indicative or optative) would have av in direct discourse. See Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 9 ; 3,. I 27 . Compare 2086. A consecutive clause with a finite verb is very commonly changed to the infinitive in indirect discourse. 2. The negative is naturally /*/ but ov is found when a single word, and not the whole clause, is to be negatived (2337) ; as WO-T' o v 8' i XV os ye Tetxwv flvai crab's, so that there is not a clear vestige of the walls (Eur. Hel. 108); Aeschin. 3, 96 (fut. inf.); Dem. 18, 283. Yet we sometimes find wo-re ov with the infinitive even if the negative does refer to the whole clause ; apparently the original ou of the direct discourse is here retained with wore and the infinitive in the indirect discourse ; as in Thuc. 5, 40 2 . 3. Very rarely do we find wore av with the infinitive ; as in Dem. 9,67. 238 THE MOODS 2088 2088. 1. After the demonstratives TOO-OUTOS, so great, so much, and TOIOVTOS, such, of such kind, the corresponding relatives oo-os and otos with the infinitive are often used instead of WO-TC. The case of oo-os and olos is assimilated to that of TOO-OUTOS or roioCros (compare 1529). The subject of the infinitive is the person or thing denoted by TOO-OUTOS or TOIOVTOS ; but the infinitive may have its own subject, which is then always in the accusative. The demonstrative may be omitted ; oo-os then means sufficient or enough, olos, fit for, such as. 'ATriyyyfXXov..., art TO (TOUT a fir) ?v8ov dyadd, ocra fir' dvdpdtntav ytvtjiv ...pr) &v f7ri\.finfiv roiis ev8ov ovras, they reported that there icas such a store of provisions within as could not in a generation of men fail those within (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2 4 ). Totouros 6 Srdo-nnros rfv, olos pr) fiovXfo-dcu rro\\ovs diroKTiwvvai T>V iroXiriav, Stasippus was a man of such character as to be unwilling to put many of the citizens to death (Xen. Hell. 6, o 7 ). o/3o{5/iai virip TOVTOV, fj.rj TIVI aXXw tVTVjgj, oi

(all from cl 5.v) ; but the trage- dians and Thucydides probably never use 5v, if. 3. Herodotus has rjv (never euv or &v). For d the Doric 2093 THE MOODS 239 and Aeolic dialects have ul, which occurs also in Homer. For Sv Homer also has KC ; Doric KU. For edV Homer has ei KC (at xe) or fjv ; he has d 8' av once (II. 3, 288) ; t 7Tp' av twice (II. 5, 224 and 232) ; and ^v.../ce' (*c') in Od. 18, 318. 4. For Epic av or KC with the future indicative in the apodosis, see 2117, 4 (b). For Homeric KC with the subjunctive in the apodosis, see 2110, 3. For simple et with the subjunctive in Homer, also in tragedy, see 2110, 1. For ei Kf. with the optative in Homer, see 2115. -Various other peculiarities are also given in their proper places. 2091. The negative of the protasis is pr/, that of the apodosis is ov. If the protasis has ov, the negative refers only to a single word and not to the whole clause (see 2337). 2092. Particular and General Suppositions. The supposition expressed by the protasis may be either particular or general. 1. A particular supposition relates to a definite act done at a definite time. Thus : if he is doing this (now), it is well or it will be well ; if he did this (then), it was well ; if he had done this (then), it would have been well ; if he shall do this (at that time), it will be well ; if he should do this (at that time), it would be well. 2. A general supposition relates to any act or acts belonging to a class or series of acts, any one of which may happen or may have happened at any time ; in these cases et or lav is equivalent to if ever or tvhenever. Thus : if (ever) he has money, he (always) gives it ; if (ever) he had money, he (always) gave it ; if (at any time) he had had money, he would (always) have given it ; if (ever) any one shall wish to go, he will (always) be permitted ; if (ever) any one should tvish to go, he would (always) be permitted. 3. The distinction between particular and general suppositions influences the form of construction only in present and past supposi- tions with nothing implied as to the fulfilment of the condition. 2093. Four Classes of Conditional Sentences. Suppositions may refer (a) to the present or past, or (b) to the future. The distinction of time, that of particularity or generality, and the implication as to fulfilment, are the grounds of classification. 240 THE MOODS 2094 There are four classes of conditional sentences : both the two first classes are for present and past suppositions ; the two last classes are both for future suppositions. This first class has two special forms for general suppositions. There are thus six regular forms. 2094. Synopsis of Conditional Forms. The following is a syn- optical view of the conditional forms : I. Present or Past Supposition with nothing implied as to reality. (a) Particular : Protasis has el with indicative... Apodosis any form of the verb. E? n !x, Swo-ei, if he has anything, he will give it = Lat. si quid habet, dabit. So also ei n lx, Aeye poi, if he has anything, tell me (imper.) ; or Soi'r; rj/Mv, may he give it (opt. of wish) ; or dTrai-rui/Aev, let us ask it of him (subj. of exhortation) ; or 80177 *"> ne might (or may) give it (pot. opt.) ; or !A.ev av, he would have said (pot. ind.). See 20952097. (6) General : 1. Protasis has edv with subjunctive... Apodosis present in- dicative. "Edv TL Ixfl, SioWi, if he (ever) has anything, he (always) gives it. See 20982101. 2. Protasis has el with optative... Apodosis imperfect indicative. E? n e^oi, e'Si'Sov, */ he (ever) had anything, he (always) gave it. See 20982101. II. Present or Past Supposition implying non-reality of condition. Protasis has el with past indicative. ..Apodosis a past indicative with av. Ei n fl\v, eSi'Sou av, if he had anything, he would give it. Ei TL tf y u sa y ^ n ^ s > it is well. Et dfoi n 8p>, may I perish miserably if I do not love Xanthias (Ar. Ran. 579). 'AXX' et SDK ft, TT X e cap,* v, but if it seems good to you, let us sail (Soph. Phil. 526). IIoXX)) a v ns (vBatpovia tlr) ire pi TOVS vtovs, et 'eis ptv fj.6vos avrovs diafpdeipfi, ol 8' aXXot (a(pf\ov(riv, there would be a happy condition for young men, if only one person corrupted them and the others benefited them (Plat. Apol. 25 b ). II. 6, 128. Et ovTQ> TUVT' e^et, ircas &v jroXXot pcv e' TT e 6 C p.ov v Tvpawf'iv ; if this is so, why should many be desirous of reigning ? (Xen. Hier. 1, 9). 2096. NOTE. 1. When the future indicative is used in the protasis in this form, it expresses a present purpose or necessity. Thus : a?p 7rA.T/KTpov et fj.a\fl (*'< fitAAfis /ici^eo-^at), raise your spur if you are going to fight (Ar. Av. 759). Xen. Mem. 2, I 17 . 16 242 THE MOODS 2097 2. This uncommon use of the future indicative of present intention or necessity, is entirely different from its ordinary use as a future condition equivalent to ea'v with the subjunctive (see 2111). 2097. NOTE. For a potential optative or indicative rarely used as a protasis, see 2117, 1. (6) General Suppositions 2098. The apodosis here expresses what regularly takes (or took) place, if ever the condition expressed by the protasis takes (or took) place. The scheme then is : 1 . For present general suppositions : Protasis : edv with the subjunctive ; Apodosis : present indicative or some equivalent expressing present repetition. 2. For past general suppositions : Protasis : et with optative ; Apodosis : imperfect indicative or some equivalent express- ing past repetition. Thus eav rts fyx tl pti ^fatrdai, TTJV o^iv a^atpeirat, if any one recklessly tries to gaze on the sun, he is deprived of his sight (Xen. Mem. 4, 3 14 ). ^.wKfxirrjs OVK tirlvfv, (I p.fj 8ity/Xtov fSXfijftKv oiKtrSw fo'/xar, (K\aifv, if ever she saw the form of one of her beloved slaves, she wept (Soph. Track. 908). 2099. NOTE. Equivalent forms for the present indicative are the gnomic aorist (1914) and perfects with present meaning ; for the imperfect indicative, we may have the imperfect or aorist with av (1961), a pluperfect with imperfect meaning, or rarely an aorist indicative. *Hi/ 8( TIS Toirrwv TI irapaftaivTj, fij/u'dV avrols tirtfifaav, if any one transgresses in any of these matters, they always impose a penalty (Xen. 1, 2 s ). Et bi TIS avT ret Trot, evdvs redvrjKti, if any one refused, he was instantly put to death (Thuc. 8, 66 2 ). Simple aorist in Xen. Anab. 1, 9 18 . 2100. NOTE. Indicative in Protasis. Occasionally the indicative is found in the protasis in general suppositions ; the form of a parti- cular supposition (2095) is thus used in a general sense. Et yap TIS...T o X pa ftorjQeiv rols irapdvofia ypdvT(s 'Amatol dairpov Trivdxriv, e, aXw tf he had written, it would be well. 4>ws f I pri (l^o p. f v, op.oioi rails Tv(p\ois av rjp.tv, if he had no light, we should be like the blind (Xen. Mem. 4, 3 f< ). Tavra OVK av tSvvavro, noiflv, 1 1 pf) teal SMITH /wpi'a e'xpa>i>ro, they would not be able, to do this if they did not lead an abstemious life (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 16 ). Hdt. 1, 120 9 . OVK av t IT o irj TroXewv TT}V ^irdpr^v f TT o ir] v Alvfins, fl p.r] ap* ov vorjcre Atoy Bvyarrfp 'Ac^poSrnj, and here Aeneas, lord of men, would have perished if Aphrodite, child of Zeus, had not quickly observed him (II. 5, 311). M Ev0a K. e peia e p o i K.\VTCI reu^ea, fl fir] ol dyatrcraro 3>oi/3oj 'ATrdAXwv, he would easily have carried away the famous armour, if Phoebus Apollo had not grudged him (II. 17, 70) ; here aTrwAei-o and ((ptpe would have been the regular Homeric construction. With a past indicative in the protasis only in the above examples, in H. 5, 388, and in Od. 1, 236. Occasionally Homer has potential optatives expressing past time (without a cor- responding protasis) ; as ovdc KC (paiys, nor would you have said (II. 3, 392) ; OVK av yvoirjs, you would not have known (II. 5, 85). The context must here show whether the potential optative can be translated as referring to the past. 2105. Omission of av. 1. When the apodosis is an imperfect expressing an unfulfilled necessity, propriety, or possibility, with an infinitive, the particle av is omitted. A present infinitive here refers to present action or to an action going on or repeated in the past ; while an aorist infinitive refers to past time 2. Such imperfects are ISei, XP*I V or *Xp*7 v > Trpoa-fjKtv, lrjv, frfv ; Katpos rjv, aiov rjv, C/'KOS r/>', Si/caioi' r/v, olds T' rjv, alcr^pov v\v, KaAais ft\fv, and others ; also verbals in -re'os with rjv. Thus : ISei o-c TOVTO iroulv, you ought to do this (but do not) or you ought to have done this (but did not), both equivalent to eVoi'eis av TOVTO, you would do this or you would have done this, if you did (or had done) your duty ; ISei o-e TOVTO TroiT/o-a/, you ought to have done this (but did not), equivalent to eVoojo-as av TOVTO, you would have done this, if you had done your duty. The real apodosis in such cases is the infinitive, the contrary of which is implied. Xprjv 8f a-f, fiirp fada \prjaTos, ...fi.r)vvTf)v ytvfcrOai, if you had been honest, you ought to have laid an information (Lys. 12, 32). Et qvav ai>8ps dyadoi, ....' ) v avTois TIJV aptTqv StiKvvvai, if they were honest men, they could show their virtue (Thuc. 1, 37 s ). KaXiv 8" ffv, tl *ac f)fJ.ap- 246 THE MOODS* 2106 rdvofttv, ToZ(r8 ft.fi> tiai TTJ fjp.(Tfpa opyfj, even if we were wrong, it would hare been honourable for them to yield to our temper (Thuc. 1, 38 4 ). Ovi* ourtoff dirocrTaTtov rrj TroXet TOVTWV r/v, (iirtp 77 86ijs f] irpoyovs irop(v((r6a.i irpbs TO dcrrv, ov8ev a v (Tt (8ft 8fvpo Itvai, if I still had the power to go easily to town, there would be no necessity for you to come hither, implying that there is necessity (Plat. Rep. 328 C ). Xen. Anab. 5, I 10 ; Cyr. 3, 3". Dem. 19, 68. 2108. NOTE. 1. A few other imperfects with the infinitive are occasionally used in this way without dv. So e/SoiAo/x^v, I would wish (for fftov\6fj.Tfif dv), r t o~ xvv6fj.r)v, 1 would be ashamed, and ffj.f\\ov. 'E/3ovX 6fJ.T} v piv ovv TTJV j3ov\T)v...,6p0>s 8ioiKtlcr0ai, I would (wish) that the Senate were properly managed, implying that it is not (Aeschin. 3, 2). 'HKTx^vofirjv, I should be ashamed (Xen. Anab. 7, 6 ai ). Et y nap' 'EAX^va>i> Xa/3oi' oSvopM Ttv ftaipovos, TovTO)v...p.d\icrTa v(ra, I ran a risk, is also used thus ; as rj irdXis CKivSuvevcre Trao-a oia6apf]vai, tl ave/xos eycvero, the city ran the risk of being wholly destroyed if a wind had arisen (Thuc. 3, 742). 3. In Homer we find the imperfect weXXov 2110 THE MOODS 247 and the aorist uxpe\ov or oel\rj (ypd-^TTj), tca\a> fjjTJ/f ica\)s, (vpf)(rcis, if you shall seek well, you will find (Plat. Gorg. 503 d ). Xdpiv eto-o/xat, tav duovrjTf, I will be grateful if you will listen (Plat. Prot. 310 s ). *~A.v 8e TIS dvdiv, if you choose war, do not come here again without arms (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 13 ). *H v p. e v KOI fit v, ^TTOV hv dvvaivTo rjfids drjpdv ol rroXe/wot, if we watch and keep guard by turns, the enemy will be less able to catch us (Xen. Anab. 5, I 9 ). So also in the apodosis a subjunctive of exhortation (as in II. 3, 283) ; a present referring to the future (as Plat. Rep. 473 d ; Xen. Cyr. 5, 5 13 ) ; or a perfect equivalent to a future perfect (as Xen. Anab. 1, 8 13 ). 2110. NOTE. 1. Homer occasionally has el alone with the sub junctive t instead of c? or yv ; et wtp ydp o-e Ka.Ta.KTa.vy, if he kill you (11. 22, 86). This also occurs in a few cases in Attic poetry ; as in Aesch. Pers. 791 ; Soph. Oed. Col. 1442 ; Eur. Iph. Aul. 1240 ; Ar. Eq. 698. The rare examples in Attic prose are doubtful ; as Thuc. 6, 21 1 . 248 THE MOODS 2111 2. In Homer we find ei or at KC several times with the future indicative ; as c ? K ' ZTI cf atfrpaivovra K i ^ 77- p 17 arti s narpoicXa) rw (Toipa rov (f)6vov (cal "EcTopa air o K.T f v fls, avros airoBavfi, if you shall avenge the murder of your companion Hector, you yourself will be slain (Plat. Apol. 28 C ). Od. 12, 382. Hdt. 1, 32 4 . Aesch. Cho. 683. 2. This use of the future indicative hi future suppositions must not be confounded with its occasional use to express a present purpose or necessity (2096). 2112. In indirect discourse, both the subjunctive and the future indicative of the protasis may pass into the oblique optative (without av) after a secondary tense. Thus, direct discourse: eav TOVTO Trot^orgs (or ei TOVTO TTotTyortis), *caA.a>5 e. Indirect discourse : <^)T; KaAais' e^tiv i TOVTO iroi7;o-ias (opt. aor.) or Trotr^crois (opt. fut.), he said that it would be well, if you should do this ; but edV TOVTO 71-017)0-77? or ci TOUTO TTotTo-ets could be retained. (D) FUTURE CONDITIONS OF LESS DISTINCT FORM 2113. The protasis here expresses a possible future case less distinctly, as if you should do this ; such a vague supposition is properly only conceived by the speaker. The scheme then is : Protasis : el with the optative (never future) ; Apodosis : optative with av (never future). This form is especially frequent with Attic writers, who use this 2116 THE MOODS 249 form to politely intimate that a future statement or supposition, even if quite true, is only conceived by the speaker and thus holds good only for him. Thus el h w could I bind you, if Ares should escape (Od. 8, 352). Once he has el irep av (II. 2, 597). VARIOUS PECULIARITIES OF CONDITIONAL SENTENCES 2116. 1. The regular forms of ordinary conditional sentences are given above in 2094 and 2095 2113. The following sections, 2117 2132, treat of various peculiarities which cannot conven- iently be grouped under the typical forms. 2. For dependent clauses with edv or el after verbs of implied inquiry, see 2034. For el used for cm, because, see 2074, 2329. 250 THE MOODS 2117 MIXED FOjiMS 2117. The apodosis sometimes does not correspond in form to the protasis. The following are the possible cases (of these 1 and 2 were already given in 2095, 2109) : 1. The protasis may be a present or past indicative, and the apodosis a potential optative or potential indicative. E i iroXifuos y( >v (rv iKavfis a> < e X o 1 17 1/,. if as an enemy I injured you greatly, I could also benefit you sufficiently as a friend (Thuc. 6, 92<). II. 6, 128. Dem. 18, 223. See also the two last examples under 2095. 2. The protasis may be a subjunctive or future indicative, and the apodosis a potential optative. Qpovpiov (I iroiTj&ovrai, rf/s p,tv yqs /3Xa7rroiev av TI ptpos, if they shall build a fort, they might injure some part of the land (Thuc. 1, 142 3 ). See also Xen. Anab. 5, I 9 , given in 2109. 3. A protasis is occasionally expressed by ei and a potential optative (with av) or a potential indicative (with av). E*7Tfp oXXw TO) dv0pd>ira>v rr ( 10 o i p.r) v av, KOI p y i- {ftrdf, on OVK (TTfTpiTjpdpX'nc'a, TTW? ov^t vvv 7rpoa-f]Ki TOVTOV (l ( jrirpf^fai f) rralfias apptvas 7rai8fvv, any one seeing that would have been encouraged (Xen. Hell. 3, 4 18 ). v E6\*ce yap Tore ye 6 8(bs avrols (pyov, olov ouS' tv^avro IT or" av, the gods then gave them such occupation as they could not even have wished for (Xen. Hell. 4, 4 12 ). Soph. Oed. Tyr. 523. II. 4, 421. 'O^e TJV, KOI Tas ^etpa? OVK av Kadfd>pa>v, it was late, and they could not have seen the raising of the hands (Xen. Hell. 1, 7 7 ). Tis a v nor* we TO; who could have thought (Soph. Aj. 430). *Ev$a 8f] ey v o> TIS a v, there one might have perceived (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3). Eur. Iph. Aul. 1582. Xen. Anab. 1, 5 8 . 3. Similarly the imperfects eS, ex/"7 v > *&l v ' e * c -' without av. 'Efjv avrois prjo'fva Xtn-eii/, they might have left not one of us (Xen. Hell. 2, 3 41 ). OVK dTTOKpivfa-dai XPV V > one Ou 9 n t * be answering (Plat. Rep. 343 m ). *Agi6v y qv dKova-ai, it would have been worth while to hear (Plat. Euthyd. 304 d ). Xen. Anab. 7, 7 40 . Dem. 20, 63. 2120. NOTE. 1. The imperfect with av here refers to present time chiefly in the expression e'/JovAd/x^v oV, I would wish, Lat. vellem (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 16 ; Aeschin. 3, 115). 2. With the potential indicative, compare such Latin subjunctive imperfects as putares, crederes, diceres, videres, you might (would) have thouyht, believed, said, seen. The presents putes, credas, etc., correspond to the potential optative ; as 1801? av, you could (might) see* 3. For the periphrastic forms ISet, etc., wifth the infinitive, see 21052108. "252 THE MOODS 2121 2121. The protasis may be represented by a participle or it may be implied in some word or phrase. The tense of the participle is the same as the finite verb would have had ; the present representing also the imperfect, and the perfect also the pluperfect. The negative is, of course, pr). Thus t\v n may represent ti. n l^w (!x et ? *x ei ) or * av Tt 'X w or " TL f\OLfJLL Or 1 Tt Cl^OI'. 2v 8f (cXvo)i' ( lo-ei rd%a, but if you will listen, you will soon know, i.e. lav K\VJJS (Ar. Av. 1390). Tour' av 6 avrbs dvrjp p,r) dia(f>0apfis e'roX/xj;- (Ttv fliffiv ; would this same man have dared to say this, if he had not been corrupted? i.e. pj 8ie(pddpri (Dem. 19, 308). Xen. Mem. 1, 4 14 . NIK a> v- r f s ptv ov8(va av narandvoifv , if they were victorious they could not kill one of them, i.e. et vtK&tv (Xen. Anab. 3, I 2 ). Andoc. 1, 5. Xen. Cyr. 8, 7 28 ; Ag. 10, 2. T w v dd\7)T(!>v Sis Tocravrijv potpyv \a@6vTu>v ovdtv &v TT\(OV yfvoiro rols aXXois, if athletes should acquire twice as much strength, no benefit would accrue to others, here the genitive absolute stands for tl oi adXqrat \dfioitv (Isoc. 4, 2). Od. 1, 390. *Avv row TO. roiavra f^tiv, OVK av olos T TJV, without having such things, I should not be able, i.e. ^...d^ov (Plat. Phaedo 99*). O vr\fTt, by yourselves (if it had depended on yourselves) you would have ~been ruined long ago (Dem. 18, 49). 2122. NOTE. The future participle is only so found in the sense of a present intention or necessity (2243, 2256), and does not stand for el with the future indicative in future suppositions, because the present or aorist participle may always represent a future supposition with eiu> (p.flo ytvrjrai , but if ever any need of me should arise, very well (II. 1, 340). In Attic this is specially frequent when two suppositions are introduced ; one by d (cat ) fjilv, and the other by ci (lav) 8 firj. The apodosis of the first is then sometimes omitted. 2126 THE MOODS 253 'Eai/ ptv KO)v TreidrjTai- d 8e fir], (vdvvovatv aTretXmy KOI TrXrjyais, if he obeys willingly, well and good, but if not, he is straightened by threats and blows (Plat. Prot. 325 d ). Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 10 . 2. In wishes with ei or elOe or fl yap with the indicative or optative, the apodosis is of course suppressed. 2125. 1. The apodosis may be an infinitive or participle depending on some verb of declaring, thinking, perceiving or the like (2192, 2193 ; 2300, 2301). If the finite verb represented by the infinitive or participle would have taken dv, the infinitive or participle in indirect discourse also takes it. The present and perfect infinitive or participle may here represent also the imper- fect and pluperfect (1948, 1955). &r)(ri.v, el TOVTO Troteire, KaXcas e x e i v, he says that it is well if you do this, i.e. " KO\U>S ?x ft " &ijo~lv tav TOVTO 7rotJ)re (TroiijOTjre), KO\U>S eciv, he says that if you shall do this, it will be well, i.e. " S av f'xftv, he said that if you had done this, it would be well, i.e. " KaXw? av *<-X fv " Oi8a rravra, eav TOVTO 7roia>o~i (Trotijtraxrt), Ka\>s ({OVTO, I know that if they do this, all will be well. Ot8a TTOVTU, TOVTO iroiolfv (iroir)o~(iav), Ka\S>s av e^oT/ra ( = KoX&s av fX ot )' -^ know that if they should do this, all would be well. 2. The infinitive may depend on a verb of commanding or desiring ; this is the regular form of indirect command (2207). Ei p.oi TOVTO Xe'yere, Kf\fva> v~p.as dntXdflv, if you tell me this, I bid you to depart. 2126. NOTE. Sometimes the infinitive with av is found where it evidently does not stand in indirect discourse. In such cases a protasis is expressed or implied, and the infinitive with oV represents an indicative or optative with av. Km fjai oi dtol ourcor / Tols itpols fo~f)p,T)vav, Store KOI I8ia>rrjv av y v S> v at, and the gods gave me such signs in the sacrifices, that even an untaught person would have understood (Xen. Anab. 6, I 31 ; like ei rtr Idianjs fjv, eyi/o> av). 'Ei/ TW atr^aXet fj8T) (o~ofjuu, a>s prjdfv av ert KUKOV iradflv, I shall then be in safety, so as not to suffer any evil (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7 27 ; like ovSev a v en KOKOV IT d0o i pi). Thuc. 2, 49 4 ; 7, 42 3 . Plat. Meno 94 d . ("O^Xw) V avfM X iav Troiovfjifvoi ev TTfXdyti OVK av txpa)p,tda 8 1 a TO fUXdirTftv TO TT/S t7rurTT)p.r)S av TTJ papvrrjTi TU>V veutv, infighting a naval battle in the open sea, we could not use the multitude, through the interference with our skill by the weight of our ships (Thuc. 7, 62 2 ; like ort 6 o^Xor f^Xan-re v av tl avra txpupfda). Plat. Symp. 174 d . 254 THE MOODS 2127 2127. NOTE. 1. The apodosis may be a participle not depending on another verb. 2a>Kpa.TT)s pq8i(i>s a v (iff) t 6 tl s vrro rutv 8iK.a(rroi>t> , tl KOI p.fTpia>s TI TOVTU>V firoirjcrt, n-poeiXero drrodavflv, whereas Socrates might easily have been ac- quitted (dfaidr) av), by the judges if he had done any of these things even moderately, he preferred to die (Xen. Mem. 4, 4 4 ). ndvra ra\\' d-n u>v av 178* cos, ri- irovs ( n o\( P.T) a-av, they perished just as if they had fought against the whole u'orZei (Isoc. 4, 69). In such conditional clauses of comparison, av (with optative or past indicative) really represents an apodosis with the verb suppressed. The full forms would be Trao-^ouo-tv oio-Trep av TIS Tratr^ot ti KTrju-atro, and oic0dpr)(Tav axrirtp av oif6dpr)(rav el iro\fjirj(rav. 2. So in Homer o>? el and o>s i T ; as in Od. 9, 314. 2130. NOTE. 1. With wo-Trep av ft both the protasis and apodosis may be suppressed ; axnrcp av d (also written wo-Trepavet ) then means simply as or like. Thus fji(6a, KO.\U>S vlnrnvrts (rwfto/te^a el 8( p.t), d\\a KaXcas ye diro0vij Xryt, ft df p. 17, oi Oappovvra pe *& do not speak thus ; otherwise (if you do speak thus), you will not find me confident (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 85 ). Et ptv /3ovXet,...t 8t, if you wish,. ..but if not (Plat. Symp. 212 C ). VIII. CONCESSIVE CLAUSES 2133. A conditional clause becomes concessive if xai is pre- fixed or added to et or edv. Thus el KaL or eav /cat, */ even, although, Lat. quamquam ; Kal el or teal eav (K&V), even if, Lat. etiamsi. The construction is the same as that of conditional clauses. The apodosis often contains the adversative particle o//.6)9, nevertheless, yet. Tariff StKata irdvTfS, tav KOI /xr; ^ov\a>VTai,...a.l(T\vvovrai. p.r] irpArrttv, all persons are ashamed not to do what is just even if they do not wish to do JiO (Dem. 16, 24). 'Hyovp.f vos dvftpos etvat dyadov atpfXflv TOVS (plXovs, K a t 256 THE MOODS 2134 1 1 p.r)8f\s /xe'XXoi (Icrfcrdai, regarding it to be the duty of a good man to help his friends, even if no one should find it out (Lys. 19, 59). Et KOI (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 302, with O/XOK in apodosis). Km tdv or K&V (Plat. Menex. 248 d ; Men. A/on. 19). 2134. NOTE. 1. Kai ei or KOI eav emphasises rather the condition ; but often there is hardly any difference between el (lav) KOI and Kal el (edv). 2. Sometimes with i KOI the Kai does not belong to , but to the next or oftener to some following word ; as in Soph. Ant. 90, Aj. 1127 ; Xen. Mem. 1, 6 12 . 2135. NOTE. Concession is more frequently expressed by a parti- ciple with or without /caiVep (or xai) ; see 2258, 2274. 'ETTCI may also express concession (Plat. Protag. 333). IX. RELATIVE CLAUSES 2136. 1. Relative clauses are introduced by relative pronouns or relative adverbs. 2. The antecedent of a relative is said to be definite, when the relative refers to a definite person, thing, place, or manner. It is said to be indefinite when the relative does not refer to a definite person, thing, place, or manner. The antecedent may be under- stood. 2137. Explanatory Relative Clauses. The antecedent is here definite. Such clauses may have the construction of any simple sentence. Hapfjv 6 MTjb'o(rdo'T)s TO> Sfvdy, oar IT f p tirpfvftfvtv avru TravTotrt , Medosades, who acted as ambassador for him on all occasions, was present with Heuthes (Xen. Anab. 7, 2 23 ). Dem. 18, 35. Potential Indicative : 'liriroK.parrjs Trap' fpf dfpino/jifvos ov irt'urtrai, fintp &v e TT a 6 1 v aXXa> T&> (rvyyevofjitvos T>V (TO^UOTWV , Hippocrates coming to me will not have the experience which he would have in meeting with any other of the philosophers (Plat. Prot. 318 d ). Potential Optative: 6 HapBtvios norapjos aftaros (s, Anytus has sat down here, to whom let us give a share in the inquiry (Plat. Meno 89*). Imperative: iris, you do a strange thing in that you give us nothing (Xen. Mem. 2, 7 13 ). Xen. Anab. 3, I 17 . 2139. NOTE. When the negative is ^77, the cause is considered as conceived rather than absolutely true; as TaAaiVw/3os...av0/ov, OO~TIS dyvoel rbv fKfWev iroXepov dfvp* fjt-ovra ; who of you is so simple as not to knoiv that the war in that part will come hither? (Dem. 1, 15). A.6yo)v . . .TOWVTO>V ols & v vp.ds eireura, of words such as I could have persuaded you with (Plat. Apol. 38 d ). Dem. 18, 43. Toiovros yiyvov trepi TOVS yovtis, oiovs av (vato Trepl aeavrov ytvecrdai TOVS (din-ov TralSay, be such toward your parents as you would pray for your own children to become toward yourself (Isoc. 1, 14). Isoc. 8, 52. In such cases the consecutive relative clause is used like wore with a finite verb (2078). 2. If the consecutive relative clause denotes a result which is possible or necessary or intended in consequence of something mentioned in the leading clause, it takes the future indicative. The negative is /j,rj. Such a consecutive relative is equivalent to wo-re with the infinitive (2080). For the future indicative we sometimes have the potential optative. 'IKOI/OI (o~p.fv fip.lv 7rffj.\^rai vavs Tf KOI avdpas, otfivts a'vp.p.a^ovvTai Tf Kal rr)v 68bv fjyrjcrovTai (= wort (rvp.fjidxfo'dai), we are able to send you both ships and men, who will be your auxiliaries and will guide you on the way (Xen. Anab, 5, 4 10 ). 'Enti ov ir\oia mi, ofs diroirhtva-ovp.t6a (= wore a7roir\(vo-ai), there are no vessels there by which we can sail away (Xen. Anab. 6, 3 1(1 ). IlalSes 8e p.oi OVTTW flK(ts drro\ovvTat, it was necessary for a decree to pass by which the Phocians would be destroyed (Dem. 19, 43). 17 258 THE MOODS 2141 Xp^ ..... 8i(\0(lv TOITOVTOV pipes TOV \6yov, 5 rpidicovTa avdpas eXe'cr&u, o t TOVS irarpiovs vopovs cr v y- y pdtyov v pf) X f IT ov pyy cr is p-ffiddrjicas, you have learned to do everything so as not to perform public duties (Dem. 42, 23). 2143. NOTE. For the future indicative, ^uAAw and an infinitive may be used ; as in Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 16 ; 2, I 29 . 2144. NOTE. Instead of a final relative clause, the future participle is much oftener used (2243, 2256). 2145. NOTE. 1. Earely is the indicative changed to the future optative after past tenses ; as Xen. Hell. 2, 3 11 . 2. So rarely do we find the optative aorist or present after secondary tenses or after another optative ; as in Ar. Ran. 96 ; Soph. Track. 903. 2146. NOTE. 1. In Homer final relative clauses take the subjunctive (usually with xe) after primary tenses, and the optative (not future) after secondary tenses. Thus t7rt^dpfjia\ a. K e v TT a v 'EXX^vwi/ ot pfj fTv\ov eV rats Taf(riv ovres, fls ras rd^eis edeov, those who did not happen to be in the ranks ( = fl rives p.f) fTv^ov ev rals ra^riv ovrts), ran to their places (Xen. Anab. 2 t 2 14 ). The conditional character of the relative clause is only recognised by /"? The conditional relative clause may also have the future indicative to express present purpose or necessity (2096) ; as in Thuc. 2, 8 6 . (2) General Suppositions. If the general supposition is present, the relative clause (protasis) takes the subjunctive with av, and the antecedent clause (apodosis) takes the present indicative or some equivalent form. If the general supposition is past, the relative clause (protasis) takes the optative, and the antecedent clause (apodosis) takes the imperfect indicative or some equivalent form. Compare 2098. Ot Ileptrat o v &v y v 5xr i bwdptvov p,fv X^-P lv o.ifo8i86vai t pr) aTroSiSovra dt, KoAafouo-ii/ is, whomever the Persians find able to return a benefit and not returning it, they punish severely (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 7 ). O v a v ns tin-' apxovros ra^dy, evTavda 8(1 pfvovra Kiv8vvi>ftv, wherever a man has been placed by his commander, there he ought to remain and bear dangers (Plat. Apol. 28 d ). TLarpis yap eVrt iracr" IV &v (wherever) irparrrj ns fv, his country is every country wherever a man is well off (Ar. Plut. 1151). Kvpos tovarivas p.d\i(rra opwi; TO. naXa 8io>KOvTas, TOVTOVS Trfltrats rivals' fyepaiptv, whomever Cyrus saw the most zealously following noble pursuits, these he rewarded with all kinds of honours (Xen. Cyr. 8, I 39 ). Ot TroXe'/itoi KOI OTTJJ fir] (TTtvov x a> pi v TfpoKara\ap.^dvovTfs fKa>\vov ray Trap68ovs, wherever there was a narrow place, the enemy by pre-occupying it, obstructed the advance (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 24 ). 2149. NOTE. General relative suppositions sometimes have the indicative instead of the subjunctive or optative (2100). 260 THE MOODS 2150 ' A.yrja'lXaos orrov &tro rf/v irarpiba rt s f 18 e irj, e*pyes, rjriKa, OTrrjviKa, when, as ; ocraKis, oTrcxraKis, as of ten as ; ev J>, while, as long as ; //.e'^pt, ax/ 31 ) o" Te > ws, while, as long as ; (b) eW, eTreiSr;, when = after, since ; e ov, e' OTOU, d<' ou, cf &v, after, since ; ws rd^La-Ta, CTTCI rd^KTra, tTreiSr/ T(i\t.o-Ta, CTretS?) as soon as; (c) irpiv, irplv ^, also irporepov %, before; /xe'xpt, I cr T e, ? o) s, fte'xpi ov or a^pi or, until. 2. Add also : Ionic evre = ore ; oio-Trcp ws (Hdt.) J OTTO)? (Hdt. 0x0)9), Ionic, also Attic poetic ; ^/AO? = ore, Ionic, tragic, lyric ; opa, as long as, until, Epic, lyric, tragic in lyric parts; 7mTt, Ionic = CTTCI; irplv ore, Horn. = n-piv, 7rapo9 = irptv, Horn, but only with inf.; os t>5, 2(52 THE MOODS 2162 until, Hdt. ; e? o, is ov, Hdt. ; Horn, el? o *e or as long a$, until ; Horn. c?u>s or elos for ws. "Bore is not in Homer. 2162. Temporal clauses have in general the same construction as relative clauses; but those introduced by particles meaning until or before, have peculiarities of their own (2172 2182). 2163. NOTE. The correlatives to the temporal particles are seldom expressed ; oftenest TOTC, then, corresponding to ore or orav, and Trporepov to irpiv. So fe)s...To>s (poet.) ; ^/AOS (poet.)...T^/Ao? (poet.) ; 5pa (poet.) ...To ; a>? ...<5s (Horn.) ; etc. 2164. Temporal clauses which express an actual occurrence take the indicative. The negative is ov. *O T f 8e eyyvrepov tyiyvovTo, ra.\a 8r) xal ^a\Kos TIS rjarpcnrTe, when they approached nearer, brazen armour began to flash (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 8 ). "Hputt rfi TrdXei ra Tfi^r) 8ta, it wot sufficient for the city to nave its walls when the Lacedaemonians invaded (Xen. Hipparch. 7, 4). 'H v i K. a S 8( i\f) iyiyvt-ro, ((pdvij Kovtopros, when it was afternoon, there appeared dust (Xen. Anab. 1, 8 8 ). 'E v a> w TT X t- fovTo, r)Kov ol 7rpo7r(fjL(pdevTfs O-KOTTOI, while they were arming themselves, the scouts that had been sent forward returned (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 1S ). "Ea> s ecrrl Kaipos, dvnXafifcrdf TU>V irpayfjMT&v, while there is a chance, take hold of the business (Dem. 1, 20). 'End ^ a 6 t v ( i Aapecor . . . ,e^ovXerd 01 rw TratSe a/x0o- Tfpoi irapdvai, after Darius had fallen sick, he wanted both of his sons to attend him (Xen. Anab. 1, I 1 ). 'E orovirep t y e v op. ij v, KaTc^rrjfpicrfjifvos rfv p.ov VTTO TTJS (f)vs or OKUS (Hdt. 7, 2292) ; fas (11. 11, 86) ; a, as ion^ a* (II. 4, 220) ; cWrc (Hdt. 7, 8 3 ) ; t o, until (Hdt. 1, 115 4 ) ; ov, wnfii (Hdt. 1, 67 s ) but some prefer to rad t's o in Hdt. 2165. NOTE. Observe the use of ore with verbs of remembering ; as fifftvrjfMii ore, I remember when for I remember that (as Thuc. 2, 21 1 ). See 2303. 2166 THE MOODS 263 2166. When temporal clauses (apart from those introduced by before or until) do not express an actual occurrence, they have the construction of ordinary conditional clauses. When av is required, it is either added after the temporal particle, or it coalesces with it, forming regularly orav, o-jrorav, eTrdv or CTTIJV (Hdt. cTredv), eTreiSdv, also r^vix' av. 1. The temporal clause may be general, expressing a repeated occurrence; it then takes the subjunctive with av after the present tense, and the optative (without av) after a past tense (2098). The negative of the temporal clause is ^17. 2. The temporal clause may express an unreal condition ; it then takes a past tense of the indicative ; the antecedent clause has a past tense of the indicative with av (2102). The negative of the temporal clause is p.^. This form is very uncommon with temporal clauses. 3. The temporal clause may express an expected future occurrence of the more distinct form. It then takes the subjunctive with av ; the antecedent clause has the future indicative or some form referring to future time (2109). The negative of the temporal clause is p.rj. This form is very common. 4. The temporal clause may express an expected future occurrence of the less distinct form. It then takes the optative (2113) the antecedent clause has the optative with av. The negative is ny. This form is not common. 1. Ot XaXSmot fucrdov (rrpaTfvovrai, orrorav TIS avratv Strjrai, the Chaldaeans perform military service for hire, whenever any one requests it of them (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 7 ). 'HVIK' av O*KOI yevwrai, 8pSxriv OVK dvao^fra, whenever they are at home they do intolerable things (Ar. Pax 1179). "S,u>K.parrjs rrlvfiv OVK edeXatv, OTrore av ay K a v p.ai A Sfo/xat, 17^0), as soon as 264 THE MOODS 2167 I have accomplished what I wish, I shall come (Xen. Anab. 2, S 29 ). 'Hvi'ic' S v rts \)(JMS a S ( K fj, f)p,ds virtp tifj.S>v p.axovp.tda, whenever any one shall wrong you, we will fight for you (Xen. Cyr. 4, 4 n ). Kvpos vTrta-xfro dvbpl eKdarta buxTfiv irfvTf dpyvpiov pvas, (irhv is Ba/3vX&>i'a rJKaxri, Cyrus promised to give to each man five minae of silver when they should arrive at Babylon (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 13 ). "EaxTnep av ffnrvtat nal olos TC &, ov p.rj Travtrw/im v , as long as I live and am able, I shall never cease to philosophise (Plat. Apol. 29 d ). Xen. Oec. 1, 23. Od. 2, 124. In indirect discourse the subjunctive with av may pass into the optative without av, after past tenses. 4. 'Airioi,p.fv &v oTTore TOV purdov ?xotfv oiTavTai)p.1v Karairpa^avrfs, when those who have effected these services for you have received their pay, we shall be ready to depart (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 17 ). Xen. Cyr. 1, 3" ; 3, I 16 . "Ems Itrov elr] avro e'avrw, as long as it should remain equal to itself (Plat. Theaet. 2167. NOTE. Observe that ws av with the subjunctive is never temporal in meaning ; o>s av means either in what way soever (1964, 2), or in order that (2045, 1). 2168. NOTE. In general temporal clauses, the indicative is seldom used ; as in Xen. Anab. 4, 7 lli ; Xen. Cyr. 2, 3 23 . Compare 2100. 2169. NOTE. As with conditional relative clauses, conditional temporal clauses have certain poetic pecu- liarities. 1. In general temporal conditional clauses, Homer usually omits av or *ce'; as in II. 1, 163. This occurs rarely in other poetry. 2. Homer occasionally has the subjunctive without oV or KC in future conditions ; as in Od. 18, 132. 3. In Homer the optative occasionally has oV or KC' in temporal clauses ; as in II. 9, 304. 2170. NOTE. Homeric Similes with d>s or <5s re, as, s OTTOTC), as when. 1. In Homer similes introduced by these particles often take the subjunctive like general relative clauses. 'Qs 8f yvvT) K\atij O8vi/ K ar a fir) vpij ireXayns...., &s o ytpttv Stpfuuvt, as when the 2173 THE MOODS 265 sea surges, ....so meditated the old man (II. 14, 16). 'Qs oirare (Od. 4, 335). The subjunctive has av several times with $ oTf, as in II. 10, 5 ; otherwise neither av nor K. 2. The simile sometimes begins with the subjunctive and continues with the indicative ; as in II. 6, 506-514. 2171. NOTE. Conditional temporal clauses are also liable to the various peculiarities mentioned in 2116 2132 ; but they occur much less frequently. TEMPORAL CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY " UNTIL" 2172. 1. The particles fiex/ai, ax/oi, rre, ews (epic and lyric opa, epic ets o KC or clo-oxe, Herodotean e? o), are all used both in the sense of while, as long as, and in the sense of until. After a negative leading clause loo? and irplv have the same meaning (Xen. Mem. 4, 8 2 ; Plat. Phaedo 58 b ). 2. When these particles are used in the sense of while, as long as, their clauses have the ordinary constructions of temporal clauses (2162). The tense used is mostly the present. 2173. When these particles mean until, they have the following constructions, mostly with the aorist : 1. When they refer to an actual occurrence, they have the indicative, mostly aorist. Tavra e-rroiow p, % p i CTKOTOS cyeveTo, they did this till darkness came on (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 4 ). Od, 1, 363. Xen. Hell. 1, I 3 ; Cyr. 7, 5 39 . Hdt. 6, 83 1 . This is like a relative clause with a definite antecedent. 2. When the temporal clause with until depends on a clause implying non-reality, it takes a past tense of the indicative without av (2102). OVK &v t7rav6p.T)v, ( a> s air f TT e i p ddrj v, / should not cease until I had made an attempt (Plat. Cratyl. 396). 'E/3aa-dvigov av pi^pi ov avrols (Bond, they would question them under torture as long as they pleased (Dem. 53, 25). 'llStws &v KaXXt/cXei TOVTO> (Ti 8if\(y6p.ijv , (a>s avrw rfjv TOV *Ap.(piovos a7T'8a>Aca pfj(n,v, I would gladly have gone on discussing with Callicles here until I had given him back the saying of Amphion (Plat. Gorg. 506 1 ')- Compare 2184. 3. When the temporal clause with until expresses an expectation, it takes the subjunctive with <">v after a primary tense or its equivalent ; and the optative (without av) after a past tense. But the subjunctive with av may be retained after past tenses. 266 THE MOODS 2174 f, ( eyo) X#o>, wait till I come (Xen. Anab. 5, I 4 ). ffTovrai pfxpis a i/ /SatriXet ra Trap' vp.>v diayy(\0fj, the truce witt last till what you say be reported to the king (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 7 ). Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 18 ; Anab. 2, 3 s . IL 15, 332 ; 2, 332. Hdt. 2, 115 7 . Compare 2109. avrois f'^OTrXiera/itVotf irpoiivai fls TO irp6 s K<5pa> trvft- , it seemed best to them to pack up their baggage and to march forward till they could effect a junction with Cyrus (Xen. Anab. 2, 1 2 ). Xen. Anab. 1, 9". Od. 12, 437. This is on the principle of indirect discourse,. 2324. With subjunctive retained after past tense : Xen. H ell. 5, 3 2S . 4. When the temporal clause with until expresses repeated or customary action, it has the construction of present and past general suppositions (2098). To Tfrrfywv y(vos...a8fi t a> s av T f\ (vrf) v TJ, the race of grasshoppers sings until it dies (Plat. Phaedr. 259 C ). Tit pit fj.i vofj.fr ovv fKacrrort, tatf av 01% 6 fir) TO 8Tp6>Tr)piov, .we used to wait each day until the prison was opened (Plat. Phaedo 59* 1 ). 2174. NOTE. 1. Thucydides occasionally omits av with the sub- junctive in clauses introduced by /nc'xpi, fu'xP 1 ov, and axpi ov, until ; as /jLrjfteva fKfirjvai fie^pi TrXovs yci/r/Tai, that no one should leave the ship until she sailed (Thuc. 1, 137 3 ; 4, 46 ; 3, 28). Compare the similar omission with Trpiv (2178). 2. This occurs with the same particles in Herodotus, also with es o and cs ov ; and with o>? and other particles in tragedy; as Hdt. 4, 119 6 ; 1, 117 4 ; 3, 31 3 ; Soph. Oed. Col. 77 ; Aj. 1183. This occasional omission of av occurs mostly in Tragedy. 2175. NOTE. Clauses introduced by until and taking the sub- junctive with av or the optative (after past tenses) without av (as in 2173, 3 and 4) often resemble final clauses and have a similar con- struction, except that the final clauses regularly take the simple subjunctive, and the temporal clauses with until take the subjunctive with av. After past tenses, the original construction may pass into the optative without av ; with the temporal clause this is usual ; with final clauses the usage varies (2040, 2042). TEMPORAL CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY " BEFOR E " 2176. The temporal particle -rrpiv, before, until, has the follow- ing constructions : 1. If the leading clause is affirmative, trpiv, before, usually takes 2177 THE MOODS 267 the infinitive. Whether the action expressed by the temporal clause really occurs, is not indicated (as in WO-TC with the infinitive, 2080). 2. If the leading clause is negative or interrogative, -n-piv, before, until, usually has the same constructions as etos (2173). "ETTI TO anpov dvaftaivti XtptcroC/>os, TT p iv nva a I a- e cr 6 a i T>V TroXe/iu'wi',. Cheirisophus mounted the summit before any of the enemy perceived it (Xen. Anab. 4, I 6 ). Uplv roeu/ia e'^iKvetcrtfai, fK.K\Tvov rrplv Hfp vlds 'A^atwv, he dwelt in Pedaeum before the sons of the Greeks came (II. 13, 172). Hdt. 6, 119 2 . Lys. 16, 4. OVK fj6(\ K.vpa> ds Yeipay if vat, IT plv r/ yvvr) aiirov f Tret ere, he did not wish to go into the power of Cyrus before his wife persuaded him (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 28 ). Oi Trpoadfv fTraixravro irplv ff7ro\i6pKT), n plv av pot d virt cr^o-at diro8(it;r)s, I will never let you go before you have shown me what you have promised (Xen. Oec. 3, 1). Mr) aTrtXdr/Tf TT plv av a < oixrrjTf, do not go away before you have heard (Xen. Anab. 5. 7 12 j. Eur. Med. 276. Hdt. 1, 32 7 . This form is very common ; compare 2173, 3. ' A.irr)y6p(V( pyfteva jSoXXetv, irplv Kvpos ( p. nXr) . 19, 55. 2. For a subjunctive with av : Kat /j.ot p.t) 0opv^r](TTj pr)8(Ls, nplv d K ov cr at, and let no one cry out before hearing me (Dem. 5, 15). Soph. Aj. 1418. Eur. Med. 94. Dem. 3, 12. 3. For the optative : '\K.(Ttvov /jLT]8ap.a>s diroTp(n(crdai, irpiv (p.^a\(lv (Is TTJV TO>V \aK(8ai- novitov \V ovd' ovirl KWTT^ ^v^oirofMiros fiv \dpiav ((TXOV, irpiv ds (p>s crbv K ar a err rj cr a i /3iW, neither the dog of Pluto nor the Charon at his oar, the ferryman of departed spirits, should stay me before I had brought thy life into the light (Eur. Ale. 362). (c) After a leading optative clause, -n-piv generally takes the infinitive. OVK av fjxddro, IT plv nad' f)8ovf)v K\vt iv, he would not let him go up before hearing (or until he had heard) to his satisfaction (Soph. Trach. 197). "OXotro..., irpiv (JJLOV (trdopdv 86p.ov, may he perish before he burst into my dwelling (Aesch. Sept. 45154). For the rare assimilation to the optative, see 2177. (d) In Homer irpiv, before, until, regularly takes the infinitive after both affirmative and negative clauses. Ov \i)(t> IT plv Tppr)(Tfv, he proceeded immediately to the armed men in the procession before they perceived it (Thuc. 6, 58 1 ). Hdt. 7, 2 2 . (Xpij) p.f) irporepov agiovv diro\vr0ai ) fj Toiis...6ir\iTas dnapd{;T)T(, it is necessary to determine not to separate before you have swept off the soldiers (Thuc. 7, 63 1 , his only cise). Hdt. 4, 196 :t . Oi/Se ij8f er u> rSs '\df)vas, I shall not cease until I take and burn Athens (Hdt. 7. 8); 2, 2 1 (inf.); 6, 45 s (indie.). Although irpiv rj is found occasionally in Attic prose, the fj is usually eliminated by editors. ASSIMILATION OF MOOD IN RELATIVE AND TEMPORAL CLAUSES 2183. A conditional relative or temporal clause, depending on a subjunctive or optative, is usually assimilated in mood to its leading verb. "EXty^oy St (sc. e'orti'), orav >v av (lirrj TIS TaXrjdes opov 8fi^, it is a proof whenever any one shows the truth of what he says (Dem. 22, 22, here 2> av tliTT) is assimilated to orav 8dt]). Ov8\ irfi.8av &> v av TrpirjTai Kvpios yfVTjTOi, TO> npo86rr) (ru/So^Xw rrept ru>v \onrS)v frt xpfjTai, nor, when he has got possession of what he has bought, does any one use the traitor as an adviser concerning future matters (Dem. 18, 47). Et dirodvTjo-Kot. p*v irdvra otra TOU fjv p.fra\d^oi, tTTfidr) 8( diroQdvoi,...K.ai p.f) rrdXiv dvaftiaxrKOiro, ap ov tro\\r) dvdyKT] (fir) av) TfXtvr&vTa irdvra Tfdvdvat, ; if all things that partake of life were to die, and after they had died did not come to life again, would not necessarily all things at last be dead? (PI it. Phaedo 72 C ). Such examples fall also under the general principles of 2109 and 2113 ; and are like ordinary protases. Tedvaiqv ore poi firjKtTi ravra p.\oi, may I die when these are no longer my care (Mimnermus 1, 2). AT. Vesp. 1431. See 2157 and 2158 for Homeric usage. 2184. A relative or temporal clause, depending on a clause implying non-fulfilment, takes by assimilation a similar form of verb, i.e., & past tense of the indicative. bqirov av pot, d tv (tcdvy rij vfi rt *a\ TW rpoTrw ZXtyov, 2186 THE INFINITIVE 271 f v olo-rrep t T t 6 p d p. p.rj v, you would no doubt pardon me, if I were speaking in that language and manner in which I had been brought up (Plat. Apol. 17 d ). Xen. Rep. Ath. 1, 16. Dem. 8, 1. Xen. Mem. 3, 5 8 . Et Trepi Kmvov TIVOS TTpdyfjuiros TrpovrLdfTo \tytiv, firtvxpv av ems ol TrXetorot ra>v tldidartav (sc. \eyfiv) yvo>p.T)v drrffprjvavTo, if the question for discussion were anything new, I should have waited till most of those accustomed to speak had expressed their view (Dem. 4, 1). Such examples have the form protases implying non-fulfilment (2102 ; compare also 2173, 2). THE INFINITIVE 2185. Nature of the Infinitive. 1. The infinitive is a verbal neuter noun and as such can stand with or without the article. It may be the subject or object of a verb, and may have the same general government as nouns. 2. It shows its verbal nature by the following characteristics : (a) it can be qualified only by adverbs, as TO /caXtwetv, writing. 4. Often the infinitive is translated by an ordinary English noun ; as TO Baveiv, death ; TO dSticeiv, injustice. I. SUBJECT AND PREDICATE-NOUN WITH THE INFINITIVE 2186. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed when it is identical with the subject of the leading verb and is not emphatic. A predicate-noun or predicate-adjective belonging to the infinitive is here put in the same case as the subject of the leading verb ; thus usually in the nominative. 272 THE INFINITIVE 2187 'AS i K ("i v, he believes he is wronged by us (Xen. Anab. 1, 3'). Ta irvpa OVK f(pr) 18 dv, he declared not to have seen the watch-fires (Xen. Anab. 4, 4 lfi ). 'OpoXoyt'is ovv Trepl e'/xe a8inos yfytvfj- v (pao-KovTw 8 1 K a v eivai, being rid of those professing to be judges (Plat. Apol. 41). Isoc. 15, 221. So with the infinitive and article: 'EK rov irportpos. \eyftv, 6 8iV fir Ttj Ti-oXfi, I believed wy wife to be the most prudent of all in the city (Lys. 1, 10). 'I in' KoXoi/ xAyaObv av8pa KIU yvvaiKa (vSaifjiova (ivai 2190 THE INFINITIVE 273 I assert the virtuous man and the virtuous woman are happy (Plat. Gorg. 470). Kpavyfjv TTO\\T)V firoiovv KaXovvrts dXXijXovs, wore KOI roiis TT o\e p. iov s d KOV e iv, they made so much noise in calling each other that even the enemy could hear them (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 17 ). The subject of an infinitive nny be another infinitive ; as Bod^vcu avrv p.ov irpoa-rdTTjv ycve corrupted by those requesting of me to be leader (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2 aa ). Ae'o^icu t)p.>v fj.ffj.vTjp,evovs T&V flprjp,fv v dyad>v f yevfo-dai, to no one will we give a pretext to be a coward (Thuc. 2, 87 11 ). Xen Cyr. 6, 4 9 . Hdt. 6, II 2 . Dem. 3, 23. With accusative : 2u M 0'p CLVT o t s (p i\ov s fiv at, fjM\\ov fj no\fp.iovs, it behoves them to be friends rather than enemies (Xen. Oec. 11, 23). *ETTIV ft p.lv...ev t py eras tyavijvai T>I> \aKf8aifj,ovia>v, it is in your power to show yourselves the benefactors of the Lacedaemonians (Xen. Hell. 4, 8 4 ). Plat. Polit. 274 1 *. Xen. Anab. 1,3 5 ; Hell. 4, I 36 . 'E(cI(Tf a\\ovs ireirtiica >/ fto>v n p o- dvfjiav flvat, if you will be zealous, lit. you willing to be zealous (Thuc. 1, 71 7 ). 'Ai/eye'Xacrev eVi T^> KpetTTOvi TOV *Epa)rof (pdirov tlvcu. Set, one ought to be a lover of mankind (Isoc. 2, 15). Apupra; ff p.f) Bpwvras fjo'lov davdv, 'tis sweeter for men to die acting than not acting (Eur. Hel. 814). II. INFINITIVE WITHOUT THE ARTICLE (a) INFINITIVE IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2192. The infinitive is used in indirect discourse afu-r verbs of saying and thinking and the like. The verb (fyq/il, say, regularly has the infinitive ; \eya) passively in the sense, is said, regularly has the infinitive, but actively it usually takes a clause with OTI or &> KOI oXXct tBvrj TroXXa roiavra tlvai, I hear that there are many other such nations (Xen. Anab. 2, 5 13 ; direct fieri). Toi>s 8* aj'x/iaAawouf ov8 y tv 6v p.ri df/v ai r) novra ol^f K8f, he said that Cyrus opened the inquiry thus (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 6 , here apxtiv stands for ^p\f). 'AXtv yeveo-Qai, if Cyrus had lived, it seems to tne that he would have become a most excellent ruler (Xen. Oec. 4, 18, direct apiaror av e'yeWro ap^wi/). Old av TOVS dfovs Tots avdpcoirois 86(-av e'/i (p v era (,... pf) Svvarol r) (or cArris) rarely has also these construc- tions: OK with a finite verb : Thuc. 5, 9 2 ; 6, 30*; Eur. El. 919 ; OTTOS with future indicative : Soph. El. 963 ; infinitive with av : Xen. Mem. 2, 6 s8 . 2. 'ATreiXeto may take on with the indicative or optative future ; as in Xen. Anab. 5, 6 M ; Ar. Pint. 88. 2197. Personal and Impersonal Constructions. 1. Some verbs, which may be used impersonally and be followed by an accusative with The infinitive in indirect discourse, may also be used person- ally in the passive form. Thus we may say Aeyerat TOV Kvpov redvdvai, it is said that Cyrus is dead, or \eyerai 6 Kvpos redvdvat, Cyrus is said to be dead. With the impersonal passive construction the infinitive is the subject. 2. With verbs of saying, announcing, and admitting, the personal and impersonal constructions are used indifferently ; with verbs of thinking, the personal construction is regular. Compare SIKCUO'S dpi, etc., for SIKCUOV eo-n 2204. 'E X i y t T o Kcpa> 8ovvm xpijpmi TroAAd, she was said to have given Cyrus considerable money (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 12 ). 'Es TOVTOV TOV x*>P ov Ae-yerai aTTiKtvdcu. TOV (rrparov, it is said that the army reached this place (Hdfc. 3, 26 2 ). 'O ' A.pav (pftaXtlv ayyeAtrat, it is announced that the Assyrian has made an incursion into the land (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3 30 ). "Epas 6/xoAo-yeiTat trapa iravrw fityas dtos flvai, Eros is admitted by all to be a mighty god (Plat. Symp. 202 b ). 'O/xoAoyetrat TTJV TTO\IV rjp.S>v dp^cuoTnTijv (Ivcu, it is admitted that our city is the most ancient (Isoc. 4, 23). 2198. 1. Of <7/ju, ftTrov, and Ae'yw, all meaning to say, (a) , to admit, nearly always takes the infinitive construction. 3. Aeyw and clrrov with the infinitive usually mean to command. 4. Gyp.'', with on or ws occurs several times : as Xen. Hell. 6, 3 7 ; Dem. 4, 48. Elirov with the infinitive in indirect discourse occurs occasionally ; as Hdt. 2, 30 8 ; Thuc. 7, 35 2 . 2201 THE INFINITIVE 5. For TruO(.iv s, ore, eirei, eTreiS^) depends on an infinitive in indirect discourse, it sometimes has the infinitive by assimilation instead of an indicative or optative. Ta 8( /xeyierra TO>V ev rovrois ecprj roiis deovs eavroi KaTaXeiVftr&u, u> v ov8ev 8fj\ov fivai rols dvdpwTTois, he said that the gods reserved to them- selves the most important particulars attending these matters, of which nothing is apparent to men (Xen. Mem. 1, I 8 ). Plat. Rep. 616 b , 490 C . 'ii? d KOV a-ai TOVS TrapovTas, dopvftov ytvecrdai, (cpa&iv), they say that there was a tumult when those present heard it (Dem. 19, 195). Thuc. 2, 102 7 (ore). Plat. Prot. 353* (eW) ; Rep. 614 b (eVei&j). 2. In Herodotus this occurs also with el, if, and Sid, because : Hdt. 3, 108 1 ; 3, 55 3 . 3. The use of the infinitive in indirect questions is uncommon ; as Siopioi>cri (reu^ws e <' o I s I eiv a L airoKTivvvva.1, they define clearly under what circumstances it is lawful to kill (Dem. 23, 74) ; compare Dem. 36, 25. 2200. Historical Infinitive. Sometimes in narrative, the infini- tive appears to stand alone, even throughout a series of sentences, where the indicative would be expected; but it here de; end; on some word of saying either expressed or understood. " 'AXX', J) TTOI," (pdvai TOV 'AcrTvdyqv, " OVK d\66p.fvoi. -ravra irtpi- TrXai/co/ietfet, " etc., " but, child," said Astyages, "it is not with pain that we ramble through these windings, etc. (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 s , see this passage and its continuation) ; similarly in Hdt. 1, 24 3 ; Plat. Rep. 614 b . (b) INFINITIVE NOT IN INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2201. The infinitive not in indirect discourse may be used 1. Like a noun, as a subject, object, predicate, or appositive (Nominal Infinitive). 2. To complete or limit the meaning of verbs, adjectives, nouns, or adverbs (Supplementary Infinitive). 3 In various constructions; i.e., to express conditions, commands, wishes, resolutions ; it is also used absolutely, and in certain idiomatic expressions. 278 THE INFINITIVE 2202 NOMINAL INFINITIVE 2202. Infinitive as Subject-Nominative. The infinitive (with or without a .subject- accusative) is used as the subject of a finite verb, especially of impersonal verbs and expressiona Such are xp 1 ?. . it ts necessary, SOKCL, it seems good, vptirfi, irpocr- i/Kei, it is proper, c^eori, it is permitted, eon, it is possible, aovvaTov (or \ovvaTo) e'ori, ov\ olov T( rri, it is impossible, tcaXov eori, it is honour- able, alo-xpov tori, it is base, vo/xos corn, it is the law, wpd eon, i is time, o'; m, J/tere is opportunity, and many others. The negative is Tt x/>ij TT o t i v ; what is it necessary to do ? (Xen. Anab. 2, 1 16 ). *E8oe v avTols...irpo'itvai, it seemed best to them to proceed (Xen. Anab. 2, I 2 ). *cv- yt iv avrols d (*<""*) woXAoir f^Qpovs t % e i v, it is not pleasant to have many enemies (L)em. 19, 221). Altrxpov anov(ravTa xprnripov \6yov fj.rf p.addv, it is disgraceful for one who has heard a useful discourse not to learn (Isoc. 1, 18). "Qpd fifj.lv ftovX t v ( , coi*a, 1 seem, and a-vp.l3a.ivfi, it happens ; it is wholly regular with os et/At, it is expected that I - , also with Sew voXXov (plxpov or v, TOO-OVTOU), it lacks much (little, so much) that I - , or I am 2207 THE INFINITIVE 279 far from - , and irap \ fUKpov ep^op-ai, I come near - ; it is usual with 8iKatos ei/zt, it is just that 1 - , dtos efyu, cTriTrJSeios et/xi, and a few similar expressions. AOK S> (Mi ddvvaros elvai, I seem to myself to be unable (Plat. Rep. 368 h , impers. Xen. Anab. 1, 4 18 ). 'EotKao-t, they seem (Xen. Oec. 7, 11). 'Q? (/xii'i'ft, as you seem (Plat. PoZi*. 280 b ). IIoXXij TIS aXoyia gv pftaiv e c yiyvftrdai, there would be a, considerable absurdity (Plat. Phil. 55* ; impers. Plat. Rep. 375 C ). 'Errt'So^or ei/ii ru^elv rfjs Tip)? TOVTTJS, I expect to attain to this honour (Isoc. 6, 8). II o X X o {) Sew virep ffjMvrov aTroXoyeto'&u, / am far from speaking in my defence (Plat. Apol. SO 1 ). Isoc. 9, 62. Lys. 17, 1. A IK at or (I ftoijddv TW avftpi, it is just for you to help the man or you are right to help the man (Plat. Prot. 339). AT. Nub. 1434. Xen. Hell. 5, 2 s2 . 2205. NOTE. AT/XoV avep6v com, it is clear, take only a clause with on; as in Xen. Anab. 3, I 10 . We have also SfjXos or ai>fp6<; clpL on; as in Xen. Anab. 5, 2 26 , Gyr. 1, 4 2 . For 817X0? ei/^i and avfp6 with the infinitive means to run a risk (Xen. Mem. 4, 7 6 ). 2207. Infinitive as Object. 1. The infinitive is used as the object of many verbs ani expressions which denote an action influencing another action which is its object ; as f3ov\ofiai rovro TT o LYJ cr a i, I wish to do this. The negative is p,rj. 2. Such verbs are those meaning to wish, to desire ; to command, to compel, to permit, to demand, to beg ; to advise, to persuade ; to attempt, to begin, to dare, to intend ; to teach, to accustom ; to resolve, to choose, to fear ; those meaning to take care, to be unwilling ; to forbid, to dissuade, to hinder, to avoid, and others. Such constructions are usually the same in Greek as in English. BouXrreu K. ar a JJL (~iv a i rffv errparttkv icat iroXtv otKt'crat, he wishes the army to remain and to found a city (Xen. Anab. 5, 6 17 ). Tovs oirXiras ('K\(Vp.u>, dXX' ev rdi-fi (TTfcrOai, they called out to each other not to run, but to follow in order (Xen. A nab. 1, 8 19 ). So flnov, commanded -(Thuc. 7, 29 1 ), Krjpva-a-o), command by herald (Xen. Anab. 7, I 7 ), ypd(pu>, decree, move (Xen. Hell. 6, 3' 2 ). *Y/ui/ e'yw y v a v a i tipas avrovs, I advise you to know yourselves (Xen. Hell. 2, 4 4 ). 'E7T^eipj/(ra X e y 1 1 v tv ra> or^iua, I tried to speak in public (Lys. 16, 20). Tvpavvtlv tirivofl, he intends to be ruler (Ar. Thesm. 338). 'EXoi'^v av /iaXXov d8iKio-$ai r) dSinfiv, I would rather choose to suffer wrong than to do wrong (Plat. Gorg. 469c). Xen. Anab. 1, 3 1 . Lys. 1, 25. Isoc. 10, 3. Xen. Symp. 8, 23. Ar. Eccl. 238. Plat. Gorg. 457 e . QoftovvTcu Xe'yeiv, they fear to tell (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2 12 ). For those meaning to take care, to be unwilling, to forbid, to dissuade, to hinder, to avoid, see Redundance of Negativos, 2351.. Tt TO K, to persuade any one to do anything, takes the infinitive ; in the sense to convince, it usually takes (ppovflv, pleasures persuade the goul not to exercise self-control (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 23 ). *Hi/ irticrtoptv tftas, it t XP'I VM^ r dtjtdvai, if we persuade you that you ought to let us go (Pl&t. 2216 THE INFINITIVE 281 Rep. 327 e ). Xen. Mem. 1, I 1 . 'Eireta-dyo-an 'Adijvaloi 2 <> K parr^v irepl TOVS deovs pr) (ro)(p pov elv, the Athenians were persuaded that Socrates did not have right sentiments concerning the gods (Xen. Mem. 1, I 20 ). (Thuc. 3, 102 7 ). Thuc. 3, 31 1 . Hdt. 7, 6 2 . 2212. NOTE. MeVw, wait, await, and its compounds, may take an object-infinitive ; as OVK dve/xetvcv -f)p.epuv yeveo-Oat, they did not wait for day to appear (Thuc. 4, 135 1 ) ; Plat. Theaet. 173 C ; it may also take a clause with Iws ; also in poetry a participial construction (II. 13, 38). 2213. NOTE. The verbs of commanding sometimes take a clause with OTTOIS ; as SiaKeXevovrai T vu>, OTTOS, . . . TifJL,pTr)creTa.i TOUS dSi/cowTas , they exhort the young man to take revenge on those who do wrong (Plat. Rep. 549 e ) ; lSeoi>To OTTWS (Thuc. 5, 36 2 ). 2214. NOTE. For the construction of verbs of causing, see 2216, 2. 2215. Infinitive as Predicate and as Appositive. An infinitive may be used as a predicate or as an appositive. To yap yvfovai (Tfipas ov8fv e?^o/Lii/ \anftdvt iv, we can get nothing from the country (Xen. Anab. 2, 2"). 2. It is used with verbs meaning to cause, to bring about. 'ETroiT/o-e TOV rf/s KtXiKt'df ap^ovra 'S,vfi>vfdi' air o\oyr) irpoarfjvfyicav o\ Btpdirovrts fftiriflv *a\ (pay f iv, the attendants brought Cyrus something to drink and to eat (Xen. Cyr. 7. I 1 )- ' EtAoi'TO ApaKOi/Ttoi> "SirapTidrrjv dpopov T' ( IT i p.f\r) 6 ff v at ical ToC dytavos IT poaTarf) v at, they chose Dracontius a Spartan to prepare the course and to preside at the contest (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 25 ). 4. Often in poetry (especially Homer), and very rarely in prose, the infinitive is connected with an intransitive verb as an accusative of specification (1595). 'ApioTfixo-Kf p.dxfv 7rpo/3t/3avioTT)v Tf\ftov yfvfvai, a, man able to distinguish (Plat. Gorg. 489*). Of X f y f t v Stivoi, those skilful in speaking (Isoc. 21, 5). * a y I v fteivos, a terrible fellow for eating (Xen. Anab. 7, 3 23 ). "Erotics iirenvctv, ready to approve (Plat. Gorg. 510 b ). Twr/ evir pfirrjs IStiv, a woman comely to behold (Xen. Mem. 2, I 22 ). KXtap^oj 6 p a v oruyvos %v, Clearchus was gloomy to look upon (Xen. Anab. 2, 6 9 ). Olitid rj8i(mj (vdiairda-ffai, a house most agreeable to live in (Xen. Mem. 3, 8 8 ). Ov paSiov diria-rdv, not easy to disbelieve (Plat. Rep. 331*). Movap^t'a avopos x a X e r 17 ical ftapvraTT) vvoiKT)o-ai, a monarchy when lawless is most disagreeable and oppressive to live in (Plat. Polit. 302*). *Ator 6avfj.dTO "'EK^IKOV eXarro) diivapiv f \ovra fj wore rovr (piXovs to (p t X f I v, the Lacedaemonians perceived that Ecdicus had too small a force to help their friends (Xen. Hell. 4, 8 23 ). Xen. Mem. 3, 5 17 . Of. AiyvTTTiot ras d s noidv TI KOI opdv, the Egyptians have their shields too large to act and to see with (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4 17 ). Nooypa p.dov TI (ptpdv, a disease too great to bear (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1293). 2225. Infinitive with Nouns and Adverbs. The infinitive may also be used with nouns, when they express a fitness or willingness for anything ; seldom, and chiefly with 0av/za, to limit their meaning 284 THE INFINITIVE 2226 like an accusative of specification (1595). A limiting infinitive with adverbs is very uncommon. 'H X t K i a v f^ovtri 7rat8eveo-0ai, they are of the age to be educated (Plat. Lach. 187). 'EKpadflv a-irov8f)v (\<*>v, have great desire to know (Eur. And. 1050). lion irois opdv, wonders for men to behold (Eur. Ion 1142). o/3o? dicovo-cu, a terror to hear (Hdt. 6, 112 4 ). KaXXtora i&etv (ITOKIV) TTJV eeYa0-u>, to make the muster in a manner most beautiful to behold (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3 5 ). INFINITIVE IN OTHER CONSTRUCTIONS 2226. Conditions. After l <2 or e <5re, on condition that, the infinitive is used, less often the future indicative in Herodotus and Thucydides ; sometimes eVi rourw precedes. Sometimes wore with the infinitive expresses on condition that (2081). ' \(plfp.(v ire, eVi Toi/rco /leVroi, f (p' 9, is used absolutely in a number of phrases. Th'3 most common of these are the following : 'Qs 7Tos eiTreiv or w? fLTTtiv, so to speak, the most frequent of these phrases (Plat. Gorg. 450 d ; Xen. Oec. 12, 8) ; d>s s TO oXoy, on the whole (Plat. Rep. 377") ; s eiTrXws eiVeiv, to speak simply (Isoc. 4, 154) ; uis ye raX-rjB?) fipjjo-Qai, to tell the truth (Plat. Gorg. 462 b ). *E/xoi ooKf'v or ws ffjiol BoKflv, as it seems to me (Plat. Euthyd. 273") ; (ws ye) oi>Two-i aKovo-at., at first hearing (Plat. Lys. 216* ; Dem. 20, 18) ; s aTTfiKao-ai, so to judge (Eur. Or. 1298) ; oo-ov ye' //.* elofvai, as far as I know (Ar. Nub. 1252). Note particularly 6\fyov 8flv and aim st, lit. to want a little (Machm. 3, 165 ; Dem. 18, 269). 2229 THE INFINITIVE 285 Herodotus has many infinitive expressions of this sort ; as ws Xdyw (iirfiv, SO to Speak ; ws ev eXa^tcrru) 8f]Xuxrai, to shoiv very briefly ; s TraXaia considering their antiquity (Thuc. 1, 21 1 ) ; so in Herodotus, a>s euat, as ws ttvai AiyuTTTov, /or (a country like) Egypt (Hdt. 2, 8 4 ). 2229. Infinitive in Commands, Proclamations, Wishes. 1. The infinitive is sometimes used as an imperative of the second person ; the subject is in the nominative. This use is rare in Attic prose ; it occurs mostly in Homer. 2v 6 1 ', av TI fXTl s |8XTioi' iroQfv \aj3elv, TT e i p acr 6 at, KOI epol ^eraStSdvat, if you have anything better to bring from any quarter, try to communicate it to me (Plat. Cratyl. 426 b ). Qapa-mv vvi>, Aid/i^Ses, , let the election be held in a temple (Plat. Leg. 753 b>c ). "ETTJ 5e flvai ras O-TTOVO'&S irevT^novra, and that the treaty shall be for fifty years (Thuc. 5, 18 s ). 'AKovtre Aeo>- TOVS yfapyoiis drr it v at, hear, ye people ; let the husbandmen depart (Ar. Pax 551). II. 3, 285. Xen. Anab. 5, 3 13 . 3. In poetry and in Herodotus, the infinitive with a subject-accusative may express a wish or an entreaty. Zfv TTartp, % A*avTa Xa^fTi/ ?) TvSfos vlov, Father Zeus, may Ajax or the son of Tydeus draw the lot (II. 7, 179). Geoi TroXiTat, /ij p.( 8ov\tids Xa^etv, O gods of our country, may I not fall into slavery (Aesch. Sept. 253). Ar. Ach. 816. *Q ZeO, (Ky(vt(T0ai /xot 'A&yi/as Tieiv, TO ypdeiv) ; it retains its government ; its subject, if it has one, is in the accusative ; it can stand in most of the relations of a noun. 2. The articular infinitive is absent from Homer ; it is not very frequent in Herodotus and the dramatists, being here chiefly a nomi- native or accusative ; it is most common in the Orators, especially Demosthenes. 3. Often the articular infinitive can be conveniently translated by 41 that" or " the circumstance that" and a clause. The infinitive with the article may not only have a subject and other adjuncts of a verb, but it may even have a clause depending on it or on its adjuncts, the infinitive with everything depending on it appearing like any ordinary substantive. QavfjiaoTov 8t (f)aiv(rai fwt KOI TO -JT t itr 6fjv ai nvas, o>s 'S.iaK.panjs TOVS vfovs 8i(6ip(v , (the circumstance) that some persons were persuadtd that Socrates was corrupting the young, seems astonishing to me (Xen. Mtm. 1, 2 1 ). here TO to 8i((f>dfip(v is the subject. Ta fjuv aXXa &>a...7r'$eer$at fjMv6uvov may follow verbs or adjectives which take the dative ; or it may be a dative of instrument or sause. 2231 THE INFINITIVE 287 The infinitive with TOV, TU", TO, often depends on a preposition or on an adverb used as such. The negative with the articular infinitive is /;. NOMINATIVE : T 6 ra dyada OVTO> yt ^aXevov (ftrriv), wcrTrep T 6 Xa/Soira O-T t prj dfjv at Xvirtjpov, it is not so hard not to have acquired advantages, as it is painiul to be deprived of them, ajter having acquired them (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 82 ). Tovro fori TO ddiKtlv , TO nXtov T&v a\Xo>v t]Tflv %fiv, this is to commit wrong, to desire to have more than others (Plat. Gorg. 483 C ). ACCUSATIVE: Movov 6pS>v TO iraieiv TOV aXio-K.6p.tvov, seeing only the beating of the captive (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 21 ). AUTO TO dir o 6 vy v K ( iv ov8tls (pofaiTat, nobody fears mere dying (Plat. Gorg. 522*). To p.ev evvotfiv Tf Koi irpoopav ayapai o~(v, I admire your friendly disposition and your foresight (Hdt. 9, 79 1 ). -To 7rpofi8evai TOV 6tbv TO p.fXXov...TrdvT(s \tyovo-i, all men say that the divinity knows the future beforehand (Xen. Apol. 13). 'Eo/ii TO fir) e 1 8 v a i ; will you swear that you do not know ? (Soph. Ant. 535). T o p.Tj {TJTOVVTO. i IT lTV%ttV TIVI ra>v Seoj/Twv (VTVxiav oipai fivat, for any one to light upon something he wants without seeking for it, I consider to be good fortune (Xen. Mem. 3, 9 14 ). To 8e /3t'a TroAirwi' 8pdv (6s fivai, on account of the Delian festival being in that month (Xen. Mem. 4, 8 2 ). n p 6 s TO p.(Tpio)v S e I art. ..TOV fj.rjo'fv (ppov"iv, I envy thee.. ..for that thou knowest nothing (Eur. Iph. Aul. 677). 'H/ifiv ap^p,fv TOV t op /jiij a- at at TOVS aXXov? fir\ TTJV dptTrjv, let us be the first to excite others to valour (Xen. Anab. 3, I 84 ). 'Errt/ieXeio-^ai TOV u>s (ppovipatTciTov 1 1 v a i, to study to become as intelligent as possible (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 85 ). 'Ai^rtr TOV KaraKOVtar, un- accustomed to obeying (Dem. 1, 23). KaTi;pao-aTo TW atYi'w TOV ^ 288 THE INFINITIVE 2232 dtr 08 ( 8 6 o~ 6 at TOV purdov, he cursed him who was the cause of the wages not having been paid long before (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 48 )- Tot) 8 pair frtix tv dndpyovo-i, they restrain them from running away (Xen. Mem. 2, I 16 ). *Ato? ...TOV TOiavr' d K ov ( iv (Dem. 21, 134). T ov y' airodavt'iv v n dp- XOVTOS 9817, death being already imminent (Lys. 12, 13). Tt TOVTOV pjucapiwrfpov, TOV yfi p.I^drjvai; what can be more desirable than this, to be mixed with the earth? (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7 25 ). 'AyTjo-tXdos OVTI TOV ri Ka/Htti' t e v a i tvOvs dvTiorpftyas eir\ Qpvyias eiropevtro, Agesilaus, instead of advancing towards Caria, turned in the opposite direction and proceeded straight to Phrygia (Xen. Ages. 1, 16). npo 8t TOV dvafialveiv TOVS fjMprvpas ^pa^e'a fBov\opa.i 8La\f^df)vai t/fuv, before the witnesses go up, I wish to say a few words to you (Lycurg. 20). "Eroi/tot tlo-iv OTIOVV n-ao-^eiv, v IT e p TOV (J.TI TT oielv TO 7rpooTaTr6fj.fvoi>, they are ready to suffer anything for the sake of not submitting to dictation (Isoc. 7, 64). So Isoc. 1, 19 (eWa) ; Xen. Mem. 4, I 2 () ; Dem. 5, 5 (/wra) ; Xen. Mem. 4, 3 1 (aWv) ; Plat. Leg. 670 1 0' x pO- DATIVE: *Iva aTrtorwcrt TW e'/xe r TI p-rj o~ 6 at vrro 8aip.6va>v, that you may disbelieve my being honoured by the gods (Xen. Apol. 14). T <5 f f} v tori rt fvavTtov, axnrfp ra> eypyyopevai TO icadfvdeiv ; is there any- thing contrary to living, as sleeping is to waking? (Plat. Phaedo 71 C ). K.fKpaTT)Kf...T <5 Trporepos irpbs TOIS irpa.yfjM.o~i yiyve&dai, he has conquered by being quicker in action (Dem. 8, 11). 'H /3as dpxq do-0vr)s r)v...T(p Sit o-ir do-dai rft? Bwdfie is, the empire of the king was weak through the dispersion of its forces (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 9 ). Me'i/wv ^yaXXerro TW f^anarav dvvao-Bai, Menon delighted in being able to deceive (Xen. A nab. 2, 6 2B ). TOVTW Stacpe'petv..., TO> Tip.f)s opeyto-dat, to differ in this, namely, in seeking honour (Xen. Hier. 7, 3). 'EdavpdfTo tirl TU> (vdvij.u>s T *cat fvKoXcas TJV, he was admired for his living cheerfully and calmly (Xen. Mem. 4, S 2 ). IIpoj T &> p.r~8(v eic r^r irpfo-ftdds Xafttlv, besides receiving nothing from the embassy (Dem. 19, 229). So Soph. Aj. 554 (eV) ; Plat. Rep. 468' (&IM). 2232. NOTE. For the peculiarities of verbs of hindering, see 2351 2356. 2233. NOTE. Many verbs which regularly take a simple object- infinitive sometimes take the infinitive with TO ; even a few which govern a genitive sometimes take an object-infinitive with TO. This usage is common in tragedy and occurs also in prose. T o irXovo-uartpdv TT~V Tro'XtJ' Troteiv dv a f3a\ o v fj. f d a, we will put off making the state richer (Xen. Mem. 3, 6 8 ). *Eartv, or o-t K a>\6o-( i TO bpav, there is one that shall prevent thy executing it (Soph. Phil. 1241). TO KOTdavt'iv, I shall endure to die (Aesch. Ag. 1290). To dpdv OVK 2237 THE INFINITIVE 289 (de\r)vyf TO p.T) KaTaTreTpwdfjvai, Clearchus barely escaped being stoned to death (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 2 ). ' ' Kvaynd^ovrai r 6 viro oivov p.r) (r with the infinitive after ev, e-n-f, Trpo's, and a/xa. The adverb irXrjv, except, which is used also as a preposition with the genitive, often takes the infinitive alone; as TrX^v.-.o-TpaTr/Xareiv, except in warring (Eur. Or. 718) ; see 2 below. 2. An infinitive depending on a preposition must have the article. But Herodotus omits it after avri in a few cases. Os dvT\ ^tv 8ov\a>i> fTToir)v ap^fiv diravruv, who didst make them free instead of slaves, and instead of being ruled by others, to rule all nations (Hdt. 1, 210 s ), here perhaps on account of the antithesis to dvri /j.ev SovXwv ; but in 6, 32 2 dvri elvai without any antithesis. For ir\r)v with simple infinitive, see above. 2235. NOTE. Purpose. Sometimes TOV with the infinitive ex- presses purpose, especially a negative purpose ; as eVei^'o^r/ 'AraXavrr) fj vrjo-os, TOV /AT) A^crras KaKovpytlv rr)v Ev^otav, the island Atolanta was fortified that pirates might not ravage Euboea (Thuc. 2, 32 1 ) ; Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 9 ; Thuc. 1, 4. 2236. NOTE. Sometimes TO with the infinitive stands in loose construction like an accusative of specification, in respect to. To dpxr/v p.T) Kdp.v(iv TO arpaTev/xa, TOVTOV trot 8fi peXtiv, you ought to make this your care, that the army may never be diseased at all (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 18 ). Mff vvTtpi^tiv Set TOV ap^ovTa pr}Tf TO etSei/ai & Set /iJjTe TO IT p ATT f iv & &v K at p 6 s $, the commander ought not to be the last to know what ought to be known, or to do what occasion may require (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 4fl ). "l(Ta>s e'-yw airto?, TO (re air o K piv af<,ei/os, employing the medical art ; vl^o-ds TOWS jT-oAc/u'ous, having conquered the enemy ; (b) it may be used as the equivalent of a protasis or apodosis ; it may be used with av for a finite verb with av ; (c) each verb has several participles, according to voice and tense ; (d) it expresses the same time as the indicative. 2. The participle has three general uses which sometimes blend into each other, (d) It may be used attributively, like an adjective. (b) Predicatively it may be used as the equivalent of a subordinate clause, to express time, condition, cause, manner, concession, purpose, etc. (circumstantial participle) ; or it may be used absolutely, (c) It may be used predicatively to complete the meaning of many verbs ; here it may refer to the subject or to the object of the verb (supple- mentary participle). I. ATTRIBUTIVE PARTICIPLE 2239. The participle may qualify a noun attributively like any adjective ; it then has attributive position with respect to the article. Oi Trapdvres n-oXirai Or 01 TroXirai ot TrapovTe<%, the citizens who are present; TTCUS KaAais ireTraiSeu/tevos, a well-educated child; ol cvoi ol fi> rfj TrdXei K aro IKOVVTCS, the strangers living in the city ; ol TrptV/Jeis ot Trapa ySao-iXews Tre/i^^c'i'Tes, the ambassadors sent by the king; TroXis *aAAi 8iai> 7roA.i?, a city of belligerents (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 73 ) ; Plat. Lys. 221 b ; Xen. Heli. 5, I 19 ; Eur. Phoen. 270. 2243. NOTE. As the participle expresses the same time as the indicative, the future participle strictly means the one who is to do anything or who is expected to do something. 'O fiyrj 6 6 K a \ ti v Trapijv, there was not present any one to prevent it (Soph. Ant. 261). Ov (nravifi T > v /3 o r) 6 y a- 6 v T a> v, he is not in want of people to lend him aid (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 42 ). 2244. NOTE. 1. A few participles are so completely felt to be nouns, that they may even take the genitive instead of the case which the verb governs. BacrtXecd? irpoa~f)KovTfs Tives, certain relations of the king (Thuc. 1, 128 6 ). Ilapa TO crv^tpov TJJS TroXcwr, against the interest of the state. (Lycurg. 130). Ta u>p.r)s, the irritation of their feelings (2, 59 4 ). To Tip. fj.fj fif\fTv rovs (pfvyovras, (rv\\t{-ds orpareu/ia, eVoXtopicft MiXrfrov, Cyrus, having received the exiles and having assembled an army, laid siege to Miletus (Xen. Anab. 1, I 7 ). Tavra TT o 07 a-avr f s eVi T&S XXovf vfi (rradiovs, the Greeks, having crossed, were about eight stadia distant from the ravine (Xen. Anab. 3, 4 3 ). 'A K ov cr av erv^t TIJS /SacriXftaj, Agesilaus, while yet young, obtained the kingship (Xen. Ages. 1, 6). 2248. NOTE. As in the last example above, the participle <5v cannot be omitted. 2249. NOTE. These temporal participles are practically equivalent to adverbs : dp^d/xefos, at first ; TfXfvrwv, at last ; SioA.iTrwi' xpovov, CTTICT^WV xpovov, ajter a while ; SiaAetTrwi/ ^po'vov, at intervals of time. "\irep (cat ap^o/itei/of dirov, as I also said at first (Thuc. 4, 64 1 ). T X f vr >v T t s teal diro TOV v8aros tlpyov avrovs ol QpaKes, at last the Thracians shut them off even from the water (Xen. Anab. 6, 3 8 ). 'OXiyov xpovov 8 1 a X t n VVKTO, on the first oncoming of night (Hdt. 6, 2 1 ). "A/z ijXtw dvia-xovri, with the rising sun (Ken. Anab. 2, I 3 ). SUK (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5 21 ).' 2251. Cause. The circumstantial participle may express cause. 'OXdcrde 8' f]8iKTjn6Ts rbv av8pa r6v8e, ye shall perish Jor having injured me (= this man) (Soph. Phil. 1035). napavop,ovs 8f Kfp8aivtiv dv' d\\r)\a>v fj >(p(\ovvT(s avrovs, they prefer thus to get gains from each other than to unite for their mutual benefit (Xen. Mem. 3, 5 16 ). Kai 77 y eX a v dnoBavfiv ff irapavo^iwv fjv, he preferred to die abiding by the laws than to live transgressing them (Xen. Mem. 4, 4 4 ). AWKC i' v, he gave him the silver-studded sword, ____ presenting it (II. 7, 303). "Ep^eTat fj Mav8dvrj...rov Kvpov rbv vibv txova-a, Mandane comes with her son Cyrus (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 1 ). Stvia TJK.V irapr)y(i\f X a |3 6 v T a TOVS av8pas, he ordered Xenias to come and bring all his men (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 1 ). Boj; ^pw/iei/ot, with a shout (Thuc. 2, 84 3 ). nipatof...^X^i/ t~ivov aya>v, Piraeus came bringing the stranger (Od. 17, 72). 294 THE PAETICIPLE 2254 2254. NOTE. The participles aywv, e^v, fyiptav, \a/3wv, and may be generally translated by with. See the last four examples in 2253. 2255. NOTE. These participles of manner are practically equivalent to adverbs . l^wy, constantly ; *pu>v, hastily, rapidly ; ^>epo/ii o?, with a rush ; dvvo-ds, quickly ; xip>^ with impunity (rejoicing) ; KXcuW, to one's sorrow, at one's peril ; 6a.pp<*>v, boldly ; "> you trifle continually (Plat. Gorg. 497*). Etj TOVTO (pepuv ir(ptf v v8f, you will touch these at your peril (Eur. Heracl. 270). \tyt roivw dapp>v, speak then boldly (Plat. Phaedr. 243 e ). For s v, the man was gone to hunt hares (Xen. Anab. 4, 5 21 ). Ou* ts \6yovs t\r)\vd\ d\\d V TTO\( tav &Trav d K. o v 7rordTv o v v Xf^^evrwv dveoTija-av, these things said, they arose (Xen. Anab. 3, 3 1 ). Ge/xto-roKX^s qpx* Mayvijcrids 86vros f3a s avrw, Themistocles governed Magnesia which the king had given him (Thuc. 1, 138 8 ). T >v a- v 6 rj\v v o /j.f v v a 6 X T} T a> v 81s TocravTijv po)p.r]v \aft6vr aTrdrTj, where there is falsehood, there is deceit (Plat. Soph. 260 C ). 'AfplKtro 8evpo TO ir\oiov, yvovTo>v T>V K.f(pa\\r)V(av, avTiirparrovTOs Zr) v o 6 f p.i8 o s, ... (carawXe Iv, the ship approached, the Cephalenians having resolved to sail in, although Zenothemis opposed it (Dem. 32, 14). II. 1, 88. Xen. Hell. 5, I 9 . Thuc. 7, 13 2 . Dem. 9,76. 2260. NOTE. The participle <5v, being, cannot be omitted ; but see 2277. 2261. NOTE. 1. The subject (genitive) of the participle is some- times omitted when it is easily supplied from the context or when some indefinite subject, like dvOp^-n-tav or Trpa.yp.a.rwv, is understood. QOTTOV TT p o 'i 6 v T < v...8p6p.os eyevfTO rots orpariaVraij tVi rdy v understood). 'lovrvv ds (j,dxT)i>, when men go to battle (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 54 ; sc. dvdpu>iru>v). Ovrw ye e XOVT a>v, things being so (Xen. Anab. 3, I 40 ; sc. irpaypdraiv). Tlparronivw (Xen. Vect. 6, 3 ; sc. npay(j.dT? diroKpivovpfvov, ask, as I will answer (Plat. Farm. 137 C ). 296 THE PARTICIPLE 2262 2. So with impersonal participles like flovros, when raining (Xen. Hell. 1, 1 16 ; Ar. Vesp. 774) ; with such expressions Aids was originally understood. Other .impersonal expressions like dS^Aou OKTOS (Xen. Hipparch. 4, 2), oimo? ex " 5 (Pl at - R e P- 381 C ), are uncommon, the accusative absolute being here regular (2265) ; but .see 2262. 2262. NOTE. The passive participles of verbs of announcing, showing, etc., are sometimes used in the genitive absolute with a dependent declarative clause, introduced by on, serving as a subject. *'E(rayyf\6fVTa>v ori Qoivurcrcu vrjfs eir\ TOVS 'Adrjvaiovs 7r\fovs 8 TJ \ a 6 4 v r o s ort tv rals vava\ rS>v *E\\r)v eV^pero rov 'ATroXXw, having arrived there, Xenophon asked Apollo (Xen. Anab. 3, I 6 ; Lat. quo quum venisset, Xenophon consuluit Apollinem). Xen. Anab. 3, I 8 . 2264. NOTE. The genitive absolute is usually employed when the subject of the participle does not already occur in the sentence in some case to which the participle might be joined. Yet sometimes, for greater emphasis of the participial clause, the genitive absolute is used, even when the subject of the participle does already occur. &t/3/9l} Cyyt\dT) avrai, Sri Mtyapa d(6f)vai, you do not seem to be doing right in betraying yourself when you might be saved (Plat. Crito 45 C ). 'Y/teTs av ov ^ p e o> v PX"* 1J OU cannot properly maintain your rule (Thuc. 3, 40 7 ). KaXws TT apao- x&v, ov t-vveftijcrav, they did not treat when they had a favourable opportunity (Thuc. 5, 14 1 ). A o K o v v dva^pfiv, it being resolved to retreat (Thuc. 4, 125 1 ). Ae'ov (Hdt. 3, 65 6 ). Upoo-rJKov (Isoc. 15, 284). Uapov (Eur. Heracl. 177). Merov (Lys. 31, 32). II p o va...ayfiv els ''E\\r](nrovTOV, dvayofjifvos Sta ra^owy, when the command was given to me by the people to convey Menon to the Hellespont, I put to sea in all speed (Dem. 50, 12). 'Eipijp.evov, when it had been said (Ar. Lysist. 13). TlapeKeXtvovro Kpavyfj OVK o\iyrj xpupfvoi, d8vva.Tov ov tv VVK.T\ oXXw TW crrjfjLfjvai., they cheered each other with no little shouting, as it was impossible in the night to give signals in any other way (Thuc. 7, 44 5 ). AtV^poi' ov dvriXe'yeiv, it being infamous to deny (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2 30 ). Ou^i eVa>cra/*eV 9, the accusative of a noun with a personal participle in agreement may stand absolutely in any number or gender. Without wo-Trep or ws this also occurs in the neuter, but very rarely. Toil? V'KIS ol TraTfpfs diro irovqpwv nv^pwTrwv tlpyovcriv, o>s rf)v /xev TWV XprjorSiv 6p.l\idv a(TKT)v Trovrjpfov KaraXwiv (sc. ovcrav), fathers keep their sons from bad men in the belief that the associa- tion with the good is an exercise of virtue, but that association with the bad in 298 THE PAETICIPLE 2'269 a destruction of it (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 s0 ). (lloXXoi) TO>V afieX^wj' dp.(\ovv fjitv y ly v o p.f v ov s

v ov y lyv o- p.t vov s, many neglect their brothers, as if friends were made from fellow- citizens and were not 'made from brothers (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 :I ). Xen. Mem. 1, 3 s . Hdt. 9, 42 3 . Without &s : A d a i/ T a 8e ravra KOI irfpavOivra, ra oTpaTtvpara dirri\6fv, this having been resolved and settled, the armies drew off (Xen. Hell. 3, 2 19 ). Tavra 8e ylvopeva, when this happens (Hdt. 2, 66). "A X X o rt 86{-av (ai(pvT)s, some another sudden resolution = lit. something else suddenly having been resolved upon (Thuc. 5, 65 :t ). Plat. Leg. 844 C . Observe the occasional 86av ravra (= eirel ?8o|e ravra), this resolution being passed = lit. this having been resolved upon (Xen. Anab. 4, I 13 ). 2. Otherwise with added subject (as rovrov, TOVTW, and the like), we have the genitive absolute ; as SodvTvr)T i K. a yevoptvov fs rov pjjpov avfppd^ciTO Zfvs, as soon as he was born, Zeus sewed up Dionysus in his thigh (Hdt. 2, 146 3 ). 'HTriardp-fda tvdvs yfvop-fvoi vp,7ravra ra Toiavra, we knew all such things immediately after being born (Plat. Phaedo 75'). T^v ^V\TIV dttapovvTa e aiv rV TTJV Zdy<\rjv e v 6 avr a oi Zay*Xaioi ....eftoTjdtov, after the Samians obeying and having seized Zancle, the Zan- claeans set out to help it (Hdt. 6, 23 3 ). Xen. Anab. 4, 7 13 (erra). Plat. Gorg. 456 d (eVeira). Xen. Symp. 4, 23 (rare). Andoc. 1, 9 (rare rjSrj). Xen. Mem. 3, 10 2 (ovras). Plat. Phaedo 61 d (OVTVS dff). Thuc. 2, 54 7 (ev<9v?). 2271. 7se of are, olov, ola, w?, awd WO-TTC/) w'/& Participles. 1. The particles are, olov, ola (also arc 8*7, oiot' 817, ota 8*7), inasmuch as, as, are used with the participle expressing cause to denote that the cause is real and that the writer or speaker is responsible for the statement. 'O Kvpos, are Trai? <5i/..., ^Sero TTJ crroXfl, Cyrus, inasmuch as he was a boy, was delighted with the robe (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 3 ). Kat are & e u> fj,fv a>v T>V eraipwv, and inasmuch as their companions were viewing them (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 27 ). O f o v Se 8ia -^povov dfply p,e v o s ds rja eVi ras ^vvrfQeis Siarpt^as, inasmuch as I had arrived after a long time, I gladly went to my accustomed haunts (Plat. Charm. 153 a ). Oia inro 'Itrrta/ov TroXiopKij- 6evTfs, inasmuch as they had been besieged by Histiaeus (Hdt. 6, 46 2 ) ; with genitive absolute, Hdt. 1, 189 4 . "Are 817, ofoi' 8)7, ofa 77 : Hdt. 1, 171 3 ; Plat. Symp. 203 b ; Xen. Hell. 6, 4 2ti . 2. The particle s K d p.v a> v drer fa-^vpt'fovro, they remained firm, as they were counselling the best, as they believed (Thuc. 4, 68"). 2uXXa/z/3ovei Kvpov as air o icre v 5>v, he seizes Cyrus with the (declared) intention of putting him to death (Xen. Anab. 1, I 3 ). Ot *Adr)vaioi. irapf s OVK (VTa.K.Ts avrina 8fr), ota. Sxrwep, and wore, with the participle, is post-Homeric. So d>9 with the participle rarely occurs in Homer, and not with the force explained in 2271, 2. 2273. NOTE. These are used in a causal sense and belong to the principal verb : rovot evc/cu, 810. root, oia TOVTO, ota ravTa, CK TOVTOV, otrra>5, for this reason. T o 8 f fii>fKv aye/3 i/3acre (rov K-polaov) firl TTJV irvprfv /3 o v X o- ptvos fldfvai, K.T.X., therefore he caused Croesus to mount on the pyre wishing to know, etc. (Hdt. 1, 86 2 ). Thuc. 7, 13 2 (8ia ro8). Xen. Anab. 1, 7 3 (8ia rovro) ; Anab. 5, 8 1S (e< TOVTOV). Plat. Lach. 178 h (ovrw). 2274. Concessive Particles. 1. The particles used to strengthen a concessive participle are : KatVep and (less often) /cat, though ; KOI ravra, and that too ; ov8e (ft^Se), though not ; KO.LTOI, though (very rare, especially in early writers). 'A.iro7r\i oiKiiftf, K a i TT ( p fjos OVTOS, he set sail homeward though it was mid-winter (Xen. Ages. 2, 31) ; Anab. 1, 6 10 . 'A8fX^>o> s (\6pov tivai /xot TOVTOV o/jaXoyto, although I have not suffered ill, yet I admit that this man is my enemy (Dem. 21, 205). 'licavd 2277 THE PABTICIPLE 301 /JLOI vopifa flprjcrdm, K. airo i iro\\d yt TT a p a\ ITT a> v, I believe I have said enough, although I have passed over much (Lys. 31, 34). 2. Homer often has irep, which occurs also in Aeschylus, rarely in Euripides and Herodotus, once in Sophocles (Phil. 1068). In Homer Kcu'....7rep generally stand sepa- rated ; thiK is uncommon in tragedy. The tragedians sometimes have ovSt-n-fp (nySctrep), Homer has ov8e...7rep separated. Ov TI 8vvr)(Tfai d %v v fj, e v 6 s IT e p ^paia'fjLe'iv, although much grieved thou wilt be unable to help them (II. 1, 241). Aesch. Sept. 1038. Eur. Ion 1324. Hdt. 3, 131 2 . Tov p.ev eireir eul(rf K al d%vvp,fv6s TT e p eraipov Kflffdai, although griev- ing for his companion, he then let him lie (II. 8, 125). Eur. Or. 680. OvSeVep (Aesch. Supp. 399 ; Eur. Phoen. 1624 ; Ar. Ach. 222). Oi>Se...7rep (Od. 13, 294). 2275. NOTE. 1. In Attic, o/xws, yet, nevertheless, is often joined to the principal verb, when the sentence contains a concessive participle ; the participle may also separate O/AW? from its verb. To TrXf/dos afj-erpov 6p>vT(s, o p, a> s er o\ p,r] & ar e If vat eV avrovs, though seeing their number was countless, you nevertheless had the courage to march against them (Ken. Anab. 3, 2 16 ). 2iu> s ; occasionally with predicate nouns, oftener with adjectives. Avroi/f fls ffjv 7ro\iTfidv ov irapab(^6fjLf6a or* rvpavviftos v p v r] r 0. s , we will not receive them into the state, as they are singers of the praises of tyranny 302 THE PARTICIPLE 2278 (Plat. Rep. 568 b ). Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 2 . riyvaxDcw >s, Kaiirtp a-Korftvos (sc. &v), I know well although my sight is darkened (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1326). 'Q s (fjMv p. 6 v T) s TffXas (sc. ovo-qs), as I alone am near (Soph. Oed. Col. 83). 'Q s Ka\6v (sc. ov)...dyopvrdai avrov, as it is good for the oration to be spoken (Thuc. 2, 35 1 ). (b) Without these particles, w is very rarely omitted in poetry ; as opvis, wv v -rj yrj r S) v (sc. oWwi'), birds, under whose guidance, like Lat. quibus ducibus (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 966) ; accusative absolute, Soph. Ant. 44. 2. The adjectives CKWV, willing(ly), and aw, unwilling (ly), are treated like participles from Homer on, and thus omit OM . 'E/xov ftfv ovx f < 6 v T o s, against my will (Soph. Aj. 455). ToZj /3ap/3apotf, 2>v AKOVTO>V TTJV xu>pav e^ovcriv, to the barbarians, against whose will they possess the country (Isoc. 4, 122). 2278. NOTE. A predicate adjective or noun connected by a conjunction with a participle, usually has wv ; as in Ar. Plut. 751 ; Vesp. 507. But sometimes the predicate noun or participle here omits w ; as in Thuc. 3, 69 1 ; 11. 10, 342. (B) SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE. 2279. The supplementary participle completes the meaning of the verb, and may refer to the subject or to the object of the verb. Moreover, it may be used either to qualify the verb by limiting its meaning to a particular circumstance ; or else it may be used as the equivalent of a proposition introduced by on, or d>9. Thus : SwKpaTTjs o- KOTT a> v SiT/yei', Socrates was continually enquiring ; Travo-w o-e aoiKovvra, I will stop you from doing wrong ; but o*8a aitTov TOVTO Ofopa-Kora = dloa on TOVTO 8fSpa.Kv, I know that he has done this ; ol8a $vr)To<; J>v ol&a on QV^TOS tlpi, I know that I am mortal. (a) PARTICIPLE LIMITING THE MEANING OF THE VERB 2280. 1. With dpi, yiyvo/j-ai, vTrapxco. Like any adjective, the participle may be used predicatively after the copulative verbs et/u, be, lyiyvo/juii, be, become, and vTrdp^w, used in the sense to be or to be taken for granted. Et TOIS n\foariv d p t (r n OVT t s f tXi7T7ra) KOI vovv f^ovres, there were some persons distrusting Philip, and having intelligence (Dem. 19, 53). Tiyvma-Kmv irov avros tavrbv rare ear at, he will know himself then or he will be knowing himself (Plat. Charm. 169 e ). Ovrt yap 0paoi ea-ovrai, they will be surprised (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2 21 ). M itrovvrfs yiyvovrai rovs KUKOVS, they get to hate the wicked (Plat. Leg. 908 b ). To{5ro v IT d p %f tv ijfids 1 1 8 or a s ijyou^iai, JT think it may be taken for granted that you know this (Dem. 18, 95) ; with vTrap^w this occurs mostly in Demosthenes. 2. So with poetic r&apvu, be ; as Ifjido XeXacr/xevos eir\ev, thou wert forgetful of me (II. 23, 69). 2281. NOTE. In these constructions with ei/u/, the verb expresses a continued state of being resulting from the action of the participle ; hence the present and perfect participles are mostly so used. The simple perfect and pluperfect may express the continued state in the same way, but not so distinctly and sometimes not at all (1928). But the periphrastic form with the perfect participle has the ordinary force of a perfect or pluperfect when it can only be formed periphrasti- cally, as in the third person plural of the perfect and pluperfect passive and middle of mute and liquid verbs ; also in the usually periphrastic future-perfect active, as eyvoxcorcs eo-oyuetfa, we shall have known; and in the periphrastic form of the future-perfect passive, as e'l/fevtr/xe'vo? eo-o/Acu, 1 shall have been deceived. 2282. NOTE. The construction of the predicate participle with flfu, especially with the aorist participle, occurs oftener in poetry than in Herodotus or in Attic prose : 11. 5, 873 ; Soph. Oed. Tyr. 970 ; Eur. Cycl. 381 ; Ar. Ran. 36 ; Hdt. 9, 51 2 . 2283. NOTE. 1. Occasionally we find an impersonal participle, like a-ufji.(f)fpov, used predicatively with ei/ ; as avf*.cpov ty rfi Tro'Aei, it was advantageous to the state = o-wtfapfv (Dem. 19, 75). Isoc. 12, 124. 2. We even find lortv wv or ytyvo/ievos, TTIV (OVTWS) t%wv ; rarely 304 THE PABTICIPLE 22SI wv with another participle. Thus : v7ro/Av>7//,a rjv). 2284. With e%o>. 1. The verb e%&> (el^ov), ftave, with an active or middle aorist or (seldom) perfect participle, denotes possession as a result of the action expressed by the participle. In the dramatists this construction is sometimes merely equivalent to the simple tense. TTJV Trpoi/ca TOUT-OP TOV rpoTrov ( <-X f ^ a $ w v, he got the dowry in this way, and held it (Dem. 27, 17). EloXXa xprjpaTa t %o pc v dvrjpirciKOTfs, we have much money that we have seized = lit. having seized it (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 14 ). *A vvv K.ara(TTpc^rdp.(vos t^tis, which you have now sub- jugated and possess (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 27 ) ; Anab. 4, 7 1 . Soph. Oed. Tyr. 701. Eur. Med. 33 ; Bacch. 302. Hdt. 1, 28 ; 3, 65 10 . The first example of this usage is in Hes. Op. 42. Herodotus uses also o-^f in this way, as in 1, 75 1 . 2. The intransitive ^w is also found in this use to express a condition or state, but mostly in tragedy. Qavp,d(ras fx^i ^ stand wondering, lit. having wondered, I stand (Plat. Phaedr. 257). TOUT' an-ciX^o-ay e^eu; have you made this threat ? (Soph. Oed. Col. 817). Dem. 19, 288. AT. Thesm. 236. Soph. Trach. 37- 2285. With verbs of" being". 1. The supplementary participle is used with verbs denoting being in some definite manner. In translating into English, the participle is generally made the principal verb, and the verb is rendered by some adverb or phrase like continually, by chance, secretly, first, away. 2. (a) Such verbs are I SiaTcXew, Siayco, Siayiyvo/iat, Sia/xevb), oiarpifita, to be continually; 0a/x.i'a>, to be wont, to be frequently ; Tvy^avw, to happen (to be by chance) ; Xav6dvv8i o id { a>, studious always of the things one ought to be studious of (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 86 ). Oufii> aXXo IT oi>v StayfytvrjTai ff 8 lacr K o TT uv rd rt Siacua al TO. adixa, he has passed through life doing 2286 THE PAETICIPLE 305 nothing else than considering what is just and what is unjust (Xen. Mem. 4, 8 4 ). Aia/xeVo) (Xen. Mem. 4, 7 7 ). Atarpij3a> (Ar. Eccl. 1151). O0 n K o /xif d fifv 6s ye a pig ev, he was not accustomed to being thus cared for (Od. 8,451). "Ervxov oTrArrat eV rfj dyopa KadevdovTfs as irfVTTjKOvra, about fifty hoplites happened to be sleeping in the market-place (Thuc. 4, 113 2 ). "Onov fTv%ev exaoros eor^Kwy, wherever each happened to be standing (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 8 ). Od. 14, 344. *E\adev dirodpds, he escaped unobserved (Xen. Hell. 1, S 22 ). *E\adov eo-eXdovres, they entered unobserved (Thuc. 2, 2 B ). Eov\oip.rjv &v X a 6 e t v avrbv drre\6 f)/j.as avroi/s iraidav ovSev 8iafpovTfs, unconsciously we found that we did not differ at all from children (Plat. Crito 49 b ). Isoc. 8, 32. Plat. Gorg. 471 b . Isoc. 1, 16. Hdt. 1, 44 2 . AiaXavddvca (Isoc. 3, 16). 'A.iroKpviTTOfMi (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 14 ). oAAov

V ws e (p 6 rj viro TWV iro\fp,i(ov KaraxB\v6 1 is, fjvayKacrdr) vavfjMxfjo-ai, Conon, having been stopped by the enemy before he could go any farther, was compelled to fight a naval battle (Xen. Hell. 1, 6 17 ). Plat. Rep. 375). Hdt. 4, 136 3 . II. 23, 805. Ot^eTot 6ava>v, he is dead and gone (Soph. Phil. 414). "Qixovro dTreXavvovres, they rode away (Xen. Anab. 7, 6 42 ). II. 2, 71. Xen. Hell 4, 8 8 ; Anab. 7, 6 42 . "Q0dv<,>. 1. With any tense of these verbs, except the present or imperfect, the supplementary aorist participle does not express time past with reference to the verb, but time coincident with it. See the examples above, 2285 and 2288. 2. The few cases of VT a t tKir\ovs avr66tv \av6dvovrts, so that they might not sail out from thence unobserved (Thuc. 3, 51 2 , for oirtas /iij \avddvaxriv... iroiovfjifvoi). Soph. Ant. 532. Qdavovrts ^8rj 8j)ovp.tv rffv fK(iva>v yrjv, we waste their land before they know it (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 18 ). Od. 4, 547 ; -H. 12. 390 ; Ar. Plut. 1102. 20 306 THE PAKTICIPLE 2287 (b) So very rarely in poetry with rvy\dv: Eur. Iph. Aul. 958 ; Soph. Phil. 371. 2287. NOTE. OVK av 0dvoi6dvoiTc). This expression, meaning you cannot be too soon, or the sooner you. ..the better, with a supple- mentary participle, is equivalent to an urgent request or command ; much less common is this expression in the third or first person. OVK &v v), I will speak at once or / may as well speak at once (Plat. Symp. 214 e ). 2288. NOTE. Ov <0av 0di 6 ij f leave off; sometimes KwXio/xai, be hindered, and oa) (with ace.), hinder ; \iirap(, endure ; Ka/ivo, dirayopevia (direiTroi', dTTfiprjKa), weary ; ev oAiywpta Trouo/wu, ov <^>povTt^a), not to care, disregard ; 7rptopaa>, (opda>, ct and e7rt'x = Trcptopao), permit, let go on ; seldom in poetry await. 2290 THE PARTICIPLE 307 *A p o p, a i dwo rfjs la.Tpi (Xen. Anab. 5, 5 9 ). Karapxw (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 4 ). TIava-ai \eyovo-a, stop talking (Eur. Hipp. 706). Ai ). OVK dvfofjMi fwo-a, J s/ia^ not endure living (Eur. Hipp. 354). 'lai' TT a i 8 a s f^avt^erai Trao-^ovras; will Jason endure to have his children suffer '( (Eur. Med. 74). Kaprepeco (Xen. Cl/J'. 3, 2 5 ). 'Yn-o/ievfif /ne TOV rv v, thou dost submit to curing for me the blind (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1324). MJJ ndp.r)s 6 e pan tvovr e s, we are never weary of paying homage (Isoc. 10, 56). 'ATT t / prj K a fj8r) (ppovrifa (Eur. Hec. 256). 'Ev o\iywpiq iroi.eofj.at (Thuc. 4, 5 5 ). Me/fa) yiyv6p.evov rbv avdpcoTrov irfpiopS>p.ev, we allow the man to become greater (Dem. 9, 29). MJJ TT e p it'Sw p.ev v fB p io-d elaav TTJV A.aKe8aip.ova, do not let us see Lacedaemon insulted (Isoc. 6, 108). Thuc. 1, 86". 'Efpopdo) (Isoc. 4, 96). EiVopaco (Eur. Med. 712). Hpofe/xat (Thuc. 2, 73 s . 'ETrtrpeTra) (Isoc. 12, 170). "Apx< (II. 2, 378). "EXW = Travo) (Pind. Isth. 3, 72). Tao-trcov eireo-xov, by arranging I restrained (Eur. Phoen. 449). "Avaye ...av8S>v, cease speaking (Eur. Phoen. 1733). 'E\lvv (II 13, 37). 2290. NOTE. Some of the above verbs are also used with the infinitive, but their meaning is then commonly somewhat changed. 1. "Apxo/uicu with the participle means to begin by actually doing something, to begin with something, to be beginning, in distinction to 308 THE PAKTICIPLE 2290 ending. With the infinitive it means to begin to do something; as rfpa.vTo...Ta fjMKpa Tfi\tj 'A.6rjvaloL oiKoooftelv, the Athenians began to build the long walls (Thuc. 1, 107 1 ) ; II. 7, 324. So apx8ous oravo-e dya>viecr$eu, he prevented the rhapsodists from contending (Hdt. 5, 67 2 ) ; Plat. Rep. 416 C . 3. MeOirjfu with the infinitive, to omit, to permit, in prose and poetry. Mfdiaa-i TO Sfovra irpdrrtiv, they neglect to do their duties (Xen. Mem. 2, I 33 ). 'E/ie.../*re? levai, permit me to go (Hdt. 1, 37 3 ). Soph. Oed. Tyr. 131 ; El. 628. Me0%t with the participle is poetic (2289). 4. (a) 'Ave'^o/xai and vTro/xeVw with the participle mean to endure, to hold out ; with the infinitive, to venture. 'Av t cr x ov T v (Tiovra err I rrfv -)(a>pr)v 8(atrdai f they ventured (or had the courage) to receive the invader in their country (Hdt. 7, 139 8 ; avt^ofuu with infinitive is very rare). 'YnopeivavTa TO. iravra IT a a % e iv, to endure the suffering of any extremity (Plat. Leg. 869). So ToXyxdw in prose and poetry (2207). Also rXa- (rX^vai) in poetry when it means to venture. With the participle ToA/naw and rXa-, endure, are very rare and poetic. (&) 'Ave'xo/icu may also be accompanied by a genitive absolute ; as ott nva dvt ea-0 at o-ov Acyovros, do you think any one will tolerate you saying (Plat. Phil. 13 C ). 5. 'ATTOKCI/AVW with the participle, to weary of an action ; with the infinitive, to leave off from weariness, as fti/rc O.TT o nd py $ a-avrov 0-wom (Plat. Crito 45 b ). 6. Htpiopdw with the participle means to overlook, to let an action go on without attempting to stop it ; with the infinitive, it means to allow a thing to happen without attempting to prevent it. Toir yap '\6r)vaiovs TJ\ITI(V...TT)V yf/v OVK hv irtpiifttlv Tpijdrjvai, for he hoped that the Athenians would not allow their land to be ravaged (Thuo. 2, 20 3 ). Hdt. 1, 24". Thuc. 1, 35 4 . Sometimes there is practically no difference between the infinitivejor participial construction. 2291 THE PARTICIPLE 309 7. 'E-mrpen-w, to permit, to give up, with the infinitive is the regular construction (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 19 ) ; with the participle it is very rare. 2291. With Verbs of Feeling or Emotion. 1. The supplementary participle accompanies many verbs signifying to be satisfied, to rejoice, to be pleased or displeased, to be vexed or angry, to be ashamed, to repent. 2. (a) Such verbs are : dyaTrdw, be satisfied ; ^ai/ow, ^So/xat, yeyr^a, rejoice, be pleased ; dyaAAo/xai, to delight in, exult in ; d/Ww, to suffice ; dA.yo, be troubled, grieved ; Ai57reoju,ai, grieve, ; a.x@ofj.ai., dyavaKrew, be vexed, discontented ; 6pyio/u, be angry ; ^aXcTrw? p with nom. part, in Ar. Plut. 645: & iv, they are contented to be honoured by smaller people (Plat. Rep. 475 b ). Ti/iteo/xevot ^aipova-iv, they delight in being honoured (Eur. Hipp. 8). Xaipovo-tv l*rao pivots TOIS olofifvoif fiev dvai cro(f)ois, oucri 8* ov, they delight in having those examined who consider themselves wise but are not (Plat. Apol. 33 C ). 'l8a>v rjo-drjv, / was delighted in beholding (Plat. Prot. 315 b ). Ttyrjdas a>v, you live in exulta- tion (Soph. Phil. 1021). 'AydXXo/xat (Xen. Hier. 8, 5). 'Ap/cc'co (Thuc. 5, 9 l ). 'AXyew (Plat. Phil. 47). AvTrto^ai (Thuc. 2, 65 2 ). 'EAeyxo/ievoi fj x dovT > they were vexed at being exposed (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 47 ). T o ii s fj.fv $ pav ipovs ayavanTf'iv air o 6 v rj cr K o v ras irpeirfi, it is proper to grieve when the wise die (Plat. Phaedo t>2"). *A 8 1 K ov fj.f v o i ol avBpwrrot. p.a\\ov o p y i o v- T a i r) ^la^opevoi, when injured, men are more angry than when treated with violence (Thuc. 1, 77 5 )- XaXtTreoy ev o pai \fyu>v, I say this without shame (Xen. Cyr. 5, I 21 ). M trffie \o vro rtis p( v o s \6yoicriv OVK ava.ivop.ai, I do not deny being overcome by the tidings (Aesch. Ag. 583). A 1 8 1 a- a i irartpa. ..IT p o\ ( i n a v, be ashamed of deserting your father (Soph. Aj. 506). Epic odopai (IL 5, 403). 2292. NOTE. Most of the participles used with the above verbs express a cause and could thus be placed under 2251. 2293. NOTE. 1. With 3xOop.ai a genitive of the participle can be used (genitive absolute) ; as ovoev T/X&TO a v T v, I say this without shame (Xen. Cyr. 5, I 31 ). But aio-xVvofjMi tp.1v fiTTt'iv rdXrjdfi, I am ashamed to tell you the truth = I do not tell you the truth because I am ashamed (Plat. Apol. 22 b ). Xen. Anab. 2, 3 22 ; Rep. Lac. 9, 4. So albtopai with the infinitive: Xen. Symp. 8, 33 ; 8, 35. So aiSeo/xat with the infinitive : Xen. Symp. 8, 33 ; 8, 35. Also epic oOofjuit with the infinitive ; as TOV 8' OVK odtrat i\ov riTop....do~Oai, but his heart fears not to assert (II. 15, 166). 2. Other verbs of feeling or emotion rarely take the infinitive ; but o-rvyfia, hate (to do), always has the infinitive from Homer on. 2295. NOTE. Verbs of feeling or emotion are often followed by OTI and a causal clause (2071) ; sometimes by tl and a conditional clause (2074). 2296. Explanatory Participle. 1. The supplementary participle may be used to explain the action of a verb, as an appositive explains a noun or pronoun. This occurs chiefly with verbs 229T THE PARTICIPLE 311 meaning to do well or ill, right or wrong ; to surpass, to be inferior, and the like. Here the aorist participle in connection with a verb expressing a past action does not denote time past, but time coincident with the verb. Compare 2286. 2. Such verbs are ev (/caA.ws) Troie'w, to do well ; dSi*eu>, to do wrong ; Xapto/u,cu rivt, \dpLv nvi, to do any one a favour ; vixaw, /cpare'w, Trepiytyvo/xai, to conquer, surpass ; ^rrao/iai, Aeuroyuai, to be surpassed, to be inferior ; and others. Ev ye eiroii], to happen ; so also yScXrfwv (d/xeivwv, Kpua-o-wv) elfju. are sometimes used personally with the participle where an impersonal construction with the infinitive would be expected. Ovroi) tru/x/Sat'vet a/u.a *ai rj r>v8f firyevfia KO(Tfjiovp.fvT], in this way their noble birth is praised (Plat. Menex. 237). HdvTa...crv pftai v ei yiyvop-fva, all happens (Plat. Phil. 42 d ). SuvfTreTrrw/cee tpis toixra, there happened to be a quarrel (Hdt. 1, 82 1 ). ' Apitrrayopr) o-vveirlTrrf... navra ravra (rvve\66vTa, it happened that all these things occurred to Aristagoras (Hdt. 5, 36). Plat. Phil. 47 d ). Kpei'cro-w i> y v t p. TT t TT Xa/nat, J cannot satiate myself with looking (Eur. Ion 925). MtoTos rfv 0vp.ovfj.evos, I ivas full of anger (Soph. Oed. Col. 768). Hdt. 7, 146 4 . 'Apicf Bvya-ttovtr rya>, it will be enough forme to die (Soph. Ant. 547). Thuc. 5, 9 1 . 'Iicavos f(prj avrbs arvx&v ", he said it was enough for himself to be unhappy (Isae. 2, 7). But dpicet or luavov e', I am come ; (.p^op-ai and c?/u ; for oixo/x/u, am gone, see 2285. "Iva d8f)s ovs (p p o)v fj K o> Xoyovs, that you may know the words which I bring (Eur. Or. 1628). Nvv 8' av ertpov TI fJKfis f^cav, now again you bring another thing (Plat. Gorg. 491). *E p x M < yap 8f) ' IT i % t 1 p > v o-oi ftti^ao-dai TTJS alrids TO fl8os, I am now going to try to show you the nature of the cause (Plat. Phaedo 100 b ). "H 1 f ravn^v a I v ( a> v, he went on praising her (Hdt. 1, 122 3 ). -"Ep^o/tai cpeav, I am going to say, am about to say, like the French je vais dire (Hdt. 1, 5 5 ). Xen. Ages. 2, 7. Kai e'yw p.tv 77 a TUS c(pf{-f)s tpoiv, I was going to speak of them in order (Plat. Rep. 449*). *H*cv (Eur. Phoen. 1075). Plat. Prot. 313 a . Homer uses the aorist of /SeuW, go, in this way. BT; (pfvyu>v, he took to flight or he fled (II. 2, 666). Ovs pf) Krjpts tftav davdroio (pfpovcrai, whom the Fates of death did not carry off or whom they did not go to carry off (II. 2, 302). B ff... "A.vTi(pov eg t v ap i a>v, he went to slay Antiphus (II. 11, 101). 2299. With other Verbs. 1. The supplementary participle is occasionally used with Tretpdo/jiai, to try ; TroXu? eytceifiat or eytcfipai alone, to importune, to urge, to be urgent ; TTCLVTO, Troieco, to do everything ; rarely with (nrovSd^a), to be zealous ; with Trapa- yx (a P^ v ; did your wife appear to attend to those matters which you took pains to teach her? (Xen. Oec. 9, 1). Plat. Polit. 310 b ). npcxr/SoXas 1 Trap(fTK(vdovTO TW rd\(t irotrj(r6fj.tvoi, they were preparing to make assaults on the wall (Thuc. 2, 18 1 ). But oftener with a>s preceding the participle, as in Thuc. 2, 7 1 ; Plat. Phaedo 98. 2301 THE PAETICIPLE 313 2. Herodotus often uses the participle with 7reipao/u, to try ; also with TroAXos et/xt, TroAAos ty/cet/xaf, and TravToios elp.i t all meaning to importune, to urge, to be urgent; very rarely with cTm'yo/Aai, to hasten, to press on. 'E,irtipridr)v e IT f\av v a>v eVt rovs av8pas TOVTOVS, I tried marching against these men (Hdt. 7, 9 1 ). n.o A A o s rj v A i v (iroirjQ-fov, Troir)cras, TrftToir)K avrovs IT (\dovras , they saw them approaching (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 2 ). 'OpStfifv TT d v T a d\rjdfj ovra a \eytrf, we see that everything you say is true (Xen. Anab. 5, 5 24 ). 'O 0(bs TO. p^eyiara irpdrrmv 6 par at, God is seen in the performance of his very great works (Xen. Mem. 4, 3 13 ). *H K o v tr t Kvpov tv KtXuu'a ovra, he heard that Cyrus was in Cilicia (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 5 ). *H K o v or f TOV 9 paav ftovXov irpor a s, he was aware that the soldiers ivere tired (Xen. Anab. 2, 2 16 ). "l a- 6 1 pcvroi dvoyros & v, know, however, that you are foolish (Xen. Anab. 2, I 13 ). 'Hn-io-Taro TOVS *E X X TJ v a s OVK f Id tcr p. v ov s viropfvetv rhs povapxias, he knew that the Greeks were not accustomed to put up with monarchies (Isoc. 5, 107). Kare'- p.ddor (pdpp.aKov ijp.lv avrov fyxtavra, I learned that he had poured in poison for you (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 10 ). Xen. Anab. 6, 6 17 . Aia/Se/SXq/if'vos VTTO \\pAv '2vpa.KO(riu>v t d X w crdr}(T6p,fda gvvcXdovTfs dp.Vvtcrdai, we shall be known to have assembled to defend (Thuc. 1, 124 2 ). For yiyvoxrKw with object-gen, and part., see 2309. 'Evi/oijera? ytvos eiriiK(s ad\ia>s 8iaridfp.fvov t perceiving that a respectable race was badly situated (Plat. Criti. 121 b ). With nom. Eur. Hipp. 435. For tvvov, when he is caught doing wrong (Plat. Rep. 609 C ). KaraXa/Li/3aj/ouert rovs (p v X a K a s dp.(pl irvp K a 6 rj- pevovs, they surprised the guards sitting around a fire (Xen. Anab. 4, 2 5 ). Toiiy vopovs Kanovpy&v e'Xf/Trrai, he has been caught violating the laws (Dem. 24, 65). Ov wore TOVTOVS ir po8 18 ov s a\o) p do-ai 8pS>vTas f) p. a s, we may catch ourselves doing this very same thing (Plat. Tim. 63 C ). "A....7rapa TOVS vofiovs IT p ATT a> v T is (pwparai , what one is caught doing against the laws (Dem. 21, 41). Examples of the parti- ciple with av : 2v d evopas Tiva iropov KOI O.TT' ep.ov av yfvop.fvov, Xe'ye, if you see any means of obtaining supplies depending on me, tell me (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 9 ). Evpio-KW fie o>8e av ylvop.va TUVTO, ei \dj3ois rrfv tp-riv a-Kfvrjv, I find that this might happen if thou shouldst take my attire (Hdt. 7, 15 5 ). Eipi'orKw ravTTjv p-ovrfv &v yfvop.evr)v rciv Trapovrtov KCIK&V dira\\ayr)v, I see that this would be the only escape from present ills (Isoc. 7, 16). Ev "crdi fjLT)8fv av fj, e TOVTOOV t TT i %( i p TI v e^ avrfav yevrjcrofj-evov, be assured that I would not have attempted to persuade you of any of these things if I had seen that only your power and wealth would come therefrom (Isoc. 5, 133). Thuc. 1, 76 1 (with nom.). Isoc. 15, 7 (with nom.). ''ETTfdtij-a (A i cr % i v TJ v) ov8ev aXijdts airijyyf^KOTa, I have shown that Aeschines has reported nothing true (Dem. 19, 177). Dem. 29, 5. Xen. Mem. 1, 2 18 . Att^^i^o-fTat TOVTO TT e IT onj K a> s, he will be shown to have done this (Dem. 21, 160). Ae/co Trpwra crofpos ytyms, I will show first that I have been wise (Eur. Med. 548). A^Xdw : Dem. 45, 34 ; Thuc. 3, 84 2 ; Antiphon 38, 5. AjjXoi/ TTOUCH (Hdt. 6, 21 :i ). 'A IT o po\ oyrj K w s, if he shall be shown to have confessed this (Dem. 27, 16). Qavepos yv KOI 8r)noTiKos /cat (pi\dvdpcairos & v, he was evidently a friend of the people and humane (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 60 ). AiJXor et^i (Thuc. 1, 140 4 ). 'EoiKaTf...r)86p.evoi, you appear to be pleased (Xen. Hell. 6, 3 8 ). For ?oica with inf. and with dat. of part., see 2307- 'O/ioXoyou/it'i/i; ova a 8ov\r), it was admitted she was a slave (Isae. 6, 49). 'O/ioXo-y o v fi f da eXddircr, we admit having gone (Lys. 4, 7). Tt'0r//ii v, he will at once be proved to be ridiculous (Xen. Mem. 1, 7 2 ). TiTOS ^yyttXev, Tissaphernes was the first to announce that Cyrus was marching against the king (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 19 ). Xen. Hell. 7, 5 10 . 'A IT j/yye'Xdij 316 THE PARTICIPLE 2302 *Hpaiov Tf"ixs IT o\ top K >v, Philip was announced to be besieging the Heraean wall,ae>e 2311, 2 (Dem. 3, 4). Xen. Hell. 4, 3 13 . For o-uVoi8a and o-uyyiyvwo-Kto (with or without a reflexive pronoun) .and the participle, see 2306. For TTOICW, to represent in art, see 2311, 13. For Ka0iw, to put in a condition, see 2311, 14. Herodotus has eTraioros yivofjM.i, to become known or heard of (like s ; SiJXov ecm and tf>avep6v lari, it is clear, much less often used than S^Xds (s ; ci/$i5//,'o/zai, to lay to heart, to consider well, almost regularly takes on. 'Optopfv OTI ol o~pov(s ovbev 8f)7rov aftiKOv ov8f dvoviov irotovatv, we see that honourable men do nothing unjust or impious (Xen. Hell. 7, 3 6 ). A.KOVW OTI (Xen. Oec. 15, 7). Ala-ddvo^ai OTI (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 U ). OtSa on. (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 45 ). 'Qs (Ar. Nub. 458). Mavddvu r (Thuc. 1, 34 1 ). TiyvuxrKta ws (Eur. Ale. 418). Me'/ii/q/iai OTI (Ar. Eq. 1254). A>?Xoa> OTI (Plat. Farm. 160c). *AyyeXXo> OTI (Xen. Anab. 2, I 4 ). Ai/Xot (sc. fftrav) OTI f-jTiK.fi- CTOVTCU, it was clear that they would attack (Xen. Anab. 5, 2 2S ). A^Xdi/ (Wu>) OTI (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 9 ; Cyr. 2, 4"). Qavepbv (eariv) OTI (Xen. Mem. 3, 9'). "Evdvfifofuu OTI (Isoc. 1, 48 ; with part. Thuc. 1, 120 8 ). 2303. NOTE. Construction with ore. With verbs of remembering and occasionally others, a clause with ore, when, is sometimes used. M ( ftv i] cr a i oTt ov8' dvaypvfiv poi (ovcridv frroirjcras, do you remember when you did not give me leave to utter a sound (Xen. Oec. 2, 11). Lys. 18, 26). OiV0' OT (Eur. Hec. 112). 'AKow>,zK...oTe (Plat. Leg. 782). So in poetry also ^/tos and ^vi'/ca : Soph. Oed. Tyr. 1134 ; A]. 1273. 2304. NOTE. When the participle of an impersonal verb or expression is used, it stands alone in the accusative. 'O p S> KOI trot rovriav 8 e >} cr o v, I see that you will have need of this (Xen. Mem. 2, 6 29 ). Etfloi/ dbvvaTov ov Tip.s K e % pr) p,t v o v avrols (for olfia K(xpr)p.fvos, I know that I have made a virtuous and just use of them, i.e. my speeches (Isoc. 15, 321). Dem. 27, 14. 2306. NOTE. 2,vvoi8a and oi>yyiyvcoo-Ko>. 1. 2wot8a (and a-vyyiy- e/iavTw, to be conscious of, with the reflexive referring to the subject, may take the participle either in the nominative or dative. 'Eyw ovTf p-tya ovre roto-t TI p,lv ov TT OITJO- as, we are conscious within ourselves that we have not acted rightly (Hdt. 5, 91 2 ). Lys. 9, 11. SvyyiKvao-Kv fp.avT

v iro\tpis. Qavovr 'Opeon^v.-.X e y o>, I declare that Orestes is dead (Soph. El. 676). Ov yap tvrv x** v apvr)(rop.ai, I will not deny being happy (Eur. Ale. 1158). Eur. Hel. 1076. Soph. Oed. Col. 1024. Eur. Tro. 478. Eur. Or. 1581. Isolated cases in prose : Plat. Phil. 22* ; Soph. 235. 2311. NOTE. Verbs of Perception with Infinitive. A number of verbs of perception are also used with the infinitive as well as with the participle, with more or less difference of meaning. 1. A.lpdv t p J3d\\ t iv dyyeXXerat, the Assyrian is said to have invaded his territory (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3 30 ). The statement is only a report, and is not yet known to be really so. 2311 THE PARTICIPLE 319 3. Fiyvwo-Kw with the participle means to perceive, to know ; with the infinitive it means to judge, to decide, or to resolve, to decree. F v o v T t s TOVTOV fivai TOV Kaipov, judging that this is the crisis (Thuc. 1, 43 2 ). Hdt. 9, 71 5 . *E y v a> a- a v Hava e'/xot irapaSovvai TOV iralfta, they decided that Pasion should deliver the child to me (Isoc. 17, 16). Hdt. 1, 74"). Xen. Hell. 4, 6". In poetry yiyvokrKO) with the infinitive occasionally means to learn how ; as (tW) y v a> T p e Tepa.v, that he may learn to keep his tongue more quiet (Soph. Ant. 1089). 4. (a) Oloa and eTnWjyAai, with the infinitive, mean to know how to do anything. \vTrr)v (vvovs o 18 f v lacr 6 at (plXos, a benevolent friend knows how to heal a grief (Men. Mon. 319). II. 7, 238. Soph. Aj. 666. 'E IT i a- TOT a t... pT)(Tis ira/jip,r)Kis iroif'iv, he knows how to make very long speeches (Plat. Phaedr. 268). II. 4, 404. Soph. Ant. 472. (b) Ol8a and cTrto-ra/xat are also found with the infinitive in the sense to know or to have a conviction; this use of ol&a is rare and chiefly poetic, while eTribrauai in this sense often occurs in Herodotus, occasionally in Attic poetry. OtSa yap del p.aprvp TJ a e atVo/tai with the participle generally means to be evidently, clearly ; with the infinitive, generally to seem to, to appear (as if). 320 THE PARTICIPLE 2311 'H ^v^f) dddvaros 1 1, you seem to speak well (Ar. Nub. 403). Tj; s rrpbf (rvp.[Mxov avrov irapelvai, he commanded by a proclamation all those desiring freedom to come to him as an ally (Xen. Ag. 1, 33). (c) Ar/Xow and d-n-ofpaivw, to show, declare, occasionally take an infinitive instead of the usual participial construction. AijAoIs yap a v r 6 v pbv fj K e i v xpr}fj.dTa>v f-^ovra, for you show that he has come with a heap of money (Ar. Plut. 269). AiyXoOiref irpoo-itcrdai. rd KeKTjpvyptva, showing that they accepted the proposal (Thuc. 4, 38 1 ). ('H |3ouXJj A i XoyD, to admit, to acknowledge, generally takes the infini- tive, rarely the participle ; as *Epo>s 6/xoAoyetTai ?rapa Travrwv /teya? 6eos flvai, Eros is acknowledged to be a great god (Plat. Symp. 202 b ). Xen. Anab. 1, 9 20 . 11. Ti07)p.i, assume, suppose, vofju with the participle, to test, to prove ; with the infinitive, to show, to explain ; as Lys. 31, 34 ; Xen. Oec. 6, 8. 13. Ilotea) with the participle means to represent in art. "AicXjjTov fVotTjtrtv ("O/wjpoy) e X 6 6 v r a. TOV Mtv(\i>v tirl TTJV 6oivr)v f Homer represents Menelaus coming to the banquet unasked (Plat Symp. 174 C ). Iloif a) with the infinitive means to effect, bring about (see 2216, 2) ; also to assume, suppose a case ; as iroui> bpds ^airarrjdfvTas vir* fpov rJKtiv tls Oacrtv, 1 suppose (or assume) the case that you have been deceived by me and arrive at the Phasis (Xen. Anab. 6, 7 9 ). 2313 THE PAETICIPLE 321 14. Ka0iw with the participle, to put into a condition, to cause ,~ as eav K\atovTas aurous Ka6i(rV 7ro\iT(t>v 81 fvSeiav irepiopav, to permit no one of his countrymen to be in want (Dem. 19, 230). 2. It occurs sometimes with verbs of perception and their causatives. Kfiv f> pas 6 pS> a- iv ddvpovs (sc. ovras), and if they see you dispirited (Xen. Anab. 3, I 36 ). Eur. Hipp. 905. EiSwt evirpfirels ftp as (sc. oi/rar), knowing you to be prepared (Dem. 4, 18). 'Eai> e'v Xeppoj^trw IT v B TJ t'XtTrrrov (sc. oi/ra), if you hear that Philip is in Chersonesus (Dem. 4, 41). 'E/ie ye evpjjo-ere ov KUKOV, you will not find me to be bad (Isae. 7, 41). *Qs KOKOV, that I may prove you base (Soph. Oed. Col. 783). *A y y e X X e Tracroiv a^Xtwrarjjv e' p, f (sc. ovcrav), tell that I am the most miserable of all women (Eur. Hec. 423). USE OF eos WITH THE SUPPLEMENTARY PARTICIPLE 2313. 1. With verbs of perception, saying, and the like, we often find a genitive-absolute preceded by o>s, where we should expect a clause with OTI or an object-accusative with a participle or an accusative with the infinitive. The use of u>s here is the same as with the ordinary 21 322 VERBAL ADJECTIVES 2314 circumstantial participle (2246) : it denotes that the thought is that of the subject of the verb or of some person in the sentence. 'Q s Toivvv OVT a>y T > v 8 e 0-ot fiaOeiv irdpa, it is in your power to learn that this is so, assuming that this is really so (Aesch. Pro. 760). 'Q s e pov dy w v iov p.( v ov OVTs t ov T mv re Air dv T a>v del KOI p f 6 v T wv, thinking that all things were always in motion and in flux (Plat. Cratyl. 439). Ma>v ovv Xe'yetr o> s TOV M.IV a>

v TO s... ; do you then believe that Minos went... ? (Plat. Leg. 624* b ). Soph. Aj. 281. Xen. Anab. 1, 3. 2. This use of ws also occurs with the ordinary supplementary accusative or nominative participle after verbs of perceiving, thinking, saying, and the like. 'Q s prjotv t SOT' to-01 p.' S>v dviaropfls, understand me as knowing nothing of what you ask (Soph. Phil. 253). liar e pa TOV s o\>K(T OVT a, (he comes) to announce that your father is no more (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 956). 'Qs vTpaTTjyrjo-ovTa t p. f...fjnj8tls 1>p>v Xeye'rto, let no one of you speak of me as one who is to be commanding.... (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 15 ). 'Q s pf) 'P.TT o\r) v 1 crd i TT)V fp-r/v v KCIKW, it is clear that he wishes to do some evil (Soph. Aj. 326). Xen. A nab. 1, 5 9 . Ka/i/3d(ri;p ''icovas at AtoXeds w s 8ov\ovs iraTpcatovs e OVT as evofii^f, Cambyses regarded the lonians and Aeolians as slaves inherited from his father (Hdt. 2,1). 'Qs 011% vrrd^tov ov8t IT ICTT fvcru>v \fyets; speakest thou as one who will neither yield nor obey ? (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 625). 3. Sometimes the participle preceded by o>s is practically a circum- stantial. It will be seen that verbs of thinking and saying, which seldom take the supplementary participle, are apt to take it with o>s. VERBAL ADJECTIVES IN -reo?, -rea, -reov 2314. The verbal adjective in -reo?, -red, -reov, is used both personally and impersonally. It is chiefly Attic and is found also in Herodotus, but not in Homer. 2315. Personal Construction. Only verbals formed from transi- tive verbs can be used personally. The verbal then agrees in gender and number with its subject ; and is passive in meaning, expressing necessity (what must be done, like the Latin gerundive in -mdus, -nda, -ndum). The agent is in the dative. The copula <,i is very often omitted. 2318 VERBAL ADJECTIVES 323 'H dp(Ti) (rot dcrK^rea (eVrti>), virtue must be cultivated by you, Lat. virlus tibi colenda est. Ov irpo ye rffs d\T)6(ias Tifj.T]Tfos dvrjp, a man must not be honoured before the truth (Plat. Rep. 595 C ). 'G^eXTjre'd n omitted. 'A o- K r) T f o v (or d(TKr)Tfa) eWt trot rrjv a p e T TJ v, you must cultivate virtue. ETTidvfiijTfov (or TridvfjLijT(a) e'er! Tols dvdp(a7rois Trjs d p ( T f) s, men must desire virtue. 'ETri^etp^re'ov (or firi^eiprjTfa) ecrri croi ra> e p y o>, you must take hold of the work. Tovs (plXovs fvfpytrrjTfov, rr^v 7ro\iv a>V j3o^/xl 8) ftor)dr)Tov fivai rols TT p dy p.av ovSfTror' fKTtov, who desires to be happy must pursue temperance (Plat. Gorg. 507 d ). 'Ireov &i> taj deaa-ofifvovs, we ought to go and see (Xen. Mem. 3, II 1 ). Sometimes both dative and accusative are used in the same sentence ; as in Thuc. 8, 65 3 . 2317. NOTE. In Latin the impersonal construction in -ndum is used only with such verbs as do not govern an object-accusative ; but in archaic Latin the impersonal construction with transitive verbs is occasionally found ; as habendum est canes (Varro). 2318. NOTE. Sometimes an impersonal verbal construction is followed by an infinitive construction in the same sentence, some word like Set or XPV being understood, or implied with the latter ; as TTOir/re'ov a av KeXeui; rj Tro'Xis, T) irf.LQf.iv avTrjv, One must do what the state orders or convince it otherwise (Plat. Crito 51 C ) ; Xen. Mem. 1, 5 5 . 324 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2319 2319. NOTE. The verbal adjectives used impersonally sometimes appear with middle as well as active meaning ; as vXaKTeov, one must guard and one must guard oneself against ; TTCIO-TCOV, one must persuade (rivd) and one must obey (TIVL) ; diraXXa.KTfov, one must release and one must release oneself, get off. # u A a KT iov fudrtpov TOV epara, one must guard against one of these two loves (Plat. Symp. 187 d ). II e i o- T e o v irarpos \6yois, I must obey my father's words (Eur. Hipp. 1182). Eiirtv OTI e K T e o v JJMV to], he said that I ought to be retained (Xen. Hell. 6, I 13 ). INDIRECT DISCOURSE OEATIO OBLIQUA 2320. 1. An assertion or question is said to stand in direct discourse when the original words or thoughts of the speaker or writer are given in the form of an independent sentence. 2. When the words or thoughts of the speaker or writer are incorporated in a sentence as a subordinate clause, and their construction is thus made dependent on a verb of saying, thinking, knoiving, and the like, they are said to stand in indirect discourse (oratio obliqua). 2321. Principal Clauses of Indirect Discourse. Principal clauses of indirect discourse are such clauses as would be principal or leading (independent) clauses also in direct discourse. 1. Those which contain an assertion are expressed by a sub- ordinate clause with on or &>? (see 2016) ; or else by an infinitive construction (see 2192). For the subject of the infinitive, see 2186, 2289. 2. Those which contain a question are introduced by inter- rogative particles or by interrogative pronouns or by indefinite relatives, and are construed according to 2008. 2322. NOTE. Sometimes one leading clause of indirect discourse is introduced by on (s) and the next is joined to the first by ydp, ovv, o, etc. "E\fyov TroXAol OTI ITOVTOS aia \tyoi Stilus \tipo>v yap taj..., many declared that Seuthes uttered proposals of great advantage, for it was winter... (Xen. Anab. 7, 3 13 ). Hdt. 7, 13 1 - a . Dem. 60, 60. 2324 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 325 2323. NOTE. In longer indirect discourse one clause may be introduced by on or ws, and the next may have the infinitive con- struction : Lys. 13, 78. 2324. Subordinate Clauses of Indirect Discourse. Subordinate clauses of indirect discourse are such clauses as would also be subordinate or dependent clauses in direct discourse. 1. If the verb of saying, thinking, knowing, etc., on which the indirect discourse depends, is a primary tense, all such subordinate clauses retain their original mood and tense. Thus : X e j e i on tftcei iv a i By, he says that he has come to see (direct " IJKCO iva 1 8(0," and $>&) simply becomes the third person tSrj, the mood and tense remaining). 2. If the verb of saying, etc., is a past tense, subordinate clau es may be changed to the optative of the same tense ; but subordinate past indicatives (see 2325), must remain unchanged in mood and tense. These rules apply also to subordinate clauses whose leading or governing clause has been changed to a participial construction after verbs of perception (2301). Subjunctives with av, which are changed to the optative, naturally drop av. (a) Subordinate Clauses changed to the Optative after Past Tenses : 'O K.\(av8pos fiTTtv on Aei7T7roi/ OVK fTravoir), d ravra TrfTroirjK&s ft*), Cleander said that he did not approve of Dexippus if he had acted in this way ; i.e. he said " OVK ewaivw e t ravra rrfTroiT)Ke" (Xen. A nab. 6, 6 25 ). "EXeyei/ on troip.os ('iij ijyetcr&u avrols..., fvda ?roXXa KOI dyaQa Xij^otiro, he said that he was prepared to conduct them..., where they would find plenty of good things; i.e. he said " froip.6s tlp.i rjyfla-dm vp.iv..., f v 6a...\ rj -^ e cr 6f " (Xen. Anab. 7, I 33 ). "EXf-yev 6 Qr]pap.(vrjs OTI, f I p.rj TIS KOIWVOVS ixavovs \T]^OITO TU>V 7rpdyp.dT(av, dbiivarov tcroiro rf/v <}\iyap)(iav 8iap.fvtiv } Theramenes said that if one did not adopt enough associates in the measures, it would be impossible for the oligarchy to stand; i.e. he said "ei /*; Tt?...X j^ TOI.., d^vvarov ecrrat" (Xen. Hell. 2, 3 17 ). TKrarafpepvijs u>p.o..., 8iairpa^ofMi... " (Xen. Ages. 1, 10). 'AflrcKpfvaro on fiav- OVK ( TT t o- T a i v T o, he replied that they were learning what they did 326 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2824 not understand; i.e. he replied " fMvddvovtri & OVK t ir ia-Tavrai" (Plat. Euthyd. 276*). 'Xirtuplvaro Sri f3ovX(vV OTpaTiayrwv 5 TI 8v- v air o dyadov, he answered that he would contrive for the soldiers whatever good he could; i.e. he replied "/3ovXvV (pi\u>i> avrw (cat irapaoTarBf cai eVioTaraf \rjiTTfov fir}, Cyrus knew that if he had to fight a battle, he would have to take companions and leaders from among his friends ; i.e. te fi TI pdx*is 8fT), they said they would not proceed unless some one gave them money ; i.e. they said "OVK I/UP, tav P.T] Tis...8 i8 ' 1 8iat3d\\ovTfs, a>s Trpo8aras OVTUS Tlfj.u>pr)df)vai, he said that whoever should be proved guilty of uttering calumnies must be punished as traitors; i.e. he said "ot &v e tXtydaxr i 8ia^d\\ovT(s, xpT)--'" (Xen. Anab. 2, 5 27 ). *E, (lfJ.f) (Koi>T(s dv oigov a it>, they said they would break down the gates if they did not open them willingly; i.e. they said ^(carao-^to-o/^\iv, OTI XAot7ro>s tlrj Svtvvris ra aupa, i IT t\ 17 er 6 e T o TO Mfvcavos crrpaTfVfMi ort rj8r) tv KtXiKta ffv, a messenger came saying that Syennesis had quitted the heights since he had found out that the army of Menon was already in Cilicia (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 21 ). "EXtyov us S(vo(pa>v OI^OITO as SfvOrjv olKr)v icai & v7To-^v tvavTiov dirioop^vTo). Hdt. 1, 87 1 ('... e'Seop^). For the reason of the necessary retention of the subordinate past indicative here, see 2325. (d) Subordinate optatives^ and subordinate indicatives of unreal conditions, naturally remain unchanged : see 2012. 2325. NOTE. 1. The necessity of preserving the past tenses of the indicative of a dependent clause in indirect discourse unchanged, arises from the fact that it would otherwise be generally impossible to distinguish the past time, which is only marked by the augmented form. Compare these examples : (a) Awo-o) Travra a av A.a/3w, I will give, all that I (may] receive. Indirect : IXeyei/ on Sukroi Travra a A.a/?ot or eXeyev cm Swcm Travra a av \dfir), he said he would give all that he might receive. (b) Aoxrco Travra a t. A. a fi o v, I will give all that I (actually) received. Indirect: eAeyev on 8wcroi (or Swcrei) iravra a eXafiev (not Aa/Joi), lie said that he would give all that he has received. Obviously if a \a/?oi could be used in the second indirect example (b), it would not be possible to tell whether it represented " a IXa/Sov," what I (actually) received, or " a av Xa/Jco," what I may (or shall) receive. 2. But where no confusion is possible, as in causal clauses, the past indicative can pass into the optative. Et^e yap \eyeiv 8t dvcrai e a cr e t a v avrov v AiXt'Si rfi 'Apre'/iiSt, he was able to say that the Lacedaemonians waged war against them (the Thebans) because they had refused to march against him (the Persian king) with Agesilaus, and had not even permitted him (Agesilaus) to sacrifice to Artemis at Aulis (Xen. Hell. 7, I 34 ) ; the direct statement was " firo\(fjLT)(roiv Trdvra a %xoiev, it would generally be impossible to tell whether " a e^oicv " represents an original " a e^oftei/," what loe (actually) have, or " d av ZXU>P* V >" w ^ a ^ we ma y ( or shall) have. For this reason a dependent present indicative is mostly retained. 328 INDIRECT DISCOURSE 2326 But the optative may be used when the context makes it perfectly clear that it represents an original indicative, and not a subjunctive with ay. Ot 8' (\fyov, art ra (sc. ^topt'a) irpos fjifoypftpidv rfjs tirl Ba/SuXcuva (sc. 68ot>) *; KOI Mi/Stdv 8 1' % o~ir t p TJKOKV, they said that the regions toward the south were on the road to Babylon and Media, through which the Greeks had come; i.e. they said "TO trpbs p.fo~r)pfipidv...8t' T)o~irtp fjufrf," (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 15 ) ; so Plat. Euthyd. 276, quoted in 2324, 2 (a). 2326. NOTE. Occasionally a dependent (or leading) present or perfect becomes an imperfect or pluperfect in indirect discourse after a past tense ; whereas regularly such a dependent present or perfect would either be retained or changed to the optative. Compare 2020. "EXeyoi/ ou KttXcoj TTJV 'EXXdSa tXfvBtpovv avrov, I av8pas 8i((pdtipfv ovrt xdpas avraipopevovs ovre iro\ep.iovs, they said that he was not liberating Greece in the right way by destroying men who were neither raising their hands against him nor were hostile; direct, " ov Ka\u>s...f\ev6(pois, fl av8pas 8taKf p. t v o v). Dem. 19, 151 (& d\T)(pf i). In such cases the writer uses his own standpoint of time, the present. 2327. NOTE. 1. In the same sentence, the principal clause of the indirect discourse may retain the original indicative, while the sub- ordinate clause may change its verb to the optative ; rarely does the reverse take place. nporjyoptvfv airrois, &> s, fl p.rj f K ir e fjujro K v TOVS \aK(8aifj.oviovs, jroXe- IJLOV f o i a- < i irpbs avrovs, he declared to them that unless they would eject the Lacedaemonians, he would bring war against them ; direct, " f i py fKirifji-^-fTf..., iroXffMv e'loiVw " (Xen. Hell. 4, 8 s ). Xen. Hell. 5, 4 36 ; Ages. 2, 31 'EftoKd 8?i\ov (ivai, on aipT)8' T/V TOV TroXe/iou TTtpas 0118' aTraXXayf) 4>iXt7r7ro>, f I p.r) QTjfiaiovs nal QcrraXovs f%6po\js Troirfo-fit, there was neither end of the war nor escape from it for Philip, as he saw, unless he should make the Thebans and Thes- salians hostile to the city; i.e. Philip's implied thought (or apodosis) was I cannot end or avoid the war, and the protasis, (dv p.r] rrotTjo-w, could have been retained in the third person (av /x) 71-0117077 (Dem. 18, 145). Of 8' aXXot 0;/3aioi, ovs (8(i...irapay(v((rdai iravfrrparia, ( t TI apa (jiff irpo^a>poit) TOIS (irovs (8ia>KOv vTrofptibo/jifvoi, d rrws f 6 (\T), \nrdp\f iv dvrl ra>v evbov, for they wished that if they should capture any one, he should remain a hostage for their friends within; i.e. tav Aa/Jw/iej/ (Thuc. 2, 5 4 ). "Efavyov fvda ^TTOT 6\^oipr)v, I fled where (as I believed) I should never see ; i.e. the thought was tv6a HTJTTOT' ctyo/im, rel. object clause (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 796). "Av8pa ovSev' eWorrov (eapcov), 5 arris dpicfcrfitv. I saw no one in the place who could assist me ; the thought was avftpa ovfttva 6pA Sorts dpKfoy, interrog. subj. (Soph. Phil. 281). Euai>ro trwr^pta dva-tiv, evda Trparrov is s dirayyt\Qfir) TCI Xe^eWa tls Aocf- oaipova, they made a truce with each other (to last) until what had been said should be reported at Sparta ; the thought was ews &v aTrayyeXdf) (Xen. Hell. 3, 2 20 ). 'iTTiroKpdrrjs, OTrore naipbs f*rj, ep.(\\ (rrpaTfiifiv ts rovs Boiwrovr, Hippocrates intended to march against the Boeotians when it should be fit time; i.e. OTTOTO.V naipbs ?j (Thuc. 4, 77 1 )- "ESo^ev nZv avTOis...irpoifvai is r& Trpoo-fav, ecus Kvp, he enjoined him, if he escaped, to return the money to him, but if he met with disaster (lit. if he suffered anything), to make such an offering as he thought would please the goddess and dedicate it to her (Xen. Anab. o, 3 6 ; we might have had d a-fadfiij and ? TI irdQoi). TOIOVTOVS fj\7riov tato-dai KO\ TOVS oXXour oloiirtp av 2>v Trpaypdrcov tiriaTarovvrfs, they hoped that the rest of the people would be like those at the head of affairs (Isoe. 7, 22 ; we might have had oloiirtp tltv). *Hi> f) yvapr), orav '\6r)valoi tir\ V oirKrdfv KivficrBai, Trplv av 6 irpoo~dfv fjyfJTai, I ordered that no one of those behind should move before the man in front lead the way (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2 8 ; or irplv 177011-0). Tovs lirirovs eWXevcre (pvXdrrfiv TOVS dyayovTas, e o> s av TIS o- rj p. T) v ?/, the horses he ordered those who had brought them to watch until some one should give a signal (Xen Cyr. 4 5 36 ; or (o>s TIS 8a>(Tfiv TTfVTt dpyvpiov pvds, t TT a v fls Ba/SvXwva rj K a> was TIS...O ri *x fl Macros 1 ). 6 Ttpi'jSafby irapeivai TOVS ftovXopevovs viraKOva-cu r)v /SacriXeis K arair t P.TT 01, Tiribazus ordered those to be present that wished to hear what terms of peace the king sent down (Xen. Hell. 5, 1 3 ) ; direct fjv flprfvr^v KaraTrfp-TTfi). KaXet rov Aaioi', p.vr)fj.r)v ira\aia>v crrrtpfjidTtov r^outr', v (p' S) v ddvoi p,v avrbs, rrjv 8e TiKTovwav XI'TTOI..., she cries on Laius, bearing memory of that ancient issue by which (as she asserted) he himself had perished, and had left her procreatress (Soph. Oed Tyr. 1245 ; here Bdvoi and stand for fdave and e 2331. NOTE. The present and perfect are occasionally represented in these clauses also by the imperfect and pluperfect, as in 2326 Kvpos inrf9 and /AT/Sa/ieo?, etc. 2. As a general rule, ov is the negative of simple declaration ; while fj.ij is the negative of an expected or wished action or condition (protasis), also of the infinitive. 2335. Ov and prj in Principal Clauses. In principal (or in- dependent) clauses expressing an assertion (1973), ov is used; in those expressing a command or wish (1973), /JLIJ is used. 2336. Ov and nrf in Subordinate Crises. Of subordinate clauses with a finite verb, the following take JJ.TJ : final clauses, clauses after verbs of fearing; conditional clauses, concessive clauses ; consecutive relative clauses which express a possible or necessary or intended result, final relative clauses, conditional rela- tive clauses ; and conditional temporal clauses. Other subordinate clauses take ov. 2344 NEGATIVES 333 2337. NOTE. We may have ou for ^17 whenever a single word, and not the whole clause, is to be negatived. Thus : l^ OUTWS, lav TC o u fj T e, edv TC f)Te, it is so whether you say it not or do say it (Plat. Apol. 25 b ). 2338. Mr] with the Infinitive. The infinitive, when not in indirect discourse, is negatived by JMJ. 2339. NOTE. For wore ou instead of wore py, see 2078. 2340. NOTE. 1. Apparent exceptions occur when ou belongs to a preceding verb, or when ouSet's (ouSeV) is to be regarded as equivalent to ou and TIS (ri) with the negative belonging to the principal verb. Aevpo fJK.ovi> /i rj 8 e v dvvavdai, be convinced that youth and old age can do nothing without each other (Thuc. 6, 18 4 ). Isoc. 1, 41. 2344. NOTE. Sometimes we find ^ in other cases where ov would be expected; as after o7/*ai(Xen. Mem. 1, 2 41 ) ; yiyvwo-Kw (Xen. Hell. 3, 2 81 ) ; fopi (Plat. Gorg. 449') ; 6/xoXoyeo) (Plat. Rep. 456 b ) ; VO/MO> (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5 69 ) ; vn-oTrreu'w (Xen. Anab. 2, 3 13 ) ; d (Xen. Hell. 3, 3"). 334 NEGATIVES 2345 2345. NOTE. Sometimes the negative is drawn from the infinitive to the leading verb. OS (prjfu, I say that.. .not (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 1 ). Ot> vop'fw, / believe that... not (Xen. Hell. 2, 4). OVK agiS>, I request that.. .not (Thuc. 2, 89 1 ). 2346. Ov and prf with Participles, Adjectives and Nouns. Participles, adjectives, and nouns, are negatived by nrf when they express a condition ; otherwise by ov. Thus 6 /ATJ t8w9, any one who does not know, or if any one does not know; but 6 OVK ci&os, the particular person who does not know. In the same way are distinguished 6 p. rj (Ward* and 6 o u Swards. So also f) ov K efjLTTfLpta, the actual non-experience ; but -fj //, 77 e//.7mpui, the possible or eventual non-experience. 2347. NOTE. Participles, belonging to an imperative or to a pro- tasis or to an infinitive which would take /A^, are negatived by /IT/. tyr)(f)io-ao~dt TOV iroXffiov, pr) s OVK aTre'Soxco, to deny that I have paid (Lys. 4,1). Plat. Gorg. 508. This is explained by the Greek conception of such a clause. He does not say exactly, I deny that this is so, but he says I deny this ; it is not so. 2351. With the Infinitive. 1. An infinitive depending on a verb of negative meaning usually takes /AT?. This negative only expresses that the object is negative, and it must be omitted in translating. If the verb of negative meaning is itself negatived, the infinitive usually takes pr) ov which must also be omitted in translating. Thus: aTrayopeva) Aca>, to hinder , /A7roSwv ei'/u, be in the way ; dvrexw and di'Tido/xat, to oppose ; airayopfva) (d-iriiirov) , to forbid ; airoXvw, to acquit; a.7Tf)(Ofj.aL, to refrain,' airoyiyvw- v TO p.fj rj8rj fivat, (vda TraXai a-n-fv8ofjifv, these are in the way of our already being where we have been long hastening (Xen. Anab. 4, 8 14 ). Mlnpov e'e' BJ\ v at, he narrowly escaped being stoned to death (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 2 ). Kt'/wava irapa Tpels d(pelo~av \^jj0ous r 6 p. T) 6avar e v yiyvoivTO TOV fj.rj 6 pdv avrovs TO o\ov orpdreu/xa ai. p.oi, I do not deny that I had fights (Aeschin. 1,136). OvSets TrcoTrort avretTre p,r] ov KoXSts e^eti/ TOVS vofiovs, no one ever denied these laws to be good (Dem. 24, 24). Eur. Hipp. 658. With TO p,Tj ov. O v K dirfo~\6fj.r)v TO p.f) ov K...C X 6 1 1 v, I could not refrain from going (Plat. Rep. 354 b ). M7 irapfjs TO pri ov

v p,f) ov \l TTCLVTO. TO. 8(iv6raTa ira66vTas vppiop,fvovs dir o- 6 a v e t v ; what is to prevent us from dying ignominiously after having suffered the most dreadful outrages ? (Xen. Anab. 3, 1 13 ). T i v a oi dirapvrjo-fo-dai f*T) o v % t avTov eVt'oTacrdat TO StVata ; who, do you think, will deny that he understands what is just ? (Plat. Gorg. 461). 2353. NOTE. Sometimes /M/ is omitted ; after KwXtfw this is usual. Sx'jo'w v fjfuis opxoi KO>XvovK dpvov/jifda, we do not deny having done it (Aesch. Eum. 611). OvSe 8iaK(o\vmxn woiflv, S>v av firidv[if)s, nor do they hinder you from doing what you wish (Plat. Lys. 207 e ) ; Plat. Euthyd. 305 d . 2355. NOTE. Barely p.-q alone stands for /A>) ov. Thus : ovre r)/j.v p. 17 o v KOTayeXaoroy fivai, no one is able to speak otherwise without being ridiculous, i.e. no one is able not to be ridiculous (Plat. Gorg. 509*). 'A8vva.ro. rj v /XT) ov /leyaXct fiXdirrf iv, it was impossible for it not to do much damage (Thuc. 8, 60 1 ). Ov^ $ p.r) o~ia with verbs of fearing, see 2062 ; with the leading clause omitted, see 2067. For ov /^ with the subjunctive (or future indicative) in strong denials, see 1977 ; for ov prf with the future indicative or aorist subjunctive in strong prohibitions, see 1985. 2359. When a negative is followed by one or more compound negatives of the same kind, the negation is simply made stronger. Ov fj.T)i> ov8e fiapftdpovs flprjut, he does not yet even speak of barbarians (Thuc. 1, 3 4 ). Ov8vl ov8ap.fi oufia/xwf oi>dffj.idv noivatviav f\(i, they have no communion anywhere in any way with any one (Plat. Farm. 166*). Xen. Anab. 2, 4 23 . ^Ofivvfii) p.rj8eir ore , 7 swear I will never show you any speech of any one or tell of any to you (Plat. Phaedr. 236 e ). 2360. NOTE. Instead of the negative compounds, the Greek might have the ordinary indefinite pronouns or adverbs. OvTf T is ivos dfTo). But the Greek usually prefers to use the corresponding negatives in such cases. 2361. NOTE. Simple ov or ^ is always separated from its following compound by one or more intervening words. 2362. When a negative is followed by a simple negative, each always has its own negative force, and the two are often equiv- alent to an affirmative. Ovdetr ov K firavxe rt, every one was somewhat affected = no one was not affected (Xen. Symp. 1,9). Ov8e rov *op/iiW (Ktivos ov% 6pa, nor does he not see Phormio = he sees Phormio surely enough (Dem. 36, 46). Isoc. 8, 52. OVK. dyvoia...ov na.Tf8(iev avro, not through ignorance did he not make it known (Plat. Rep. 406). Mi) o$v...S>v t>p.us ovros f^rj7rdrij(rf P.T) 86ro> 8iKT)v, let not this man escape punishment for the deception he practised on you = " do not let him not be punished " (Dem. 19, 77). 2363. NOTE. Observe the difference according to the rules : OVK fTroirjo-fv o v 8 e v, he did not do anything ; but ovotv OVK firoirjo-ev, he did eve) y thing. When ov is followed by /u.^, or /*?? by ov, both negatives retain the separate force. 2367 PAETICLES 339 PLACE OF THE NEGATIVE 2364. 1. The negative particle regularly stands before the word that it negatives. Hence the difference in meaning : Ov irdvTa /caA.o>5 eiroiycrev, not ail things did he do well (i.e. only some) ; liavra ov KaA.ws fvoirjo-cv, hi did all things badly (i.e. none, well), VARIOUS NEGATIVE EXPRESSIONS 2365. See, under Particles (2366) these and other negative ex- pressions I \LOVOV OV Or p.OVOV OV'XJi, OfTOV OV, Oo^ OTl and fJ-7] OTl, OU^ O7TOJS and /AT] OTTOS, ou fjiijv dAAd and ou fte'i TOI dAA, etc. PARTICLES 2366. 1. The Particles are adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections. In the alphabetical list in 2371 are given the conjunctions (particles which connect words or sentences), certain emphatic particles or adverbs, the interrogative and negative particles. 2. The Interjections are numerous, and some are the same as in English ; among them are : # ; a; Ht a; aajejejlejeljvjw, fa> ; ai, ha ! at and aicu, alas ! 2u, Lat. vah ! ha ! da. and poetic eta, Lat. eja ! on ! up ! away ! evol, Lat. evoe ! (Bacchanalian) ; lav, ho ! hallo ! ah ! lavol, ho t ho ! (joy) ; lov, Lat. heu ! alas ! (occasion- ally expresses joy] ; tw, io ! ! (joy), also may express grief; oa ; alas ! ot, ot, oh ! alas ! woe ! ova. expressing astonishment or abhor- rence ; ouai, Lat. vae ! ah ! woe ! WOTT, mariner's or rower's call ; dr(T)aTai, OT(T)OTOI, exclamations of grief or pain ; \e\v, a war-cry, any cry; fj.v, expressing weeping or sighing or indignation; Lat. papae, expression of deep grief or astonishment or joy comic) ; fv, expression of grief or astonishment. 2367. The conjunctions are divided into eleven classes. Several belong to more than one class. 1. Copulative : KU, re, poetic ^8e, epic loc. 2. Disjunctive : % (or), tire, oure (/AT/TC), ovoe (p.rj8e). 3. Adversative : dAAa, drap (Horn, also avrdp), av, 8f, ^,V....8f, {JLfVTOl, \M\V. 340 PARTICLES 2368 4. Comparative : u>s, ^a-irtp, OTTWS, wore, ifj (than), Horn. ^UTC and 5. Declarative : on, SIOTI, us, poetic 6. Final : tva, ws, OTTCDS, prf, poetic opa. 7. Consecutive : wo-re, u>s ; apa, 8>7, vw (poet, also vvv, Horn, vvv and vi;, Hdt. vvv), ow; TOIVW, roiyapovv, TOiyaproi, poet, roi'yap. 8. Conditional : el (lav, rjv, av). 9. Causal : on, 8m, ws, eVei, yap, are, ore, OTTOTC, poet, owe/cot and 10. Concessive : ei KCU, /cat ct, KatVoi, KaiVcp, o/xcos. 11. Temporal : ore, OTTOTC, a>5, CTTCI, 7Ti8i7, axpi, / jtc/ X/ )l OTTTJVIKO, ocraxi?, oTroo-a/cts, tws, lore, c^ ov, <10' ov, ey w ; poet, evre, o , Horn, ^/xos and eis o(Te) /cc. 2368. The emphatic adverbs are : ye, yow, Sat, 817, , /xa, /AV, fJLrjv, vai, vrj, ouv, Trep, rot. 2369. Postpositive Particles are such as cannot stand first in a sentence, but must follow one or more words. The enclitics of course are all postpositive. 2370. Asyndeton. In ordinary discourse every Greek sentence is connected with the preceding one by means of a conjunction ; most frequently Se' is thus used, but often KO.L or ow. The omission of such a connecting particle, termed asyndeton (aa-vvSerov, not connected), sometimes occurs for lively effect, naturally oftener in poetry than in prose (as Soph. El 1234). A connecting particle is not necessary when a demonstrative referring to what precedes stands first in the sentence. After an. announcement of something to follow by words like o8e, roido-Se and the like, the new sentence is usually joined to the preceding one without the intervention of a particle; but' sometimes yap is here employed. 2371. List of Particles. In the following list the more important particles are mentioned, and quoted examples are given when neces- sary. The prepositions are given in 1843 1864. For the syntax of the ordinary adverb, see 1865. The negative particles are explained in 2334 2365. Certain interrogative particles are explained in 2008 and 2009. Certain affirmative and negative particles used in answering 2371 PAETICLES 341 questions are also mentioned in 2010, 4. The sections of the syntax are also indicated in which the uses of certain other particles in the list are explained. 1 . 'AXAd, but, yet, the ordinary meanings. (a) Often dAAd introduces a reply or stidden transition, and may then be rendered by well, or need not be translated. *Hi> fffuv 17717077 , /cat 6 'Sfvdrjs ffprj "dAXa ol8a Ka>p.as TroXXay ," if you lead us , and Seuthes replied, "Well, I know of many villages " (Xen. Anab. 7, 3 9 ). Xen. Anab. 2, I 4 ; 3, I 35 . Km /*oi eVt'8ii/ TJ)S jBpaxvXoyias iroir)(rai 'A XX a TTOIJJO-O), show me an example of brevity of speech. I will do so (Plat. Gorg. 449 C ). (b) A sudden exhortation is introduced by dAAd, come now ! Ti Sel I Aeyeii/; dAA' ire ei? M^Sou?, what more need I add ? come now ! .....join the Medes (Xen. Gyr. 1, 5 U ). 'A A. A' iw/xev (Plat. Prot. 311 ft ). (c) After a conditional clause dAAa often means at least ; dAAa ye, (but) then at least; dAA' ow, but then; dAA' ow....ye, but then. ..at least. Ei a-copa 8ov\ov, a X X* 6 vovs eXevdepos, even if the body be captive, the soul at least is free (Soph. fr. 855). Aet TTfipaa-dai onus, fjv pev 8ww[j.e6a, . .../u.e$a, ei 8e p.r), a X X a KaXwy y e dTrodvT)fj.fv, we must try if we can, to save ourselves, but if we cannot, then at least to die nobly (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 3 ; 7, 7 43 ; 2, 5 19 ; Ag. 2, 21). The condition may be omitted ; as Z> deal Trarpwot, a-vyyevea-de y' a X X a vvv, gods of my ancestors, help me at least now, if (or as) you did not before (Soph. El. 411). (d) Sometimes dA\a is to be rendered by rather, on the contrary ; a preceding negative clause is understood. K.iv8vvos TroXXous a7roXXv(r$ai fjv dp.f\S)s re KCU d(f)v\dKTO>s iropfinj 7 ). (e) 'AAA' r) after a negative means except ; as dpyu'piov ou/c e^w a A A' TJ fjiiKpov TL, I have no money except a little (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 63 ; 4, 6 11 ). Probably dAA' T? stands for dAAo ^. (/) See under ov (67 below) the following : ov (^77) /Aoi'oj/....dAAa KUL, dAA' ov and dAAa fj^r), ov\ OTCJS. ...dAAa xai, p-rj ort. ...dAAa /cat', ov p.rjv dAAa. 2. "AXXo TI (TI), in questions, see 2008, 4. 3. "AAXus, in another way, otherwise, in vain, at random (Soph. 342 PARTICLES 2371 Oed. Tyr. 1151 ; Xen. Anab-. 5, I 7 ). iy oAAws, to no purpose (1280). "AAAws n /cat means especially (Xen. Anab. 5, 6 9 ; Xen. Hell. 6, 3 10 ). 4. "Apx, together with, improper prep., see 1771 ; with participles, see 2270; a-i.fi. ...K apa referring to the future (Xen. Anab. 5, I 13 ).---Et apa interrogative, whether or if indeed (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 s2 ). 7. *Apa, interrogative particle, see 2008. "Apa (postpositive), see 6. 8. 'Ardp, Horn, also a,vrdp, but, yet (Xen. Anab. 7, 7 10 ; Hell. 5, 4 17 ). 9. "Are, with participles, see 2271, 2272. 10. A3 (postpositive), on the other hand, in return, moreover (Xen. Anab. 1, 10 11 ; 2, 6 5 ). Epic 8eA<'' ov yap a A. A' e^w /ca/cu>9, (fo no mock me, brother, for I am ill (Ar. Ban. 58). 13. Te (enclitic), an intensive particle, serving to emphasise the preceding word (Lafc. quidem), may sometimes be translated by at least, even, indeed, just; but in most cases is best rendered by emphasising the particular word or giving it a prominent place in the sentence. Xfip.S)v6s y f OVTOS, oiov Xe'yety, the ivinter being just as you say = during so severe a winter as you say (Xen. Anab. 5, 8 3 ). Airw ei/i y e dv8pi, and indeed to himself (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 s ). -It is found particularly with pronouns : as 0? ye, who = Lat. qui quidem; eytaye, I for my part. So eVeiye, just because. Very often yc is inserted between the article and its noun, or between the preposition and its noun : thus ol ye ayaOot, os. 14, Tooc (= ye ovv, postpositive), at any rate, at least, then, in truth (Lat. certe). 2ii 8( p.oi 8oKfls ravavria Trjs s ov8' av fls 8ov\os virb dea-Trorrj Statrco/xei'Of pdveif, you (Socrates) seem to have enjoyed the opposite from philosophy ; at least, you live in a way in which no slave would continue to live with his master (Xen. Mem. 1, 6- ; 4, 3 10 ). J5. Aai, an Attic colloquial particle (postpositive), used only in urgent questions and in the formulas ri Sat; (= "what then?" or " why then ? ") and (less frequently) TTWS oai -, (" how then ? " or " how now?"). Xen. Cyr. 5, I 8 . Ar. Nub. 1266. Compare 877. 16. Ae" (postpositive), but, and, usually does not introduce any- thing contrary, but merely something else . or something new ; in numberless cases it only serves to. connect a sentence with what 344 PARTICLES 2371 precedes (see 2370), and is then seldom rendered by but ; usually it is equivalent to and, and very often it need not be translated at all. For ov 8f we usually find ov (JLCVTOL to avoid confusion with ovSe'. For /xtv....8f, see below 48 (B). 17, At) (postpositive), an emphatic particle, has a variety of meanings. (a) Originally temporal, it may mean now, already, just. 'O iraTT)p KOI f) p.T)Tr)p irdXai 8 17. ...e rer f X VT T) K e s f\ (l > * E X &?, is it not so ? Of course it is (Plat. Apol. 27)- A^Xoi/ 8rj, 8fi\a 817, it is quite clear, evidently (Plat. Gorg. 478 b ; Rep. 387 C )- So, often with superlatives and words expressing number or quantity : K/mTtoTos 817, the very greatest (Xen. Anab. 1, 9 20 ) ; iroAAa 8^ mi KaXa epya (Plat. Menex. 239*). (c) Very often 877 adds emphasis to other particles and to pro- nouns ; as et 817, if really ; ore 817, just when ; 9 877, JW 817, just that ; OVTCJS 877, just so ; o? 817, just the one who ; OOTIS 817, quicunque, etc. Koi 8r) KOI, and also in particular, and also of course (Hdt. 1, 29 ; Plat. Phaedo 59 d ). For 877 in ST^TTOTC, etc. see TTOTC. 2371 PARTICLES 345 / (d) To 8e is sometimes added 8*7 to emphasise the thought ; as et? Se 8rj eiTre, but one even said (Xen. Anab. 1, 3 14 ; 7, I 28 ). So dXXa 8rj (Xen. ^wa&. 6, 3 16 ). (e) As a particle of inference, 877 means therefore, accordingly, hence. *EXeydi> (rive?) ort (can'Soiei/ orpdrev/xa, ai VVKTO>P TroXXa Trvpa (paivoivro. 'ESoKet 817 rots 1 crrpaTrjyols OVK darepavXd? fitv 8 17 ovr e* T>V TOIOVTWV , you surely are not one of those men (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 1 ). is a stronger form (Dem. 14, 34). 20. Arjra (postpositive), a stronger form of 817, of course, surely ; as ou S^ra, no, surely not (Plat. Crito 49 b ). With questions, as TTWS Syra; how then ? (Plat. Gorg. 469 b ). 21. AIOTI. (a) Causal (= 8ta TOVTO on), because, see 2015, 3. (b) Declarative (rarely), that = on, see 2015, 3. (c) Relative and indirectly interrogative, wherefore (Xen. Cyr. 8, 4 13 ). 22. 'E6.v (= d & v ), if, conditional particle, see 2090, 2098, 2109. For lav in certain indirect questions, see 2034. For lav T. ...lav re, see 2118. For lav /cat and /ecu lav, see 2133. 23. El. (1) Conditional particle, if, see 2090. For ct in certain indirect questions, see 2034. For i /cat and /cat ei, see 2133. For d = because, see 2074. For el, whether, in indirect questions, see 2024. (2) Ei /jLTfj, if not, unless, Lat. nisi. Without a verb after a nega- tion = except (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 6 ; 2, I 12 ), see 2131. So on ^77 (see 66 (b) below). (3) Ei fjii] et, except if, Lat. nisi si, sometimes occurs (Plat. Gorg. 480 b ). See 2131. (4) Et pi) apa, unless indeed, see 6 above. (5) Ei pr) om, except for, see 2131. (6) HXrjv d, see v\-r]v below and 2131. 346 PAKTICLES 2371 (7) Ei TIS (TI) is often found for OCTTIS ', as tVccuv KOL )(l\.ov *ai I T t a\Ao xprpLfLov i/v, they burned all the fodder and whatever ( = if any- thing") else was of use (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 1 ). 24. El ydp and eifle, particles of wishing, that, see 1999, 2 ; so in poetry ei (2001). 25. Elos, evus, Horn, for Ito? (2161). 26. Eiirep, with the indicative, means if really (=if, as is really the case), Lat. si quiden. Xen. Anab. 1, 7 9 . 27. Eis o K, Horn. = I<09. 28. Elra and eirerra, then, thereupon, used temporally and in enumerations ; after Trpwrov /leV often = in the second place ; even when /*eV precedes they are usually found without 8e, as in Dem. 2, 1. Use with participles, see 2270, 2. In ironical questions, eTra (iTrctra^ K' av TrpOrrrf TIS fS, one's country is every land where one does well (Ar. Plut. 1151). Soph. Aj. 386. (b) As a final particle, tavrov K a i rrjv yvvaiKa K a t ra Tfuva nal TJJV 8vvap.iv ivt\ti(turt (Xen. Ages. 3, 3). For icai avroy and Kai. OVTOS, see 1428, 1431, 1478. (1) Kai....u, both and, the two members considered separately^ "ApXOVTts pAv flat. K ai ol /3ovcoXot ru>v ftou>v (cat ot i7riro(f)opftol T>V tTTTTcov, herdsmen are rulers of oxen and horse-feeders of horses (Xen. Cyr. 1, I 2 ; Plat. Euthyphr. 7 d ). (2) Tc in prose is mostly TC....TC to connect clauses, and TC /cat to. connect thoughts or words (both. ...and, not only.... but also, on the one hand.... on the other hand). Tov o-wpmos avros rt OVK f)p.f\fi, roi/s T' a/Lie AoiWar OVK iirfjvti., he did not neglect the body and did not praise those that did (Xen. Mem,. 1, 2 4 ; Anab.. 3, 2 3i) ). 'Edrjpevov aVo ITTTTOV, oTrore yvp-vdvai. tavrov T e K a I TOVS ITTTTOVS fiovXoiTO, he hunted on horseback whenever he wished to exercise himself and the horses (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 7 ). For XXws T Kai, see 3 above. (3) Kai often stands between an adjective of quantity or number (like TroXu's and oXiyos) and another adjective relating to the same sub- stantive. 348 PAETICLES 2371 IloXXot yap K a i dyadol $tXot, many good friends = many friends and good ones (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2 12 ). Sometimes we find re nai between iro\vs (oXt'yo?) and a following adjective; as TroXXfly re K a I fv8aipovas KOI /leyaXas 1 TToXetr, many rich and large cities (Xen. Anab. 3, 2 23 ). (4) Kat....Sc means and. ...also (even), here 8e meaning and and /cat also (even). Aapeto? Kvpov crarpdirrfv (irolrja-f K at arrpaTTjyov 8 e oVe'Set^e, he made him satrap and even (also) appointed him commander (Xen. Anab. 1, I 2 ; 2, 6 8 ). But in this sense double /cat is also used with a particle intervening ; as (cat 817 (cat, and of course also, and in particular (Plat. Phaedo 59 d ; Hdt. 1, 29) ; (cat ert (cat vvv, and even now yet. (5) Before superlatives /cut strengthens, like the Latin vel ; as /cat /taAiora, and most particularly (Xen. Cyr. 2, I 13 ) ; /cat ^porarov, even very foolishly (Xen. Anab. 3, 2' 22 ). (6) After words of likeness, /cat, like Latin atque, is equivalent to as. AvSot vop.ois IT a p a7r\T] (cat r>v Kii>8f)vu>v p.(T(\(i,v, as you share the honours, so you ought also to share the dangers (Xen. Hell. 2, 4 9 ). "O(T oi8a (ciyco, irdvra eVioDjo-et, whatever I know you also will know (Soph. Oed. Col. 53). So arise the formulas et TIS KOI oXXoy, &s TLS (cat aXXo?, (iTTorf (cat aXXorf, where ai is not translated ; as et TIS (cat aXXor dvf/p, (cat Kvpos agios ftrri 6avp.d(c Tovrta 8v' tj rpels 8po/jiovs ir(pi(\T)\vdarf fj6ni'(a...Ktu. see 2288. Rarely does the Greek use a temporal conjunction in such cases, as in Xen. 1, 8' (fjviKa). (9) Occasionally we find clauses contrasted by Te'....8 : Soph. Phil. 1312. (10) In epic poetry ri is often found with conjunctions ; as fitv, Se, ovoe, (cat, ydp, ore ; also with other particles, 2371 PARTICLES 349 especially in os pd re (Od. 12, 39) ; also with irep ; with I), really ; in questions, T' apa ; with relatives, as os TC. In Hdt. ocrov TC = about (Hdt. 2, 71) ; in Attic WO-TC, are, oto's TC are relics of this early extensive use of re. In all the above cases re cannot be translated. 45, Kaiirep (Horn. /cat. ...Trep), although, always with a participle (2274). 46, KCHTOI, 'and yet, although, always introduces an independent clause (Xen. Mem. 2, 3 16 ). 47, Md particle used in swearing (1603 1604). 48, McV (postpositive) originally = prjv, indeed, truly. (A) (1) The word is used alone with its original meaning, indeed, truly, in a few isolated cases ; as in Xen. Anab. 1, 7 6 ; 7, 6 n . (2) It is always found for p.r)v in the phrases : TTO.VV //./ ovv, ^.aXurra. fitv ovv, Kopiorj p.cv ovv, yes, most assuredly ; iravTa-n-do-L /x,ev ovv, yes, by all means ; KOI ftev 817, and surely yet ; dAXa /xcv or/, but surely yet (Plat. Gorg. 471*) ; ov /j.ev o-rj, yet surely not (Xen. Anab. '2, 2 3 ) ; ov fiev ovv, no, indeed not (Plat. Symp. 201 C ). (3) The expression p. I v ovv may mean according to the context either yes, indeed or no, rather (Plat. Phaedr. 230* ; Crito 44 b ). (4) Mfv ovv, like p.tv orf (17, e), is very often used in transitions, now (Xen. Anab, 2, 5 15 ). 5. In Homer and Herodotus we find the formulas ^ /xo/, ov fj.ev, fir) fj.(v in strong assertions. Homer has much oftener KCU p,tv than /cat p-tv Srj. (6) In questions p.iv is equivalent to fj,r}v (Ar. Av. 1214; Plat. Charm. 153 ). (B) (1) The, ordinary use of /xeV is in connection with a following os or fjufvToi, one particle belonging to one thought or sentence, and the other particle belonging to another, thus forming a contrast (p.v 8c, fjifv /ueVroi). This is a favourite Greek idiom. Occasionally this may be translated by indeed but or on the one hand on the other ; but usually fitv is left untranslated, and Se is rendered by but or and. 'O fjitv fiios fipaxys, fj fie T(\vr} p-aicpa, life indeed is short, but art it long (Lucian, Herm. 63). For o /*i/ 6 fie, see 1377. In cases of anaphora (the repetition of the same word in two 350 PARTICLES 2371 succeeding sentences) /zei/. ...8e are generally employed, 8e here = but (and) also. Svvtifu f*v dfois, ovveipj. 8* dvtfpdwoi? TOI? dyado'is, I associate with the gods and also with good men (Xen. Mem. 2, I 33 ; Anab. 7, 5 14 ). (2 1 Instead of oe or /i/eVroi, the particles d\\d, drdp, ^v, ov prjv dX\, TOIVVV are sometimes used to correspond to /xeV. Sometimes the contrasted thought is expressed without any of the above particles, in some other way. Homer has, besides 8e, also dAAa, drdp, avrdp, av, avre, and KCU, corresponding to /AC'V. (3) If more than two members are contrasted, only the first has /AC'V, all the others oe. (4) Within a contrast indicated by p*v ..... 8e, there may be another Contrast also indicated by /txcv ..... 6"e. 'O //.ev dvrjp TOiavra /j.ev TTfTTOirjKe, roiavTo. oc Xeyei u/xa>v 8e aivTai, roiavra /A e v IOTIV /xot ola 8 crot', Toiavra 8e au croi (Plat. Theaet. 152"). Dem. 2, 18. 6. Clauses are often co-ordinated by /icv....8e' when in English one is subordinated to the other by a conjunction like while. \l) TTOif](Tai TTJV virdpxov p t v oip.ai dvrd^iov (ivai TU>V irdvTtav xprjpdTtav, JT, jor my part, consider that to be free is worth all riches (Xen. Hell. 4, I 38 ). (9) From T/ and /xV and 8e are derived i^tV and i^Se, and. 'Hfjiev is epic, often found with rjot corresponding (= T....cat). 'H8e is found alone often in epic poetry, and occasionally in the tragedians (mostly Aeschylus). Horn, also t8c, and. 2371 PARTICLES 351 (10) Position of yneV and 8e. When several postpositive particles meet, /ueV and Se come first ; as oo-a pev S^.-.-eyei/cro (Xen. Anab. 4, I 1 ). : When the words contrasted are nouns with their articles, /*eV and 8e come between the article and the noun ; if the contrasted words are prepositional phrases, yue'v and 8e come after the preposition. To fjiev (rw/iara...., rj 8e ^vx^l (Isoc. 1, 12) ; els p e v TOVS v$piovres, rois 8e 8ov\fvovTfS (Isoc. 4, 151). In cases like TOVTOV 8e rfjv VVK.TO. fj,ev Sijcrere, TTJV 8( rjfjiepav a(pr)tXo- (rotpo) jjLfv comas "urdi. pevroi dvorjTos 3>v, you seem like a philosopher, but know that you are foolish (Xen. Anab. 2, I 13 ). Xen. Anab. 1, 9 6 (truly). 50. Me'xpi, axpi, until, 2161 ; as preposition, up to, 1862, 1. 51. Mrj, not, as a negative, 2334. In final clauses, 2037. After verbs of fearing, 2062 ; without a principal clause, 2067. For fj.rj and fiTj ov with the subjunctive = perhaps, perhaps not. For ^ in questions, 2008. 52. MTjSe, see oiSc below. 53. MV^ (postpositive), partly strengthening, in truth (II. 23, 410) ; oftener adversative, yet,, however (Plat. Tim. 20 b ). In questions, then ; as TIVOS /J.TJV eve/cot IjjuivOdveTC ro^euciv; (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6 28 ). Ti fJLrjv ; what then ? in Attic = of course (Plat. Leg. 690*). For rj ^v see 2371, 35. 'AXAo. fn-qv (at vero), yet truly, and KOL ^v (et vero, et sane), and yet, nay more, introduce objections or merely something additional .(Xen. Anab. 3, I 17 ; 1, 9 18 ; Ar. Ban. 106). For ov p.rjv after /ueV, and ov nty aXXd, see below under ov, 2371, 67 (/). 54. Mi^re, see ovre below under ov in 2371, 67 (d). 55. MTJ TI ye (8Vj), not to say, to say nothing of, Lat. nedum (Dem. 21, 148). See ^ on under ov in 2371, 67 (d). 56. M&V (= p)) ovv), interrogative particle expecting the answer no, like Lat. nvm (2008). 352 PAKTICLES 2371 57, Nai, yes, surely, in answers. For vol fid, see 1603 1604. For other ways of expressing yes, see 2010. 58, NT}, see 16031604. 59. NUK, now, at present. After a conditional sentence (2089), >tv Se means but then, but now, Lat. nunc vero (Dem. 1, 9). Nw or vvv (enclitic, weakened from vw), used inferentially, then, therefore, with an imperative synonymously with orj (as Xen. Anab. 7, 2 26 ). See roivw. In Homer vvv and vv are not confined to the imperative. 60. Ola, otoi', with participles (2271). 61 "Ofius, nevertheless, notwithstanding, with participles, 2275. 62, "OTTWS, as, that, in order that. As an indefinite relative adverb : Ov/c IOTIV o TT to s fjfjidpTCTf, in no way have you erred (Dem. 18, 208). Use as final conjunction, 2037 ; with verbs of striving, 2050. For OTTCOS without a principal clause, 2058. For ou^ oVcos, not only, see 67 below. For oVws declarative, that,, see 2015, 2. 63, "o....Too i ouTu>, the.. ..the (1814). 64, "Ore and oirore, when, OS, 2161 ; fjf.ffj.vrjp.ai ore, 2165. For ore, OTTOTC, fTrfLoij, sometimes causal = because, since, whereas, see 2071. 65, OT^, distinguished by the accent from ore; found in ore Sc, but sometimes ; and in ore /iev.. .ore 8e, Lat. modo....ntodo, now. ...now, sometimes.... sometimes, at one time.... at another time. Equivalent expressions are TTOTC /j.ev....irorf 8e, and TOTC /AV....TOT 8e'. 66, "On. Declarative, that, 2213 ; with verbs of perception, 2302 ; causal, because, 2071 ; for on with superlatives, 1359 ; for /AT/ on, not only, 67 below. -"On n ; sc. cVriv, /or w/ia< reason ? (Dem. 23, 214). 'OTIT/, because, colloquial for OTI, as in Ar. Nub. 1046 ; see TIT;. (a) The expressions 8fj\ov on (sometimes written SrjXovon), it is clear that, evidently, clearly, and (e) olo' on, I (well) know that, certainly, are almost used like adverbs, and are added to or inserted in the sentence. *A (iriaravTcu 8fj\ov on, with regard to what they know (they are wise), it is clear (Xen. Mem. 4, 6 7 ). ndpei/u 8' UKUV ovx (novo-tv, olo' OTI, I am unwilling here to unwilling hearers, I know (Soph. Ant. 276). (b) 'On /IT/ after a negative = ei /AT;, except (67 below and 2131) ; as OVK fTTL OeUtpiaV TTtOTTOT* K TT/S 7ToA.(l)S C^X^CS OTI fir) ttTTtt^ t? 'Io~6fJMV, yOU never went out to see the games except once to the Isthmus (Plat. Crito 52 b ). 2371 PAETICLES 353 (c) Like the Latin quod, on sometimes means that = as far as this is concerned. E?7roi/i.' av eyaye ort TO p.ev a\\a opdws f/Kovo-as, or i 8e KCU e/j,e old fiTrelv TOVTO, iraprjKovo-as, I should say that you heard the other things right, but that when you think I said this, you heard wrong (Plat. Prot. 330*). Oftener o is soused, as in Xen. Hier. 6, 12 (o 8' e^Xwcray....). (d) Homer also has simple o in the sense of that ; as in Od. 3, 146 and 166 (2071, 2 ; 2015, 5). Originally on was identical with o . 67. Oo, not, treated in detail with /^ in 2334 2365. Ov, no, as in Xen. Mem. 6, 6 2 , see 2010, 3. In questions = ap ov or OVKOVV, as in Xen. Anab. 3, I 29 ; see 2008. (a) Movoi/ ov, P.OVOV ovx/ (lit. only not, Lat. tantum non), almost, all but. Ovs f)o~v\iq r/v, dXXa K ai ot (p[\oi avrov, not only was Crito himself unmolested, but also his friends (Xen. Mem. 2, 9 8 ). M) art dfbs dXXa KCM avdpwTrot, not only a god, but also men (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2 17 ). Xen. Hier. 8, 5. Ov% o TT co ?....d X X a K a i, not only not. ...but also. H yfj ov\ oira>s nva x (A"?) OTTO) s....dXX' ov8( or /irjSf, not only not. ...but not even. O u x o IT a) s TT)S KOivf/s fXfvdtpias p.fT(%op,fv dXX' ov 8 f 8ov\tids p,(Tpias ^wo- 6r)p(v ruxfiv, not only have we no share in the common liberty, but we are not even deemed worthy of meeting with moderate slavery (Isoc. 14, 3). M 17 oirats opxdo-dai tv pvdpw a X X' ov 8" opdovo~6ai (8vva(rOt, not only were you not able to dance in measure, but you were not able even to stand straight (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3 10 ). Xp) TOV p.r) TV\ovTa yvs frj^iovv a XX a 23 354 PARTICLES 2371 ft Tj 8' aripdfiv, the state ought not only not punish the man who is wrong in Jiis opinion, but ought not even to degrade him (Thuc. 3, 42 7 ). Ov8....p.f) ort, not even much less (not to say). Ata rbv ^et/^wi/a oi'dt ir\tlv, ftf) on avcupficrGai rovs avdpas Svvarov qv, on account of the storm it was not even possible to put to sea, much less to rescue the men (Xen. Hell. 2, 3 3S ). Xen. Symp. 2, 26. Plat. Rep. 398*. Of the above, the expressions beginning with ov stand for OVK cpu> (Xe'yw) OTTOS, I will (do) not say that : those beginning with /AT? stand for some expression like /AT) CITTW on, not to say or /AT) "7075 cm or /AT) flTT) TIS OTl. (e) Ov tir/v after /AeV = ov /AeWot (Isoc. 4, 15). (/) Ou /AT)V dAAa and ov /AC'VTOI dXXa, nevertheless. These are ex- plained by the omission of something before dXXa which is contrasted with what follows. 'O 1irnos....fUKpov (Ktlvov e^rrpa^ijXicrev ov pr)v dXXa fTre^fivfv 6 Kvpns, the horse almost threw him over its head ; nevertheless Cyrus kept his seat (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4 8 ; i.e. yet it did not throw him, but [= nevertheless] he kept his seat). Example of the uncommon ov pevroi dXXa, Thuc. 5, 43 a . Compare ov yap dXXd, above, 12 (e). (g) MSAXoi/ r) ov is sometimes found for simple /AaXAov TJ, rather than {instead of), the ov being superfluous. IldXiv o\rjv Sia$flpai /AaXXoi' Jj ov TOVS atTtovs, to destroy a whole city rather than (instead of) the guilty (Thuc. 3, 36 4 ). 68, Ou8^ ((iT]8^), connecting negatives. (a) And not, nor, connecting a negative member with a preceding negative member. Ovotfua yv eXTris rZ/Awpi'ds, o v 8 c aXXT; crwrr/ptd v ; " " Ov p.a rbv At' " f(f)Tj 6 NiKTjparos, '''OVKOVV tpoiyt SoKet," u do you then know a sillier tribe than the rhapsodes?" "No, by Zeus," said Niceratus, "it surely does not seem so to me " (Xen. Symp. 3, 6). 70. OUK (postpositive ; Hdt. and Dor. S>v), therefore, then, consequently. I. The usual meaning is therefore, then, consequently. Tovrois ijtrdr) Kvpo? /3ouXerai o v v irivov ^apls e'/xoO yiyverai, no honourable deed, divine or human, is done without me (Xen. Mem. 2, I 3a ). Ovrt diroo(op(iKd(Ti.v....o vre diroirf>(vyacri, they have not fled secretly nor have they completely escaped (Xen. Anab. 1, 4 8 ). Miyre ^re (Xen. Eques. 9, 11). OSrf /njre (Dem. 19, 149). (a) Ov (/XT/TC).... TC = Lat. neque....et, not only not.. ..but also, on the one hand not. ...and (but) on the other. Ovrt yap tirl tviq TOV KrjpvKii f8tavro, iff pi Tf TTJS ^orfdfias ov8ev airt- Kpivavro, not only did they not show hospitality to the herald, but they gave no answer to the request for help (Xen. Hell. 6, 4 20 ). Xen. Anab. 2, 2 8 ; 7, 3 18 . (b) OvT....ovof, p,Tqre....fi.r)oe are the negative of re 8c (see above, 2371, 44 (8)) ; Thuc. 2, 93 2 ; Xen. Anab. 7, G 22 ; Find. Isth. 2, 44-45. (c) Oure....ovand /XT/TC..../^ are poetic (Eur. Or. 41, 1086). Barely re' OU....TC for ovre....ovre (Eur. Iph. Taur. 1367). 73. OOTI or ov TI, not at all (Plat. Rep. 331). 74. OUTOI (pjjoi), surely not, in nowise (ov or /x,^ + rot ; Xen. Mem. 1, 4 10 ; Aesch. Prom. 625). 75. "O4pa, poetic; temporal, until, as long as (2161); final, that, in order that (2037). 76. n&pos, formerly, poetic. Epic also before with the infini- tive. 2371 PABTICLES 357 77, Rep (enclitic, weakened from older Trepi), very, much, just, even, used to strengthen relatives to which it is attached, as oa-n-fp, just the one who ; also in enrep, if really = since (2071) ; eVeiVe/o, since really, oreirep, just when, just as. For /catVe/a with participles, see 2074. In Homer irep is also used with other words. TvvatKi irep (Od. 11, 441). Upayrov irep, for the very first time (II. 14, 295). *Ev irep oveipa (Od. 19, 541 ; note the position of irfp). Barely with verbs, as Kfiv 6pfj.r)(ravTs rr\f]i> irdvv oXi-yot dp-fp' avrov Ko.Te\fi(pdr)iroi r}8fa>s Trpocr- dexovrai T&S eoprds, TT\T)V oi rvpawoi, all men gladly look forward to feasts except the rulers (Xen. Hier. 1, 18). (3) II A. r) v el without a verb is equivalent to el ^ unless, except (if), Lat. nisi, as Ar. Av. 601. 79, rioXX n ; Plat. Euthyphr. 5). (a) Toiyapovv and Toiydprot (prepositive), therefore, indeed, then, so then ; similar are KOI yap ovv and KOI yap rot (Plat. Soph. 234 e ; Phaedo 82 d ; Xen. Anab. 1, 9 8>9 ; Isoc. 7, 30). KcuVoi, see above. Ourot, see above. MeVroi, see above. -'Hrot, see above. 'Hroi....^, see above. ToiVw, see below. (b) Totyap, poetic ; rapa for rot apo, dramatic. 87. Toui'CKa, for that reason, therefore, see ovve/ca. 88, Toiyuk (postpositive, from roi and vw, not in Homer nor in Pindar), therefore, then, surely now. Aeye 817, TI $17? ftvat TO ocrtov ; Af'yw roivvv, art TO o dSiKoiivTi (irfi(vai, say now ivhat you declare to be holiness....! say then that holiness is to prosecute any one who acts unjustly (Plat. Euthyphr. 5 d ). (a) So rarely p.cv TOIVW is used in transitions like /xcv ow or y^ev By (Isoc. 4, 28 : Xen. Mem. 2, I 10 ). (b) Moreover, for, Lat. atqui (Xen. Mem. 1, 2^ ; Cyr. 1, I 2 ). (c) Sometimes it merely connects like 8e (Xen. Anab. 5, I 9 ). 89. Qs (proclitic), as, ^ai, Lat. ut; it has various uses. (a) As a relative, as, sometimes with a corresponding oimos, so (Lat. ut, ut....ita). 'Q s iro\ffuois avrois xpw^Tat, they treat them as enemies (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1 39 ). "EicAevo-f rovf "EXX^i/ar a> s vcifjios avrois tls piX 7 ?" o^rw ra^^i/at cat OT^fat, /ie ordered the Greeks to be so marshalled and to take their places as was their custom for battle (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 15 ). In exclamations like Lafc. quam (as wr TI&VS, how sweet, see 1542). With superlatives like Lat quam (o>s ftf\Tivros}, see 1359. Considering that, for, like ut in cases like this : Bpao-iftas ffv ov8e advvaros, u> s \aKf8aip.6vios, flirdv, nor was Brasidas unskilled in speaking, for a Lacedaemonian = considering that he was a L. (Thuc. 4, 84' 2 ) ; Xen. Anab. 4, 3 81 . Before numbers, about; as us pvpids fyaxfiar (Lys. 19, 40). So in expressions like as (tVi) TO n-oXv, for the most part (Plat. Rep. 330 ; 377 b ). 2373 SOME FIGUEES OF SYNTAX As if, as for, of what appears to be ; as irapeo-Kfvdfcro s (o> a- a v T a> s), in like manner, just so (Plat. Phaedo 102*). 'Q s e r e p a> s, in the other way, but eYe'pco? ira>s = in some other way (Dem. 18, 85). 'ii r aXrj0S)s, truly, most assuredly (Plat. Phaedo 63 a ). In these cases a>s is the adverb from the article 6, f), TO (originally a demonstrative). (c) 'Os temporal, as, when, as soon as, see 2161. Causal, as, since, because, seeing that, see 2071. Declarative, that, see 2013. Con- secutive, so that, like wore, see 2077. Final, that, in order that, see 2037. In wishes (Lat. utinam), see 2001, 2. As a preposition, to, see 1864. 90. "florrep (from w? and Trep), even as, just as ; only comparative. "Qo-Trep av fl, see 2130. 'Oo-Trep with participles, see 2271. 91 "flare, so that, with resttZ-clauses, see 2077. With verbs of causing and impersonal verbs of happening, see 2217, 2203. With adjectives of fitness, see 2223. Sometimes wo-re = on condition that* see 2081. NOTE. Homer uses wore with resw^-clauses as above, only in II. 9, 42 ; Od. 17, 21. He uses it for comparisons synonomously with wo-n-ep, as. Herodotus uses wore with participles in the same way as are, ola (Hdt. 6, 94). SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 2372. Ellipsis (defect) is the omission of words essential to the thought. Many cases have already been treated. For asyndeton or the absence of connectives between sentences, see 2370. Other oases require no special mention. 2373. Pleonasm (redundance), the reverse of ellipsis, is the introduction of words not essential to the sense ; sometimes this is done for greater clearness. Some cases have already been treated. 1. The apparent redundance of negatives is treated under 2350 2357 ; see also 2358 2363. For fia\\ov and /u-aAio-ra redundant, see 360 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 2374 1354, 1365. For the repetition of av see 1970. So ourosis sometimes used pleonastically (as in Dem. 18, 159). For example of pleonastic repetition of on, see Xen. Anab. 7, 4 5 . 2374. Brachylogy (brevity in speech) is a condensed form of expression in which words essential to the thought are to be inferred from the context. Thus, a predicate verb may have to be supplied, especially an infinitive ; an affirmative expression from a negative ; in a comparison, the owner may be compared instead of the object. " Hoiov nva rovrov vop.iots &v TOV av8pa eivai;" " Afj\ov on," ((far), " paXaKov rt KOI 8(i\6v " (sc. tlvai vo/iifw), " what kind of person would you consider this man to be ? " " Evidently," he said, " a weakling and a coward " (Xen. Mem. 3, 7 1 )- Tavra fyu> croi ov TrddofMi, 2> M\TJT(, OI/JMI 8e ov8f oXXoi/ av6pa>irpdv (\ fTf v8f v tyrrov TJH&V (vripov, here rjfjLoiv for r)r rjfjLfTtpds, you have a land no less prized than our own (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3 41 ). See also the pregnant construction of prepositions (1840, 1841). 2375. Zeugma (yoking) is the grammatical connection of one verb with two or more subjects or objects while it is appropriate only to one. XprjfjLara TfXovvrfs cat \dpiras, paying them money and thanks (for Xapiras 8i86vT(S, Plat. Grit. 48). Ovrt v (rTV(p(\i(-ai, what if the Olympian, the lord of the lightning, wish to dash us from our seats (II. 1, 580). Many examples are like cases of ellipsis. 2377. Anacoluthon (inconsistency) is a change or interruption of the grammatical construction begun in the first part of the sentence. 'Eiridvfj.G>v 6 Kvpo s....(8o(v avrto, Cyrus considering...., it seemed best to him (Xen. Cyr. 7, 5") ; Thuc. 3, 36. 'H/*Ti/ vtvortov fjroi t\iri(ov- ras, we must swim, or hoping (Plat. Rep. 463 d ). In these and in many similar cises, the construction becomes grammatically inconsistent. 2380 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 361 ORDER OF WORDS AND CLAUSES 2378. Usual Order. Owing to its great wealth of inflections, the Greek language is very much less restricted than the modern languages in the position of words in a sentence or of clauses to each other. The usual order of words is : (1) the subject with its qualifying words at the beginning ; (2) the predicate (verb, or the copula elvai with a noun or an adjective) at the end. Oblique cases and adverbs and prepositional phrases belonging to the verb, may come before or after the verb. Tio-(rar ar o i 8f Xeyoi/rat ofroi TSav nfpl fKfivrjv rfjv xpav elvai, the Chaldaeans had each a shield and two javelins, and they are said to be the most warlike of all the people in that part of the world (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 7 ). OuS' av (Xjrls rfv ravra yevea-dai /3 e Xr i a, there would be no hope of this situation becoming better (Dem. 9, 5). Ev8aip.d>v yap IJMI avrjp ffpaivtro < at T ov T p 6 TT ov (cat r > v X 6y a> v, the man appeared to me to be happy both in manner and in discourse (Plat. Phaedo 58). 2380. Postpositives. The following words cannot stand at the beginning of their clause or sentence ; i.e., they are postpositive : 1. The indefinite pronouns and adverbs : TIS, rl, TTOIOS, TTOO-OS, TTU>S, etc. 2. av (modal particle, Epic xe ; except aV = cdV, if) ; apa, Epic dp and pa (except 5pa) ; av (poetic avre), again ; yap, ye, yovv, Sat, of, 8rj (except Epic ST) yap, or) Tore) ; ST/TTOU, orjirovOtv, ST/TTOTC ', orjOtv, Sfjra. ', 362 SOME FIGURES OF SYNTAX 2381 6r)v ; /xeV, /zeiroi, \LVJV ', vvv (Epic vu, except i>vv) ; ow ; Trep ; T ; TO^ TOlVw. 2381. Position of Dependent Clauses. 1. Clauses introduced by on, is, "ya, OTTWS, etc., regularly follow their leading verbs; but they are sometimes placed first for emphasis. "iva 8t v iroKlrfia. fuicpbv (irdvfifu, that the whole form of government of the Persians may be shown more clearly, I shall go back a little (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 15 ). 2. For the placing of the relative clauses before the principal clause for emphasis (as ov eiSes avopa, ovrds CO-TIV), see attraction of relative (1358, 1359). 3. A dependent clause is sometimes inserted within its principal clause ; and a principal clause is sometimes inserted within its dependent clause. Tovrov 8', e IT i IT f p xdpas rf\6(v (Is (p. (is, OVK fort QvrfrSav oortr fi-aipri&fTcu, but this man' since he has come into my hands, there is none of mortal who shall take him from me (Eur. Heracl. 976). 'E<^t p.voi yap (Kfivu>v 018' OTI KoiTjpas Trai8(vcrovv y tyv ofit v v opyfjv y(vto-6at f I beg that there be no resentment on your part towards me for this (Dem. 9, 3). llfx'is o~ ( yovdrcov, for npos yovdrtav o~( (iK(Ttva>), by thy knees, I implore thee (Eur. Hipp. 607). 2383. Juxtaposition. 1. Words expressing similar or opposite ideas are often placed side by side for emphasis ; in this juxtaposition the nominative case precedes the oblique case. Hap' OVK t6f\u>v fdf\ovo~jj, unwilling with her willing (Od. 5 r 155). Swf/v f)\iKia>rais fi86/j.(vos fi8op.fvois f(*oi, I associated with my comrades, delighting in them and they delighting in me (Xen. Hier. 6, 2). 2386 SOME FIGUKES OF SYNTAX 363 2. Thus O.UTOS avrov, etc. Tolr T' avros avrov irr]p.ao-iv ftaptverai, he is weighed down by his own sufferings (Aesch. Ag. 836). Also eV avrbs avrov for avros e(p' avru> (Aesch. Ag. 921); and similar juxtaposition of pronouns, as irpbs avrbs avrov Kfvo T) 8 1 o s or tov v orovovv Stcwpe'pet for 17811 oriovv f)8fOf orovovv, anything whatever pleasant differs from anything else whatever pleas- ant (Plat. Hipp. 1, 299* 1 ) ; OTTO rS>v vp.fr(pwv tp.1v no\ep.fl o-up.p.d\a>v,he maintains war against you through the resources of your allies (Dem. 4, 34). 3. Similar are the frequent forms aXXos aXXo(i') = alius (alium) aliud, aAXos aXXofli = alius alibi, aXXos aXXocre = alius alio, aXXos aXXoflfi/ = alius aliunde, aXXos aXXws = alius aliter, and others ; in English such expressions must often be rendered by two clauses, " the one (some) the other(s) ". *AXXo? oXXoi/ (t\Ki, one drew up another (Xen. Anab. 5, 2 15 ). OvTOf.... aXXop aXXa Xe-yet, these men say, one one thing, and another another thing (Xen. Anab. 2, I 15 ). 'O erepo? TOV erepov, alter alterum (Xen. Anab. 6, I 5 ). KaXoy ovv av p.oi 6 /3ios fly a\\rjv t a X X 77 s TrdXecoy d/iei/3o/AeVa>, a fine life I should lead wandering about from one city to another (Plat. Apol. 37 d ). npbs a X X o T* aXXov for irpbs oXXoi/ oXXore (Aesch. Pro. 276). 2384. Chiasmos. When two pairs of words are contrasted, the order of the second pair is often inverted, thus a : b x b : a. This is called chiasmos (imitation of a X), and is also very common in Latin. KoXoi/ TO yrjpav, aXX' virfpyrjpav KUKOV, old age is a blessing, but dotage an evil (Men. Mon. 608). AipeTovrfpoV e'ori Ka\>s dnodavflv fj C^ v a t o- x p & s, it is more desirable to die nobly than to live shamefully (Isoc. 4, 95). ' olpni TTJS d K pOT drr) s (\fvdeplas SovXei'd TrXet'crTj;, from the most extreme liberty, arises, / suppose, the greatest slavery (Plat. Rep. 564 a ). II. 4, 63 and 64 ; 5, 839. 2385. Hysteron proteron. Two predicates or expressions are sometimes placed not in the logical or natural order of occurrence in time, but in the reverse order. This is called hysteron proteron (the last first), and is employed when the naturally last expression is regarded as the more important and is thus placed first. E?/iTa T' np.rj)t((Tii8(a Kal X o v vTa, I left him both strong and living (Soph. Track. 234 and 235). Tptxpfjv KOI ytvfcriv, the education and birth (Xen. Mem. 3, 5 10 ). 2386. Insertion of Words. 1. A word may be effectively empha- 364 SOME FIGUBES OP SYNTAX 2886 sised by inserting immediately after it particles like Sr;, Wp, ye' ; the modal adverb av ; expressions like OI/ACU, I suppose ; the address *> ai/8p9 'Amatol. Examples : Thuc. 2, 4 8 ; Xen. Cyr. 5, 3 4 ; Dem. 1, 18; 11 6, 242; Aesoh. Sept. 1038; 12. 19, 334; Soph. El. 1188; oi/xat (Plat. Rep. 564*) ; S> avSpes 'A&jvaioi inserted Dem. 4, 2. 2. When the verb ^tjfu introduces a direct quotation, it is regularly inserted in the quotation itself. Kal 6 'StoKpdrrjs tva roivvv, f(f)Tf, /XTJ dp.T) 6 narr^yopos, " TOVS irartpas TrpOTrrfkanl^av ^8i8aa-Kf," " but Socrates," said the accuser, " taught children to show contempt for their parents " (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 49 ). ABBREVIATIONS USED IN CITING GEEEK AUTHOES (In other cases the name or title is given in full) Aesch. .... Aeschylus Ag . . Agamemnon Cho. ..... Choephori Eum Eumenides Pers. ..... .Persae Pro. ..... Prometheus Sept. ..... Septem Supp. ..... Supplices Aeschin Aeschines Ar. ..... Aristophanes Ach. ..... Acharnenses .1 '. ..... Aves Eccl Ecclesiazusae Eq. ..... Equites Lysist. ..... Lysistrata Nub Nubes Plut. ..... Plutus Ran Ranae Thesm. .... Thesmophoriazusae Vesp. ..... Vespae Aristotle .... Aristotle Pol. . . Politica Dem. Eur. Ale. And. Bacch. Demosthenes Euripides Alcestis Andromache Bacchae (365) 366 ABBREVIATIONS Cycl. . . -~ . . . Cyclops El. ... . . . Electra Hec. . . . . , Hecuba Hel. . . . . . Helena Heracl. ' . . . . Heraclidae Here. Fur. .... Hercules Furens Hipp. ..... Hippolytus Iph. Aul. .... Iphigenia Aulidensis Iph. Taur. . ... . Iphigenia Taurica Med. . , . . . Medea Or. " . . . . . Orestes Phoen. ..... Phoenissae Rhes. ..... Rhesus Supp. ..... Supplices Tro. . . . ' .V . * Troades Hdt. . . . . . Herodotus Hes Hesiod Op. . . . ' . . Opera et Dies Scut. ..... Scutum Theogon Theogonia Horn Homer Hym. ..... Hymns II. Iliad Od , Odyssey Isae. ..... Isaeus Isoc. ..... Isocrates Lye. ..... Lycurgus Lys. . . ... Lysias Men Meuander Afon Monostichi Find Pindar Isth. ..... Isthmian Odes Nem Nemean Odes 01 Olympian Odes Pyth . Pythian Odes Plat. . . . . . Plato Ale. J, II . . . . Alcibiades I, II Apol. , . Apology ABBREVIATIONS 367 Charm. Cratyl. Crit. . Critias Euthyd. Euthyphr. Gorg. . Hipp. Maj. Hipp. Min. Lack. . Leg, v Lys. Menex. Meno . Par. . Phaedo Phaedr. Phil. . Pol. . Prot. . Rep. . Soph. . Symp. . Theaet. Theag. . Tim. . Soph. . Aj. . Ant. El. Oed. Col. Oed. Tyr. Phil. . Trach. Theog. Thuc. . Xen. Ages. Anab. Apol. Cyr. Charmides Cratylus Crito Critias Euthydemus. Euthyphro Gorgias Hippias Major Hippia.s Minor Laches. Leges Lysis Menexenus Meno Parmenides Phaedo Phaedrus . Philebus . Politicus Protagoras Republic Sophistes Symposium Theaetetus Theages . Timaeus Sophocles Ajax . Antigone Electra Oedipus Coloneus Oedipus Tyrannus Philoctetes Trachiniae Theognis Thucydides Xenophon . Agesilaus . Anabasis . Apologia Socratis . Cyropaedia 368 ABBEEVIATIONS Eques De Re Equestri Hell. ..... Hellenica Hier Hiero Hipparch Hipparchicus Mem. . " , , . . Memorabilia Oec. ..... Oeconomicus Rep. Ath Respublica Atheniensis Rep. Lac Respublica Lacedaemonia Symp. . . . Symposium Vect. . . . . . De Vectigalibus Ven. . . . De Venatione INDEXES TO THE SYNTAX The numbers refer to the sections. See also the Table of Contents, the Preposi- tions 1828-1864, the Negatives 2334-2365, and the Particles 2366-2372 ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX Ablative case, how expressed in Greek 1563 Accompaniment, dat. of 1773-1775 Accompanying circumstance expressed by participle 2153-2155 Acountability and liability, adjectives of, with gen. 1714, 8 Accusative 1573-1617 ; as direct obj. of transitive verb 1574 ; direct obj. in- stead of object-gen, (with adjectives or nouns) 1576; Greek verbs with direct obj. for English verbs with different constructions 1577-1584 ; with verbs meaning to feel shame or to be afraid 1581, 1582; with intransi- tive verbs 1583 ; ace. of the way with verbs of leading 1584 ; ace. with in- transitive verbs compounded with a prep. 1585 ; aco. of effect (as ypdtjxa l-xiffToK-hv) 1586 ; cognate accusative 1587-1594 ; ace. of specification 1595 ; adverbial accusative 1597 ; ace. of extent (time or space) 1599; aco. of obj. of motion (in poetry) 1602 ; ace. with verbs of swearing 1603 ; double object-aco. with one verb 1605-1608 ; object-ace, and predicate ace. with one verb 1609-1614 ; object-ace, and cog- nate ace. with one verb 1615-1617 ; with verbs meaning to (say) do any- thing, and to divide 1615, 2 and 3 ; also 1616 and 1617 ; accusative absolute 2264-2268 ; accusative of specification, r6 and infinitive some- times so used 2236 Active Infinitive used for passive 2222 Active Voice : transitive and intransi- tive use, causative meaning 1866, 1867 Adjectives 1333-1366 ; adjectives with adverbial force 1317-1321 ; adj. with object-ace. 1576 ; agreement 1333- 1386; adj. and part, used as nouns 1337 ; comparison 1338-1366 ; posi- tive degree with comparative meaning 1338 ; adj. with iroAiJs 1339 ; com- parative equivalent to too, very, rather, somewhat 1340 ; comparative followed by gen. or by 6 (than) 1341- 1343 ; comparative followed by wr6s and gen. of reflex pron. 1344 ; corn- par, expressing highest degree between two 1356 ; comparative with J> Kara. or f> irpAs 1345 ; occasional omission of fj after trKtov (ir\eiv), ' or if>' rt or &r6s, uses 1421, 1423-1431 ; personal pronouns used as reflexives 1437, 1438 Persons, peculiarities in the use of 1245 Place dat. of 1823-1827 ; gen. of place (in poetry) 1732, 1733 Plenty and want, verbs of, with gen. 1674-1679 ; adj. 1714, 5 Pleonasm 2373 Pluperfect, see Perfect Plural, peculiarities in the use of 1227- 1238 Position of clauses, see Order of Words Possessive genitive 1619, 1 ; 1631, 1 ; 1634 ; 1714, 4 Possessive pronouns 1454-1469 ; re- placed by article when ownership is obvious 1454 ; possessive genitives of personal pronouns used instead 1455 ; position of possessive pronouns and possessive genitives with respect to article 1455, 1459 ; adj. or appositive in gen. (dat.) with possessive pron. 1458 ; poss. pron. equivalent to sub- jective or objective gen. 1459 ; re- flexive possessives 1460-1463; parti- tive gen. of reflex, pron. in predicate ENGLISH INDEX TO THE SYNTAX 377 position . 1464 ; simple possessives epe (8 /te or ei yap, also by &f\oi> and infinitive, also (in- Homer) by opt. 2004-2007 ; some- times expressed by infinitive 2229, 3 Zeugma 2375 GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX J6.ya.fMi constructions 1690 ayairdw construction 1806 &yy(\.\f X opMi with infin. or part. 2290, 4 avtf 3>v 1530 (c) iiri' with gen. for ^ after comparatives 1349 afTio?, aiTiov 1768 4{u> with infin. or part. 2290, 5 airo^atVw with part, or infin. 2311, 8 (c) oiroT 1889; ylyvofi.au with adverbs 1222, 1223 with infin. or part. 2311, 3 8r 1748; with ace. of person and gen. of thing (poet.) 1580 StlKrim with part, or infin. 2311, 8 (a) etc. with gen. 1723 ayopa, 1813 (380) GEEEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX 381 tpavepts) tan 2302 6u with part, or infin. 2301 ; 2311, 8 (6) (c). 5td 1888 SoKeea construction 2198, 2 5oKifj.dfa with part, or infin. 2311, 12 5J|cw ravra 2268, 1 Svo with pi. noun 1335 i UVTOV yiyi/effOai etc. 1633 ^$ov\6fjLriv without &v as apodosis of unreality 2108, 1 e5e, txpw etc. without &v in apodosis expressing unreality 2105 e often used for tin, because, after certain verbs 2074 tl 5e yA\ as substitute for conditional clause 2132 eWe (or et yap) in wishes 1999, 2001, 2004, 2007 tlfii as copula 1205, 1216-1218; ey omitted 1216, 1217, 1218, 1792; eJ/J and yiyvonai with adverbs 1222, 1223 eli/oi connecting two ace. 1610 tiirov construction 2198 efs (arfip) with super!. 1363 els (eV) with gen. and house omitted 1279 e'/cao-ros 1416, 6; eKaj/ elvat etc. 2228, 2 eX/tro-eu/ Oe($/ 1579 ^A.ir^w and e\iris constructions 2196, 1 e'/ie avrdv or ourrfi' /ue (a.vr'bv I fit) etc 1440, 1 1/ieA.A.oi/ without Sv as apodosis of un reality 2108, 1 <>bs avrov etc. in poetry 1463 ifi6s, ff6s etc. as reflexives 1465 fiov, e>oi, ^e' used instead of pov etc, 1419 v TO?S with superlative 1364 vwrios construction 1768 1837 S,v 1530 (c) ot/ca constructions 2307 jrei sometimes used in the sense of although 2073 TTI 1837 iri\ai>9di'ofj.ai with part, or infin. 2301 ; 2311, 5 Ivlffranai with part, or infin. 2301 ; 2311, 4 iTpeiria with infin. or part. 2290, 7 eff6i(a with gen. and ace. 1639 iffrl, elffl omitted 1792 nv and yiyverai with plural masc. or fern, subject 1253 1416, 1 tTffos 1491, 1492 in (still) 1353 5 and (npeW reflexives as simple pos- sessives in Old Ionic 1456, 2 8 aKovto as pass, to eS Ae'yw 1888 e5 (/co/cws) Troie?)/ TJ^a 1616 5 -ird irp6s) after comparative 1345 # with superl. 1359, 1362 i| 5' 8s, ? 5' 7} 1509, 1 ol irtvraK&ffioi 1332 382 GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX V = wn come 1900, 2 TJ\'IKOS 1493 ; peculiar assimilation of 1534 (a) foiffvs 1416, 5 ; 1417 y)Hs 1509, 1 jca\ovntvos etc. 2240 icari, compounds of, with verbs, govern- ing gen. 1709-1713 Karedytvai TTJS KeaAijs 1640 Kflpai as pass, to rtOfiKa 1889 KflpeffOai TWI 1789 Ko\dfa 1802 KOTrrfffOal Tiva 1579 jcvpfta with supplementary participle 2286 with obj. used instead of pass. 1890 \a.vOavo> with supplementary participle 2286 \fydnfvos etc. 2240 \fyca construction 2198 XoiSoptiv riva or rwi 1578 \vftaivfff6ai Tiva or ru/i 1578 lf with compar. 1353, with superl 1358 /ioAi with superl. 1358 ; 1365 jti with infin. or part. 2290, 2 w and inf. expressing fut. 1926, 1927 with part, or infin. 2301 ; 2311, 5 fj.ffi.((>eff6ai riva and rtvi 1578 /xeVu construction 2212 1416, 1 1837 fffi, see Negatives and Particles ; fi-fi rarely used alone for ^7; ov 2355; /J.TJ sometimes omitted with infinitive after verbs of negative meaning 2353 ; ^ ov some- times omitted with infinitive after verbs of negative meaning 2354 ; ^ ov with participles and nouns 2357 v 1453, 4 (t.&vos 1416, 4 ; /xoVos TWV a\\cav 1719 V, ffov etc. as reflex, poss. 1467 VIKO.V 'O\v/jiirta etc. 1590 vlKav etc. 1588, 1 viv 1453, 5 VVKT( 1822 filfy construction 1803; with part, or infin. 2311, 11 " 1620 6 St, i, 8, rb 5, 1377, 2 6 fKflfov (for iittivov) rtK 6 M V ..... 6 Sf 1377-1388 3, 8irp, 3, with verb announcing some- thing following 1520 (6) ft ( construction 2198, 2; with part, or infin. 2311, 10 6vofj.a6/ji.ei>os etc. 2240 &TTJ with superl. 1362 oTrolos with superl. 1362 ; in exclamations 1542 dirdffos with superl. 1362 ; in exclamations 1542 dirrfiros, oirolos, 6irr)\iKos, ovov, dirdOfv etc. 1493 8iro)s with superl. 1361 6pd ^, see 2358; ov ^ with subj. or fut. indie, expressing strong denial 1977 ; with fut. indie, or aor. subj. expressing prohibition 1985 5, oOev, ol etc. rel. adv. 1493 5, of etc. (pers. pron.) used as reflexives in Homer 1444, in Attic 1449-1452 ; as personal pronoun in Homer and dia- lects 1453 iu8' (/uT)8") Sis 1509, 1 wSels assimilated in ovotls offre 1485 \iffKdw 1699-1701 ird\ai with pres. tense 1900, 3 irdvra, in all respects 1353, 1358 Trdpa. 1837 vapd with ace. for % after comparatives 1349 vdpos 2182, 5 iros 1416, 2 ; iras ris 1556 iravw with part, or infin. 2290, 2 ire/00/ueu 1749 itflOoi construction 2211 rrf\dfa construction 1759, 1764 384 GREEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX infin. or part. 2290, 6 xtvu with gen. and ace. 1639 x\tlarov with superl. 1358 ; 1365 *\fov (rt) and ri irAeW for /taAAov 1352 AV 1863, 2234, also under Particles trotfta with part, or infin. 2311, 13 Tro\ffjLtii> construction 1763 iroAAo/ and ol iroAAof 1397 *o\\6v with superl. 1358 iro\v, iro\\6v, iroAAy with comparatives 1353, with superl. 1358 *plv 1j 2182, 1 and 5 Trplv....wplv 2182, 4 *p6 with gen. for 1j after comparatives 1349 Trp6s fit 1420 *p6ff6ev....irptv2l82, 3 TrpOTepov 1j, trplv ij, SffTfpov ij, trp&Tfpov (irpd), irpiv irplv, Trdpos, irdpos.... irplv 2182 -rpbrtpov.... irpiv 2182, 3 irvvBdvonat with infin. or part. 2311, 1 irus ov fj.e\\w ; 1927 ffTfavoiiff0ai nvt 1789 ffrtpyu construction 1806 ffvyyiyvwffKu (tfjiavrf) constructions 2306 ; 2311, 16 ffvvottia t/jMvrf constructions 2306 ffwottia nvi (t/jiavrf) n 1780 trvvrpt/ifiv TTJS Kf(T(pos for 8s 1468 Tt added to relatives 1494 r(6vdvai = to fear 1582 -r'oy, -Wa, .-riov verbal adjectives in 2314-2319 Tfpx(ff6ai nvi 1805 TTjAufoCroi 1488-1490 ri,\tK6ffS( 1488-1490 n somewhat 1353 TI ifiol Kal ffol ; 1793 2252 rt ov with indie, aor. in exhortations or commands 1913 rt ov /t'A.A 1927 TI iraOta ; 1990 T/ itaBiav 2252 Tt0ijfi.i assume, with part, or infin. 2311, 11 rwa 1579 1798 Tivf or foOparirois understood with dat. of relation or standpoint 1797 T/S interrog., see Interrog. Pron. rls, rl, see Indefinite Pronouns ; rls as subject omitted 1211, 6 ; T!S equivalent to many a or every one 1557 r6 = wherefore 1370 rb S( adverbial 1382 ri> (ifv....rb Sf etc. 1378, 5 rb rl: etc. 1399 (a) rb -KM/TO!]/ 6avfM.ffr6rarov 1520 (a) rottffSe 1488-1490 TOJOVTOJ 1488-1490 rbi> Kal r6v etc. 1377, 4 Tbv fff Kal i/jit etc. 1399 (6) T0ff6ff&t 1488-1490 TOffovros, roff6a'St, roiovros, rot6ffSe, TTjAj- KOVTOS, TTjAoc^ffSe 1488-1490 ToDr' iittivo and r6y iKtivo 1476 ToCro /ti/....To5ro 5 1377, 5; 1475 yx a " a 1648-1650; with obj. used instead of pass. 1890; with supple- mentary participle 2286 irrfffOai riva 1579 = therefore 1370 1743, 1749 u with infin. or part. 2290, 4 $ j 2182, 2 cuVoyiiat with part, or infin. 2311, 6 (5rj) with imperative 1981, with hortative subj. 1986, 2 iryui as pass, to SIWKCD 1888 G-REEK INDEX TO THE SYNTAX 385 construction 2198 (pOdvu with supplementary participle 2286-2288 Qovtu construction 1747 1579 construction 1803 Xpft* with ace. of person and gen. of thing (poet.) 1580 Xf^? 1748 ; with ace. of person and gen. of thing (poet.) 1580 &v belonging to a predicate-noun or adjective sometimes omitted 2277, 2278 ; sometimes omitted when a supplementary participle 2312 uv, avQ' ui>, ^| uv = TOVTUV Sri (far this, that, because) 1530 (c) us with superl. 1359, 1362 us in exclamations 1542 us with supplementary participle 2313 us with infinitive absolute 2228 us as conjunction, see Particles us as prep, to 1864 us a\-nSus 1501, 9 us fl or us el re in Homer in clauses of comparison 2129, 2130 us ffioi 1797 ucravTus 1509, 1 uffvfp assimilated 1534 uffitfp or us with ace. absolute 2268 uf\\ov as apodosis of unreality in Homer 2108, 3 H>e\ov (-fs, -f) with infinitive to express unattainable wish 2004-2007 ABERDEEN : THE UNIVERSITY PRESS 25 634 9

fi\(\lravTf s els a\\T)\ovs, they both burst out laughing on looking at each other (Plat. Euthyd. 273 d ). 1240. NOTE. The supposition that the dual is used in speaking of things in pairs does not appear tenable. In fact, in most cases it is used where each of two subjects is considered by itself. Several passages occur in the older poetry in which the dual is applied to more than two ; as a.Trorivf.Tov (Horn. II. 8, 186). 1241. NOTE. In adjective words of the first and second declension the masculine dual is usually used for the feminine, especially in the nominative and accusative. T yvvaiKt, the two women (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5 2 ). Tovro> TO> Tiptpa, these two days (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2"). IlalS' (pa>, my two daughters (Eur. Suppl. 140). "l8(crdt T d> 8 ( TO) Ka, $1X01, a> TOV Trarp&ov OIKOV (f(ra>8(, ravrd, ravraiv, and the like are very rare. The dual of a masculine participle of the third declen- sion is occasionally found in poetry ; as trXrjycvTc in II. 8, 455 ; -irpoXnrovre in Hes. Op. 199 ; IXOVTC in Eur. Hipp. 387 ; cAKoirc in Ar. Eccl. 1087. So in Plat. Phaedr. 237 d . GENDERS 1242. The masculine is used in speaking of persons in general and may mean females as well as males. ( C O) av0pa>7ros, any person male or female (but 17 avdpuTros, the female 1245 PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF PEESONS 11 person) ; ot yovds , the parents ; d8(\(poi, brothers or brother and sister. 'O TT o T f p o s &v i) /3eATiG>i/, fW 6 di/r/p (W 17 yvvf), OVT o s KOI ir\(tov (pfpfiai rov dyadov, whichever is the better, whether the man or the woman, he receives also more o/ (/ood (Xen. Oec. 7, 27). Toil/ fvrv \ovvTa>v irdvrfs diwp.ia} f Kflv o s KCU 17 (sc. dvTa>vvp.ia) OVTO s, the pronoun endvos and the pronoun OVTOS. To (sc. prjpa) ypd(p8e(rp.os) d\\d dvrl TOV 8 1, the (conjunction) dXXa is instead of 8e (Soph. Oed. Col. 237, schol.). AetVei f) (sc. irp6dri.s} 8 id, the preposition 8id is wanting (Soph. Oed. Col. 1291, schol.). 1244. NOTE. For the infinitive as a neuter noun, see 2230. For clauses used as neuter substantives, see 1520. For any word or phrase considered merely as such and then taking the neuter article, see 1394, 8. For the neuter relative used in reference to a whole clause or phrase, or word, see 1520. PERSONS 1245. A change of person sometimes occurs. (a) A person speaking of himself in the third person, may in the course of the speech return to the first. 'Evravd' ov8ap.ov At) p.o(r d t vrj v yeypcKpev ou8' alriav ov8(p.iav KOT' ( /iov t here he nowhere mentions (me) Demosthenes nor does he mention any charge against me (Dem. 18, 79). ToC0' v/*u/ Aids roviros va-rarov dpofl- TO 8' a\\' tv "AiSou rois Acarw ^vdi}tro^ai, this last word does Ajax speak to you, all else I shall speak in Hades to the dead (Soph. Aj. 864). So oS 6 avf/p is often used for ryo> in the Tragedians. (b) In addressing a company (or a person), a speaker may change from the second person to the first and thereby include himself among them. MaXtora 8' ttv IT apo v v 6 ( ir)s opeyfcrdai T>V ica\)v tpyov, d Karap.ddois, art Kal r(ls f)8ovas ('K rovriav /*dX7ra yvr)s t % o p. f v, you would be best spurred on to strive after noble deeds, if you understood that pleasures too, in the truest sense, we get from them (Lsoc. 1, 46). So also Isoc. 7, 9. 12 AGREEMENT 1246 AGREEMENT 1246. 1. The verb agrees with its subject in person and number (1249). 2. An adjective agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case (1333). 3. A predicate or an appositive noun agrees with the sub- stantive to which it refers in case ; and if the sense permits, also in number and gender (1302, 1322). 4. A pronoun agrees with the noun to which it refers in number and gender (1511 1520). 1247. NOTE. To the above general rules there are a number of exceptions, some of which are quite regular. All these rules and their exceptions are given below in their proper places. See Subject- Nominative and Verb, Predicate-Noun arid Adjective, Apposition, Adjectives, Agreement of Eelative. 1248. Construction according to the Sense. A word often con- forms to the real rather than to the grammatical number or gender of the word to which it refers. This is termed construction according to the sense (constructio ad sensum, Kara crvveaiv). (a) Thus a collective singular noun may take a plural verb (1257, 1258), or a plural predicate participle (1307) ; a noun denoting place may take an appositive denoting the inhabitants (1325) ; a neuter or feminine noun denoting a male person sometimes has its predicate participle in the masculine (1307) ; in poetry an attributive adjective or participle may conform to the real rather than to the grammatical gender of the noun to which it refers (1336) ; a relative pronoun with a singular collective antecedent may be in the plural (1513) ; a relative pronoun may conform to the real rather than to the grammatical gender of its antecedent (1518), it may also at the same time be in the plural if its antecedent is collective in meaning (1513, 1518). (b) Construction according to the sense is particularly frequent with pronouns, especially after ris, TI. 'Ynfiyov tirl Neuptda, rapa(Ta i op.evo)v fie icm TOVT&V, they proceeded to Neuris, and these too (i.e., the inhabitants) being disturbed (Hdt. 4, 125). 0f/irrocA7s (fxvyti ts Htptvpav, >v avrStv fifpyirijs, Themistoclrs flees to Corcyra, being a benefactor of them, i.e., of the Corcyreans (Thuc. 1, 136'). 1253 AGREEMENT 13 'Es 8e Tr)v 2 TT dprrjv a>s rjyytXdij TO. yeyevrjueva irepl HvXov, f8o(v avTols, wfwn the occurrences at Pylus were reported at Sparta, it ivas determined by them, i.e., by the Spartans (Thuc. 4, 15 1 ). 'Edv rts fyavfpbs yevyrai KXenraiv t TOVTOIS ddvaros f(rnv fj jjp.ia, if any one is found stealing, death is the punish- ment for them (Xen. Mem. 1, 2 812 ) ; so also Xen. Cyr. 1, 2 2 and 7, 4 6 , and Anab. 1, 4 8 . SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE AND VERB 1249. A finite verb agrees with its subject-nominative in number and person. ('Eya>) ypd, we rejoice. Ol ai>8pts \eyova-iv, the men say. 'Eya>, 6s e'Xt^a, I who said. 1253. NOTE. 1. Sometimes the verb agrees with the predicate nominative, or with the appositive. Aide (i)i>, p.fd' ij/ne'pai/ fUav K /xe'tr^y rrjs 'EXXaSo? dvrjp- TT a tivi ~S.toK.pa.Tts re x.a\ '\iriroK. parts, ri tv vm f\(Tf ; tell me, O Socrates and Hippocrates, what have you in mind ? (Plat. Prot. 311 d ) ; so also Od. 3, 332, and Soph. Trach. 821 (i'8e). 1255. A neuter plural subject regularly has its verb in the singular. To fwa Tpi\ti, the animals run. Tavra tytvero, these things happened. Ta firirf)8tia eVcXtirc, the provisions failed (Xen. Anab. 4, 7 1 ). IlXoTa 8' vfiiv iraptvriv, vessels are here for you (Xen. Anab. 5, 6 20 ). 1256. NOTE. But when a neuter plural subject denotes per- sons, the verb may be in the plural ; as, roo-aSc pera 'A0r/vaia>v Wvij -eo-Tparevov, so many nations were warring on the side of the Athenians (Thuc. 7, 57 11 ). Also when the different parts of the noun are considered as separate parts of the mass ; as !/ t^K>; 7roAAa, there were many traces of horses and men (Xen. Anab. 1, 7 17 ). Other exceptions are rare in Attic (as Xen. Anab. 1, 2 s3 , Thuc. 6, 62 4 ), frequent in poetry and in the dialects (as Horn. II. 2,135). 1257. A singular collective subject denoting persons may have its verb in the plural. 'O oXXor a- T par 6s airifiaivov, the rest of the army marched away (Thuc. 4, 32 2 ). To IT X T) 6 o s f\lnjol ('ya> re KM trv ff^tv, both I and thou were both skillful and wise (Plat. Theaet. 154 d ). Ou s /cat \vKovpyos vopovs (OfTrjv, Minos and Lycurgus gave laws (Plat. Leg. 632 d ). 1261. NOTE. Sometimes the verb agrees with one of the subjects (the nearest, or the most important) and is understood with the rest. "ETTffjL^f fj.e 'Apiaios Xe'yw flcnrlTTTti (Is TO (rrpaToirfdov, the king and his followers break into the camp (Xen. Anab. 1, 10 1 ). 2dp v (rirfvdovTai Mavni/evcrt, Demosthenes with his fellow-generals makes a treaty with the Mantineans , OVT' &v a~u, OVT' oXXoy oiSetf av6pa>ira>v 8 6 ^ a i T* av /xaXXoj/ dStcetv f) abinficrQai, neither you nor I nor any one else would prefer to do wrong than to suffer wrong (Plat. Gorg. 475 e ). 1264. NOTE. When singular subjects are thus connected, the verb is rarely in the plural. Et irepl TOVTOV e/xeXXoi/ diro\oyf)(ra(rdai Aetu^dp^r fj AiKaioytvrjs, if Leochares or Dicaeogenes were about to make a defence abend this (Isae. 5 5 ). ATTRIBUTE 1265. Besides adjectives, participles, genitives of nouns (except the partitive genitive), adverbs, and prepositional phrases, may serve as attributes. 'O irapu>v Ktv8vvos, the present danger. Oi r5>v Qqftalav a-TpaTijyoi, the generals of the Thebans. 'H ai/w TTO\IS, the upper city. Ot tv a 'EXfva-lvi fepw, in the temple at Eleusis (Lys. 6, 4). To rat ovn ^(v8os, the real falsehood (Plat. Rep. 382 C ,. 1267. Attributive nouns denoting station, occupation, age, or nationality, are often joined to the words avtjp^ man, yvvrj, woman, (6, 17) avQpwjros, person (the last usually in a contemptuous sense). 'A.VTJP l8io>TT]s, a private man, one in private station (Aeschin. 3, 233). 'Avfjp pijreap, an orator (Aeschin. 3, 253). 'Avdpoairovs iro\iras, citizens (Dem. 19, 172). *A.v6p(airos yorjs, a mountebank fellow (Aeschin. 2, 153). Tpavs yvvT], old ivoman (Ar. Tlwsm. 345). *Q av8pts 'Adrjvaloi, Athenians. J Q av8pes 8inacrTai (Dem. 20, 1). In addresses, av8pes has the force of our " gentlemen ". 1268. NOTE. The names of nations often appear as adjectives. Oi"E\\T)v(s ir(\Ta(rrai, the Greek targeteers (Xen. Anab.). Utpays dvqp, a Persian (Xen. Anab. 1, 6 1 ). 1269. NOTE. Attributive nouns are seldom joined to other nouns than those mentioned above (1267, 1268), but a few cases are found. *Onur6ob? vvrtpos iiv T S> v f K ( I, not inferior to any of the people there (Plat. Tim. 20*). 1274 ATTEIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELT 17 *H(rav iroXXol T 5>v TT par t pov (nrov8aloi, many of the men of former times were estimable (Dem. 20, 114). Ot Mapadmvi KOI SaXa/ui/t, those (who fought) at Marathon and Salamis (Dem. 19, 312). O I e TT I r a> 8 e t a> K e p a t, those on the right wing (Thuc. 1, 50 1 ). Bao-tXet/r KCU ot fpvriv, Tissaphernes and those with him (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 1 ). Ot TTtpi 3ft>o(p>vTa, Xenophon with his men (Xen. Anab. 7, 4 16 ). " Ot Trepi Ke/cpoTra, simply Cecrops (Xen. Mem. 3, 5 10 ). 1273. So also 6 or ^ with a genitive may denote the sow, daughter, or husband, or any person connected by relationship, or service or dependence with the person indicated by the genitive. QovKvdidrjs 6 'oXdpou, Thucydides the son of Olorus (Thuc. 4, 104 3 ). 'EXeVq KOT o'dcovs eVrt rouo-S' 17 rov Atoj, Helen the daughter of Jove is in this house (Eur. Hel. 470). Tov rrfs (rrpar^yov TOVTOV ov davpafcrf ; do you not admire this husband of our (female) general ? (Ar. Eccl. 727). MeyaXa &v 77^1010, et TOVS a-tavTov KaraKaivois, you would be severely punished if you put to death those that belonged to you (Xen. Cyr. 3, I 16 ). IIopeuo/*ai irpbs TOVS e/iaurov, I go to mine own (Soph. Ant. 892). Et^e TO fvu>wfjiov KXeap^os *at ot tKfivov, Clearchus and his men held the left (Xen. Anab. 1, 2 18 ). *H\avv(v eVl TOVS Mfvo>vos, he advanced against Menoris soldiers (Xen. Anab. 1, 5 13 ). 1274. The masculine article with the possessive pronoun also denotes a person connected by relationship or service or dependence with the person indicated by the possessive pronoun. Evfoiav 8d TOV fTTiTpoTrov fx flv e7 ' Ka ' To ^s (rols, it is necessary that the steward have good will to you and yours = your family (Xen. Oec. 12, 6). To fvvofiv f/ioi Kai rotv ( fjiols eyw trp&TOv 7rfip>[uu Trai8tvfiv, I try first to teach good will toward me and mine = my family (ibid.). Tovs o- v v/ieTeptov oincf s TTJV 686v fjyolvTO ; would you send me some of your people who would direct (him) on the way ? (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 28 )i 2 18 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 1275 1275. Certain nouns denoting tkinys, to which an attributive adjective belongs, are often omitted. 1. Few masculine nouns are thus omitted : [KoXn-of] TOV Iwiov, the Ionian Gulf (Thuc. 6, 34 4 ). [Srarijp] o KV&KIJVCIS, the Cyzicene stater (Xen. Anab. 6, 2'). [Oi^oy] 6 anparos, unmixed wine (Men. Mon. 420). [Rarely a-rparos] 6 ir(6s, the foot-soldiery (Thuc. 1, 47 2 ). 2. The principal feminines thus omitted are : ['Hp-t'pa] Ty ixTTtpaia, rfj Tpirj), on the following, on the third day (Xen. Anab. 3, 4 s7 ). [r) or x&>P"l 8ia noXf^ids, through hostile country (Xen. ///s fia6vv fKoifj.T)dr)s, how deep a sleep you slept (Lucian, Dialogi Marini, 293). [XopSij] 17 virari), the highest chord. [*Ayc{)pa] OVK eVl T^? air^f 6pfj.fl TOIS iro\\ols, he rides not on the same anchor with the people (Dem. 18, 281). 3. Few neuters are omitted. To (vvvvfjMv [icc'pa?], the left wing (of an army). 6fp/xo> [wSaTi] \ova-6ai, to bathe in warm, water (Ar. Nub. 1044). In most neuter adjectives used substantively no particular noun is to be supplied (see 1281). 1276. Some of the above nouns may be omitted with a possessive pronoun, with the article and an adverb, and with the article and a preposition with its case, and with the article and a genitive. 1277. NOTE. 1. rVuy7 m &y be omitted after ^ and a possessive pronoun. Kara yt TTJV (fi.r)v, according to my opinion (Plat. Phil. 41 b ). C H tft.T) VIKQ, my opinion is right (Plat. Leg. 862"). 2. *H/i.cpd may be omitted after 17 and an adverb. 'H aSptov, the morrow. 'H (fjs, the next day. 3. F^ may be omitted after 17 with a genitive. Swifirj pot tig TO. rov d8f\(pov TOV ffj-ov, he was going to my brother's place (Lys. 12, 12). 1279. 1. If the word house is understood after the prepositions tls epov, let him come to my house (Ar. Lysistr. 1211). 2. In the expression ev rj/^erepov [sc. OLKOV 8d>fj.ao-Lv], in our palace, in our court (Hdt. 1, 35 5 ; 7, 8 14 ), there seems to be a double ellipsis. 1280. Many feminine adjectives are used to express direction, extent, condition, manner ; some of these are adverbial accusatives (1597), some are datives of manner (1810), and some are governed by prepositions. "08' ov fMKpav aTTfo-Tiv, he is not far away (Eur. Phoen. 906). "H^fiv TTJV Taxio-Trjv, to come as quickly as possible (Xen. Hell. 4, 5 8 ). So also rr\v aAAwr, in vain, as rrjv nXXwy aSoXeo-^w, I am prating in vain (Dem. 6, 32). For more examples of these adverbial accusatives, see 1597. 'l&'a, privately, S^/xoo-ia, publicly, and many others, see 1810. 'E ivavrtas, from an opposite direction, in front (Xen. Hier. 6, 8). 'Er fia TT)s 'EXXdSof, in the middle of Greece (luoc. 4, 42). IIo a-ov anfortv fvdivot TO orpdrev/ia ; how far off from here is the army ? (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3 10 V 2(KeXo( TO p. to- a (cat TO npos Boppav rfjs vrjcrov (xovo~iv, the Silicians hold the central and northern parts of the island (Thuc. 6, 2 4 ). Sw/cpdr^r del ty eV T u (pavf pa>, Socrates was always in public (Xen. Mem. 1, I 10 ). 'Eirl ir\iov OVTOI Kadftopuv TI ol (K TOV 6/iaXov dv KapTfpiov tyKOTmKo8op.flTai, forts were built on the strongest points (Thuc. 3, 18 3 ). Svp.(pfpop.fvovs ai/Tovs ts oXiyov KOI irtivTas (STO avTo, being crowded together into a small space, and all at the same point (Thuc. 7, 36 6 ). 1283. The neuter article with an adverb of place or with a prepo- sition and its case is sometimes used in the same way. Els TO opav, into looking upwards (Plat. Rep. 529*). Aie'/Si; fls TO irtpdv, he crossed over to the opposite coast (Xen. Hell. 1, 3 17 ). MovtriKr) KaTa86fTai ds TO evTos TTJS ^x^s, music sinks into the depths of the soul (Plat. Rep. 401 d ). Ta ptv icdro> TIJS '\crirjs , ra 8e ava> avTf)s, the lower (= coast) regions of Asia , the upper parts of Asia (Hdt. 1, 177). *Ei> rourw TO> firraw, in this strait (= place between) (Thuc. 4, 25 1 ). To irepav TOV iroTapov, the opposite side of the river (Xen. Anab. 3, 5 2 ). To rrpbs to-iripav, to the west (Xen. Anab. 6, 4 4 ). To irtpl TTJV x^pai/, the affairs of the country (Isoc. 7, 1). 'A(pfir TO t s TTJV Xt'ov fir\u ts TT)V Kavvov, giving up going to Chios, he sailed to- Caunus (Thuc. 8, 41 1 ). 1284. NOTE. Here belong also expressions like cVl TroAv, TO (or Ta) (TTL 6aTcpa, (v VTTYJKOW, and the like. 'H 'EXXas tir I iro\v fTvpawtiiBij, Greece was for a long time ruled by tyrants (Thuc. 1, 18 1 ). EiV/3dXXi/ t< TOV tirl 6 d T t p a, to make an incursion from the opposite side (Xen. Anab. 5, 4 10 ). 'Ef TO eirt dart pa TOV iroTapov Trapao-TavTts, standing on the other side (bank) of the river (Thuc. 7, 84 4 ). Els TO- fir' t K t T v a TTJs y^r opp.a KOI fs TO tir I T d 8 1 , it rushes that way over the earth, and this way (Plat. Phaedo, 112 b ). 'E v ' IT ?; K 6o> Kadfurrrjicfi, he stood within hearing (Xen. Anab. 7, 6 8 ). 1285. NOTE. Figuratively such a neuter denotes standpoint, con- dition, degree, and the like. 'Ev T < 8 1 del fuvelT ev w Kadty ircrrcuo'fvp.fvov, he taught to what degree a well educated man ought to be versed in everything (pTf o TI fKa Kflrai ravra rd dyadd, these advantages lie exposed as prizes (Xen. Anab. 3, I 21 ). Ei nva exert /3eXTfo>, devres fls K oiv o v Xe'-yere, if you have anything better, communicate it for our common benefit (Plat. Leg. 796 e ). To rots apxova-i TTfideadai Trd&iv tv K o t v exo/aev (sc. xpij/xara), we navt money in the public treasury (Thuc. 1, 80 5 ). Els K aXa> 0poveii>, to be wise in good time (Soph. El. 384). "EKUCTTOV ev r & 8fovri irpdrrova-iv, they do everything at the necessary moment (Isoc. 3, 19). TSs evTroptds...tls 8eov \>p.iv yiy- vofjLtvdsl 8ei'&>, I will show that the affluence.. .is to your advantage (Dem. 20, 26). 'E or dirb (rov) ta-ou, on a level, in the same circumstances, equally (Xen. Hier. 8, 5 ; Thuc. 4, 63 l ). 'Ev T< e> (Xen. Gyr. 8, I 31 ; Anab. 1, 3 21 ) ; e'fc roO 0ai/epoO (Thuc. 4, 79 2 ), openly. 'Ev rw dcpavtl, in secret (Xen. Cyr. 8, I 31 ). 'Eg eTolfjiov, at once (Xen. Mem. 2, 6 16 ). 'ATTO rov avTopdrov, spontaneously (Plat. Euthyd. 282). 1287. The neuter adjective or participle may express general ideas of time. IIoXv irpo T>V Tpa>iKoi)v rj\6ov oi ' HpanXeovs Trai8(s KOI /J.IK pov irpo TOVT&V "ASpaoTOf, a long time before the Trojan war, the children of Heracles came, and a short time before, Adrastus (Isoc. 4, 54). 'H AaKeeu/ia>i> e'c TraXatorarou (vvop.7]drj, Lacedaemon was well governed from the most ancient times (Thuc. 1, 18 2 ). A'rpr/3e rpels pfjvas xdi TT X e t w, he remained three months and more (Xen. Hell. 2, 2 18 ). Z&vres p.t\pi rS>v itrj^drmv rov fttov, living to the utmost limits of life (Plat. Leg. 931*). 'Ev rvr)s, the moment (Plat. Farm. 156' 1 ). 1289. NOTE. Demonstrative and relative pronouns with prepo- sitions are most frequently thus used. 22 ATTRIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 129O *Ev TOVTO) (cat rt irpoTfpov ra8( eVpflcrcrrro, in Hie 'meantime and even earlier these negotiations were being carried on (Thuc. 8, 45 l ). 'E v ntpl fiytfiovids SitirpitrTovTo ....... tv rovrw ot \aK(8cup.6vioi f^yfo-av, while they were deciding about the command, the Lacedaemonians in the meantime passed over (Xen. Hell. 4, 2 13 ). *E o v ois ov irptTTd wepl fjiiKpa 8iaTplf3(iv, it does not become those who promise great things to occupy themselves with little things (Isoc. 4, 189). Tbo-irdviov Tipiov, what is rare is valuable (Plat. Euthyd. 304 b ). XaXfTra ra caXd, the beautiful is difficult (Plat. Rep. 435 C ). Ta f(rar6p.tva, the future (II. 1, 70). To TJT ov p,( v ov dXcorof, (p(vyfi 8f Tdp,\ovfjLtvov f what is searched may be obtained, but what is unregarded escapes (Soph. Oed. Tyr. 110). So 8*toi/ and (vtawpov or dpicrrepoi/, the right and the left iving (of an army), TO p.o-ov, the centre. For predicate neuters like *aXoi/ 9 ta (Plat. Leg. 663 e ), see 1309. 1292. The neuter article with an adverb is sometimes used in the same way. To (v KOI TO KoXSts, the good and the noble (Plat. Leg. 667). To s TOV Xddpa (cpetrroi/, wJiut is done openly is better than what is done secretly (Dem. 20, 74). To \idv r)rat Trept TO. 1296 ATTEIBUTES USED SUBSTANTIVELY 23